Auerbach_Data_Communications_Reports_Vol_2_1970 Auerbach Data Communications Reports Vol 2 1970

Auerbach_Data_Communications_Reports_Vol_2_1970 Auerbach_Data_Communications_Reports_Vol_2_1970

User Manual: Auerbach_Data_Communications_Reports_Vol_2_1970

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 470

DownloadAuerbach_Data_Communications_Reports_Vol_2_1970 Auerbach Data Communications Reports Vol 2 1970
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

Prepared and Published by

AUERBACH INFO, Inc.
121 North Broad Street
Philadelphia, Pa. 19107
Phone
215-491·8200

AUERBACH

1'1\

AUERBACH INFO, INC.
AUERBACH INFO, INC. publishes periodically updated looseleaf reference works for current
awareness in the field of Information processing, data communications, and graphics.
• AUERBACH Standard EOP Repods

An eight·volume analytical service providing detailed, objective reports on the major U.S. computer systems. Hardware and software are analyzed in a standardized report format that facilitates comparisons.
Benchmark problems are used to measure overall system performance in typical commercial and scientific
applications. Updated twelve tlflles per year.
• AUERBACH Scientific and Control Computer Reports

A two-volume extension of AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports containing detailed, objective analyses of
the U.S. computer systems that are specialized, by hardware design or software support, for scientific,
control, and other nonbusiness-oriented applications. Updated six times per year.
• AUERBACH Computer Notebook

A two-volume current awareness service on more than 80 U.S. computer systems, updated twelve times
a year with new reports and revisions. Contains individual descriptions of the features and limitations of
each system, over 100 pages of objective hardware and performance comparison charts, and complete
price lists.
• AUERBACH Computer Notebook International

A two-volume guide which has the entire contents of AUERBACH Computer Notebook plus coverage expanded to include computer systems manufactured outside the United States. It also includes Special
Reports which 'provide facts and guidelines on topics of current interest. Updated twelve times a year.
• AUERBACH Software Notebook

A detailed guide to the manufacturer·supplied software for third·generation U.S. computer systems. This
service contains individual, analytical reports designed to supply the facts you need to understand, evaluate, and utilize computer software. Updated six times per year.
• AUERBACH Data CommunIcations Reports

A complete reference source on digital data communications equipment and techniques. Contains individual, analytical reports on more than 50 different types of communications terminals and processing
equipment, detailed reports on common-carrier facilities, and a guide to the design of effective data com·
munications systems. Updated four times per year.
• AUERBACH Data Handling Reports

A comprehensive guide to selecting and applying the wide range of support equipment and supplies used
in conjunction with computer systems. Detailed, analytical reports, in a standardized format for easy comparisons, describe equipment used for capturing data at its source, preparing input to computers, performing media conversions, processing unit records, and handling printed forms. Updated four times
per year.
• AUERBACH Graphic Processing Reports

A comprehensive analytical service on information storage and retrieval systems, microform reader/
printers, plotters, computer·driven displays, and photo typesetters. Includes system design tools, operational procedures, performance, support requirements and prices. Updated four times per year.
• AUERBACH Time·Sharing Reports

A two-volume service covering all aspects of commercial time·sharing. It includes reports on the state of
the time-sharing art, time-sharing languages, applications, equipment and individual reports on commercial time-sharing services. Updated four times per year .

•••••••••••

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports
TItE I NFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN HAS BEEN OBTAINED FROM RELIABLE SOURCES AND HA,S. BEEN EVALUATED BY EXPERIENCED
TEcHNICAL PERSONNEL DUE TO THE RAPiDlY CItANGING NATURE OF THE TECHNOLOGY AND EQUIPMENT HOWEVER. THE INFORMATION
CANNOT BE GUARANTEED
Printed ,n U.S.A,

© 1969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

6000:00

COMMUNICATIONS
TERMINAL
EQUIPMENT
(Continued)

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

AUERBACH
®

fA.
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6270:01
FRIDEN TELEDATA LINE

"
FRIDEN TELEDATA LINE

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:.......................

Teledata Tape Transmitter-Receiver,
Models 7, 7A, 7B, S, SA, and SB .

. 12

Manufacturer:...................

Friden, Inc.
San Leandro, California .

. 13

Basic Function: . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . ..

reads data from punched paper tape and transmits
it over narrow-band or voice-band lines (some
models);
receives data from narrow-band or voice-band
lines (some models) and punches it into paper
tape •

. 15

Description
The Friden Teledata line consists of a number of paper tape transmitter-receivers designed
to transmit coded information punched into standard 5, 6, 7, or S-level tape at speeds up to
7.9 characters per second. When a standard telegraph-grade line is used, no special subset
or interface unit is necessary, and full-duplex operation is possible. For transmission over
voice-band lines (Model SA only), a special Friden Interface Unit and a Bell System 103A or
103F Data Set (or equivalent) are required, and operation is limited to the half-duplex mode
(transmit or receive, but not both at the same time).
The main characteristics of the models currently comprising the Teledata line are summarized in Table I.
Error checking is accomplished by sending one or two parity bits with each character, depending on the model (see Table 1), and checking this parity when received data is punched. The
second parity bit, when used, is formed from three levels of the coded character; this method
limits the number of data bits per character to 5 or 6, depending on the model. Parity errors
or an inoperative transmission line causes a halt in transmission and causes indicator lamps
to be lit. Retransmission requires operator intervention.
TABLE 1. FRlDEN TELEDATA GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

Model

Tape
Levels

Tape
Width,
inches

Transmission
Cycle,
bit periods

Data Bits per
Transmission
Cycle

Parity Bits per
Transmission
Cycle

Transmission
Speed,
char/sec*

7
7A
7B

S
6
5

1. 000
0.S75
0.6S75

9.42
9.42
9.42

6
6
5

1
1
2

7.9
7.9
7.9

S
SA
SB

S
S
6

1. 000
1. 000
0.S75

10.42
10.42
10.42

6
6

2
2
2

7.1
7.1
7.1

6

*These speeds are based on transmission over a 100-wpm (75-bits/sec) telegraph line
or a voice-band line. The transmission speed over a 45-bits/sec or 56-bits/sec
telegraph line is proportionately lower.

© 1969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

11/69

6270:02
FRIDEN TELEDATA LINE

.16

First Delivery: . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . .

April, 1958 .

. 17

Availability:...................

60 days •

.2

CONFIGURATION
A Friden Teledata terminal consists of a punched paper tape reader and punch and the necessary control electronics. The facilities of the various models are summarized in Table 1.
All models can be connected to 45, 56, or 75-bits-per-second telegraph-grade lines and require no data set for this type of connection. Interchangeable gears are provided to alter the
speed for operation at the different rates.
Model 8A can be connected to a voice-band line via the appropriate Interface Unit and data set;
see Paragraph. 72 for the data set required .

.3

INPUT
Input medium:
Input code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quantity of data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated input speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed:

standard fully punched 5/8, 11/16, or I-inch
tape, depending on model; see Table 1.
any 5, 6, 7, or 8-level code, depending on model,
which conforms to the parity bit formation
rules. Codes containing less than the maximum
number of levels for a particular model can be
used, and the parity bits will be supplied automati cally. See Table 1.
variable.
depends on grade of transmission line to be used;
see Paragraph. 71.
somewhat less than rated speed, and depends on
the block length .

. 32

Manual Input: . . . . . . . . . .

no provis ion.

. 33

Fixed Input: . • . . . . . . . . .

no provision.

.34

Transaction Code Input:

no provis ion.

.35

Message Configuration:

1 to N data characters; there are no special control characters .

. 36

Operating Procedure
(1) Mount tape and check switch positions.
(2) Establish connection with remote point; switch to data mode if voice-band lines are
used.
(3) Turn Power switch on and operate Read switch.

.37

Entry of Time and Date:

.4

OUTPUT

.41

Output to Punched Tape

no provision .

Tape size:
Tape code:
Rated punching speed:
Effective speed:
Format control:
11/69

........... .

standard 5/8, 11/16, or I-inch tape depending on
model; see Table 1.
a binary image of the received data is punched;
parity bits can be deleted.
depends on model and grade of transmission line;
see Paragraph. 71.
somewhat less than rated speed, and depends on
block length.
none.

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6270:03
F'RIDEN TELEDATA LINE

~

.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

• 51

Data Entry Errors: . . . . . . . . . .

· 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking:

no checking .

Error indication: . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . .
Correction procedure: . . . . . . . . . . . .

one or two parity bits are transmitted with each
character, depending on model; see Table 1.
when receiving data, the parity is mechanically
accumulated as the punches are activated.
light and device halt.
manual intervention.

.53

Data Recording Errors:

see Paragraph. 52, above.

• 55

Line Malfunctions
Detection: . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • . .
Action: . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

•6

CONDITION INDICATORS
Input device available: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input device busy: • . . . . . . . . . . . • . .
Remote receiver ready: • . . . . . . . . . .
Remote receiver busy: • . . . . . . • . . • .
Power on: . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improper data entry: . . . • . • . . . . . . .
Transmission error: • . . . . . . • . . . . .
Recording error: . . . . . • . . . . . .. .

·7

DATA TRANSMISSION

.71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speedFriden 7, 7A, or 7B: . . • . . . . . . . . .

Friden S, SA, or SB: . . • . . . . . . . . .

Transmission method: ..•..•.••..•
Transmission code: • . • . . . . • . . . . . .
Transmission mode: . . . • . . . . . . . . .
Order of bit transmission: . . . . . . • . .
Synchronization: . . . • . . • . • . . . . . . .
• 72

open lines are detected.
transmission is halted and a lamp is lighted.

none.
none.
none.
none.
visible switch.
none.
lamp.
lamp.

7.9, 6.0, or 4.8 char/sec over voice-grade or
75-bits/sec telegraph-grade line, 56-bits/sec
telegraph-grade line, or 45-bits/sec telegraphgrade line, respectively.
7.1, 5.4, or 4.3 char/sec over voice-grade or
75-bits/sec telegraph-grade line, 56-bits/sec
telegraph-grade line, or 45-bits/sec telegraphgrade line, respectively.
serial by bit.
same as input code plus start and stop bits.
half-duplex or full-duplex.
low-order bit of each character is transmitted
first.
start and stop bits are transmitted with each
character (asynchronous) .

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set*

Common-carrier leased telegraph-grade
lines (up to 75 bits/sec): . . . . . . . . . .

none required.

© 1969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

11/69

6270:04
FRIDEN TELEDATA LINE

.72

Connection to Communications Lines (Contd.)
Data Set*

Communications Line
Common-carrier leased voice-band
line (75 bits/sec): . . . • . . . • . . . . . .
Public switched telephone network
(75 bits/sec): . . . . . . . . • • . • . . • . .

Bell System Data Set 103F or Western Union
75 Baud Data Modem. **
Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 103A. **

*In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; see Sections 4620 and 4640 for a current
list of modems available from independent manufacturers of telephone equipment.
**Only Model 8A can be connected to a voice-band line. This connection also requires use of
the proper Friden Interface Unit .
. 73

Transmission Control

Functional operations: .•.•••.••...

manual dialing or Signaling.
operator must establish communication and then
switch to data mode if transmission is via voiceband lines.
none •

• 74

Multistation Operation: . . . • . . . . . . . •

no provis ion •

•8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

C all initiation:
C all reception:

Teledata Models
7,7A, 7B, 8, 8A, 8B

Component:
Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

23
16.25
17
120

Power (KW)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phases

115
60
1

?

Temperature Range rF.)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr.)

?
?
?

*Does not include channel-deriving (tone) equipment .
.9

PRICE DATA
Monthly
Rental,

Purchase
Price,

Yearly
Maintenance,

Component or Feature

$

Teledata Model 7, 7A, or 7B

100.75

3100

155-200

Teledata Model 8, 8A, or 8B

100.75

3100

155-200

4.70

145

30

103A or 103F InterfaceUnit

$

$

*Maintenance charge varies with distance, on a zone basis, from the
nearest Friden Service Office.
11/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6271:01
FRIDEN.7100

'"
FRIDEN 7100 CONVERSATIONAL TERMINAL

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: ..

.12

Manufacturer:

.13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . two-way typed-message communication at 10 or
12.2 char/sec over narrow-band or voice-band
communications facilities .
Description

. 15

. . Model 7100 Conversational Terminal.
.. Friden, Inc.
Division of Singer Corporation
97 Humboldt Street
Rochester, New York 14609

The Friden 7100 Conversational Terminal is designed to provide half-duplex typed message
data communications at up to 10 or 12.2 characters per second. It can operate over a privately'owl'led or leased common-carrier narrow-band or voice-band line, or the public telephone network.
The 7100 can communicate with other 7100 terminals or with a remote computer; it can also be
'operated locally as a conventional electric typewriter.
A 52-key keyboard is provided with switches at the right of the keyboard for Power on/off,
Break, Control and Color modes; see Figure 1.
The 7100 employs the USASCII transmission code presented in Table I. The complete 128character USASCII character set can be transmitted or received. Control characters are
transmitted by placing the 7100 in the Control mode and depressing the appropriate key. (Control characters are engraved on the front edge of the key, upper- and lower-case symbols, on
the top.) This action transmits the appropriate control character and prints the corresponding
upper-case symbol displayed on the key-top. Received control characters are either ignored
or, the corresponding upper-case symbol is printed in red depending on the position of the color
mode switch.
The 7100 generates even parity for each character transmitted. Parity checking on received
data is optional; a red upper-case M is printed in place of an incorrectly received character.
A Break feature is provided; space characters are transmitted for as long as the Break switch
is depressed. The 7100 does not respond to a received brake code.
The Color Mode Switch provides two printing modes: (1) prints all transmitted characters in
red and received characters in black (up position) or (2) prints both received and transmitted
characters in black and printing the upper-case symbol corresponding to received control characters in red (down position).
The Mechanical Nonprint option (switch selectable) prevents printing transmitted or received
data when placed in the Nonprint position .
. 16

First Delivery:

,17

Availability: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 months .

. . . . . ..

.. November 1967.

.2

CONFIGURATION
The Friden 7100 Conversational Terminal consists of a manual mput keyboard, Ii printer, and
control logic including a communications interface. A data set is required to connect the 7100
to a communications line.

.3

INPUT

. 31

Prepared Input: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no provision .

.32

Manual Input
Method of entry:.
Quantity of data:.

. . . . . . . . via 52-key keyboard.
. . . . . . . . variable.

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/68

6271:02
FRIDEN 7100

Figure 1.
.32

Friden 7100 Conversational Terminal.

Manual Input (Contd.)
Character set: . . . . .

· 128 distinct character codes including numerics,
upper- and lower-case alphabetics, special
characters, and control characters; see Table 1.
· control mode permits generating control characters from keyboard.

Comments:
. 33

Fixed Input: .

· no provision .

. 34

Transaction Code Input: .

· no provision .

.35

Message Configuration: .

· 1 to N characters with control characters interspersed; control characters are keyed by depressing the Control Mode switch and the
appropriate key .

. 36

Operating Procedure
(1) Switch power on.
(2)

Establish connection by dialing or manually signaling.

(3)

Key in message.

(4)

Terminate connection.

• 37

Entry of Time and Data:

.4

OUTPUT

.44

Output to Printer

· no provision .

Output medium: ..

· friction-fed roll paper or pin-fed (optional) fanfold forms up to 14 inches wide (13. 5-inch
writing width) .
Character set: . . . . .
· 91 printable characters; see Table I.
.10 or 12.2 chars/sec.
Rated printing speed:.
Effective speed: .
· less than rated speed due to carriage return/line
feed and control characters.
Format control: .
· controlled by control codes in incoming data or
manually by operator. Controls include carriage
return/line feed, case shift (includes Control
mode) and Color mode (ribbon shift).
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . · horizontal spacing is 10 chars/inch; vertical
spacing is 6 lines/inch; color mode permits
printing transmitted charactE'rs in red, received
characters in black or just upper-case symbols
in red for corresponding control characters.
(Contd. )

5/68

AUERBACH Data Communications

Report~

A
"UERBACH

AUERBACH

6271:03

DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

FRIDEN 7100

~

TABLE I: USASCII TRANSMISSION CODE*
l,b7

~

/

.

b6

0

b5

0
0

~

+ ----.
~

0

0
0

~

b3

b2

bl

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

}

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

5

ENQ

NAK

0

1

1

0

6

ACK

SYN

0

1

1

}

7

BEL

1

0

0

0

8

BS

1

0

0

1

9

1

0

1

0

10

1

0

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

0

Row

1

1

0

6

7

}

2

3

4

5

NUL

SP

0

@

P

!

}

A

Q

a

q

"

2

B

R

b

r

-#

3

C

S

c

s

$

4

D

T

d

t

SOH
STX

DC2

1

2
-- -.-- -.-. ---1
3

ETX

DC3

0

0

4-

EOT

DC4

--

1

}

0

DLE
DC}

-

0
0

1

1

}

1

0

1

0

}

b4

1

0
1

-

p

%

5

E

U

e

u

F

V

f

v

ETB

",

6
7

G

W

g

W

CAN

(

8

H

X

h

x

HT

EM

)

9

I

Y

i

LF

SUB

...

:

J

Z

j

Y
z

11

VT

ESC

+

;

K

(

k

0

12

FF

FS

<

L

\

1

1

13

CR

GB

=

M

)

m

>

N

1\

n

?

0

-

1

1

1

0

14

SO

RS

1

1

1

1

15

SI

US

.

/

-

-

0

t
I
I

~

....,
DEL

... Non-printable characters or symbols include control characters contained in columns 0 and 1.
and the symbols SP. @. -. and DEL .

\
/

!

\.
)

'\

;'

.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

.51

Data Entry Errors:. . . . . .

. 52

Data Transmission Errors

.. no provision for checking except through visual
verification of input data when typed .

Type of checking: . . . . . . . . . . . . . - .... optional character parity.
Error indication: . . . . . . . . . . .
. .. red upper case M is printed in place of character
received in error.
Correction procedure: . . . . . . . .
. .. operator intervention.
.6

CONDITION INDICATORS: .

.7

DA TA TRANSMISSION

.71

Basic Characteristics

... visible switches for Power on/off and Color mode.

Rated transmission speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 or 12.2 chars/sec.
Transmission method: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . serial by bit.
Transmission code: . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . 7-level USASCII with 8th bit added for even character parity; a total of 11 or 11 bits are transmitted for each character, including start and
stop bits.
Transmission mode: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . half-duplex; full-duplex is required for Break
feature.
Order of bit transmission: . . . . . . . . . . . . low-order bit (bl) is transmitted first.
Synchronization: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . start/stop; one start bit and one or two stop bits
bracket each character transmitted.

C 1968 AUERBACH

Corporation and AUERBACH I.,fo. Inc.

5/68

6271:04
FRIDEN 7100

. 72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Lines

Data Set***

Bell System leased line
Type 1006 Data Channel: . . . . . . . . . . . . Bell System Data Set 103F.
VVestern Union Class D
Data Channel: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . VVestern Union 180 Baud Data Modem.
Bell System leased line
Type 3002 Data Channel: . . . . . . . . . . . . Bell System Data Set 103F.
Public telephone network: . . . • . . . . . . . . Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 103A2 .
. 73

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . manual dialing or signaling.
Call reception:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . capable of automatic answering.
Functional operations:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . carriage return/line feed; all USASCII control
characters are received and can either be printed
as the corresponding upper-case symbol or
igllOr ed .

. 74

Multistation Operation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no provision .

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model 7100
Conversational Terminal

Component

.9

VVidth (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
VVeight (pounds)

18
22
10
90

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)

0.2
115.!.15V
60

Phases
Temperature Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

1
+35 to +115
5 to 95
?

PRICE DATA
Component or Feature

Monthly
Rental, *
$

Purchase
Price, **
$

90

3200

Model 7100 desk

6

200

Mechanical Nonprint

1. 25

25

Receive parity check

2.50

50

Model 7100 Conversational
Terminal

* Monthly rental is structured on a one-year lease;
maintenance is included in the rental cost.
** A yearly maintenance contract priced at $160 is available
for purchased equipment.
*** In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant.
5/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AUEIIIIACH
DATA
CDMMUNICATIDNI
AUERBACH IIEI'D,"I

6272:01
FRIDEN 7102

•

FRIDEN MODEL 7102 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

.12

Manufacturer:

.13

Basic Function:

. 15

Description
The Friden Model 7102 Communications Terminal incorporates an individual punched paper
tape reader and tape punch as integral units; these units are positioned at the left side of
the Flexowriter typewriter. The basic paper tape reader and punch can be replaced by an
edge-punched card/tape reader and punch at additional cost.

........ .

Model 7102 Communications Terminal.

................. .

Friden, Inc.
Division of Singer Corporation
97 Humboldt Street
Rochester, New York 14609
transmission and reception of data over a
narrow-band or voice-band line at 12. 2 characters per second; provides data input and
output capabilities via typewriter, edge-punched
card/paper tape reader and punch .

................ .

The Model 7102 can communicate with another Model 7102, a Model 7100, or a remote computer system over a narrow-band or voice-band'communications facility at up to 10 or 12.2
(optional) characters per second. Transmission is half-duplex asynchronous.
The Model 7102 can operate in anyone of six transmit modes or three receive modes as
illustrated in the following table:
Mode
Function

Transmit

Print

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Punch
Read

X

Key

X

Receive

X

X

X

X
X

X

X

In addition, data can be transcribed from edge-punched cards to paper tape or vice versa
when the optional edge-punched card reader and punch is incorporated, data can also be
entered from the keyboard and printed and/or punched without transmission.
The basic reader and punch accept I-inch wide paper tape; the optional edge-punched card/
paper-tape reader and punch also accept 3-inch by 7-inch edge-punched cards. The reader
and punch can operate up to 12.2 characters per second. The readers sense data mechanically.
The Model 7102 generates even parity for each USASCII 'character transmitted from the keyboard; parity is not generated for data entered from the reader. Parity checking on received
data is optional; a red upper-case M is printed and/or a delete code (punch in all channels) is
punched in place of an incorrectly received character. A manual override switch permits
punching any 8-level non-USASCII codes and printing and/or punching USASCn codes not
containing a parity bit.
A Break feature is provided; space characters are transmitted for as long as the Break switch
is depressed. The Model 7102 responds to a received break signal only when operating in
the full-duplex mode. The received break signal, consisting of a 200 millisecond signal
(space) interrupts the transmission from the reader but not the keyboard.
A 53-key keyboard is supplemented with switches located to the left and right of the keyboard
for Tape Feed (punch), Start Read, Stop Read, Break, Control, Color mode and Power on/off.
The Model 7102 employs the USASCn transmission code; see Report 6271, Table 1. The
complete 128-character USASCII character set can be transmitted or received. Control

o

1968 AUERBACH Corporlltion and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/68

6272:02
FRIDEN 7102

Figure 1.
. 15

The Friden 7102 Communications Terminal

Description (Contd. )
characters are transmitted by placing the 7102 in the Control mode and depressing the
appropriate key. (Control characters are engraved on the front edge of the key; the associated graphic symbols are engraved on the top.) This action transmits the appropriate control
character and prints the corresponding graphic symbol displayed on the key-top.
The Color mode·switch provides three printing modes:
•

Xmit-Recv-prints all transmitted characters in red and received characters in
black; the choice of colors for transmitted and received data is optionally reversible.
The corresponding graphic symbol (as engraved on individual key-tops) is printed
in red for transmitted control codes only.

• Color Off-prints both transmitted and received characters in black; the corresponding graphic symbol is printed in red for transmitted control codes. Received
control codes are not printed.
•

Char Recog. - prints both transmitted and received characters in black; the
corresponding graphic symbol is printed in red for both transmitted and received
control codes. In this mode a graphic representation of 128 USASCII characters,
except for carriage ret'!lrn, is printed. Horizontal tabulation and backspace are
inhibited in this mode. A red "I" is printed in place of horizontal tabulation; a red
"H" is printed in place of backspace operation. Line feed, null, and delete codes
are optionally inhibited.

The Print Inhibit option (manually controlled by a lever on the right side of the Model 7102)
prevents printing transmitted or received data when placed in the Print Inhibit position.
Reader control keys provide for starting, stepping one character position at a time, and
stopping reader operation.
The Tape Feed key permits feeding tape; null codes are automatically punched when operating
with the basic paper tape punch. When the edge-punched card/paper tape punch is incorporated, edge-punched cards are advanced to the initial punching pOSition and sprocket holes
only are punched. As an option, the delete code (a punch in all channels) can be punched on
depression of the Tape Feed switch. This option is available for both the basic and optional
punch.
(Contd. )
8/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
AUERBACH REPORTS

6272:03
FRIDEN 7102

•

. 15

Description (Contd. )
The three panel switches located immediately above and to the right of the keyboard provide
reader, punch, and printer control functions.
A reader code-sensitivity control (All switch), when placed in the Select (up) position,
establishes reader sensit ivity to stop, delete, and null codes. The stop (DC4) code will stop
the reader action; Tape Feed (DEL) and null (NUL) codes are ignored and are neither punched
nor transmitted. When reader non-sensitivity is selected (down position) the reader is insensitive to control codeR except the NUL code, which causes the reader to stop. All codes
are transmitted and punched (if the punch is operating).
The punch contr9l is a momentary on-off switch. DepreSSing the Punch switch activates the
punch; depressing the Punch switch a second time deactivates the punch.
The printer control is also a momentary switch. Depressing the Print switch once establishes
the normal print mode. In this mode. data entered from the reader or keyboard, or received
from the communications line, is printed. Depressing the Print switch a second time functionally separates the printer and keyboard from the reader, punch, and communications line.
Tn this mode, the printer and keyboard perform as a conventional typewriter while concurrent
operations are performed, such as punching data received from the reader or from the
communications line or transmitting and/or punching data entered from the reader. The
Print On indicator, when lighted, indicates the normal print mode.
The optional Automatic Device Control feature permits automatic selection of the reader,
punch, or printer under command of the designated standard (S) or alternate (A) control codes
in the following table:
Device
Status

Note:

"s"

Reader

Punch

Printer

S

A

S

A

S

A

On

DC2

DCl

DCl

DC2

:->1

SI

Off

DC4

DC3

DC3

DC4

SO

SO

indicates standard control code; "A" indicates alternate control code.

Control codes can be interspersed with manual operations such that a device can be activated
by a control code and manually deactivated by the device switch. The All switch must be in
the Select position for the Automatic Device Control feature to be operative. Control codes
can be entered via the reader or the communications facility; codes entered via the reader
are not transmitted. Control codes entered from the keyboard when in Control mode are
transmitted and/or punched, but can not cause op-eration of the designated device.
Reader operation halts when a stop code is read from tape or cards, when a 200-millisecond
break signal is received (full-duplex mode only) from the remote terminal or computer, or
when manually stopped. Reader operation is initiated by receiving a start code from the
remote terminal or computer or by manual means.
.
. 16

First Delivery: ..

July 1968 .

. 17

Availability: . . . .

2 months .

.2

CONFIGURATION
The basic Friden 7102 Communications Terminal consists of a manual input keyboard, a
printer, an individual paper tape reader and punch, and control logic including a communications interface. An optional edge-punched card reader and punch, which can read and punch
both edge-punched cards and paper tape can he substituted for the basic tape-only reader and
punch. A data set is required to connect the 7102 to a communications line; see Paragraph. 72.

C 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/68

6272:04
FRIO EN 7102

.3

INPUT

. 31

Prepared Input
Basic Paper Tape Reader and optional
Edge-Punched Card/Paper Tape Reader Input medium: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantity of data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated input speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.32

fully punched I-inch. 8-level paper tape; 3- by
7-inch edge-punched cards.
any 8-level code; the device is code insensitive.
any size block length.
128 characters .
12.2 char/sec.
somewhat less than transmission speed. depending on block length.
holes are sensed mechanically; parity is not
checked; basic 7102 reader does not handle
edge-punched cards; reader can be started
or halted by control codes when the Automatic
Device Control option is incorporated.

Manual Input
Method of entry:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantity of data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Comments:

via 53-key keyboard.
variable.
128 distinct character codes including numerics.
upper- and lower-case alphabetics. special
characters. and control characters; see
Paragraph . 32 Report 6271.
Control mode permits generating 32 control code
characters and 4 non-printing graphic symbols
from keyboard.

. 33

Fixed Input: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

no provision.

.34

Transaction Code Input:

no provision.

:35

Message Configuration:

1 to N characters with control characters interspersed; control characters are keyed by depressing the Control Mode switch and the
appropriate key .

. 36

Operating Procedure
(1) Establish connection with remote terminal by manual dialing or signaling;
on a dedicated line. a permanent connection can be maintained;
(2) Insure that the called terminal is ready;
(3) Depress the data set Data button;
(4) Transmit data from the reader or the keyboard;
(5) Terminate the connection.

The Model 7102 can be operated automatically (once the connection is established) under control of the remote computer. The Automatic Device Control must be incorporated for
automatic operation.
A reader transmission can be interrupted by a received break signal when operating in the
full-duplex mode .
. 37 Entry of Time and Date: . . • . . . . . . . .. no provision .
.4
.41

OUTPUT
Output to Punched Tape
Basic Paper Tape Punch and optional
Edge-Punched Card and Paper Tape Punch Tape size: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •

8/68

I-inch paper tape; 3- by 7-inch edge-punched
cards.
(Contd. )

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AUEIIACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
AUERBACH Rll'OIITS

6272:05
FRIDEN 7102

•

. 41

Output to Punched Tape (Contd.)
Tape code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rated punching speed: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format control:. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments:
........... .

. 44

7 -level USASCII code plus an even parity bit
(8-level) when punching from keyboard; puncl1
is code insensitive and will punch any 8-level
code.
12.2 char/sec.
somewhat less than transmission speed depending
on block length.
none.
basic 7102 punch does not handle edge-punched
cards; punch can be started or halted by control
codes when the Automatic Device Control
option is incorporated .

Output to Printer
Output medium: ..
Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated printing speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format control: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Comments: . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

.51

Data Entry Errors: . . . . . . . . . . . . . :.

. 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking:
Error indication:
Correction procedure: ..........
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

friction-fed roll paper or pin-feed (optional)
fanfold forms up to 14 inches wide (13. 5-inch
writing width) .
89 printable characters; see Paragraph 6271. 44.
12.2 chars/sec.
less than rated speed due to carriage return/line
feed hori~ontal tab, backspace, and case shift
operations.
controlled by control codes in incoming data or
manually by operator. Controls include
carriage return/line feed, horizontal tab, back-.
space, case shift and ribbon color.
horizontal spacing is 10 chars/inch; vertical
spacing is 6 lines/inch; color ribbon shift
incorporated, see Color Mode Control, Paragraph .15. Vertical Spacer forms handler
can be attached to the printing carriage to accommodate sprocketed, continuous forms of different
widths; printer can be started or halted by control codes when the Automatic Device Control
option is incorporated .

no provision for checking except for visual verification of input data when printed •
optional character parity on received data.
red upper case "M" is printed and/or delete
code is punched in place of character received
in error.
operator intervention.
.
manual override switch permits punching any
8-level non-USASCII codes and printing and/or
punching non-parity USASCII codes.

. 53

Data Recording Errors: . . . . . . . . . . . .

no provision for checking recorded data except for
visual verification of input data when printed.

. 55

Line Malfunctions: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.6

CONDITION INDICATORS: . . . . . . '.' ..

no provisions for detection other than through
operator recognizing halted operation; transmission must be coordinated between sending and
and receiving operators.
printer and punch status indicator lamps only;
switches provide visual indication of setting.

. C 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

8/68

6272:06
FRIDEN 7102

.7

DATA TRANSMISSION

. 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed:. . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission method: . . . . . . . . . . . • .
Transmission code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission mode:

............. .

Order of bit transmission: . . • . . . . . . . .
Synchronization: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 72

10 or 12.2 char/sec.
serial by bit.
.
7-level USASCII with 8th bit added for even parity;
a total of 10 or 11 bits are transmitted for each
character, including start and stop bits.
half-duplex; full-duplex is required for Break
feature.
low-order bit (hI) is transmitted first.
start/ stop; one start bit and one or two stop
bits bracket each character transmitted .

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Lines

Data Set*

Bell System leased line Type 1006 Data Channel: . . . . . . . . . ..
Type 3002 Data Channel: . . . . . . . . . ..

Bell System Data Set 103F.
Bell System Data Set 103F.

Western Union Class D
Data Channel: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

Western Union 180 Baud Data Modem.

Public telephone network: . . . . . . . . . ..

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 103A2.

*In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant .
. 73

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Call reception:. . . . . . .
.. . . . . . . ..
Functional operations: .. . . . . . . . . . ..

manual dialing or signaling.
capable of automatic answering.
carriage return/line feed, case shift, horizontal
tab, backspace, etc.

. 74

Multistation Operation:

no provision .

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Model 7102
Communications Terminal *

Component

20.5
22
10
110

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)
Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (cpS)

0.2
115 t 15V
60

Phases
Temperature Range (OF.)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

1
+35 to +115
5 to 95
?

*Model 7102 desk size is 51.25 inches wide by 27.5 inches deep by 28.5 inches high.
(Contd.)
8/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS

6272:07
FRIDEN 7102

REPORTS

•
.9

PRICE DATA

Component or Feature

Monthly
Rental, *
$

Purchase
Price, **
$

1-----

Model 7102 Communications
Terminal (includes paper tape
reader and punch)
Model 7102 Desk

140

4750

7.50

240

10.00

200

Print Inhibit

1. 25

25

Automatic Device Control

7.50

150

Receive parity check

2.50

50

Pin Feed Platen

3.85

110

Vertical Spacer

3.50

100

Edge-Punched Card Reader and
Edge-Punched Card Punch

*Monthly rental is structured on a one-year lease;
maintenance is included in the rental.
** A yearly maintenance contract price at $237.50 is
available for purchased equipment.

\

!

. 0 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/68

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6320:01
GE DATANET -600/601

•
GE OAT ANET 6001601
.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

GE DATANET-600.
GE DATANET-601.

. 12

Manufacturer: . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .

General Electric Company
Computer Department
Phoenix, Arizona.

.13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . • . .

read data from punched paper tape and transmit
it over a voice-band line;
receive data from a voice-band line and punch it
into paper tape .

. 15

Description
The GE DATANET-600 is a punched tape terminal which operates over a voice-band, halfduplex, common-carrier transmission line and consists of two separate components:
•

A controller, which contains circuitry for control, synchronization, error detection, and bit/character serial/parallel conversion.

•

A combination reader/punch, which provides paper tape input/output to the controller.

The DA TANET-600 will transmit 5-, 6-, or 7-level codes at 50 characters per second. An
8-level code can be handled, but whenever the 8th level is punched, the transmission rate is
reduced by half. Generally, the 8th level is used infrequently (for control codes), so the
effective transmission rate for 8-level codes will be close to 50 characters per second.
The DA TANET-600 operates in a half-duplex mode, alternately sending and receiving data. A
full-character redundancy checking system is used, in which every character is sent twice.
The second version of each character transmitted contains the inverse bit pattern of the first
version transmitted. As the data is being received, each character is checked. At the end of
a block, if all characters have been received correctly, a data character or tone is transmitted
from the receiving station. If an error has been detected, no response is made.
A DA TANET-600 can communicate with:
•

Another DA TANET-600 .

•

A GE-200 Series computer system, via a DATANET-15 Data Transmission Controller and a DATANET-601 at the computer site.

•

A DA TANET-30 Data Communication Processor.

•

A GE-400 Series computer system, via a DATANET-20 Data Transmission Controller, a single-channel controller for controlling the exchange of data between
a GE-400 Series computer system and communications lines.

The DATANET-601 is similar to the DATANET-600 but contains the additional circuitry
necessary to allow it to signal a DATANET-15 that servicing is required and to exchange data
with the DATANET-15. The 601 can be disconnected from the DATANET-15 and used as a
DATANET-600. The DATANET-15 is a multiline controller for controlling the exchange of
data between a GE-200 Series computer and communications lines. A DATANET-601 is required at the computer site to handle code conversion when a remote DATANET-600 is communicating with the computer. A paper tape copy of all received data can be made by the
DATANET-601, if desired.

© 1965

AUC:RGACI! Corporatio,l and AUERBACH 'fltu, Inc.

10,.65

6320:02
GE DATANET-600/601

• 15

Description (Contd. )
The DATANET-600 is capable of unattended operation. In this mode, a called terminal will
not transmit or punch data until it has received a valid data code. This prevents unintentional
operation if a number is called by mistake.
The DATANET-600 Controller can be switched to operate in an off-line mode, in which the
reader and punch can operate in conjunction with each other to perform duplication and editing.
The duplication function can be used to duplicate tapes or to combine several tapes into one
tape. The edit function can be used to punch a new, error-free tape from tapes which contain
bad blocks. (incomplete blocks because of detected errors); the new tape contains only the good
(error-free) data blocks.
~

• 16

First Delivery: .

•.••••••••...•

• 17

Availability:· ...••.••.••.•••••.

·2

CONFIGURATION

?

no longer in production.

A DATANET-600 or -601 terminal consists of two components housed in separate cabinets: .
a controller and a combination reader/punch. The terminal is connected to a voice-band communications line via an appropriate data set, as specified in Paragraph. 72 .
.3

INPUT

· 31

Prepared Input
Input medium:

............. ...

Quantity of data: .•••••••••••..•
Rated input speed: •.•••••••••••.
Effective speed: ...••••••••••••

fully-punched 11/16-, 7/8-, or 1-inch, 5-, 6-,
7-, or 8-level Mylar or oiled paper tape.
any 5 ... , 6-, 7-, or 8-level code; a separate plugin module is used for each different code.
variable.
50 char/sec.
somewhat less than rated speed, depending on
block length.
when transmitting an 8-level code, speed is cut
in half for each character that has the 8th level
punched.

· 32

Manual Input: .•.•••••.•••••.••

no provision.

· 33

Fixed Input: .•.•••••.••••..•••

no provision.

.34

Transaction Code Input:

no provision.

.35

Message Configuration:

data characters are followed by end-of-block
code.

• 36

Operating Procedure

'

Input code: .•.••.•.••.•.•••...

.37

(1)

Establish connection by manual dialing.

(2)

Set switches for receive/transmit.

(3)

Switch to data mode and start transmission.

Entry of Time and Date:

no provision.

(Contd. )
10/65

AlJ.ERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6320:03
GE DATANET-600/601

•
.4

OUTPUT

• 41

Output to Punched Tape
Tape size: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rated punching speed: .••..•.••..••
Effective speed: .•••••••..•••••..

Format control:
•5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

.51

Data Entry Errors: . • . . • . • . . . . • • ..

• 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking:
Error indication:
Correction procedure:

\

"

each character and its inverse are transmitted
sequentially, and the two codes are compared
at the receiver.
blank spaces on the output tape and failure to return an aclmowledgement signal following end":'ofblock.
automatic backspaci,ng of tape and retransmission
of entire block; if errors perSist, retransmissions
will continue until operator intervenes.

Data Recording Errors:

no detection facilities •

.55

Line Malfunctions: .••••••••••••••

no detection facilities; line failure will be regarded
as an error, 'with continuous retransmissions
until operator intervenes.

•6

CONDITION INDICA TORS
Input device available: .•••••••••••
Input device busy: . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Remote receiver ready: • • ••••••••••
Remote receiver busy: ••••••••••••
Power on: ......••...•.•..•..•.•
Improper data entry: •••••••••••••
T,ransmission error: •••••••• '. • • ••
Recording error: .••••••••••••• '..

.7

'DATA TRANSMISSION

• 71

Basic Characteristics
~ated

!

no detection facilities.

. 53

i

\

11/16-, 7/8-, or I-inch, 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level
oiled paper tape. (Mylar tape is not recommended. )
same as input code; a separate plug-in module is
required for each different code.
50 char/sec.
somewhat less than rated speed, depending on
block length; when receiving an 8-level code,
speed is cut in half for each character containing an 8th-level punch.
tapes can be duplicated off-line, with deletion of
error blocks •

transmission speed:

Transmission method:

none.
none.
none.
none.
lamp.
none •.
none.
none .

50 char/sec (850 bits/sec) for 5-, 6-, or 7-level
tapes.
25 char/sec (850 bits/sec) for 8-level tapes for
each character containing an 8th-level punch.
serial by bit.

/

@1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

10/65

6320:04
GE DATANET-600/60t

.71

Basic Characteristics (Contd.)
Transmission code: .•••• ' •••••••••

a total of 17 bits are transmitted for each chaJ;acter
(a code containing a punch in the 8th level requires
34 bits).
.
half-duplex.
?
start/ stop.

Transmission mode: •••••••••••.•
Order of bit transmission: ••••••• ••
Synchronization: • . . . . . • . • • • • • ••••
. 72

. 73

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set*

Public switched telephone network:
Common-carrier leased voice-band
line: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C.
Bell System Data Set 202D, or Western Union
1200 Baud Data Modem .

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . • •
Call reception: . . . . • . • . • . . . . . . . .
Functional operations: ..••.•.•...•

manual dialing.
capable of unattended operation.
none .

. 74

Multistation Operation: . . . . . . . • . • ..

no provision .

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component:

DA TANET-600 or -601
Controller

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

26
18
9

10.5
12
5
20

54

Power (KW)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
Phases

0.14 max
115
60
1

Temperature range eF.)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU /hr. )
.9

Reader /Punch

65 to 95
20 to 80
478 (approx.)

PRICE DATA
Component or Feature

Monthly
Rental,

Purchase
Price,

$

Monthly
Maintenance,

$

$

DATANET-600 (includes controller
and reader/punch)

275

8,250

?

DATANET-601 (includes controller
and reader/punch)

300

9,000

?

* In some cases. equivalent data sets can be used; check with the local common-carrier
communications consultant.
to/65

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS
AUERBACH
'

6321 :00

~

GE DATANET-760
REPORT UPDATE

..

REPORT UPDATE

. . GE INTRODUCES COMPONENT CHANGES IN DATANET-760 SUBSYSTEM
GE has introduced significant changes in the DATANET-760 Subsystem. Basically, the DTU
760 Display Terminal Unit has been replaced by the Display Monitor Unit (DMU 761) and the
Electronic Keyboard (EKB 761) ; see Figure L
The new, 14-inch DMU 761 Display Unit provides the same display as the DTU 760 Display Unit.
The DTU 760 Display Unit is no longer in production and is available on an "as returned" basis
only. A number of new components now supplement the DATANET-760 Subsystem to extend the
overall versatility and efficiency of the subsystem.
Two new Data Line Controllers, the DLC 761 and DLC 766, provide full-duplex operation with
respective transmission rates of 1200 bits per second (120 chara:cters per second) and 2000 or
2400 bits per second (250 or 300 characters per second). The DLC 761 operates asynchronously; each character is composed of 10 bits, which include parity and unity start and stop
bits. The DLC 766 operates synchronously; a total of 8 bits, which includes parity, is transmitted for each character, and four sync characters precede each messliie'!"
Two Basic Controller Units (BCU 760 and 761) provide basic control logic for keyboard entry
control, character generation, and timing. The BCU 761 is employed when the Function Key
Group option is incorporated. The BCU is included as an integral component of the Display
Controller Units (DCU 760).

Figure 1. New GE DATANET-760 Subsystem
© 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/67

GE OATANET-760
REPORT UPDATE

The FunctlonKey Group 1s now availa.ble as a standard option providing 8 or 16 additional keys
for the display and transmission of Bpecial symbols.
Up to four or more 14-inch or 23-inch (DMU 765 23-inch Read Only Display Unit) display-only
monitors can be connected to each Display Unit .for repeating a display at several locations. On
special request, a DATANET-760 Subsystem can be interfaced with closed-circuit television.
Read-only. two- or three-color monitor. are also available on request.

a

The configuration rules for incorporating pl'fnters In 760 Subsystem have been changed. Each
Page Printer Controller (PPC 760) can accommodate only one Teletype Model 33 or 35 ReceiveOnly Page Printer. Up to four Printer. Controllers can be connected to a Display Controller.
The Teletype Page Printers can now be obtained from GE; however, prices have not been established to date. .
... NEW PARTIYNE OPTION EXPANDS SIZE OF DATANET-760 SUBSYSTEM
Each keyboard!display or read-only display unit can be located up to 5000 cable feet from the
Display Controller by incorporating two Line Repeater Units (LRU 760). Each Line Repeater
Unit extends the basic 1000-foot separation by 2000 feet. A Keyboard Video Amplifier (KVA
760) must be included in each Repeater Unit. When the Party Line Junction option (PLJ 760)
is incorporated in the Line Repeater Unit. up to four additional keyboard/ display or read-only
display units can be connected to the Line Repeater Unit. The Party Line Junction option requires a Party Line Monitor (PLM 760) for each terminal unit connected to the Line Repeater
Unit. The Party" Line option alerts each of the party line operators to his own incoming message or alerts the operator when the party line is not busy. The 760 Subsystem can be expanded
to provide a maximum combination of 288 keybOard/display and read-only display units with full
utilization of the party line options •
... DATANET-760 PRI9ES~HAN9EP "

pa.-

The price data on
6321 :12 has been updated to reneet current prices and features included
with the GE DATANET-760 Subsystem.

11/67

AUERBACH Data Communicetlons Reports

6321:01

GE. DATANET-760

GE DATANET-760 KEYBOARD/DISPLAY SUBSYSTEM

.1

GENERAL

.11

¥dentity:.......................
Manufacturer:...................

• 12

· 13

· 14

DATANET-760 Keyboard/Display Subsystem •
General Electric Company
Information Systems Division
P.O. Box 129
Oklahoma City. Oklahoma.

Basic Function: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• visual display. via a cathode ray tube. of data
transmitted between a DATANE't-760 subsystem
and a remote computer; data can be entered via
a keyboard; printed output is optional.
Basic Components
Name: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• Display Terminal Unit.
Model number: •••••••••••••••••• DTU760.
Function: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• provides cathode ray tube and keyboard for display and entry of data.
Name: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• Display Controller Unit.
Model number: •••••••••••••••••• DCU760.
Function: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• provides basic control logic for keyboard entry
control. character generation. and timing.
Name: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• Terminal Memory Unit.
Model number: •••••••••••••••••• TMU760.
Function: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• provides buffer storage and display logic for all
units.

• 1;)

Name:. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• Page Print Controller.
Model number: •••••••••••••••••• PPC760.
Function: ................... • • •• provides basic control logic for a Teletype
Model 33 or 35 Receive-Only set.
Name: ••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• Data Line Controller.
Model number: •••••••••••••••••• DLC760 or DLC765.
Function: •••••••••••••••••• • • •• provides interface for data 'set. message assembly
and distribution. and error detection and retransmission.
Description
The GE DATANET-760 Subsystem is designed to facilitate the rapid exchange of data between
a computer system and one or more remote locations. under control of a stored program in
the computer. Up to 32 cathode ray tube Display Terminal Units with data entry keyboards
can be controlled by the Display Controller. Figure 1 shows the Display Terminal Unit.
up to four Page Print Controllers can be included in a DATANET-760 Subsystem. Each Print
Controller replaces one Display Terminal Unit and can drive one or more Teletype Model 33
or 35 (or equivalent) Receive-Only Printers. All printers connected to a single Print Controller receive and print the same data.
Each display or printer unit can be located up to 1000 cable-feet from the Display Controller.
(This distance can be extended for the display units with Line Repeater Units. available on
special request.) The Display Controller Is connected to a remote computer via a commoncarrier leased voice-band line or the public telephone network. appropriate data sets. and an
appropriate communications controller at the computer. The DATANET-760 can also be connecte'd directly to a computer I/O channel; this report. however. deals with the DATANET-760
Subsystem as used in a data communications environment.
Only one DATANET-760 Display/Keyboard Subsystem is normally connected to a single
communications line.

C 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/66

6321:02
GE DA TANET-760

Figure 1: GE DATANET-760 Display Terminal Unit
.15

Description (Contd. )
Basic Operation
The GE DATANET-760 Subsystem operates in a half-duplex mode. Information is exchanged
between the Subsystem and the remote computer by an alternating series of "transmission
frames, " each consisting of one or more messages to or from individual display or printer
units. After receiving a transmission frame from the remote computer, or after a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving anything, the Display Controller automatically scans
the units for messages to be sent, and initiates the sending of a transmission frame, which
may contain messages from up to eight terminals. During periods when no information is to
be transmitted, empty frames are transmitted. Normally, all data messages are acknowledged.
The Display Controller will automatically retransmit a message if a negative acknowl~dgment
is received. Full-duplex operation, which permits simultaneous transmission and reception,
is available upon special request.
.
The 7-level ASCII transmission code is employed, with an eighth bit added for character
parity. A DATANET-760 Subsystem can be obtained for transmission at 1,200, 2,000, or
2,400 bits per second. Thecorresponding character rates are 120, 250, and 300 characters
per second. Start/Stop synchronization is employed at 1,200 bits per second; a total of 10
bits, including start and stop bits, are transmitted for each character .. Synchronous transmission is used at 2,000 or 2,400 bits per second; sync characters are transmitted prior to
each transmission frame.
(Contd. )

11/66

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6321:03
GE DATANET-760

•
Components
A DATANET-760 Display/Keyboard Subsystem consists of:
•

One Display Controller,

•

Up to 32 Display Terminal Units. and

•

Up to 4 Page Print Controllers.

On special request, up to four or more 14-inch or 23-inch display-only monitors can be connected to each Display Unit for repeating a display at several locations.
The Display Controller contains one to four Terminal Memory Units (TMU), each containing
1,472 characters of delay-line storage. The storage of each TMU can be segmented to
accommodate from 1 to 8 Display Terminal Units and Print Controllers. On special request.
multjple Display Terminal Units can share one memory segment of a TMU on a shared-access,
party-line basis. Paragraph. 2 shows the display sizes when various numbers of units are
connected. The Display Controller also contains the logic for character generation, display
regeneration, parity checking, and control of multiple display stations and printers. The displayed characters are composed of one or more strokes.
The Display Terminal Unit consists of a rectangular cathode ray tube with a 14-inch diagonal
and a maximum display field 8 inches wide by 6.3 inches high. A physically separate alphanumeric keyboard is a standard part of the Display Terminal. The keyboard module can be
located up to four feet from the display module. On special request, the keyboard can be as
far as 100 feet from the display module.
A Page Print Controller (PPC) is required for each independent group of printers incorporated
in the Subsystem. The Print Controller utilizes one storage segment of a Terminal Memory
Unit. GE supplies the PPC with an interface to accommodate a Teletype Model 33 or 35
Receive-Only Page Printer or equivalent. (The user must obtain the printers separately.)
All data to be printed must be transmitted from the remote computer. If an operator desires
a display to be printed, the displayed data is first sent to the computer, then back to the printer
under control of the program stored in the remote computer. This technique enables the program stored in the remote computer to manipulate the printed format and to add stored data
not displayed by the requesting station. The Page Print Controller formats the incoming data
for line length and provides control functions that make it possible to tie together lengthy
messages that require more than one frame for transmission. The display terminal is free
to operate immediately after the print request has been transmitted.

\

Editing Facilities
Editing facilities available to the Display Terminal Unit operator include movement of the
cursor forward or backward. up or down. to the beginning of a line. or to the first display
position. The cursor is non-destructive; 1. e., it does not erase the character displayed in
the position the cursor occupies. In the basic keyboard. cursor movement is controlled by
certain character keys in the up-shift condition. The optional Entry Marker Group provides
a separate set of keys at the right of the keyboard which duplicate these functions. These
keys are repeating keys; 1. e. , the indicated action is continued if the key is held depressed.
An automatic tab function is included in the basic unit which positions the cursor at a vertical
line in a table outline previously written on the display. A Repeat key in the basic keyboard,
if held depressed Simultaneously with a character key, enables the operator to make repetitive
entries of characters or symbols.

/

A selected portion of the data displayed can be transmitted to the remote computer, beginning
with any position in one line and continuing through to the end of a consecutive group of lines.
The remainder of the display is not disturbed.
The cursor can be positioned directly to any display position by control codes contained in the
incoming message. This eliminates the need for rewriting previously displayed data.
/

© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH

In~o.

Inc.

1t/66

6321:04
GE DATANET-760

.15

Description (Contd. )
Error Checking and Correction .
Character and longitudinal (optional) parity checking are performed on all data received by
the DAT ANET-760 Subsystem from the remote computer; character parity bits and longitudinal
check characters (optional) are generated and transferred with all data transmitted from the
Subsystem. If the remote computer returns a negative acknowledgment, indicating that an
error was detected at the computer site, the Display Controller automatically retransmits the
message. The Display Controls also makes certain checks on the validity of message formats
received from the computer. If errors are detected, the Display Controller transmits a
negative response.
Programming Support
GE states that software is now available or is being planned to facilitatetheuseoftheDATANET760 Subsystem with any GE computer system .

. 16

First Delivery:. • • • • . • • • • • • . • • . ••

. June 1966 .

. 17
.2

Availability: •••••••••••••••••••
CONFIGURATION

5 months .

AGE DATANET-760 Keyboard/Display Subsystem is composed of these units:
•

One Display Controller,

•

Up to 32 Display Terminal Units, and

• Up to 4 Page Print Controllers.
Each Display Unit or Printer can be located up to 1, 000 feet from the Display Controller.
Extended distances are available on special request.
Up to four or more 14-inch or 23-inch display monitors can be connected to each Display
Terminal Unit (DTU) for display only. The monitor's display is exactly the same as that of
the DTU to which it is connected. The monitors are available on special request.
The Display Controller consists of the Display Controller Unit (DCU) , one Data Line Controller (DLC) , one to four Terminal Memory Units (TMU) , and up to four Page Print Controllers (PPC). All of these components are housed in the cabinet provided with the Display
Controller Unit. Each component physically consists of one or more logic boards; configuration changes can be easily made in the field.
A Terminal Memory Unit contains a delay-line memory with a total storage capacity of 1,472
characters. This memory can be segmented into two, four, or eight parts to accommodate
up to eight Display Terminal Units or associated printers. The following table shows the
allowable segmentation of each TMU and the resulting display size for each Display Unit.
Number of
Memory
Segments

Number of
DTU's and
Print
Controllers·

1
2
4
8

1
2
4
8

Display Size
Number of
Lines

Number of
Char/Line

Total Number
of Characters

26
16

46
46
46
46

1,196
736
368
184

8

4

• Maximum of four Print Controllers per subsystem.
All Display Units connected to the same TMU have the same display size. Units connected to
different TMU's can have different display sizes.
Each Page Print Controller can accommodate one independent group of printers. Each
printer within a group receives and prints the same data. See Paragraph. 44.
(Contd. )
11/66

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6321:05
GE DATANET-760

•

Two standard Data Line Controllers (DLC) are available. The DLC760 is for a data transmission rate of 1,200 bits per second (120 characters per second); the DLC765 is for a data
transmission rate of 2, 000 or 2,400 bits per second (250 or 300 characters per second).
Table IV lists the characteristics of each DLC. A special controller for full-duplex operation
is available on special request. See Paragraph. 72 for the standard communications facilities
that can be accommodated and the data set required .
.3

INPUT

.31

Prepared Input: • • • • . • . • • • • . • . • • •• no provision.

• 32

Manual Input
Display T.erminal Unit
Method of entry:. . • • . . . • • . . • • . • . • via 53-key keyboard, including 10 control keys.
Quantity of data:. • . . . • • . • . • . • • • . • up to 1,196, 736, 368, or 184 characters per
display, depending on the number of displays
per TMU; see Paragraph .2.
digits, upper-case alphabetic letters, and 28
Character .set: •••
punctuation marks and special symbols; see
Table I.
(~onlments: •••••..••.•.•.•.•.•. 4 additional command keys are provided on right
side of keyboard; 8 cursor control keys (optional)
which duplicate functions of certain keyboard
keys are located on right side of keyboard.
except for punctuation marks and special symbols,
keyboard layout is the same as for a standard
typewriter.
a group of Function keys is available on special
request; see Paragraph . 34.
to

)

\
I

/

\

••••••••••••••

• 33

Fixed Input: . • . . • . • . . • • • . . . • . . . .. no provision.

· 34

Transaction Code Input: . . . • . . . . • . . •• a group of Function keys is available on special
request; these keys provide additional symbols
for display and transmission and are normally
used for transaction-code input or similar
identification.

.35

Message Configuration
Input to the remote computer and data to be displayed or printed are transmitted between the
computer and the DATANET-760 ~ubsystem in alternate groups of messages called "transmission frames" (see Paragraph. 7). A transmission frame sent by the computer consists
of any number of computer messages followed by an EOT character. A transmission frame
sent by the DATANET-760 consists of up to eight display messages followed by an EOT character. The exact number of display messages in a frame depends on the number of units
connected to a TMU and the activity of the units (see Paragraph. 73). During periods when
no information is to be exchanged, a two-character quiescent frame is transmitted which
consists of an SOH and an EOT character. When the DLC765 Data Line Controller is used
for transmission at 2,000 or 2,400 bits per second, each data message is preceded by four
sync characters.
The formats for all messages sent by the DATANET-760 are identical, and consist of the
following characters: SOH, address of unit originating message, status character, FCl,
FC2, STX, text, ETX, and LP. The FCl and FC2 characters are reserved for Function
codes; see Paragraph. 34. There are five types of messages, which are distinguished by the
status character; the five message types are listed in Table Ill. The LP character is the
longitudinal parity check character. If the Longitudinal Parity Check option is not incorporated,
the LP character transmitted is all ones.
The DATANET-760 Subsystem can recognize and respond to three types of messages sent from
the remote computer; see Table Ill. The format for these messages is identical to that for display-originated messages except that the address character indicates the unit addressed and
the FCl and 'FC2 characters can be omitted.
'

C 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

t1/66

6321:06
GE DATANET-760

TABLE I: GE DATANET-760 ASCll DATA TRANSMISSION CODE

~

______________

b7

0

b6

0

b5

J-~

0

c::J - Character for Storage
It¥;;!;,;;1 -

o

o

1

1

1

1

1

o

1

1

1

o

o
o

1

o

1

_

1

-

Combinations not

USE,d

1

externally

Commands (not stored)

* These symbols permit horizontal
Note -

o
o

or vertical lines to be drawn for tables or charts.

See Table II for definition of control characters.

Reproduced from DATANET-760 Keyboard/Display Subsystem Manual, CPB-1308, published
by General Electric Company .

. 36

Operating Procedure
A Display Terminal Unit operates in one of four modes (Local, Transmit, Receive, or Print),
as indicated by the mode indicator located in the left margin opposite the first display line.
The Local mode is used to compose messages. The cursor (entry marker) identifies the
next display position to be entered. Control keys are provided to space the cursor forward or
backward one position at a time, move the cursor up or down one line at a time, move the
cursor to the first character position of the same line, and position the cursor at the first
displayable position. These control keys are located within the character keyboard layout in
the basic keyboard and are operated in conjunction with a control shift key.
The optional Marker Control Group provides a set of control keys in addition to the standard
control keys to provide the same functions. These keys are located on the right side of the
keyboard and operate without the control shift key. When held depressed, the optional
cursor control keys will repetitively advance or backspace the cursor, or move it up or down.
The cursor continually blinks 3 to 5 times per second, which permits quick visual location by
the operator.

(Contd. )
11/66

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

'lJ£RBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6321:07
GE DATANET-760

It

TABLE II: \DEFINITIONS OF GE DATANET-760 CONTROL CHARACTERS
Control
Character

Definition

-----------+--------------------------------------------------------------------;
NUL

SOH
STX
. ETX

Null. Used as a status character in message header to indicate the message
contains text.
Start of Header.
Start of Text.
End of. Text •

EOT
ENQ

End of Transmission.

ACK

Acknowledgment. Used as a status character to indicate that the last message
for the specified terminal was received correctly.

BSY

Busy. Used as a DA TANET-760 status character in the message header to
indicate that the last message received was addressed to a Busy terminal. A
terminal is Busy when it is under local control or has a message waiting to be
transmitted.

PRT

Print. Used as a DATANET-760 status character to indicate that the message
is to be printed. The computer then re-addresses the message to the PPC.
Negative Acknowledgment. Used as a status character in message header to
indicate that the last message was received with a detectable error.
Backspace marker one character. When the marker is at the left edge of the
page, subsequent backspaces have no effect.
Line Feed. Moves marker down one line. When the marker is on the bo~tom
line, a line feed moves the marker to the top line without changing character
position.

NAK
BS
LF

FF
CR

Enquiry. Used in conjuncti?n with NAK as subsequently described.

Form Feed. Clears memory, erases display, and page returns marker to the
top left character poSition.
Carriage Return. Returns marker to the leftmost character position. When the
marker is at the left edge of the page, subsequent carriage returns have no effect.

RLF

Reverse Line Feed. Moves m!lrker up one line without changing character
position. When marker is on top line, subsequent RLF's have no effect on the
marker. Character position is never changed with this command.

FS

Forward Space marker one character. When the marker reaches the end of the
line, another Forward Space causes generation of a Carriage Return - Line
Feed.
Page Return. Returns marker to top left character position without eraSing
display.
Synchronous Idle. Used in synchronous transmission to obtain character
synchronization.

PR
SYN
SP
BLINK

Space. Stores and displays a "Space" character.
Causes all characters between Blink character and the next space character (or
end of line) to blink. When inserted in a message to a Page Print Controller, a
single Blink character stops the printer at that point. A Double Blink code causes
the PPC to generate a form feed (carriage return. line feed) sequence and then
stop printing.

C 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/66

632t:08
GE DATANET-760

TABLE 1lI: SUMMARY OF MESSAGE TYPES
Type of Message

Status
Character

Text
From Display

From Computer

Information

NUL

1 to I, 196 data
characters*

1 to 1,196 data
characters plus
cursor movement
commands*

Positive Acknowledgment

ACK

none

cursor movement
commands*

Negative Acknowledgment

NAK

none

ENQ plus cursor
movement commands

Busy

BSY

none

-

Print

PRT

1 to 1,196 data
characters*

**

* Maximum number of data characters in messagtl is determined by the maximum display size of
the sending or receiving Terminal Display Unit; see Paragraph. 2.

** A message from the computer which is to be printed is formatted as an Information message addressed to a printer •
. 36

Operating Procedure (Contd.)
To transmit a message to the remote computer, the operator:
•

Composes the message by keying in the data, using the cursor control keys to
aid in positioning the data;

• Moves the cursor to anywhere in the last line to be transmitted and depresses the
ETX key to enter the End of Transmission character (displayed as a C) in the
right margin opposite the last line;
• Moves the cursor to the first character to be transmitted; and
• Depresses the TX key.
Transmission can be initiated in either the Local or Receive mode. All data between the
cursor and the end of the line indicated by the ETX symbol is ready for transmission.
Depression of the TX key places the Terminal Display Unit in the Transmit mode, as indicated
by a "T" displayed in the mode indicator position .. The message will be included in the next
available transmission frame.
The keyboard is disabled until transmission is completed. The Terminal Unit is now free to
receive a message from the remote computer. Normally, a positive or negative response is
received. The keyboard is locked again if a negative response is received, and the mode
indicator character will blink. The Display Control will automatically retransmit the message in the next available transmission frame. The Terminal Display Unit is automatically
placed in the Receive mode after a successful transmission, and an "R" is displayed in the
mode indicator charll:cter poSition. The operator can also change modes manually if required.
To print out a display, the operator depresses the PRT key, which puts the display in the
Print mode and causes a "P" to be displayed in the mode indicator character position. The
display message is transmitted to the remote computer. The remote computer selects a
print terminal as determined by the stored program and sends the message back to the
DATANET-760 for printing. The keyboard is locked until the transmission to the computer
is completed. The Display Terminal is freed for other operations immediately following the
transmiss.ion.
(Contd. )
t 1/66

AUERBACH Data Communications Rp.pcrt~

A
~

AuERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6321:09
GE DATANET-760

It

The capability of the Display Unit to transmit selected portions of a message and the
capability to include cursor positioning commands in the message from the computer allow
a series of display messages and computer responses to be displayed simultaneously .
. 37

Entry of Time and Date: . . . . . . . • • . .•

.4

OUTPUT

. 44

Output to Printer

no provisions .

Up to 4 independent groups of Teletype Model 33 or 35 Receive-Only Printers can be used in
a DATANET-760 Subsystem for printed output at 10 char/sec. Each group of RO Printers
requires a Page Printer Controller (PPC). All printers in a group receive and print the
same data. The Teletype units are fully described in Reports 6804 and 6805. The output
interface of the PPC is EIA RS232A. The output code is as shown in Table I with the addition
of a start bit and two stop bits to correspond to the 11-unit code used by the Teletype Model 33
and 35 equipment. The output transfer rate is 10 characters per second (110 bits per second).
The user must obtain the Teletype or equivalent printers separately .
. 46

Output to Visual Display Device
Display Terminal Unit Output medium:
Character set: . . . . • . . . • . . . . • . • . •

Character size: . . . . . • . . . . . • . . . • .
Display size: .••...•....••.•••.

Characters per line: • • • • . • • . • . • • •.
Lines per display: . . . . . . . • . • •••••
Characters per display: •••••.. ••.•
Buffer capacity: • . • • . . • . . . • . . • . ••
Format control: . • • • . . . . • . . .•••.•

Rated output speed:. • • • . • • • • • • • • • •

cathode ray tube; displays white characters
against gray background.
digits 0-9, upper case letters A-Z, and 28
punctuation and special symbols; see Table I.
Four of the special symbols permit drawiag
vertical and horizontal lines.
nominally 0.12 inch wide and 0.16 inch high.
display field for a 26-line unit is 8.0 inches wide
by 6.3 inches high; the display field of a 16-,
8-, or 4-line unit is proportionately shorter in
height, and is centered on the face of the tube;
the diagonal of the rectangular tube is 14 inches.
46.
26, 16, 8, or 4 depending on the number of displays per TMU; see Paragraph. 2.
1,196, 736, 368, or 184, depending on the number
of displays per TMU; see Paragraph. 2.
1,472 characters per Terminal Memory Unit;
maximum of 5,888 characters per DATANET760 Subsystem.
each space in the display occupies one poSition of
buffer storage; cursor is nondestructive and
blinks continually 3 to 5 times a second to aid
operator visibility; control keys allow cursor
to be advanced or backspaced, moved up or
down, positioned at the beginning of the next
line, or poSitioned at the first display position;
cursor can be positioned by the operator when
composing. a message or by contl'ol codes in a
received message; the entire message can be
erased by the operator or by a control code in
the received message; single characters are
corrected or changed by poSitioning the cursor
and depressing the correct character key;
special symbols allow drawing of horizontal and
vertical lines; cursor can be tabbed to the next
position after a vertical line.
150, 250, or 300 char/sec (1,200, 2,000, or
2,400 bits/sec respectively).

C 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH In.1o. Inc.

11/66

6321: 10
GE DATANET-760

.46

Output to Visual Display Device (Contd.)
Effective output speed: • • . . . . . . • . .

.5

EHHOH DETE( 'TION AND COHHECTION

.51

---------

• 52

n.) provision for checking other than visual

Data Entry Errors:

verification of the display. Errors are corrected by repositioning the cursor and rekcving
the data .

Data TransJ!lission Errors
Type of checldng: . . . . . . .
Error indicathn: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Corl'f)ction P,-()\."··dure: . . • . . " . . . . . •

character parity; longitudinal parity (optional,;
status cha racier validity check; various cheeks
on format and control characters.
a negative acknowledgment message is 11'a1lSmitted, the mode indicator on the disphy blinkB,
and the keyboard remains locked during n tr;IIl~'­
misBion.
autol1l-1f lC rctranHllliSdion by DATANET--j;iG, as
progrll mnH'd I', (~omputer at remot.- site
(uswllly re!.ransmisl:lion).
no provision for checking other than visua I
verifjeatioll of displayed or printed data

.5:3
• 55

highly variable; depends on activity of display
terminals, number of format control charaet£'rs
in the display message, turnaround tIme, etc.
The aetivity of the terminals affects thl' hl,wkingor messages into transmission fra mes_

Line Malfunctioll!:>
no data received from remote computer within
4 seconds after transmission from DATANET760.
Controller reinitiates a transmission frame: s"e
Paragraph . 7,

Detection: . . . . . . . .
Action:

.6

CONDITION INDICA TORS: .

.7

DATA TRANSMISSION,

the mode inr:iC'ator character is displayed in the
left rna rgin opposite the first display line. An
If W'. "L", "1''', or" P" is displayed to indicate
Receive, Local, Transmit, or Print mode,
respectively. The modc indicator blinks if fI
negntive response. which indicates an errOl",
is received. A wide array of controls allows
the operator to adjust the brightness and contrast. of the display, the vertical size of the
characters, and the horizontal and vertical
synchronization .

A DATANET-760 Subsystem can operate the public telephone network or over a dedicated line.
A connection is normally maintained between the Suhsystem and the remote com~uter for an
extended period of time. Groups of messages called "transmission frames" are normall~
transmitted continually in alternate directions hetween the Subsystem and the remote computer.
The Data Line Controller contains a timer which is started after every transmission from
the DATANET-760. If a transmission is not received from the remote computer within '1
seconds, the DATANET-760 will reinitiate a transmission frame. The remote computer can
defeat the time out and prevent the DAT_ANET-760 ft'OIl' transmitting by appropriate signa's
to the data set. All messages from Display Units are held pending until acknowledged. Spe
Paragraph.35 for a discussion of the message and transmission frame formats .
• 71

Basic Characteristics: • • • . . • • . • . . ..

see Table IV.
(Contd. )

11/66

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

..

AVERBAn,

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6321: 11
GE DATANET-760

TABLE IV: DATANET-760 BASIC TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS
DLC 760 and DCL 761
Data Line Controllers

Characteristic

DLC 765 and DLC 766
Data Line Controllers

1,200 (120 char/sec)

2, 000 or 2,400
(250 or 300 char/sec)

Serial by bit

Serial by bit

Transmission code

ASCII, see Table II; a total of
10 bits are transmitted for
each character, including
start and stop bits

ASCII, see Table II; a total of
6 bits are transmitted for
each character

Transmission mode

Half-duplex (DLC 760);
full-duplex (DLC 761)

Half-duplex (DLC 765);
full-duplex (DLC 766)

Order of bit transmission

Low-order bit first, parity
bit last

Low-order bit first, parity
bit last

Synchronization

Start/sto!>

Synchronous; 4 sync characters
precede each message

Rated transmission speed
bits/sec
Transmission method

.72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line or Service
Public telephone network, operating
at the following speeds 1,200 bits/sec: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2,000 bits/sec:

Data Set*
Bell System Data-Phone
Data Set 202C.
Bell System Data-Phone
Data Set 201A. .

Common-carrier leased voice-band
line operating at the following speeds 1,200 bits/sec: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 73

. 74

Bell System Data Set 202C or 202D, or
Western Union 1200 Baud Data Modem.
2,000 bits/sec: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bell System Data Set 201A.
2,400 bits/sec: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bell System Data Set 201B or Western Union
2400 Baud Data Set.
* In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant .
Transmission Control
In half-duplex operation the Display Controller Unit initiates the sending of a transmission
frame after each transmission frame received from the computer, or after the timer in the
Data Line Controller has timed out. The Display Units and printers connected to a Terminal
Memory Unit (TMU) are numbered sequentially, and all TMU's are also numbered sequentially. When initiating a transmission frame, the units are scanned in descending
sequence by Memory Unit and by Display Unit for messages awaiting transmission. If a
waiting message of any type is detected, that message and all messages from lowernumbered units connected to the same TMU are grouped and sent as one transmission frame.
A similar procedure is followed in full-duplex operation except that the units are scanned
continuously for transmit requests and there is no message framing .
Multistation Operation
Polling: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . automatic poll after each message received from
remote computer; see Paragraph. 73.
Addressing:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. individual Display Units cannot communicate directly with one another; such communication
could be provided on a store-and-forward basis
by appropriate programming of the remote
computer, utilizing the individual address ability
of the terminal units.
@

1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/67

6321: 12
GE DATANET-760

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component

Display Terminal Unit

Controller Cabinet·

Line Repeater Unit

--

--Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

16
27
)7
78 (appx.)

Power (KyA)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
Phases
Temperature Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)

-

27.25
27.25
62
550 (appx.)

0.20
115
60
1

0.75
115
60
1

40 to 100
10 to 90

65 to 85
20 to 80

0.06
115
60
1
-20 to -+125
5 to 95

----- -

---

..

* Houses all components except Display Terminal Units and Printers .

.9

PRICE DATA
Component or Feature

Monthly
Rental,

$

Purchase
Price.

Monthly
Maintenance,

$

$

--

DMU 761 Display Monitor Unit
(14-inch screen)
DTU 760 Display Terminal Unit*
DMU 765 Read-Only Display Unit
(23-inch screen)

27.50

1,010

5

55
25

2,020
:100

10
5

EKB 761 Electronic Keyboard
EMC 761 Entry Marker Control
FKG 761 Function Key Group
(8 keys)
FKG 766 Function Key Group
(16 keys)

27.50
10
15

1,OtO

375
550

5
2
3

20

735

4

350
110
NC
NC
50

14.000
4,600
NC
NC
2,100

24
8
NC
NC
4

105
170
125

4,200
6,250
5,000

8
20
16

190

7,950

26

15
5
5
5

550
185
185
185

3
1
1
1

10
15

375
550

:1

20

735

4

185

1

DCU 760 Display Controller Unit
TMU 760 Terminal Memory Unit
BCU 760 Basic Controllflr Unit
BCU 761 Basic Controller Unit
PPC 760 Page Print Controller
Data Line Controllers DLC 760 (half-duplex at 1200 bps)
DLC 761 (full-duplex at 1200 bps)
DLC 765 (half-duplex at 2000 or
2400 bps)
DLC 766 (full-duplex at
2400 bps)
LRU 760 Line Repeater Unit
KVA 760 Keyboard Video Amplifer
PLJ 760 Party Line Junction
PLM 761 Party Line Monitor
DTU 760 Options· EMC 760 Entry Mal ker Control
FKG 760 Function Key Group
(8 keys)
FKG 765 Function KflY Group
(16 keys)
PLM 760 Party Line Monitor

5

-

2

* The DTU 760·is no longer in production; it is available on an "as returned"
basis only. The options shown are still available for existing units.
NC - No Cliarge.

11/67

11. 1
14
11
17 (maximum)

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6322:01
GE DATANET-730

®

GE DATANET-730 ACOUSTICALLY COUPLED TERMINAL

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

General Electric DATANET-730 Acoustically
Coupled Terminal (ACT).

.12

Manufacturer:

General Electric Company
Information Systems Division
P. O. Box 12313
Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73112.

. 13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • .

transmit and receive data over the public telephone network via an acoustic telephone
coupler .

. 14

Basic Components

. 15

Name: • . . • . . . .
Model number: ..
Function: • . . . • . • • . • • • . . . . . • . . •.

Portable Keyboard Send-Receive Set.
Model ACT-731 KSR.
transmits data from keyboard input; receives
data and prints it.

Name: . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
Model number: . . . . . • • . . .
Function: . . • . . • . . . . . . . .

Portable Automatic Send-Receive Set.
Model ACT-733 ASR.
transmits data from punched paper tape or keyboard input; receives data and punches it into
paper tape or prints it.

Name: . . • . . . • • • • • . . . . . • . . • • . • .
Model number: . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function: . . . . . . . • • . • . . . • . . . • . • •

Mobile Automatic Send-Receive Set.
Model ACT-735 ASR.
transmit data from punched paper tape or keyboard input; receives data and punches it into
paper tape or prints it .

Description
The GE DATANET family now includes a line of acoustically-coupled teletypewriter terminals
under the name of DATANET-730. Three models of the DATANET-730 are presently available;
all include the Teletype Model 33 ASR or KSR (depending on the DATANET-730 model) interfaced with a GE DigiNet Model TDM-114 Data Set and packaged as a mobile unit, see Figure
1, or as portable units in separate hand-carrying cases.
This report presents a summary of the DATANET-730, and includes only that information
pertinent to the 730 configuration. Refer to Report 6804 for a detailed description of the Teletype Model 33 line.
The GE DATANET-730 is available in three models:

'\

I

•

Model ACT 731 - includes the Teletype Model 33 KSR and GE Model TDM-114 Data
Set. Both units are packaged in separate hand-carrying cases.

•

Model ACT 733 - includes the Teletype Model 33 ASR and GE Model TDM-114 Data
Set. Both units are packaged in separate hand-carrying cases.

•

Model ACT 735 - includes the Teletype Model 33 ASR and GE Model TDM-1l4 Data
Set. Both units are functionally integrated into a mobile cabinet.

/

/

© 1969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/69

6322:02
GE DATANET-730

Figure 1. The GE DATANET-730 Model Act-735 Mobile Terminal, Connection
to a Standard Desk-Telephone Set is Shown .
. 15

Description (Contd.)
The differences between the Teletype equipment and the GE DATANET-730 include some keyboard key-top changes, the addition of the GE acoustically-coupled data set, and the special
packaging provisions.
The DATANET-730 transmits at 10 characters per second (110 bits per second) and operates
asynchronously in the half-duplex mode. The 7-level USASCII code with an 11-unit code
structure is employed. Each character transmitted includes a parity bit, one start, and two
stop bits. Even parity is generated and transmitted but no checking facilities are provided
for received data other than operator surveillance.
The character set totals 96 characters including upper-case alphabetics, numerics, special
characters and control codes; of these 96, 64 characters are printable.
The ASR models employ a punched paper type reader and a punched paper tape punch. Operation of these units can be initiated by the remote computer via special control codes. Both
units employ 1-inch, 8-level paper tape.
The GE TDM-114 is a telephone coupler data set that acoustically couples the Model 33 Teletype unit to the public telephone network via a standard desk telephone set such as the Bell
System Series 500 telephone set. To transmit data between the DATANET-730 and a remote
computer, the operator places the call in the conventional manner, positions the telephone
handset in the telephone-coupler cradle and activates the data terminal. The call is terminated by simply removing the handset from the cradle and "hanging-up" in the conventional
manner. Table I presents the operational characteristics of the TDM-114 Data Set.
(Contd.)

5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A'A'

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

~

6322:03
GE DATANET-730

AUERBACH
®

/

TABLE 1. GE DATANET-730 ACOUSTIC COUPLER TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS*

Component
TDM-114
Data Set

Mode
Half-duplex
or
full-duplex

Method Modulation
Serial
by bit

Frequency
Shift

Operating
Mode
Speed

Timing

Code

Asynchronous

Any code;
unrestricted
code length

Originate
only

Up to
300
bps

*The GE TDM-114 Data Set is compatible with the GE TDM-115 Data Set and the Bell
System Data-Phone Data Set 103A2. GE also markets the TDM-114 and-115 Data Sets
as separate units; see Section 4640: Telephone Coupler Data Sets.
/

.15

Description (Contd.)
In addition to its data transmission capabilities, the DATANET-730 can be used off-line to
prepare paper tape or list paper tape data.
The Answer-Back feature of the standard Teletype Model 33 units is also present in the DATANET-730. The feature consists of a recorded message of up to 20 characters that is initiated
by an ENQ code received from the remote computer or another DATANET-730 ACT.
An elapsed time meter is available as an option for the DATANET-730 terminals •

. 16

First Delivery: . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

December 1968 .

. 17

Availability:....................

3 to 4 days .

•8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model 731 ACT
Component

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (lbs.)
Power(KW)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phase

Model 733 ACT

Model 735 ACT

KSR
Unit*

TDM-114
Data Set*

ASR
Unit*

TDM-114
Data Set*

ASR
Unit

21.2
22.0
14.0
70.0

10.0
12.0
4.62
8.5

24.63
22.0
14.0
82.0

10.0
12.0
4.62
8.5

22.0
18.5
8 4

TDM-114 Mobile
nata Set Cabinet
9.5
7.5
4.0
125 .. 0**

0.110 Supplied
0.110 Supplied
0.110 Supplied
115
by
115
by
by
115
60
60
KSR
60
ASR
ASR
1
Unit
1
Unit
Unit
1

40-120
Temperature Range CF)
0-,90
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/Hr.)
409
?

40-120
0-90
682

?

682

*Includes carrying case.
**Includes mobile cabinet.

© 1969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

40-120
0-90
?

34.0
22.0
27.0

-

6322:04
GE DATANET-730

.9

PRICE DATA
Monthly
Rental,

Purchase
Price,

Monthly
Maintenance,

Component

$

$

$

Model ACT-731 KSR*

N/A

2100

30

Model ACT-733 ASR*

N/A

2200

35

Model ACT-735 ASR**

110

2100

35

*Includes carrying cases.
**Includes mobile cabinet.
N/A - Not Applicable.

5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

6380.01
HONEYWELL 480

HONEYWELL 480 COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL UNIT
.1

GENERAL

· 11

!.!:!PlJtity:..

480 Communications Contl',,1 Unit.

Manufacturer: .

Honeywell EDP Division
(iO Walnut Street
Wellesley lIills, Mass.

· 1:1

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,

provid('s a Honeywell 400 or HOO computer system
with the capability of communicating with various
remote terminals over a voice-band line.

· 15

Desc'ription

I"

The Honeywell Model 480 Communications Control Unit controls the transfer of digital information over a single half-duplex voice-grade line (either leased, or the public switched
network) between a Honeywell 400 or 1400 computer system and various terminal units,
including:
•

Another Honeywell 400 or 1400 computer system equipped with a 480
Communication Control Unit.

•

A Honeywell 800 or 1800 computer system equipped with an 880
Communication Control Unit.

•

A Honeywell Series 200 computer system equipped with either a 281-2D or
286 Communication Control.

•

An IBM 1400 or 7000 Series computer system equipped with a 1009 Data
Transmission Unit.

•

An IBM System/360 computer system equipped with a 2701 Data Adapter
Unit.

•

An IBM 1013 Card Transmission Unit.

•

An IBM 7701 or 7702 Magnetic Tape Transmission Unit.

The 480 operates at 250 or 300 characters per second and sends or receives a 4-of-8 transmission code, Utilizing a buffer capacity of 512 characters, the 480 supplies all control
codes, establishes synchronization, automatically translates to and from the internal
Honeywell 6-bit code, implements a character validity and longitudinal parity error detection
scheme, and automatically retransmits erroneous messages.
As many as four 480's can be connected to the central processor of a Honeywell 400 or 1400
computer system. Each requires an input and an output trunk from the central processor.
A hardware interrupt feature allows a separate data processing program to be run concurrently with the transfer of data over a communications line .
.2

CONFIGURATION
A 480 can be connected to a Honeywell 400 or 1400 Central Processor via one input and one
output trunk of the central processor. A maximum of four 480 Communications Control Units
can be connected to either processor. Connections to standard communications facilities are
as specified in Paragraph. 72.

©1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH

I~fo.

Inc.

10/65

6380.02
HONEYWELL 480

.3

INPUT
All input to the 480 is from the assochted H-400 or H-1400 computer system under control
of the stored program. Input to the 11-400 or H-1400 can be from the console keyboard,
punched cards, puncher! paper tape, magnetic tape, or magnetic disc.
data is transfel'l'l!d in blocks of ham 1 tl) 51~
characters under program control. Each message is preceded and followed by control characters automatic(l.lly supplied by the control unit.

· 36

Operating Procedure
(1) Operator establishes connection manually by dialing

01'

signaling.

(2) The 480 is set to transmit or receive.
(3) The Start button is pressed and the telephonE' is switched to data mode .
.4

OUTPUT
All output from the 480 is to the associated H-400 or H-1400 computer system under control
of the stored program. Output can he to printed copy (via either the line printer or the
console typewriter), punched cards, punched paper tape, magnetic tape, or magnetic disc.

·5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

.51

Data Entry Errors
Type of checking: .

: 52

no checking is performl'd on the data transferred
from the attached computer system to the 480.

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error indication: . . . . .
. .....
Correction procedure: ..

. 53

character validity and longitudinal parity.
an interrupt signal is generated and the processor
branches to a specified location.
under control of the stored program; usually
retransmission .

Data Recording Errors
Type of checking: . . . . .

no checking is performed on the data transferred
from the 480 to the connected computer system.

. 55

Line Malfunctions: . . . • . . . .

no checking .

·6

CONDITION INDICA TORS
Component: . . . . .

480 Communications Control Unit

System available: .
Input device transmitting: ...
Remote receiver ready:
Remote receiver busy: ...
Power on: . . . . . • . . . . . .
Transmission error: . . . . .
Retransmission occurring:

lamp.
lamp.
lamp.
lamp.
lamp.
lamp.
lamp.

(ClIlltd. )

10/65

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AUERBACH
DATA
CDMMUNICATIDNS
REPORTS

~

AUERBACH

6380.03
HONEYWEL.L. 480

•
.7

DATA TRANSMISSION

.71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed:
Transmission method: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission code: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission mode: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Order of bit transmission: . . . . . . . . .
Synchronization: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set*

Public switched telephone network at
2,000 bits/sec (250 char/sec):

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 20lA.

Common-carrier leased voiceband lines at the following
speeds:
2,000 bits/sec (250 char/sec):
2,400 bits/sec (300 char/sec):
. 73

250 or 300 char/sec over voice-band lines.
These speeds correspond to 2,000 and 2,400 bits
per second, respectively.
serial by bit.
4-of -8 (same as IBM 4-of-8 code used with 7702
Magnetic Tape Terminal; see Paragraph 6450.31).
half -duplex.
1, 2, 4, 8, R, 0, X, N.
synchronous; i. e., synchronization is maintained
by the data signals .

Bell System Data Set 20lA.
Bell System Data Set 201B, or Western Union
2400 Baud Data Modem .

Transmission Control
Call initiation:
Call reception:

...............

Functional operations:

~

manual dialing or signaling.
operator must establish voice communication and
then switch to data mode.
no direct control, but incoming data can be used
to control operations through appropriate programming .

. 74

Multistation Operation: .••......... no provision .

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component:

\

480 Communications
Control Unit
35
30

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

800

Power(KW)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
Phases

1.0
208
60
3

Temperature range (OF.)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr.)

70-74

66

?
?

* In some ca~es, equivalent data sets can be used; see your local common-carrier
communications oonsultant.
@1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH I."fo. Inc.

10/65

6380.04
HONEYWELL 480

.9

PRICE DATA

Component or Feature
480 Communications Control Unit

10/65

Monthly
Rental,

Purchase
Price,

Monthly
Maintenance,

$

$

$

790

35,550

79.00

AUERBACH Data Communications Rer·"ts

A
~

AUERBACH

6381 :01

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

HONEYWEL.L. 481

'"
)
HONEYWELL 481 SINGLE-CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:.......................

481 Single-Channel Communications Control •

• 12

Manufacturer:...................

Honeywell EDP Division
60 Walnut Street
Wellesley HUls, Mass .

. 13

Basic Function: . • • • . . • . . . . • • • • • .. provides a Honeywell 400 or 1400 computer
system with the capability of communicating
with various remote terminals over a
narrow-band or voice-band line .

. 14

Basic Components
Name: .• •. • • . . . • • . . . . • • . • • • . .. Single-Channel Communications Control (SCCC).
Model number:. . • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • •• 481.
Function: •••• . • • . . • . • • • • . • • • • .. provides buffering to control data flow between
the computer system and a communications
line.
Name: . • • • • . • • • • • • • • . • • • • • • • .• Communications Adapter Unit.
Model number: .•••••..•••••••.••. 485-1R, -IT, -lH, -2R, -2T, or -2H.
Function: . . . . • . . . . . . • . • • • • . . . .. provides the interface for a specific type of line ..

. 15

Description
The Model 481 Single-Channel Communications Control (SCCC) controls the transfer of
digital information over a simplex or half-duplex narrow-band or voice-band line between
a Honeywell 400 or 1400 central processor and a variety of terminal equipment. Generally,
any standard teleprinter, paper tape reader or punch, etc., which can transmit or receive
up to 105 characters per second with codes of up to 8 levels, can be employed as terminal
equipment.
The 481 has a dual two-character buffer for input, which is used as a single four-character
buffer during output. A hardware interrupt facility allows an independent data-processing
program to be run concurrently with the data communications transfer. All control signals,
error checking, and translation are implemented by the central processor program.
A Model 485 Communication Adapter Unit (CA U) is contained in the 481 and serves as the
interface between the 481 and the line terminal. There are various types of CAUls, depending
on the type of line to be serviced •

•2

CONFIGURA nON
The 481 SCCC can be connected to a Honeywell 400 or 1400 central processor via one input
and one output trunk of the central processor. A maximum of four 481 SCCC units can be
connected to either processor. A 485 Communications Adapter Unit is required for attachment to a specific communication line. Six models of the 485 are currently available:
•

485-1R - permits connection to a telegraph-grade line for receive-only
operation.

• 485-1T - permits connection to a telegraph-grade line for transmitonly operation.
•

485-1H - permits connection to a telegraph-grade line for halfduplex .operation.

@ 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH .lnfo. Inc.

10/65'

6381:02

HONEYWELL 481

.2

CONFIGURATION (Contd.)
•

485-2R - permits connection to a vOice-grade line for receiveonly operation.

•

485-2T - permits connection to a voice-grade line for transmitonly operation.

•

485-2H - permits connection to a voice-grade line for balf-duplex
Operation.
.

The connections to various communications facilities, and the data sets required, are
specified in Paragraph. 72 •
•3

INPUT

All input to the 481 is from the associated H-400 or H-1400 computer system under control
of the stored program. Input to the H-400 or H-1400 can be from the console keyboard,
punched cards, punched paper tape, magnetic tape, or magnetic disc •
• 35

Message Configuration: • • • • • • • • • • • ••

• 36

Operating Procedure

data is transmitted in blocks of variable length.
data characters are followed by an end-ofmessage or end-of-transmission character
supplied by the stored program, when required
by the remote terminal.
minimum message length is four characters;
maximum length is dependent on core storage
availability and/or on program considerations .

With 485-1 Communications Adapter Operation with this Adapter is entirely under program control; no operator action is
required.
With 485-2 Communications Adapter -

•4

(1)

Operator establishes connection manually by dialing or signaling.

(2)

The 481 is set to transmit or receive.

(3)

The Start button is pressed and the telephone is switched to data
mode •

OUTPUT

All output from the 481 is to the associated H-400 or H-1400 computer system Wlder control
of the stored program. Output can be to printed copy (via either the line printer or the printer
or the console typewriter), punched cards, punched paper tape, magnetic tape, or magnetic
disc •
•5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

• 51

Data Entry Errors: ••••••••••••...

no checking is performed on the data transferred
from the attached computer system to the 481
SCCC.

(Contd. )

10/65

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

6381:03

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

~

AuERBACH

HONEYWELL 481

'"
· 52

Data Transmission Errors: . • . • • • • . ••

no automatic checking is performed on trans-·
mitted or received data, but various checks
can be programmed, depending on coding and
format restrictions of the remote terminal.
If the 481 is receiving, the stored program
can request retransmission; if the 481 is transmitting, the stored program can initiate
retransmission •

• 53

Data Recording Errors: .•.•.••••••• no automatic checking is performed on the data
transferred from the 481 SCCC to the attached
computer system.

• 55

Line Malfunctions: . • • . • • • • • • • • • • ••

•6

CONDITION INDICA TORS: .•••.••.••. there are no condition indicators on the 481
SCCC, and there are no indicators on the
attached computer system console which
directly pertain to data communications •

•7

DA TA TRANSMISSION

.71

Basic Characteristics

no automatic checking.

Rated transmission speed485-1 Communications Adapter: • • ••

6.0, 6.6, 7.5, or 10.0 char/sec on Telegraphgrade line.
485-2 Communications Adapter: • • •• 14.8 or 105 char/sec OIl voice-band line.

Transmission method:. • • • • • • • • • • • ••

serial by bit.

Transmission code: ..•.••......••.

any code up to 8 levels; specified when ordered.

Transmission mode: •••••••••••••••

simplex or hall-duplex, depending on Adapter
model; see Paragraph. 2.

Order of bit transmission: • • • • • • • • • • • as specified when ordered.
Synchronization:. • . • • • . • • • . . • • . . . • start and stop bits are transmitted with each
character •

• 72

\

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set*

Common-carrier leased telegraph grade lines (up to 7 5 bits/sec): • • • • • •• none required.
Common-carrier leased narrow-band
Data Channels (up to 75 bits/sec): • • • •• Bell System Data Set 103F or Western Union 75
Baud Data Modem.
Bell System Schedule 3A Data Channel
(150 bits/sec): • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••

Bell System Data Set 103F.

\
/

* In some cases. equivalent data sets can be used; see your local common-carrier
communicationS consultant.
@1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH In!o. Inc.

10/65

6381 :04
HONEYWELL 481

• 72

Connection to Communications Lines (Contd.)
Communications lJne

Data Set*

Western Union Class D Data Channel
(180 bits/sec): . • • • • • . . • • . • • • . • •.

Western Union 180 Baud Data Modem.

Common carrier leased voice-band lines
at the following speeds:
Up to 150 bits/sec: . • • • • • • . . . . .•
Up to 180 bits/sec: . . . • . . • . . . . ..
Up to 1,200 bits/sec: . . • • • • . . • ..
Public switched telephone network at the
following speeds:
Up to 150 bits/sec: . . • . • • • . • • . ..
Up to 1,200 bits/sec: . . • • • . . . . ..
. 73

Bell System D~ta Set 103F.
Western Union 180 Baud Data Modem.
Bell System Data Set 202C or 202D, or Western
Union 1200 Baud Data Modem.

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 103A.
Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C .

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . • • • • • • . . . • . . • . • . .•

manual dialing or signaling on voice-band lines.
programmed calling on telegraph-grade lines.
Call reception:. • • • • . • • • • • • • • . • . •• capable of unattended operation.
Functional operations:. , . . . . • • . • . . •. no direct control, but incoming data can be used
to control operations with appropriate programming .
. 74

Multista.tion Operation: . • • • . • • • . • . .•

•8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

no provision other than the facilities offered hy
programming; it would depend on the rf'moi"
terminals' ability to rCb'Pond to message&. and
would require program analysis of responses .

Component:

481 SCCC**

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

20
30
73
400

Power (KW)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
Pbases

0.3
208
60

Temperature range (OF.)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr.)

70-74
?
?

"-

3

* In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; see your local common-carrier communications consultant •

.**

This unit also contains the 485 Communications Adapter Unit.
(Contd. )

10/65

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

fA
~

A•• [P6A(H

6381:05

AUEPBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

HONEYWELL 481

II>

•9

PRICE DATA

Component or Feature

Purchase
Price,

Monthly
Maintenance,

$

$

300

13,650

24.00

25
25
30
30
30
40

1,125
1,125
1,350
1,350
1,350
1,800

2.50
2.50
3.00
3.00
3.00
4.00

Monthly
Rental,

$
481 Single-Channel Communications
Controller
485 Communications Adapter Unit:
485-1R
485-1T
485-1H
485-2R
. 485-2T
485-2H

/

/

\

\,

\
\

)

@1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

10/65

A
..

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6382:01
HONEYWELL 281

HONEYWELL 281 SINGLE-CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL UNIT

.1

GENERAL

· 11

Identity:.;.....................

· 12

Manufacturer:...................

· 13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

· 15

De'scription

Type 281 Single-Channel Communications
Control Unit.
Honeywell EDP Division
60 Walnut Street
Wellesley Hills, Mass. 02181
different models provide a Honeywell Series 200
computer system with the capability of communicating with various remote terminals over
a narrow-, voice-, or broad-band line.

The Type 281 Single-Channel Communications Control Unit enables the transmission and
reception of messages over a common-carrier narrow-, voice-, or broad-band communications line. Many models of the 281 are available to accommodate 5- to 8-level data codes
and transmission rates of up to 5100 characters per second. The 281 is a Single-channel,
half-duplex control that sends or receives either by single character or by message. For
full-duplex or multiple-channel operation the Honeywell Type 286 Multi-channel Commooication Control (Report 8381) is generally recommended although additional Type 281 Controls
can be added to a Honeywell Series 200 computer system. Each 281 Control requires two
input-output address assignments of the associated Series 200 computer.
By means of a 281 Commooications Control and appropriate commooication facilities, a
Honeywell Series 200 system can communicate with a wide variety of remote devices, such
as:

•

Teleprinters, paper tape readers, and paper tape pooches used with Bell System
and Western Union telegraph services (Teletype Model 19, 28, 32, 33, 35 and 37
units over TWX, Telex, public telephone network and leased lines).

•

Teletype Telespeed 1050 Equipment (Bell System Dataspeed Type 2 Service).

• IBM 1050 Data Communication System.
• Honeywell Data Station.
• Honeywell Keytape Units.
• Honeywell Visual Information Projection (VIP) System.
•

Other Honeywell Series 200 computers (H-llO, H-120, H-125, H-200, H-1200,
H-1250, H-2200, H-4200, or H-8200).

• IBM (Synchronous Transmit Receive (STR) terminals (IBM 1013, IBM 1978,
IBM 7702).
• IBM System/360 computers equipped with 2701 Data Adapter Units or 2702 or
2703 Transmission Controls.
'
•

UNIVAC 1004 Card Processors equipped with a DLT 2 feature.

There are two basic models and a number of variations in the 281 series. The characteristics of each model (type of communications service and terminals, transmission speed,
and data set requirements) are presented in Table 1.

\

The associated computer can test for the presence of incoming data or for readiness of the
control to transmit data. The 281 can perform the same tests and interrupt the computer
program automatically. Data being transmitted and received by a Communication Control is
protected by a transmission-lapse check, by a character parity check, and by an optional
longitudinal parity check in some models. The failure of a transmission or parity check sets
a program-testable indicator.

/

C 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/68

6382:02
HONEYWELL 281

TABLE I: HONEYWELL TYPE 281 SINGLE-CHANNEL CONTROL UNITS
N_BaIId

Characteristic

281-'IB

2al-1A

Buffer slu
Transmission speed

8 bits
6.6 char/sec

8 bits
10 char/_

Transmission metbod
Transmission code (I)

Serial by bit
5-level Baudot;
7.5.-unlt

Serial by bit
B-level.USASCIJ;
11-unlt

8 bUs
6.0,6.6,7.5, or
10 char/sec
Serial by bit
5-1evel Baudot;
7.5-un1t

Transmission mode
Order of bit transmissloa
SynchonrtzaUon

Half-duplex
Low-order bit
first
Start/stop .

HaIf-cluplex
Low--order bit
first
Start/stop

Half-duplex
Low-order bit
first
Start/stop

Compatible remote termlnsl

Teletype Model 32

Teletype Modeis
33 aDd 35

Teletype Models
19 aDd 28

281-1E

281-ID

281-IC

8 bUs
10 char/sec

a bits
14.8 char/sec

SerIsl by bit
a-level USAScn;
IJ..un1t

Serial by bit
II-level mM
code; 9-u1t

Half-daplex
Low-order btl

first
Start/stop

HaIf-daplex
Low-order bit
first
Start/stop

Teletype Models
33 and 35

mM 1050 Data
CommunlcsUon
8y8fem

Reference (2)

6803

6804; 6805

6802

6804; 6805

6447

Compatible communication
facility

Western Union
Telex Service

Ben System TWX CE
(100 Speed) Service

Common-carrier
leased telegrapbgrade line

Bell System TWX CE
(100 I\>eed) Service

Compatible data set (3)

None required

Bell System Data
Phone Data Set
103A

None reqIllred

Ben System 'l'JIpe
1006 Data ChsIIIlel;
Western Union
Cl88SDData
Cluumel
Ben System Data Set
103F or Western
Union 180 Baud
Data Modem

Comments

Manual dialing

I

Dell System DataPhone Dats Set
103A

(1) See also th.. Reference entry In this column.
(2) This refers to the report where the specified remote termlnsl Is covered.
(3) In 80me cases. equivalent data sets can he used; check with your local communications consultant.

• 15

Description (Contd.)
With most models of the 281, each message character is stored in two core storage locations
of the associated computer system. With the 281-1 models using 5- or 6-level codes, each
character occupies one storage location. Unused bit positions are automatically zero filled.
The 281 Control Unit can transmit or receive in either of two modes: character or message'.
In the character mode, the transmission or reception of each message character must be
individually pl'ogrammed; i. e .• an interrupt sequence must be executed for each message
character. An interrupt sequence requires apprOximately 400 microseconds for an H-200
Processor and is proportionate for other models of the Series 200 line. In the character
mode, the computer's input-output channel is released after the transfer of each message
character. In the message mode, the input-output channel is not released until after the
entire data block has been transferred. The demand on the central processor in the message
mode is only the time required to transfer data between the 281 Control Unit and the processor (one or two core storage cycles per message character). An interrupt is not generated
in the message mode until the whole data block has been transferred.
For a brief outline of the characteristics of the Honeywell Series 200 family of computers, see
Paragraph 8381. 23 •

. 16

First Delivery: .

July 1964 •

• 17

Availability: .•.•

6 months •

•2

CONFIGURA TION
There are currently twenty-one different models of the Type 281 Control Unit, each designed
for a specific combination of communication facilities and remote terminals. The characteristics of each model are presented in Table I.
"
One or more Type 281 Control Units can be connected to a Honeywell Series 200 Central Processor via one input and one output trunk per 281.
Connections to standard communications facilities are also described in Table I, along with
compatible data sets if any are required.

8/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A.
..

~

4UfRB4C"

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6382:03
HONEYWELL 281

TABLE I: HONEYWELL TYPE 281 SINGLE-CHANNEL CONTROL UNITS (Contd.)
,-_._-_.

-

Voice-Band

Narrow - Band

Charactpristic
1---- - .--.---.--.. Bufft'r

2HI-K
-

281-IR (4)

281-1M

281-111

281-2A

8 bits
14. H char/~ec

8 hits
105 char/sec

8 bits
120 char/sec

H hith
12fl char/sec

Transmission method
fransmission Codl' (I)

Serial by hit
6-lt'vt'IIOM
cod.·; 9-unit

:-;~'n('hroni'/ation

Half-duplt·,
Low-oro ... lilt
first
Start/stop

Serial by bit
8-level
USASCn;
lO-unit
Half-dupll'x
Low-order bit
first
start/stop

S.·rial by bit
8-1l'vpl \1SASen
IO-unit

Transmi~!'>lt)n

Serial by bit
Any 5-, 6-, 7-,
or 8-level code;
IO-unit
lIalf-duplex
Low-order bit
first
start/stop

('oltlp:ltlble remote terminal

IBM 10;;11 Data

Teletype Telespeed
1050 Equipment;
Bell System Dataspeed Type 2
Service
6800

Honeywell Oats
station

Honeywell
VIP

IBM Synchronous
Transmit Receive
Terminals such as
7702 and 1013

6383

6384

6450; 6444

S 11'.1'

Transm iSM Ion speed

mode
()rci£"t' nf hit tl"ansmission

Communication

System

Half-duplex
Low-order bit
first
btart/stop

Relt'r"nce (2)

66·1~

Compatible communication
facility

Bell :-'yslPm Type
100r. nata Channel;
Wpstem Union
Class 0 nata
Channel

Public switched telephone network; commo....carrier
leased voice-band line.

Compatible data set (3)

nell SyslPm flat"
Set 10:;1', Western
Union JRO naud
Data M(),iPm

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C; Bell System Data Set 202D,
Western Union 1200 Baud nata Modem, or Weslt'rn \Jnion 2400
Baud Data Modem

8 bits
1200 or 1800
blts/sl'c
Serial by bit
mM 4-of-8
constant ratio code;
8-unit
Half-duplex
Low-order bit
first
Synchronous

--

Comments

(J I Sep also thp Hcferencp l'ntry in this column.
(~l This refers to the report whl're thp specifipd rpmote terminal Is covered.
(3) In some cases. equivalent data sets can Ill' used; check with your local communications consultant.
(4) The ~"I-IR can also Ill' used locall\' up to ;;0 «'et from the 281 Control Unit; the 28J-1S ts
equivalent to the -IR but, is used lor local oppratlon only at distances up to 200 feet from
the 2R 1 Control Vnit .

'\

/

.3

INPUT
All input to the 281 Control Unit is transferred from the associated Series 200 computer
under control of the eomputer program. Input to the computer can be from the console keyboard, punched cards, punched paper tape, magnetic tape, magnetic drum, or magnetic
strip devices.

\

,35

Message Configuration: ,

, 36

Operating Procedure

I

except with the 281-1 models, each message
is preceded by a start-of-message character;
if the message length is not fixed, the message
must contain an end-of-message character;
message length is dependent upon remote terminal equipment and core storage availability.

(1) Operator establishes connection manually by dialing or Signaling.
(2) The 281 is set to transmit or receive.
(3) The Initialize button is pressed and the data set is switched to data mode.

.4

OUTPUT
All output from the 281 Controi Unit is transferred to the associated Series 200 computer
under control of the computer program. Output from the computer can be printed copy,
punched cards, punched paper tape, magnetic tape, or magnetic disc.

".

•5

ERROR DETECTION" AND CORRECTION

. 51

Data Entry Errors:

\

/

no checking is performed on data transferred
from the associated computer system to the
281 Control Unit.
© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/68

6382:04

HONEYWELL 281

TABLE I: HONEYWELL TYPE 281 SINGLE-CHANNEL CONTROL UNITS (Contd.)
Characteristic

Voice-BIIDd (Contd.)
281-2M
281-2D

281-2B

281-2R(4)

Broad-Band
281-2F

8 bits
2000 or 2400
bits/sec
Serial by bit
Any 5-, 6-, 7-,
or 8-level code;
8-unlt
Half-duplex
Low-order bit
first
Syncbronous

8 bits
2000 or 2400
bits/sec
Serial by bit
IBM 4-of-8
constant ratio
code; 8-unit
Half-cmpleX
Low-order bit
first
Syncbronous

8 bits
2000 or 2400
bits/sec
Serlsl by bit
8-level USASCn

8 bits
2000 or 2400
bits/see
Serial by bit
8-level USASCn

8 bits
40,800 bits/sec
(5100 char/see)
Serial by bit
My 8-level code

Half-duplex
Low-order bit
first
Synchronous

Half-duplex
Low-order bit
first
Syncbronous

Half- or full-duplex
Low-order bit
first
Syncbronous

Compatible remote terminal

Remote Honeywell
Computers

IBM SyncbrODOII8
Transmit Receive
Terminals sucb as
7702 and 1013

HODeyweli Date
station

Honeywell
VIP

Other Honeywell
Series 200 computers; UNIVAC
1004 with DLT-2B

Reference (2)

6380; 6381; 8380
8381

6450; 6444

6383

6384

6382; 6860

Compatible communication
facility

Public switched telephone network; common-carrier leased voice-band line.

Common-carrier
leased broad-band
line (Series 8000
wideband Channel
Type 8800)

Compatible data set (3)

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 201A; Bell System Data Set 201B or
Westem Union 2400 Baud Data Modem.

Type 8801 Series
Terminal

Buffer size
Transmission speed
Transmission method
Transmission code (1)
Transmission mode
Order of bit transmission
Syncbronlzatlon

Comments

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Can transmit or
receive in
message mode only

See also the Reference entry in this column.

This refers to the report wbere the specllied remote terminal Is covered.
In some cases, equivalent data set can be used; cbeck with your local communications consultant.
The 281-2R can also be used locally up to 50 feet from the 281 Control Unit; the 281-2S Is equivalent
to the 2R but, is used for local operation only at distances up to 200 feet from the 281 Control Unit.

• 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking: . • . • , • .

Error indication: .•..
Correction procedure:
. 53

Data Recording Errors: ....•.•.••.

· 55

Line Malfunctions
Detection: .

no checking is performed on data transferred
from the 281 Control Unit to the computer
system.
testable indicator is set if no data is received
within a specified time.
under program control.

Action: ••.

.6

CONDITION INDICATORS: .

·7

DA TA TRANSMISSION

there are no condition indicators associated
with the 281 Control Unit.

.71

Basic Characteristics:

see Table I.

.72

Connection to Communications Lines:

see Table I.

· 73

Transmission Control
Call initiation: .•
Call reception:. • . • • • .

8/68

character and longitudinal parity checking is
available for some narrow-band and all voiceand broad-band models of the 281; there is no
extra cost for the character parity check option.
a testable indicator is set.
under control of computer program; usually
retransmission •

manual dialing or signaling.
capable of unattended operation.
AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6382:05
HONEYWEL.L. 281

II

Functional operations: ••••••.••••..

• 74

Multistation Operation: •....••.•.•.

•8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

in some models special characters in the
received data can cause message termination, an interrupt signal to be generated,
parity checking to be inhibited, etc.; in all
models, characters in incoming data can be
used to control operations by appropriate
programming •
no provisions other than the facilities offered
by programming of the associated computer
system; it would depend on the remote terminal's ability to respond to messages, and
would require program analysis of responses •

Logic
Cabinet*

Component:
Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weigth (POunds)

39
30
42
400

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
Phases

0.148
115
60
1

Temperatul'e range (OF)
Humidity range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

60 to 85
40 to 60
319

* The indicated dimensions are those of the Honeywell Series 200 Logic Cabinet,
which can accommodate four logic drawers. Each 281 Control Unit occupies one
logic drawer. Any number of logic cabinets can be incorporated in a Honeywell
Series 200 computer system .
.9

PRICE DATA
Component or Feature

Type 281 Single-Channel Communicatione Control Unit
Models -lA, -lB, -lC, -10, -IE,
-lH, -lK, -1M
Model-1R
Model-IS
Models -2A, -20, -2F
Models -2, -2M
Model-2R
Model-25
OptiOns
087 Long Check (longitudinal parity
check; not available on 281-1 models)

,

Monthly
Rental,*

Purchase
Price,

Monthly
Maintenance,

$

$

$

145

6750

22

190
205
215
175
230
235

8930
9620
10125
8100
10765
10995

30
32
34
27
36
36

50

2250

7

* Rates shown are for prime-shift use with a lease agreement of five years;
most rates are higher for lease periods of less than five years. Hourly rates
for extra-shift usage are approximately ten percent of prime-shift rates.
@

1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/68

A
AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
CDMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6383:01
HONEYWELL DATA STATION

'"
HONEYWELL DATA STATION

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

Honeywell Data Station .

Manufacturer:...................

Honeywell EDP Division
60 Walnut Street
Wellesley Hills, Mass. 02181

.13

Basic Function:

transmission and reception of data over a voiceband communications line with a Honeywell
Series 200 computer at up to 120 char/sec or at
250 or 300 char/sec; off-line data preparation
and recording; input can be punched cards.
optically coded cards. punched paper tape. or
keyboard; output can be paper tape or printed
copy .

. 14

Basic Components: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

see Table I.

.15

Description

12

A Honeywell Data Station consists of a group of input and/or output devices (see Table I) interconnected by a 288-1 or 288-3 Central Control Unit and is intended for use as a remote terminal for a Honeywell Series 200 computer system. The Data Station can also be used offline to perform data transcription functions such as listing punched cards, preparing punched
papE'r tape, etc. Communication between a Series 200 computer and a Data station must be
initiated by the remote computer.

)

Data transmission is in the half-duplex mode. The 288-1 Central Control Unit operates


101

110

P
Q
R
S
T
U

@

V
W

X

y

Z
[

-]
-"

(1) The eighth bit is an even parity bit.
Control Characters
SOH*
STX*

start of heading.
Start of text.

CR
CS·

Carriage return.
Control sample.

ETX
EOT

End of text.
End of transmission.

TEL*
BCA*

Telephone (operator signal).
Branch request signal.

ENQ*

Enquiry.

DAC*

Deactivate signal.

ACK*

Acknowledge.

NACK*

Negative acknowledge.

BELL*

Audible signal.

DPB*

Delay line buffer bypass.

LF

Line feed.

DEL

Delete.

* These characters are not on the Data Station keyboard.

8/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

111

DEL

A
AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6383:05
HONEYWELL DATA STATION

co

289-7 Punched Card Reader Input medium: . .
Input code: .. . .
Quantity of data:

standard 80-column punched cards.
standard Hollerith card code; see Table III.
1 to N characters per block, not including control characters; N is limited to 132 (including
control characters) if buffer is used; block
can be read from up to 15 cards.
Character set: ...
48 alphanumeric and special characters.
Rated input speed:
100 cards/min.
limited by block length, control messages, and
Effective speed: . .
speed of printer if used to record transmitted
data.
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
punched disc allows reading of selected fields;
cards are end-read; requires huffer option
088-1.
TABLE III: HONEYWELL DATA STATION PUNCHED CARD CODE
USASCII
Char

Card
Code

(3)

Space

blank

Key
Punch
Chat" (I)

USASCn
Char

Space

0
1
2
3
<1
5
6
7
8
9

!

(2)
(2)

,.

#
$

(2)

11-8-3

~,

(2)
(2)

&

,

(
)

•

t

,

/

$
(2)

0-8-4
12-8-4
11-8-4
12

',:,[()

nil)

•

&[-+')

0-8-3

,

11
12-8-3
0-1

-

Card
Code

(3)

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

:
;

<

-

8-3

>

/

?

Key
Punch
Char (1)

USASCn
Char

0
J
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
@[:)
(2)
(2)

\
A

(3)

B

C
D

E

F
G
H

I
J

K
L

M
N
0

#1'1
(2)
(2)

Card
Code

Key
Punch
Char (1)

Card
Code

Key
Punch
Char (1)

11-7
11-8
11-9

P

C

P
Q
R
S

D
E

T
U

F

"

0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6
0-7

(2)

12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-R
12-9
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6

(1) Key punch characters are for a standard key punch keyboard arrangement.
appear in place of the corresponding key punch character in a FORTRAN

USASCII
Char

A
B

G
II
I
J
K

L

M
N
0

(3)

W

X

y
Z
(

-I
1\

-

0-2

O-Ii

0-9

,~

R
S
T
U
\'
\\
X

Y
Z
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)

Characters in brackets (e. g. , [+ J)

(2) There are no corresponding characters in a standard or FORTRAN keyboard arrangement.
(3) The card codes are translated into the corresponding USASCn transmission codes (see Table II),

289-8 Optical Bar Code Reader Input medium:
Input code: ..
\

optically-coded card or paper documents, 5 to 8
inches long and 3.5 inches wide.
5-level bar code including parity (each character
consists of 5 vertical printed bars per column,
arranged horizontally in a yes-or-no position);
2-level mark-sense code which allows operator
to enter up to four characters of data: see Table

IV.
Quantity of data:. .
Character set: . . .
Rated input speed:
Effective speed:
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
)

up to 80 characters per block (read from up to
seven documents).
digits 0 through 9 for bar code; letters D through
G for mark-sense code.
50 char/sec for bar coded documents; 25 char/sec
for mark-sense coded documents.
limited by block length, control messages and
speed of printer if used to record transmitted
data.
documents are end-read; bar code can be printed
on Honeywell high-speed printers or lithographed;
mark-sense characters must be marked with a
number 2 black lead pencil or equivalent; marksense coding can follow bar coding on the same
document; requires buffer option 088-1.

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/68

6383:06
HONEYWELL DATA STATION

TABLE IV: HONEYWELL DATA STATION OPTICAL BAR CODE
READER (OBCR) DATA CODES
OBCR
Character

Code

OBCR Bit
Configuration
P 4 3 2 1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Bar
Code

0

Space
(2)
(3)
(4)

0
0
1 0
0 0
1 0
0
0

0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1

1
2
3
4
5

1 0
1 1

6
7
8
9

1 0 1
0 1
1 0
1 1 0
1 1 0

0 0
0 1
1 0

0
1
1
1

1 1

Space

0 0
0 1
1 0

=

0
0

0

1
1 1
0 1
0 1

(5)

D
E
F
G

MarkSense
Code

U8ASCn
Character
Generated (1)

-

0

<
>
?

0 0
0 1
1 0

1 1

D
E
F
G

(1) See Table II for USASCII Transmission code.

(2) Start or end of information.
(3) Unspecified,
(4) Mark-sense code follows.
(5)

. 32

Parity or dual-bit error •

Manual Input
Keyboard (289-2A, 289-2, or 289-3) Method of entry:
. . . . . . . . . .
Quantity of data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character set:

...

Comments:

8/68

48-key keyboard.
1 to N characters per block, not including control
characters; N is limited to 132 (including control
characters) if buffer is used.
65 characters, including upper-case alphabetics,
numerics, 24 specials, and 5 control characters.
a keyboard is required for remote operation.

. 33

Fixed Input:

no provision .

. 34

Transaction Code Input:

no provision .

.35

Message Configuration:

3 to N characters per block including start-of-text
character, data or control characters, end-ofblock or end-of-transmission character, and
longitudinal check character. When the buffer is
used, N is limited to 132 characters. All control characters are automatically generated by
the Control Unit for all input devices except
the keyboard. The longitudinal check character
is automatically calculated and inserted for all
inputs by the Control Unit.

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

AB

..

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6383:07
HONEYWELL DATA STATION

AUERBACH

· 36

Operating Procedure
• Turn on Data Station, select transmission mode (local, remote), and load
devices (cards in reader, paper in printer, etc.).
• Insert the program disc (for reading selected punched card fields) and set
"Cards per Block" and "Documents per Block" switches if necessary.
• In the local mode, press Master Clear Switch, activate desired devices, select
single block or continuous read, set Buffer Bypass switch if desired, and press
Run button to start.
• In remote mode, insure that the data set is ready, and wait for computer to
activate Data Station.
Detected errors which require manual intervention can be flagged and corrected according to
preset procedures. If the buffer is overloaded in remote mode, the overflow information is
lost. The block must be retransmitted after removing the cause of the overflow .

. 37

Entry of Time and Date: . . . . . . . . "...

.4

OUTPUT

· 41

Output to Punched Tape
289-5 Paper Tape Punch Tape size: . . . . . . . . . .
Tape code: . . . . . . . " ..
Rated punching speed: . . .
Effective speed: ..

· 44

no provisions .

fully punched, I-inch paper tape.
8-1evel USASCII code; see Table III.
120 char/sec.
limited by block length, control messages, and
speed of printer if used to record transmitted
data.
none.
contains a one-character buffer.

Format control: .
Comments: ....
Output to Printer
289-2 or 289-3 Page Printer and Keyboard Output medium: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
friction-fed or phi-fed, continuous or fanfold
forms 8.5 inches wide; maximum printed line
length is 72 characters.
Character set: . . . . . . .
59 characters, including upper-case alphabetics,
numerics, and 24 specials; see Table II.
Rated printing speed 289-2: . . . . . . . .
10 char/sec.
289-3: . . . . . .
40 char/sec.
Effective speed: ..
limited by block length, control messages, and
functional operations, such as line feed and
carriage return.
Format control: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
via special control codes in received data; operations include space, line feed, and carriage return; there is no backspace or horizontal tab.
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . .
asynchronous; printing is performed by paired
hammers and rotating print drum.

.

.~.

289-9 Remote Line Printer Output medium: . . . . . . . . .

Character set: . . . . . . . .
Rated priIiting speed: . . .
Effective speed: . . .

-. ...

Format control: . . .
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' .. .

printed contiIluous forms from 4 to 20 inches
wide; maximum printed line length is 120
characters; optional line length is 132 characters.
63 characters, including upper-case alphabetics,
numerics, and 27 specials. See Table II.
400 lines per minute.
limited by block length, control messages, and
transmission speed.
via special control codes in received data;
operations include horizontal tab, vertical tab,
and head-of-form.
the 289-9 Printer can only be used when operating
with the 288-3 Central Control Unit.

C 1968 Al)ERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH

I~fo.

Inc.

8/68

6383:08
HONEYWELL DATA STATION

.5
.51

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION
Data Entry Errors
Optical Bar Code Reader Type of checking: . . . . . . . .
Error indication:
Correcti
&.
+

•,
(

Cr _

I

J:(
c
;

I
%

-

?
STX
ETX
DCI
DC2

01100011
11100100
01100101
01100110
11100111
11101000
01101001
01110010
11110011
01110100
11110101
11110110
01110111
01 1 1 1000
11111001
01000001
01000010
11000011
01000100
11000101
11000110
01000111
01001000
11001001
11000000
01001101
01101010
11101011
11101100
01101101
01101110
11101111
11110000
01110001
11001010
01001011
11001100
01100000
01001110
11001111
01010000
11111010
01111011
11111100
01111101
01111110
.11111111
01011010
11011011
01011100
11011101
11011110
01011111
10000010
00000011
00010010
00010010

001101111
100000010
000000011
000010001
000010010

• When transmitting data from a K-910 Keytape terminal to a K-710 Keytape
terminal. the low order six bits contain data. bits 7 and 8 are transmitted
as ones and' btt 9. parity .
• " Symbols that are unique to the K-910 Keytape terminal are presented to the
right of the first entry. all other symbols are common to both the K-710
and K-910 Keytape terminals.

C 1968

AUERBA~H

Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

8/68

6385:08

HONEYWELL
KEYTAPE
messages are transmitted in fixed-length records
as specified by program; record size can be
from one to 80 characters. or up to 120 characters optionally; the text portion of each record
is preceded by an STX character and an Odd/
Even character and terminated by an ETX character and a longitudinal parity character .

.35

Message Configuration: • . . • . • • . . . . .

. 36

Operating Procedure
Before a message is transmitted. predetermined programs and time of transmission should
be established between the communicating terminals. Programs can not be loaded from tape
and. therefore. must be entered manually from the keyboard.
(1) Load program into memory.
(2) Mount tape reel.
(3)· Set control switches on keyboard.
(4) Establish connection by dialing or manually signaling.

. 37

(5) Depress Data key on data set .
Entry of Time and Date: . . . . . . . . • .. no provision .

.4

OUTPUT

.43

Output to Magnetic Tape
K-700 Series Keytape magnetic tape dl'ive Tape size: . . . . . . • • • . . • . . . . . . . . O. 5-inch magnetic tape recorded at 556 bitS/inch;
200 or 800 bit/inch densities are optional; compatible with IBM 729 Series tape format.
Tape code: . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . 6-bit BCD (even parity) or binary (odd parity); see
Table n.
Rated output speed:. • . • . . . • . . . . . . 13,344 char/sec (556 bitS/inch). 4,800 char/sec
(200 bits/inch), or 19,200 char/sec (800 bits/
inch).
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . limited by block length and transmission speed.
Format control: . . . • • • . . . • . . . . . . extensive tape format control is provided by stored
program; see Paragraph . 15 for description.
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . records are recorded in fixed length format; an
80-character record is standard; with options,
records can be 120 characters in length.
K-900 Series Keytape magnetic tape drive Tape size:. . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . .. O. 5-inch magnetic tape recorded at 800 bits/inch;
compatible with IBM 2400 Series tape format.
Tape code: .•..•••....•...••.. 8-level EBCDIC code plus odd parity; see Table n.
Rated output speed:. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 19,200 char/sec.
Effective speed: . . • • . . . . . . . . . . .. limited by block length and transmission speed.
Format control: . . . • . . . . • . . . . . .. extensive tape format control is provided by stored
program; see Paragraph .15 for description.
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. records are recorded in fixed length format; an
80-character record is standard; with options,
records can be 90, 100. 110, or 120 characters
in length .

. 44

Output to Printer
Output medium: . . . . . . • • . . . . . • . .. pin-fed fanfold forms up to 20 inches wide.
Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 64 characters including alphabetic, numeric, and
28 special symbols; see Table n.
Rated printing speed: ..• • . . • . . • . .. 300 lines/minute.
Effective speed: . . . . . . • . . • . • . . • •. limited by line spacing, number of characters per
line. and transmission speed.
(Contd.)

8/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
AUERBACH IllPORTS

6385:09

HONEYWELL
KEYTAPE

•

. 44

OUtput to Printer (Contd.)
Format control: . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . ..
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

.5
.51

controlled by horizontal and vertical tab function
codes.
horizontal spacing is 120 or 132 (optional) chari
line; vertical spacing is 6 or 8 lines/inch; printer
can operate in either of two selectible modes:
List mode lists data as received; Format ·Control
mode allows format operations to be performed;
data can be received from remote terminal or
transcribed from mangetic tape via the core buffer;
zero suppression is optional and requires the Left
Zero option .

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION
Data Entry Errors
Type of checking: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

· 52

· 53

· 55

.6

character parity and longitudinal parity are checked
when each record is read from magnetic tape.
Error indication: . . . . . • . . . . . . . . .. audible alarm sounds; lamp is lighted.
Correction procedure:. . . . • • . . • . . .. tape is automatically back-spaced and record is reread; operator intervention is required when an
error is detected after the eighth consecutive reread operation.
Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking: . . . . . . . • . . • .
character parity and longitudinal parity.
Error indication: . • . . . • . . . . • . . . . . indicator lamp is lighted; reverse-channel signal is
interrupted for 200 milliseconds.
Correction procedure:. . . . . . . • . • . . . automatic retransmission of record received in
error up to two consecutive times; the third consecutive error halts transmission. audible alarm
is sounded. lamp is lighted. and operator intervention is required.
.
Data Recording Errors
Type of checking: . . . . . • . . . . . . • . .•

each record is re-read and checked bit for bit with
. the buffer contents; character and longitudinal
, parity are also checked.
Error indication: • • . . . . . . • . . . . . .. tape halts. lamp is lighted. and audible alarm is
sounded.
Correction procedure:. . . . • . . . . • • .. tape is automatically backspaced and data is rewritten up to eight times; operator intervention is
required when error occurs after eighth consecutive re-write operation.
Line Malfunctions
Detection: . . . . • . • . . . . . • • . . . . . .. absence of signal on reverse channel for 30 seconds.
Action: . • • . •. • . . . . . . . • . .. ; . . .. operation halts. unit disconnects. and audible alarm
sounds .
CONDITION INDICATORS
A back-lighted display panel. consisting of 18 to 20 panel lamps. numerically displays (1) the
active memory position. (2) the data stored in the active memory position. or (3) the contents
of the controlling program memory for that poSition as determined by the Memory Inquiry switch
located to the left of the display panel. Numeric digits are displayed directly as numeric digits.
Alpha or special characters are displayed as two numbers; a decoding chart just above the display defines the displayed alpha or special characters.
A comprehensive array of indicator lamps provides error status, transmission status, and
verification status displays. An audible alarm is included in conjunction with the error status
iildicators.

o

1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/68

6385: 10

HONEYWELL
KEYTAPE
.7

DATA TRANSMISSION

. 7l

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed: . • • • • . • • •.

• 72

1200 bits/sec over the public telephone network;
1800 bits/sec over a leased voice-band line.
Transmission method:. . • • • . . • . • . •• serial by bit.
,
Transmission code: ••• • . • • . • • • . •. 6-level BCD plus control and parity bits (K-710);
8-level EBCDIC plus parity (K-910); both transmission codes include even parity and start stop bits producing a total of 10 bits/char (X-7l0)
or 11 bits/char (X-910).
Transmission mode: . • . . . • . . . • • . •. half-duplex.
Order of bit transmission: . . • . . . • . .. low-order data bit (bl) first.
Synchronization:. . • • . • . . . . . • • . . .. asynchronous; a single start and stop bit append'
each transmitted character •
Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line or Service
Public telephone network operating
at the following speed:
1200 bits/sec: . . • . . • . . . . . . • . ..
Common-carrier leased voice-band
line operating at the following speed:
1800 bits/sec: . • . . . . . • . • . . . . ..

• 73

Data Set *

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C.

Bell System Data Set 202D or Western Union 1800
Baud Data Modem •

Transmission Control
Call initiation: .•.•••... '. . . . . . • •.
Call reception:. . . . . . . • . • . . . . • . ..

• 74

manual dialing or signaling.
operator must establish voice communication and
then switch to data mode.
Functional operations:. . . • . . . . . . . .. under control of stored program; see Paragraph
. 15 for description .
Multistation Operation: . • . • • . . . . • •. no provision .

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component

KEYTAPE
Unit (1)

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

600

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
Phases

0.72
120
60
1

Temperature Range ('F)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

50
18
43

50 to 90
20 to 80
2.300

(1) Dimensions do not include auxiliary devices.
Reading table holds keyboard and is 30 inches
wide. 19 inches deep and 27 inches high.

*

8/68

In some cases. equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant. Bell System 202C2 and 202D2 Data Sets provide reversechannel capability. Bell System 201A and 201B Data Sets and Western Union Data Sets
do not provide reverse-channel capability. except through the use of a full-duplex line.
(Contd.)
AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

6385: t t

AUEReACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS

MlER8ACH

HONEYWELL
KEYTAPE

R£PORTS

•
•9

PRICE DATA

Component or Feature
Keytape Model K-710
Keytape Model K-910

Monthly
Rental, (1)
$

Purchase
Price,
$

Monthly
Maintenance,
$

245
270

11,500
12,500

35.00
38.00

15
5
10
15
20

750
250
500
750
1,000

2.00
0.75
1.50
2.00
2.50

5
NC
5

250
NC
250

0.75
NC
0.75

Options: (2)
120-character record length (3)
90-character record length (4)
100-character record length (4)
1l0-character record length (4)
120-character record length (4)
800 bpi recording (3)
200 bpi recording (3)
Right justification
NC -

No Charge.

(1) Based on a one year lease.
(2) A one-time charge of $25 is applied for field installation of each option.
(3) K-700 Series option.
(4) K-900 Series option.

o

1968 AUERBApH Corporation and AUERBACH Info.

:;->;';

8/68

A

AUERIIACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS

2Sl

6440:01
IBM 65/66

AUEll8ACH REPORTS

•

IBM 65/66 DATA TRANSCEIVERS
.1

GENERAL

· 11

Identity:.......................

IBM 65 Data Transceiver;
mM 66 Data Transceiver.

· 12

Manufacturer:...................

International Business Machines Corporation
112 East Post Road
White Plains, New York.

.13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • ..

card-to-card transmission of punched-card
data over telephone or telegraph communications facUities.

· 14

Basic Components
Name: ....... "," .................................. ..

Model number:
Basic function: •••.••••••..••• •••
Nam.e: .............................................. ..

Model number:
Basic function: .................................. .

Data Transceiver.
66.
bidirectional punched-card data transmission,
with printing on card at receiver.

Name: .............................................. ..

Telegraph Signal Unit.

Model number:
Basic function: .................................. ..

67.

Name: .............................................. ..

Model number:
Basic function: ..•••.•.••...... ••
· 15

Data Transceiver.
65.
bidirectional punched-card data transmission.

provides transmission control when using
telegraph-grade lines.
Telephone Signal Unit.
68.
provides transmission control when using
voice-grade lines.

Description:
The IBM 65 or 66 Data Transceiver can transmit data from punched cards or receive transmitted data and punch it into standard 80-column cards. The 66 can also print the data at
the top of the corresponding card columns. The 65 and 66 Data Transceivers are based on
the IBM 24 Keypunch and 26 Printing Keypunch, respectively. but cannot be used off-line to
prepare punched cards. The format of the transmitted data or punched data is controlled by
a program card which is mounted on a drum synchronized with the movement of the card
. being read or punched. Format control is limited to fixed or X-skipping, variable end-ofcard, suppression of the blank-column check, and duplication of data punched into the previous card.
The 65/66 Data Transceiver can be connected to a variety of communications facilities, including the public switched telephone network, common-carrier leased voice-grade lines,
the TWX network, Western Union Class D service, and common-carrier leased telegraphgrade lines.
The rate of data transmission depends on the particular communications facUity and can
range from 3 fully-punched cards per minute over 60-speed (45 bits per second) telegraph
lines to ll-fully punched cards per minute over voice-grade lines.
Checking facUities include character validity checks on the data read from the cards and the
data received by the terminal. The transmission code is a 4-of-8 constant-ratio code; which

@ 1965 AUERBA~H Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

10/65

6440:02
IBM 65/66

. 15

Description (Contd.)
is different from the code used by IBM devices such as the 1013, 7702, 7710, or 7711. Normally, when an error is detected, the device halts and manual intervention is necessary for a
restart. If the optional Successive-Card Checking feature is installed, a device halt does not
occur until three successive card records have been received in error. Cards punched from
data received in error are offset in the stacker of the receiver; the corresponding cards at
the transmitter are also offset. Card records passing all checks are marked by a special
punch in the row 12 position of column 81.
Another optional feature permits up to four independent pairs of Data Transceivers to be operated over a single voice-band line.
The IBM 65/66 Data Transceivers are no longer in production and are available on a rental
basis only .

. 16

First Delivery: . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

?

.17

Availability: . . . . . . .

these units are no longer in production;
availability depends on returns .

.2

CONFIGURATION
An IBM 65 or 66 Data Transceiver Terminal consists of either a 65 or a 66 Data Transceiver
and either a 67 Tel.3graph Signal Unit or a 68 Telephone Signal Unit. The connection to various
communications facilities is described in Paragraph. 72 .

.3

INPUT

.31

Prepared Input
Input medium: ..•.•.•...•..

Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated input speed: . • . . • . • . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed: . . . • . • • . • • • . . • . . • .

standard IBM SO-column cards
(upper corner cuts only).
standard Hollerith.
1 to 80 char/card; multiple cards can be
transmitted automatically.
full alphanumeric plus specials.
16 columns/sec (65); 14 columns/sec (66).
3 to 11 fully-punched cards/min, depending
on communications facility .. The 66 is
limited to 10 fully-punched cards/min. The
effective speed also depends on the number of
columns of data transmitted or punched.

• 32

Manual Input: .

no provision.

. 33

Fixed Input: .•

no direct provision; however, under control
of the program card at the receiving terminal,
specified data can be duplicated from previous
card .

. 34

Transaction Code Input:. . • . . • . . . . . ..

no provision .

. 35

Message Configuration:

1 to 80 characters per card, under control of
the program card. Control signals and idle
characters are supplied automatically or
manually by operator.

Input code: . • . . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . •
Quantity of data: . . . • . . • . • . . . . . . . .

...•........

(Contd. )
10/65

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

6440:03

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS

~

AUERBACH

IBM 65/66

REPORTS

•
• 36

Operating Procedure
(1)

Establish connection by telephone, teleprinter message, or by schedule.

(2)

Sequentially set receive and transmit signal-level switches.

(3)

Insert program card on program drum at each location.

(4)

Place cards in feed hopper.

(5)

Receiver operator feeds 3 blank cards into position.

(6)

Receiver operator presses Start key.

(7)

Transmitter operator feeds 3 cards into position.

(8)

Start light goes on at receiver and transmitter.

(9)

Transmitter operator presses Start key to begin transmission.

(10)

After last card has been transmitted, lamps and buzzers signal operators to
press appropriate keys and buttons to end transmission.

.37

Entry of Time and Date:

•4

OUTPUT

· 42

Output to Punched Cards
Card type and size: .••..•..... .•.
Card code: • . . • . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . .
Rated punching speed: ...•.•....•.
Effective speed: . . • • . • . . . . • • • . .••
Fonnat control: . . . . • . . • . . . . • . . • .
Comments: • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . •

·5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

.51

Data Entry Errors
. Type of Checking: .•.•.••.•.•....

Error indication: .•.•••.•••• ' .•..•
Correction Procedure: ••••.•.••••.
• 52

no provision•

standard mM 80-column (upper
corner cuts only).·
standard Hollerith.
16 columns/sec (65); 14 columns/sec (66).
3 to 11 fully-punched cards/min, depending
on communications facility. The 66 is
limited to 10 fully-punched cards/min .
. program card.
Model 66 can interpret and print each
character over the corresponding card column.

character validity and various checks on
functional operations such as sldpping or
feeding.
machine halt at end of card, light, and buzzer.
If all checks are passed, a punch is placed in
the 12 row of column 81.
press Release key, refeed last three cards,
press Start key.

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checldng: .•••.••.••.••••
Error indication: • • • . . • • • . • • • • . ••
Correction procedure: .•••••...•.•

character validity.
same as .51, above.
same as .51, above.

@1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

10/65

6440:04
IBM 65/66

· 52

Data Transmission Errors (Contd.)
Comments: . . . . . . . . . • . • . . • . • . . •.

with the Successive-Card Checking feature. a

machine halt occurs only after three successive
cards have been received in error; cards punched
from erroneously-received data are offset at
both the transmitting and receiving terminal.
• 53

Data Recording Errors
Type of checldng:

..•••.••.••..•••

Error indication: . . • . . . . . • • • . . . • ..
Correction procedure: ••.•..•••.•••

failure to .punch. to sldp or feed properly. or to
punch the proper number of characters; timing
checks such as receiving data while sldpping.
sl'le. 51. above.
see. 51. above •

• 55

Line Malfunctions: • • . . • • . • . . . • . • •.

no checldng provisions •

•6

CONDITION INDICA TORS

Input device available: ••.•••.•••••.
Input device busy: .•..•....•..•.••
Remote receiver ready: .•.•.•......
Remote receiver busy: . . . . • . . . • • • .•
Power on: . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • .
Improper data entry: . . . . • . . . . . . . • .
Transmission error: . . . . . . . . . . . • . •
Recording error: . . • . . . . . . • . . • . • ••
•7

DATA TRANSMISSION

• '11

Basic Characteristics

none.
lamp.
lamp.
none.
lamp.
lamp. buzzer, machine halt.
lamp, buzzer. machine halt.
lamp, buzzer, machine halt•

Rated transmission speed:. . . . . . . . . . . depends on communications facility; separate
removable speed selector modules are available for each speed capability.
Transmission method: . . • . . . . . . . . . . se rial by bit.
Transmission code: .•....•.•...•.. 4-of-8 Transceiver code; see the code table
in the report on the mM 7740 Communication
Control System, Paragraph 8440.24.
Transmission mode: . . . . . • . . . . . . . • . half-duplex.
Order of bit transmission: ...•••.•... ?
Synchronization: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . start and stop bits are transmitted with each
character .
• 72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set*

Common-carrier leased
telegraph-grade lines
(up to 73 bits/sec): . • . . • . • • . • • • • ••

none required.

Common-carrier leased
narrow-band Data Channels
(up to 75 bits/sec): • . . . . • . • . • • . • •.

*

Bell System Data Set l03F or Western Union
75 Baud Data Modem.

In some cases. equivalent data sets can be used: see your local common-carrier
communications consultant.

(Contd. )
10/65

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
8
..

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6440: 05
IBM 65/66

Communications Line

Data Set*

Bell System Schedule 3A
Data Channel (up to 150 bits/sec): . . . .
Western Union Class D
Data Channel (up to 180 bits/sec): ..•.
Common-carrier leased
voiceband line: .' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Public switched telephone
network: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 73

Bell System Data Set 103F
Western Union 180 Baud Data Modem
Bell System Data Set 103F or Western Union
180 Baud Data Modem
Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 103A

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Call reception:. '.' . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote functional operations: •.•....•

manual dialing or signaling.
operator must establish connection.
none .

. 74

Multistation Operation: . . . • • . • . . • . .

no provision •

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model 65
Data
Transceiver

Component
Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

31
29
39
290

Power (kw)
Voltage

0.85
115 or
208/230
60
1

Frequency (Hz)
Phases
Temperature Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)
.9

Model 66
Data
Transceiver

Model 67/68
Signal Units

31
29
39
275

19
27
30
180

0.85
115 or
208/230
60
1

50-90
30-65
2,059

50-90
30-65
1,958

**
**

-

--

PRICE DATA
Component or Feature
65
66
67
68

Card Unit
Printing Card Unit
Telegraph Signal Unit
Telephone Signal Unit

Digital Data Set Feature
Successive-Card Checking
Feature

Monthly
Rental
$

Purchase
Price,
$

87
107
82
82

No longer in
production;
not possible
to purchase

20
18

* In some cases,

equivalent data sets can be used; see Sections 4620 and 4640
for a current list of modems available from independent manufacturers of
telephone equipment.

** Included in 65/66
© 1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc.

Transceivers
5/70

A
~

,.

AUERBACH

6444:01

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

IBM 1013

IBM 1013 CARD TRANSMISSION TERMINAL
.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:....................... 1013 Card Transmission Terminal .

. 12

Manufacturer:................... International Business Machines Corporation
Data Processing Division
112 East Post Road
White Plains, New York.

.13

Basic Function: . . . . .

. 15

Description

transmits data from punched cards; receives
and punches data into punched cards .

The IBM 1013 Card Transmission Terminal is a punched card terminal capable of sending
or receiving data at speeds up to 300 characters per second. It transmits data from punched
cards, using a fixed or variable program, and punches cards from received data in a fixed
or variable format (editing only; no data rearrangements). The IBM 1013 operates over the
public switched telephone network or common-carrier leased voice-grade lines, using the
appropriate common-carrier data set, or over any equivalent channel with input-output
connections conforming to the Electronic Industries Association Standard RS 232.
The 1013 is one of the IBM STR (Synchronous Transmit-Receive) terminal units and can
communicate with other members of the STR group when set to compatible data rates.
The terminals with which a 1013 can communicate include:
•

Another 1013.

•

An IBM 7701 or 7702 Magnetic Tape Transmission Terminal.

•

An IBM 7740 Communication Control System.

•

An IBM 1973 Data Transmission Terminal.

•

An IBM 1978 Print Read Punch Terminal.

•

An IBM 7750 Programmed Transmission Control.

•

An IBM 7711 Data Communication Unit.

•

An IBM System/360 Data Processing System via a 2701 Data
Adapter Unit.

•

An IBM 1401, 1440, or 1460 Data Processing System via
a 1009 or 7710 Data Transmission Unit.

The 1013 transmits and receives data in a half-duplex mode. If full-duplex facilities are
used, data transmission is still half-duplex, but synchronization can be maintained in both
directions at the same time. This reduces the turnaround time when exchanging control
signals.
The 1013 can operate in any of five modes, selected by the operator.
The Program Entry mode allows the operator to enter the data from four program cards
into reserved areas of buffer storage. The program cards contain instructions for
controlling the format of the Variable-Program Transmit or Receive mode. Fixed data,
if any, is also included in the program cards.
In the Fixed Transmit mode, 80 characters of data are transmitted from each card.
@1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

10/65

6444:02
IBM 1013

.15

Description (Contd.)
In the Fixed Receive mode, the received data is expected to be in BO-character records and
each record is punched into one card.

The Variable-Program Transmit mode allows a data block of up to 329 characters to be
transmitted as one record. The record can consist of from one to seven subrecords, each
in the same format. A subrecord consists of up to 80 characters read from a card and up
to 47 characters of fixed data previously loaded into the 1013 with the program cards. Some
of the control functions provided by the control instructions include fixed or X-skipping,
suspension of the blank-column check, variable end-of-card location, deletion of data read
from the cards, insertion of fixed data into the transmitted data, and various combinations
of these functions.
In the Variable-Program Receive mode, the format of the card punched is controlled by the

receiving terminal in the same manner as in the Variable-Program Transmit mode. Up to
seven cards can be punched from one received record, depending on the format of the
transmitted data. In general, one card is punched for each transmitted card record.
Additional fixed data can be inserted into the punched card from the data read from the
program cards at the receiving terminal.
The transmission code is the 4-of-8 constant ratio code used by other IBM data communications equipment (but not the IBM 65/66 Data Transceivers). Checking facilities include
validity checks on the character codes read from the card and received as data. Detected
errors result in up to two retransmissions of the entire record. If an error still persists,
manual intervention is required.
. 16

First Delivery: .

fir st quarter, 1963.

.17

Availability: ...

?

.2

CONFIGURATION
The 1013 consists of a 1, OOO-column-per-second card reader, a 160-column-per-second
card punch, buffer storage, electronic control circuits, and an operator's console.Connections to various communication facilities are described in Paragraph. 72 .

.3

INPUT

.31

Prepared Input
Input medium: . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • . .
Input code: . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . • • . • .
Quantity of data Fixed operation: . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . .
Variable operation: . . . . • . • . . • . . . •
Character set:. • . . . • • • . . • . • • • . • . .
Rated input speed: . • . . . . . . . • • • . . . .
Effective speed: • . . . . . • • . . . • . . • • • .

• 33

SO characters read from a card.
1 to 80 characters read from a card.
56- characters, consisting of alphanumerics and
specials; sec Table I.
1,000 columns/sec.
apprOximately 40 to over 400 cards per minute.
depending on grade of transmission line used,
nunlber of characters per card, transmission
modc (full-duplex or half-duplex) and the
receiving terminal .

Fixed Input Fixed operation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable operation: . . . • • • • . . . . . . . . •

10/65

standard IDM SO-column punched cards.
standard Hollerith card code; see Table I.

no provision.
1 to 47 characters per card transmission; fixed
data is stored in the buffer area prior to initiating transmission.
(Contd. )

AUERBACH Data Communicatrons Reports

A

AU[IIIIACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS

~

AU[RBACH

6444:03
IBM 1013

R[PORTS

•
TABLE I: IBM 1013 DATA CODES
Printed
Symbol

Card
Code

Intennedlaloo
Code

0

-

-0

2

lR
2R
12

0
1

1
2
3
4
5

3
4
5

6

6

7
8
9
A

7
B
9
12-1
12-2
12-3
. 12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-11
12-9
II-I
11-2
11-3
11-4

8
C

0

~
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
I'

II-S
11-6
11-7
11-11

Q

R

11-9

S

0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6
0-7
o-B
0-9
0-1
3-11
12-3-B
11-3-B
0-3-8
4-B
12-4-B
11:'''-8

T
U
V
W
X
Y

Z

,I
S

@
tl

•
'Ib
&
Note ~ !?)&

Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note

t

I (I) 2 ..2 ,.,
2 A
2 ....
2 ....

Substitute
Characte<

11-+-8

12

II

-.4R
14
24
124
8R
IB
IRN
2RN
12N
.caN
14N
2..N
124N
eRN
IBN
IRX
2RX
12X
4RX
14X
2..X
12..X
eRX
lBX
2RO
120
.ca0
140
240
1240
IRO
180
IRO
128
12BN
12BX
1280

48R
48RN
48RX

_0
N
X

12-0
11-0
0-2-8
12-7-8
11-7-8
0-7-8
0-5-11

28R0
1248RN
124BRX
1248R0
I4BO

5-8

14

~~

4of8
Code
2480
2IRN
10XN
20XN
12RN
40XN
14RN
24N
124
80XN
18RN
IROX
2ROX
120X
40X
I..OX
2..0X
124N
eROX
IIOX
IRXN
2RXN
12xN
4XN
I..XN
2..XN
124X
SRXN
18XN
2RON
120N
40N
' ..ON
240N
1240
IRON
lION
IRON
12IR
12BN
12ax
1280
48RN
40X
4X",

;::
24X
2UUX
28XN
2BON
14N
14X
I4BO
2IRX
124

Note 1 Plus zero and minus zero print as ? and J an
tI!e 1407.

MarX,...

Note 2 "card MarX .... GIOUp
Delta A.
Segment MarX...... Ward Separatar... can be
printed on any 1403 ar 1404 wilh the expanded
character set. They are standard on the 1407.

t

The substitute character. which is used in the
IBM 7701 Magnetic Tape Transmlaion Terminal.
can be racei ..... and punched but nat transmitted by the IBM 1013. Punching the substitute character code camblnation stops the
1013. ancIsignals the aperatar.

Reprinted from IBM 1013 Card Transmission Terminal. p. 7. Form A21-1068. published by IBM.

© 1965

AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

10/65

6444:04
IBM 1013

• 34

Transaction Code Input: ••••••••••••

• 35

Message Configuration
Fixed operation: ••.••••..••••••••
Variable operation: ••••••.••••••.•

• 36

no provision•

each transmission consists of 80 data characters
and control codes which are automatically inserted.
up to 329 characters per transmission, consisting of from 1 to 7 card records (each in the
same format), fixed data for each card record,
and control codes.

Operating Procedure
(1)

Dial receiving station or otherwise establish connection; check that data set is ready
for transmission; check that 1013's are synchronized and Ready light is on; check other
lights.

(2)

Select fixed or variable program (one 80-column card per record, or operation under
1013 program control).

(3)

Load data cards and press Start key.

A special key, TEL, can be used to signal the remote operator. This is usually used to indicate totheremote operator that voice communication is desired.
• 37

Entry of Time and Date:

.4

OUTPUT

• 42

Output to Punched Cards

no provision •

, Card type and size': •••••.••
Card code: •
Rated punching speed: ••
Effective speed: •..•.••••••
0

•

•

••

•••••••••••••••

0

0

••

0

Format control Fixed operation:
Variable operation: •••
0

•••

0

••

0

•

•

•

0

0

•

0

•

•

•

•

••

0

•

•

•

•

••

•

•

0

••••

•

•

•

•

•

••

0

•

•

•

••

•5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

.51

Data Entry Errors
Type of Checking:. • . • . • • • • • • • • • . •.
Error indication: • • • • • . • • • • • . . • . ••
Correction procedure: .•••••.••.•••

• 52

none.
stored program permits format control (see
Description) •

invalid card code combinations, column count
check, and blank column detection (optional).
machine halt, audible alarm, and light.
manual intervention.

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking: . • • • . . . • . . • • • • . •.
Error indication: • . • . • . • . . • • •• • • •.

10/65

standard IBM 80-column punched cards.
standard Hollerith card code.
160 columns/sec.
depends on transmission speed and location of
the last column punched. For transmission
speeds of 150 char/sec and higher, the range
is approximately 90 to 170 cards/min if the
last column punched is 80 or 30, respectively.
At the 75 char/sec speed, the punching rate is
limited by the transmission speed.

character validity and longitudinal parity check.
machine halt, audible alarm, and light after
three unsuccessful attempts to transmit full
record.'
(Contd. )

AUERBACH Data Comrtlunications Reports

A

~

.

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
CDMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6444:05
IBM 1013

Correction procedure: ••.•••...••••

. 53

Data Recording Errors
Type of checking: . . • . • . • • • • . • • . . ••

Error indication: • . • • • . • • • • . • • • • .•
Correction procedure: .•••••..••..•
Comments: • • . . • • • • . • • . • • • . • • . ••
• 55

Line Malfunctions: . • • • • . • • • • • • • • •.

•6

CONDITION INDICATORS
Input device available:. • • • • • • • • . • • ••
Input device busy: ••••.••••.•••••.
Remote receiver ready: ••.•......•.
Remote receiver busy: . • • • • • . • . • • ..
Power on: . • . • • • . • . • • . • . • • • • • • ••
hnproper data entry: ••••••••••••.•
Transmission error: ••••••.•••••••
Recording error: . • • • • • . . • • • . . • • •.

•7

DATA TRANSMISSION

• 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed: ••••..•..••
Transmission method: •..•.•...•.••
Transmission code: ....•.•.••••••.
Transmission mode: ••.••.•....•.•.
Order of bit transmission: •.•••••...•
Synchronization: •••...•.••.••••..

• 72

automatic retransmission of record; manual
refeeding of error card after three unsuccessful attempts to transmit record •

error in card punching and blank column detection (optional).
audible alarm, light, and machine halt.
manually eject defective card and resume operation (card will be repunched).
check punch can be put in column 81 of card to
indicate correctly-punched card .
no specific provision for checking .

lamp.
lamp.
lamp.
lamp.
lamp.
lamp, audible alarm.
lamp, audible alarm.
lamp, audible alarm •

75, 150, 250, or 300 char/sec.
serial by bit.
4-of-8 constant ratio code; see Table I.
half-duplex.
1, 2, 4, 8, R, 0, X, N; see Table I.
synchronous; i. e. , synchronization is maintained by the data signals •

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line
Common-carrier leased voice-band
lines at the following speeds:
Up to 1,200 bits/sec (75 or 150
char/sec): ••••••.•.••••.••.•
2,000 bits/sec (250 char/sec): ••••••
2,400 bits/sec (300 char/sec): .••.••
Public switched telephone network at
the following speeds:
Up to 1,200 bits/sec (75 or 150
char/sec): ••.••...•.••••.•••
2,000 bits/sec (250 char/sec): ..••..

Data Set*

Bell System Data Set 202C or 202D, or Western
Union 1200 Baud Data Modem.
Bell System Data Set 201A.
Bell System Data Set 201B or Western Union
2400 Baud Data Modem.

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C.
Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 201A.

Note: Any equivalent transmission medium that meets the standards of Electronic
Industries Association's Recommended Standard 232 is usable by the IBM 1013
Card Transmission Terminal.

*

In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; see your local common-carrier
communications consultant.
@1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

10/65

6444:06
IBM 1013

.73

Transmission Control
Call initiation:. . • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • ••
Call reception:. • • • • • • • • • . • • • • • • ••
Functional operations:. • • . • • . • • • • • ••

manual dialing or signaling.
operator must establish voice communication
and then switch to data mode.
none, except request retransmission.

.74

Multistation Operation:

no provision.

•8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

•

•

GO

••••••••

1013 Card
Transmission Terminal

Component
Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)
Power (kw)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phases
Temperature Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)
.9

•

47
29
52
800
1.15
115
60
1

-

PRICE DATA
Component or Feature
1013 Card Transmission Terminal

5/70

-

3,415

Monthly
Rental

Purchase
Price

Monthly
Maintenance

$

$

$

775

42,050

82.50

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AU[~.ACH

~

~U[R8AC"

6445:01

DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
R[PORTS

IBM 1978

•
IBM 1978 PRINT READ PUNCH TERMINAL

.1

GENERAL

· 11

Identity: .......................... .

.. 12

Manufacturer: ......................... ..

• 13

Basic Function: ••••••..•.•••••••

. 14

Basic Components

transmit data from punched cards; receive and
print data or punch data into cards; operates
over a voice-band line •

Name: ............................... ..
Function: ............................... ..

1978 Printer
includes line printer, buffers, and control
circuitry. Printer is included in all models
of the 1978.

Name: ............................................ ..

1978 Card Read Punch
provides punched card input and output. Card
reading is provided in Models 1 and 2; card
punching is provided in Model 2 only.

Function: ...................................... ..

· 15

1978 Print Read Punch Terminal;
Models 1, 2, and 3.
International Business Machines Corporation
Data Processing Division
112 East Post Road
White Plains, New York.

Description
The IBM 1978 Print Read Punch Terminal is available in three models which provide various
combinations of input/output components. The capabilities of the three models are as follows:
•

1978 Model 1 - provides punched card input and printed output.

•

1978 Model 2 - similar to Model 1, and provides pUnched card output
in addition.

• 1978 Model 3 - provides printed output only; no input capabilities.
The 1978 Terminal operates at 75, 150, or 250 characters per second over the public telephone network or a common-carrier leased voice-band line; in addition, it can operate at
300 characters per second over a leased line.
The 1978 is one of the IBM STR (Synchronous Transmit-Receive) terminal units and can communicate with other members of the 8TR group if compatible data rates and message configurations are employed, Refer to Paragraph 6444. 15 of the report on the IBM 1013 Card Transmission Terminal for a list of other terminals in the STR group.
The 1978 transmits and receives in a half-duplex mode. If full-duplex facilities are used,
data transmissions are still half-duplex but synchronization can be maintained in both directions
at the same time, which reduces turnaround time when exchanging control signals.
The 1978 Terminal is quite similar to the IBM 1013 Card Transmission Terminal; it uses a
similar Card Read Punch unit and much of the same control circuitry. The primary difference
between the 1978 and the 1013, aside from the printing capability of the 1978, is that the 1978
lacks the complex and flexible, variable programming mode provided in the 1013 (see Paragraph 6444. 15).
The Card Read Punch unit is a modified version of the IBM 1442 Card Read Punch. The
Printer is a modified version of the IBM 1443 Printer, which uses a horizontally oscillating
type-bar. Both the 1442 and 1443 have been used extensively as peripheral devices in IBM
computer systems.
The peak card reading speed is 190 cards per minute; the peak card punching speed varies
from 91 cards per minute for fully punched cards to 190 cards per minute for cards with 25
or fewer columns punched.

C 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

8/66

6445:02
IBM 1978

• 15

Description (Contd.)
The peak printing speed is 190 lines per minute if the standard 52-character type-bar is
used. The Selective Character Set option permits the use of other type-bars having character sets of 13, 39, or 63 characters. The peak printing speed with the non-standard typebar varies between 475 and 160 lines per minute.
The actual rate at which data can be transmitted depends on the transmitting and receiving
components, the turnaround time, and the number of characters per record. See Tables V
and VI for additional information about effective transmission rates.
Data is transmitted between a 1978 Terminal and a remote terminal in an alternating sequence
of data blocks (transmittal records) and control signals. A transmittal record contains from
one to seven subtransmittal records. Each subtransmittal record corresponds to one card
or one line of print. The transmittal record can contain up to 329 data characters including
certain control characters (see Paragraph. 35).
The 1978 operates in one of seven modes:
•

Send Normal Mode -- 80 characters are read from each card (one per column)
and transmitted. The input cards are punched in standard IBM Card Code.

•

Send Binary Mode - 160 characters are read from each card (two per column)
and transmitted. The- input cards are punched in column binary.

•

Send First Character Mode - the codtl punched in the first card column determines
whether the card is read in the normal or binary mode. A 7-9 punch in column 1
indicates column binary reading; all other card punch combinations indicate normal
reading. The first card column is transmitted as one or two data characters.

•

Receive Punch Normal Mode - received data is expected to be in the form of
records containing up to 80 data characters; each record is punched into one card.

•

Receive Print Mode - received data is expected to be in the form of records containing up to 80 data characters; each record is printed on one line, with single
line spacing. No form skips can be initiated.

•

Receive First Character Control Mode - received data recoras are punched or
printed according to the initial character of each record. Cards can be punched
in IBM Card Code or in column binary. Single, double, or triple line spacing can
be performed after printing each line, or a skip to the top of the next page can be
made. With the Skipping Device option, a forms skip can be initiated by the initial
data character; actual skipping is controlled by the tape loop carriage control mechanism. Up to 120 or 144 (with optional feature) characters can be printed per line.

•

Off-Line Mode - data can be transcribed from punched cards to printed output.
One line is printed for each card, with single line spacing. Input cards are
expected to be in the standard IBM card eode. The rate of transcription varies
from 130 cards per minute when using the 63-character type bar to 190 cards
per minute with the 13-character type bar.

The transmission code is the IBM 4-of-8 code used by the other terminals in the IBM STR
group. Extensive checking provisions are included in the 1978. Character validity checking
is performed on data read from a card (in the normal mode) and on data received from a
remote terminal. A longitudinal redundancy check (LRC) is performed on each subtransmittal record r.eceived and on the entire transmittal record. When transmitting, LRC characters are automatically generated for transmission. Detection of an error in received data
causes the 1978 terminal to automatically request a retransmission. If errors persist after
a total of three transmissions, the terminal halts and manual intervention is required.
Optional Features
A number of optional features are available for a 1978 Terminal, including:
•

Selective Character Set - allows the operator to replace the printer type-bar
with one containing a different character set. Type-bars having a character set
containing 13, 39, 52 (standard). or 63 characters are available.
(Contd.)

8/66

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6445:03
IBM 1978

•

•
•

24 Additional Print Positions - extends the print line from the standard 120
character positions to 144 positions.

•
•

Printer Speed Increase - increases the maximum rate of printing with the standard
52 character set from 190 lines per minute to 240 lines per minute.

•

Automatic Turnaround - enables the 1978 Terminal to automatically switch from
the selected transmit mode to Receive First Character Mode when a blank card is
detected in the reader. When the following transmission and EOT signal is received,
the 1978 switches back to the selected transmit mode.

•

Automatic Answer and Disconnect - allows a 1978 Terminal to answer an incoming
call automatically, without need for operator attention, and to receive or transmit
data automatically.

•

Speed Selection Switch - permits operator to select transmission speed•

Skipping Device - provides additional carriage control via the 12-channel tape
loop carriage control mechanism. The tape loop moves in synchronization with
the form being printed and has 12 channels or columns which are prepunched to
indicate different vertical points on the form. Channel 1 is reserved to indicate
the top of the page and channel 12 the bottom. Without the Skipping Device option
forms skipping is limited to a skip to the top of the next page initiated in the Receive First Character Control Mode or automatically when a punch in channel 12
is detected. With this option, skipping to anyone of 9 positions indicated by
punches in the corresponding tape column or channel can be initiated by the first
data character in the Receive First Character Control Mode.

Transmit Variabl£'-Length Hecords - enables from 1 to 148 data characters to be
read and transmitted from one or two cards; end-of-record is indicated by a special
charnet£'r (Group Mark) punched in the card; this Group Mark replaces the one
normally generated by the control circuitry.

• 16

First Delivery: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

July 1965 .

• 17

Availability: .••••••••••••••••••

not specified by IBM •

•2

CONFIGURATION'
The IBM 1978 Print Read Punch Terminal is available in three models having different combinations of input/output capabilities as follows:
•
•
•

1978 Model 1 - provides punched card input and printed output.
1978 Model 2 - provides punched card output in addition to punched card input
. and printed output.
1978 Model 3 - provides printed output only.

The physical configurations of the various models are described in Paragraph. 8.
The standard communications facilities that can be accommodated and the associated data
. sets are listed in Paragraph • 72.
The optional features available for .each model of the 1978 Terminal are listed and described
in Paragraph . 15•
•3

INPUT

• 31

Prepared Input
Card Read Punch (1978 Models 1 and 2) Input Dlediunl: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Input code: • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••
Quantity of data: ••••••.••••••••

Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated input speed: •••••••.••••••
Effective speed: ••••••••••••• ' •••

standard IBM 80-column punched cards.
standard Hollerith card code (see Table I),
or column binary.
80 characters per card (normal mode) or 160
characters per card (column binary mode).
see Table I.
190 cards/minute.
see Tables V and VI.

© 1966 AUERBA,CH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc,

8/66

6445:04
IBM 1978

TABLE I: IBM 1978 TERMINAL DATA CODES
DEFINED CHARACTER

BLANK (SEE NOTE 2)
PERIOD
LOZENGE
LEFT BRACKET
LESS THAN
GROUP MARK
AMPERSAND
DOLLAR SIGN
ASTERISK
RIGHT BRACKET
SEMICOLON
DELTA
HYPHEN (MINUS SIGN)
DIAGONAL
COMMA
PERCENT MARK
WORD SEPARA TOR
LEFT OBLIQUE
SEGMENT MARK
SUBSTITUTE BLANK (SEE NOTE 2)
NUMBER POUND SIGN
AT SIGN
COLON (SEE NOTE 3)
GREATER THAN
RADICAL
QUESTION MARK (PLUS ZERO)
A
B
C
0
E
F
G
H
I
EXClAMATION POINT MINUS ZERO

J

X
X

X
X

):(

X
X
X

X
X
)

[

5:.

*

.
&

X

$

X

X
X
X

+
X
X

]
;

A

f

X

,

X

%

X
X
X
X

X
X
X

V

,•
\

~

X
X
X
X

@
:

X

-,

X

>
r
?
A
B
C
0
E
F
G
H
I
!

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

--

X
X

J

K
l
M
N
0
P
Q
R
RECORD MARK
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
(0)
ZERO
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NOTES:

PRINT BAR SEE NOTE 1
13 39 52A 52H 63

PRINTS
AS

K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R

)(

X
X
X
X
X
X

+

S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
0
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X,
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X,
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

STANDARD
CARD CODE

BCD CODE BITS
1
C B A 8
" 2

40F 8 ODE BITS
1
8 R 0 X N
2 "

C
12-3-8
12-4-8
12-5-8
12-6-8

B
C B
B
B

R 0
A 8
A 8

2 1

"

l;i-I-H

I..

1
A 8 "
AlB 4 2
AlB 4 2 1

12

C

A

11-3-8
11-4-8
1-1-5-8
11-6-8
'1-7-8

8
C B
B
8
8
C B
C B
8
8
B
B
C
A
A 8
C
A 8
C
A 8
A 8
C
A 8
A
8
8
C
8
8
8
C
C B A 8
B A
B A
C B A
B A
C B A
C B A
B A
B A 8
C B A 8
B
8
C B
C B
B
C B
B
B
C B
C B
8
B
8
A 8
A
C
A
C
A
A
A
C
A
C
A 8
A 8
C
8

0-1
0-3-8
0-4-8
0-5-8
0-6-8
0-7-8
2-8
3-8
4-8
5-8
6-8
7-8
12-0
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
11-0
11- I
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-9
0-2-8
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6
0-7
0~8

0-9
0
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

.

1 2

2 "
12 4
1

""
,

I 2

I

4 2
4 2

1
2

I
2 1

I
1 2

4
4 2
4 2 I

2
2

2

2
I 2

4 2
2 1
2
1
2
2 I

1 2
2
1
2
1
2
I 2

"

4
1
4 2
2

,

1

I

I

1

1

2
2 1

1

4

I

2

4

""
"

I

1

2 1

1

1

I

2
2
2 1

1

2

""
"

I

I

4 2
2 I

1

1

I

I
2
2 I

1

2

C

I

4

"

C
C

C

8
8

1
4 2
4 2 1

1

I

1

1

N

8
8
4 8 R
8 R 0
8
8
"
R 0
8
0
8
0
8 R,
8 R 0
4 8
0
8
0
8 R
4 8 R

"
""

X in a print bar column indicate. that the character i. printed by that bar. Any other notation show. the character
a. it i. printed by the 52 - character bar, Arrangement H.

2.

The" of 8 codes shown are for Binary Mode. ,In BCD Mode the substitute blank character is deleted from the
character set, and the blank has the" of 8 Bit Configuration 2 - 4 - 8 - O.

3.

The colon is used as the .ubstitute character by the IBM 7702 Magnetic Tape Transmission Terminal.

"

"

""
"

X
X N
X
X
X
N
N
X

N

8

8 R
8 R
8
0
R 0
R 0
0
4
R 0
4
0
2
0
2 4
8 R 0
8
0
2
8
R
2
R
2
4
R
4
2 4
2 4
8 R
8
2
8
0
2
R 0
2
0
4
R 0
4
0
2 4
0
2
0
8 R 0
8
0
2
8 R
0
2
0
2
R
4
0
R
2
R
2
R
8
0
8 R

1.

N

4H

" , "
,
, "
,
""
"
"
"
"

0
R
R 0

X N
N
X
X

4B
2

2 I

8
4 8

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
X N
X N
N
X N
N
N
X N
N

Reprinted from IBM 1978 Print Read Punch Terminal, Form A21-9029, published by IBM.
(Contd.)
8/66

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

oWERBACH

.UERtI.CH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6445:05
IBM 1978

•
• 32

Manual Input: .•.••••. •••••••••

no provision.

• 33
.34

Fixed Input: ••••••••••••••••••

no provision.

Transaction Code Input:

no provision •

. 35

Message Configuration
Data is transmitted or received by an IBM 1978 Terminal in a series of data blocks called
transmittal records and appropriate control code sequences. Refer to Tables II and III for
the structure and definition of each control sequence. Each transmittal record consists of
a Start-of-Record sequence followed by one to seven subtransmittal records, and ended by
an End-of-Transmittal-Record sequence. Each subtransmittal record consists of data
characters followed by a Group Mark or Record Mark code and a Longitudinal Redundancy
Check character (LRC).
Depending on the mode of operation (see Paragraph. 15), the llUmber of data characters in
each subtransmittal record can be up.to 161 characters, including the initial control code
when used. The number of data characters can vary in subtransmittal records within the
same transmittal record, again depending on the mode of operation. The maximum number
of data characters per subtransmittal record for each input or output component is shown in
Table IV.
The maximum number of data characters per transmittal rec,.rd, inclucting first character
control codes and Record or Group Marks, but excluding LRC characters, is 329. When
transmitting, each subtransmittal record corresponds to one 0ard read from the Card Read
Punch unit. When receiving, each subtransmittal record corresponds to one card punched
or one line printed.
All control codes mentioned in this entry are generated

• 36

autom~ti0ally

by the 1978 Terminal.

Operating Procedure
(1) Operator establishes connection by dialing or signaling, coordinates the transmission
with the remote operator, checks that the data set is ready for transmission, and
switches to data mode.
(2) Operator verifies that synchronization between terminals has been established and that
all components are in a ready condition by observing the control panel lights.
(3) Operator selects proper operation mode and loads data cards if transmitting or readies
the Card Read Punch or Printer if receiving. The transndtting terminal operator Ulen
presses the Start key.
The exchanges of data messages and control signals are under' the contrul of the terminals.
Further intervention by the operator is required only when eu'ors are repeatedly detected
in retransmission of the same data block (transmittall'ecord). when reading, punching,
or printing component malfunctions or errors are detected, aIld when the call is terminated.
The Automatic Answer and Disconnect option permits transmission or reception of messages by an unattended IBM 1978 Terminal.
T.ABLE II: mM 4-0F-8 CHARACTER TRANSMISSION CONTROL CODES
Symbol (1)

Transmission Code (2)

Idle

IDL

18RO

Error-Inquiry

EI

18RX

Transmit Leader

TRL

14RO

Control Leader

CTL

14RX

SOR/ACK-1
SOR/ACK-2

S/A-1

12RX

S/A-2

12RO

Control Code

(1) These are the symbols used in Table III.
(2) See T8:b1e I.
@

1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/66

6445:06
IBM 1978

TABLE HI: IBM 4-0F-8 CONTROL MESSAGES
Characters
Transmitted (2)

Function

Control
Message (1)
Idle
End-of-Idle (EOI)
Inquiry
Start-of-Record
(SOR-10r SOR-2)

IDL
CTL IDL

To maintain synchronization.
To signal that the direction of Idle transmissions shall be reversed.
To interrogate remote terminal as to
readiness.
To signal the beginning of a transmittal
record; records are alternately designated
odd (SOR-1) and even (SOR-2) to provide
detection of duplicate transmissions.

TRL EI
TRL S/A-1or
TRL SA-2

Acknowledge
(ACK-10r ACK-2)

To signal readiness to receive in response to
an inquiry message; to signal the transmitting
terminal that a transmittal record was received without any detected errors.

CTL S/A-1 or
CTL S/A-2

Error

To signal the transmitting terminal that errors
were detected in one or more subtransmittal
records.
To signal the end of a transmittal record.

CTL EI

End-of-Transmittal
Record (EOTR)

End-of-Transmission To signal the remote operator that transmission has been completed (manually initiated).
(EOT)
To signal the remote operator j normally used
TEL
to indicate desire for voice communication
(manually initiated).

TRL LRC
CTL
CTL

(1) All messages except Idle and start-of-Record cause a change in the direction of
transmission; all messages except End-of-Transmission and TEL are automatically
initiated.
(2) All messages except Idle are two-character sequences; see Table IT for transmission codes.

TABLE IV: MAXIMUM SIZES OF SUBTRANSMITTAL RECOR,pS
Operation

Transmit

Receive

Component

Maximum Number of Data
Characters Per Subtransmittal Record *

Card Reader Normal Mode
Binary Mode
Card Punch....;
Normal Mode
Binary Mode
Printer standard
with Additional
Print Positions
Feature

80
160
80
161
120
144

* Does not include first character control codes.
(Contd. )
8/66

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
R[PORTS

6445:07
IBM 1978

•
.37

Entry of Time and Date:

.4

OUTPUT

• 42

Output to Punched Cards

no provisions.

Card Read-Punch (1978 Model 2 only)
Card type and size:
Card code: . . . . . .

standard SO-column pWlched cards_
standard Hollerith card code (see Table 1),
or column binary.
160 columns/sec; 190 cards/min maximum.
see Tables V and VI.
none.

Rated punching speed: .
Effective speed: _
Format control: . ___ _

TABLE V: DArA TRANSMISSION RATE OF
IBM 1978 TERMINAL
~

Data Transmission Rate, records/sec (1)

Characters
Per Record (1)

Via a Half-Duplex Line Operating at:
75 char/sec

25
40
80
160

Via a Full-Duplex Line (2) Operating at:

-

150
95
50
25

150 char/sec

250 char/sec

285
190
95
50

410
285
150
75

300 char/sec

75 cnar/sec

470
335
175
90

165
105
90
25

150 char/sec

250 char/sec

330
210
105
55

300 char/sec

550
345
180
90

655
415
215
110

(1) Each record Is a subtransmlttal record and corresponds to one card or one printed line. Maximum blocking is
assumed. See Paragraph. 35 for details on message configuration. The rates shown in this table represent the
speed at which data is sent over the line. The overall effective rate is governed by the peak ·reading. punching.
or printing rate (see Table Vl). or the data transmission rate. whichever is the lowest.
(2) The operation of the terminal Is always half-duplex, but'full-duplex facilities can be used to maintain synchronization
In both directions simultaneously, which reduces turnaround time.
.

TABLE VI: IBM 1978 TERMINAL
PEAK INPUT/OUTPUT RATES (1)
Input or Output
OPeration

Peak Rate,
Cards or lines
per minute

Card Reading
Printing 13-character
39-character
52-character
63-character

190
set
set
set
set

Card Punching25 columns
40 columns
80 columns

475
240
190
160
190
146
91

(1) The overall effective speed of operation will be
the lowest of the three following rates: data
transmission rate (see Table IV), transmitting
component rate, and receiving component rate.

01966 AUERBACH Corpor/ltion and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/66

6445:08
IBM 1978

• 44

Output to Printer
Printer (all models of 1978) Output medium.: • . . . . • . .•••.•..•

Character set: •••••••••••••••••
Rated printing speed With 13-character set:
With 39-character set:
With 52-character set:
With 63-character set:
Effective speed: . • . • • • • • • • • • • • • .
Format control: .••.•.••••.••.••

•5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

• 51

Data Entry Errors
Type of checking: . . • • • • . • • • • . • • .•
Error indication: • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • •
Correction procedure: ••••••.•••••

• 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking: . • • • • • • • • • . • . • • .
Error indication: • • . • . • • • • • • . • .••
Correction procedure: ••••.•••.••••

Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .

• 53

pin-fed continuous fan-fold forms from 4. 00 to
16.75 inches in width; 120 or 144 (optional)
printing positions; 10 characters per inch
horizontal spacing and 6 or 8 lines per inch
vertical spacing.
52 characters standard; 13, 39, or 63 character
set available with Selective Character Set
option.
475 lines/min.
240 lines/min.
190 lines/min.
160 lines/min.
see Tables V and VI.
vertical forms control via 12-channel paper tape
loop mechanism (optional). Skipping operation
is initiated by first character control code of a
message •

character validity, card registration, character
count, and reading lamp checks.
terminal halts, a lamp is lighted, and an audible
alarm is sounded.
manual intervention.
character validity check; longitudinal redundancy
check for each subtransmittal record and for
entire transmittal record.
output is suspended and an error indication code
is transmitted to the remote terminal after
complete transmittal record is received.
automatic retransmission of entire transmittal
record; after a total of 3 failures to receive a
record, the terminal halts with a lamp lighted
and sounds an audible alarm.
when r~ceiving a retransmission, the 1978 punches
or prints the entire transmittal record .

Data Recording Errors
Type of checking: . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Error indication: • • • • • • • • • • • •••••
Correction procedure: ••••••••••••
• 55

Line Malfunctions: •••••••••••••••

•6

CONDITION INDICATORS

echo check to verify that correct dies have been
activated in card punch; character parity checking on data sent to printer, but no direct check
on printed output.
a lamp is lighted and an audible alarm is sounded.
manual intervention.
no specific proviSions for checking•

A comprehensive array of lamps and switches on the main operator panel, which is located
on the printer, displays the flow of data through the buffers, the mode of operation, the status
of each component, transmission errors, and printer malfunctions. A secondary panel is
provided on the Card Read Punch unit to indicate reading or punching malfunctions.
(Contd. )
8/66

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

fA.
~

..

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

•7
• 71

6445:09
IBM 1978

DATA TRANSMISSION
Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed: .••••••.•.
Transmission method: ..•.•...•.••
Transmission code: •.••.•••••••..
Transmission mode: .•••••••••••••
Order of bit transmission: ••.•••••••
Synchronization: ••.••••.••••.•••

• 72

600, 1200, 2000, or 2400 bits/sec (75, 150, 250,
or 300 char/sec, respectively).
serial by bit.
.
IBM 4-of-8 Transmission Code (see Table 1); a
total of 8 bits are transmitted for each character.
half-duplex.
1, 2, 4, 8, R, 0, X, N; see Table I.
synchronous; a special character (Idle) is repeatedly transmitted between terminals prior
to data transmission •

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line*
Common-carrier leased voice-band line
operating at the following speeds:
Up to 1,200 bits/sec (75 or 150
char/sec): .• .••••••••••••••
2,000 bits/sec (250 char/sec): ••••.
2,400 bits/sec (300 char/sec): .••••

Data Set**

Bell System Data Set 202C or 202D or Western
Union 1200 Baud Data Modem.
Bell System Data Set 201A.
Bell System Data Set 201B or Western Union
2400 Baud Data Modem.

Public telephone network operating at the
following speeds:
Up to 1,200 bits/sec (75 or 150 chari
sec): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2,000 bits/sec (250 char/sec):
. 73

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . . . • . . . . . • . . • . . • •
Call reception: ••••.•.•..••.•..
Functional operations: . . • . . • . . . . .

• 74

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C.
Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 201A•

Multistation Operation: ..•.•.•.•.•

manual dialing or signaling.
capable of unattended transmit or receive operation
with optional feature.
none standard (card feed and line advance are
automatic at end of each data block); with the
Skipping Device optional feature. vertical form
skipping in the printer can be initiated by the
initial control code for each data block•
no special provisions.

* IBM states that any transmission medium that meets the standards of EIA RS-232A is
usable by the IBM 1978 Terminal.
** In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; see your local common-carrier
communications consultant.

© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/66

6445: 10
IBM 1978

•8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IBM 1978 Terminal

Component
Modell

.9

Model 2

Model 3

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

86
56
49
1,400

86
56
49
1,400

86
56
49
1,400

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phases

3.7
208/230
60
1

4.1
208/230
60
1

2.8
208/230
60
1

Temperature Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

50-90
20-80
11,400

50-90
20-80
12,600

50-90
20-80
8,600

PRICE DATA*
Purchase
Price
$

Monthly
Maintenance
$

1,000

51,800

106.00

1,100

55,000

118.00

850

42,900

102.00

Selective Character Set (permits using
type-bars with size of character set
other than standard)
Print Positions, 24 additional (expands
print line from 120 positions to 144
positions)
Printer Speed Increase
Skipping Device (provides form skipping
controlled by carriage control tape
loop)
Nonstandard Type-Bar**
13-symbol character set
39-symbol character set
52-symbol character set
63-symbol character set

25

1,375

2.00

45

2,475

2.25

60
5

100
150

8.00
0.50

-

-

400
450
500
575

Transmit Variable-Length Records
Automatic Turnaround
Automatic Answer and Disconnect
Speed Selection Switch

15
35
40
15

325
1,400
1,600
650

Component or Feature
1978 Terminal
Modell (transmit-receive and print)
Model 2 (transmit-receive and print
or punch)
Model 3 (receive and print)

Monthly
Rental
$

Optional Features

-

-

-

0.50
1. 50
1. 50
1.25

** One type-bar, any size, is included with the basic terminal; these prices apply to
additional type-bars.
* Current pricing unavailable; equipment listed under Paragraph. 9 no longer in
production"

5/70

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

6447:01

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICA liONS
REPORTS

.

"'~iJ
(
)

I
J

M
N

0
P
Q

R
S
T
U
V

W
X
y
Z
Space

"
+

-,

,

-

¢

I
?

* With extended character punching and reading special features

installed in 1056 Modell and
1057 Model 1. Shaded areas indicate the differences in card codes and graphics between the
PTTC/BCD Code set with the Extended Character Reading and Extended Character Punching
special features installed and the PTTC/EBCD Code set used with the 1056 Model 3 and 1058
Model 2. The transmission code is the same for both code sets.

Reprinted from IBM 1050 Data Communication System Principles of Operation. Form A24-3474-0
published by IBM.

(Contd.)
11/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

6447:09

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

IBM 1050

AlJ(RRACH
.~

TABLE

m:

IBM 1050 FUNC'l'ION CODES
Transmission Code

Symbol

Card Code

BY
RES
RS
!.oF
NL*
HT
UC
EOB
BS
LC
EOT
PRE
lL
DEL
Cancel
Key

0-9-4
11-9-4
9-5
0-9-5
11-9-5
12-9-5
9-6
0-9-6
11-9-6
12-9-6
9-7
0-9-7
11-9-7
12-9-7

BAC8421
A

84
8 4
8 4
1
A C 8 4
1
C 8 4
1
B
84
BA
1
842
A C 84 2
C 8 4 a.
B
BA
842
C 842 1
8 4 2 1
A
8 4 2 1
B
BAC8421
B
C
B

Meaning
Bypass
Restore
Reader stop
Line Feed
New Line
Horizontal Tab
Upper Case
End of Block
Backspace
Lower Case
End of Transmission
Prefix
Idle
Delete

*The eighth track of the tape is punched with the NL code when the
1050 system has either the Line Correction or Home Correction
special feature (or both) installed. This punch is not included in
the parity check of the NL character and therefore is not transmitted.
Operation,

. 36

Operating Procedure
For point-to-point operation, the operator can initiate a connection by dialing another
station and verifying that the other station is ready for a period of transmission. If the
Master Station Feature is installed, remote components can be automatically polled or
addressed. The operator can insert successive message cards; each card contains the
receiving unit's address for each message. The optional Pack Feed Feature allows up to
300 cards to be sent without operator attention. Multiple messages can be sent by paper
tape without operator attention, once the tape has been initially positioned.
For multi station operation, the keyboard, paper tape reader, or card reader can be used
to provide either polling or addressing characters for remote stations. Messages are
automatically received following polling. Errors are indicated and require manual intervention according to preset procedt:.res. A special feature allows for two additional
attempts to send a message in which an error has been detected.
After addressing for transmission requests, the operator may key the message to the
addressed unit. If the message is in a machine-readable form, the paper tape reader or
card reader automatically sends the message (one block of indefinite length on paper tape,
or one or several cards) to the addressed unit. Pressing the system reset button, when
using tape or cards, automatically initiates polling and transmission.
When the 1050 system is connected via communications lines to a computer system, all
polling and addressing are controlled by the computer.

.37

Entry of Time and Date:

.4

OUTPUT

.41

Output to Punched Tape

no special proviSion.

1055 Paper-Tape Punch Tape size:
Tape code:
Rated punching speed:

e

chad (fully punched) I-inch, 8-level paper tape.
Chad edge-punched documents (optional feature).
6-1evel PTTC/BCD plus odd parity; see
Table II.
14.8 or 8.33 char/sec, depending on communication facility.

1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/68

6447:10
IBM 1050

TABLE IV: UNUSED CODES*
PTTC/BCD Code

Transmission
Code

Symbol Lower Case Upper Case
Card Code
Card Code

BAC8421

Symbol

PTTC/EBCD Code
Lower Case Upper Case
Card Code Card Code

PN

9-4

9-4

C 8 4

PN

9-4

9-4

PF

12-9-4

12-9-4

B A C 84

PF

12-9-4

12-9-4

PZ

12-0

8-7

MZ

11-0

0-8-5

t

0-8-2

12-8-7

BAC8

2

Unassigned

12-0

1-8

B

8

2

Unassigned

11-0

12-1-8

8

2

Unassigned

0-2-8

0-1-8

A

*These codes serve no assigned function in the 1050 System and are not printable. but are
valid data codes.
Adapted from IBM 1050 Data Communication System Principles of Operation.
Form A24-3474-0. published ~ IBM .

. 41

Output to Punched Tape (Contd.)
Effective speed:
Format control: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments: . . . . . . . . •

. 42

depends upon block length.
a hole is punched in level 8 for start of I:1essage
block, beginning of each data line, error control or manual delete codes (optional features).
power-driven take up reel is available optionally.

Output to Punched Cards
1057 Card Punch;
1058 Printing Card Punch Card type and size:
Card code: . . . . . .

standard IBM 80-column cards.
standard Hollerith code, or extended Card Code
(optional); see Table II.
14.8 or 8.33 characters (columns) per second,
depending on communication facility.
approximately 10 fully-punched cards per
minute.
program card.
these units are similar to the IBM Model 24
!'!nd 26 keypunches, respectively. The 1058
prints the data at the top of each column under
control of the operator or program card .

Rated punching speed:
Effective speed:
Format control:
Comments: ...

. 44

Output to Printer
1052 Printer Keyboard;
1053 Printer Output medium: . . . .

Character set: . . . . . . . ; . . . . . . .
Rated printing speed:

friction-fed forms
pin-fed forms in 12 widths from 5.25 to 13.12
inches (optional).
maximum printed line length is 13 inches.
printing is 10 or 12 characters per inch
horizontally and 6 or 8 lines per inch
vertically.
fan-fold forms up to 15 inches in width can be
fed and stacked.
88 characters, including upper and lower-case
alphabetics, numerics, punctuation, and
special characters; see Table II.
14.8 or 8.33 char/sec, depending on the communication facility.
(Contd. )

11/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

fA.

AUERBACH

6447:11

DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

.

1I~£RBA('H

IBM 1050

Effective speed:
Format control:
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . •
.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

. 51

Data Entry Errors: . . . . . . . . .

. 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking: . • . . . • . • . . • . . • ..

Error indication: . . . • • . . . . . • . . . . .

Correction procedure: . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Comments: . . . . . . . • . . . . • • . . . . . .
.53

.6

no provision for checking .

an odd parity bit is attached to each character
transmitted and is checked by the receiving
terminal.
a longitudinal redundancy check character (LRC)
is generated for the entire message and is
checked by the receiving terminal.
if a parity error occurs, a hyphen character is
punched on all receiving tape punches, a hyphen
or underscore character (depending on shift
status) is typed un all receiving printers, the
data check light at the receiving station is
turned on, and the receiving station is caused
to generate negative answers to the LRC.
if LRC characters are unequal, the receiving
terminal data-check light is turned on, a
hyphen characte t· is sent to the transmitting
terminal, and the transmitting device halts.
manual intervention.
two automatic retL'ansmissions (with optional
feature).
all error detection is controlled by the 1501
Control Unit.

Data Recording Errors
Type of checking: . . . • . . • . • . • . . . . .
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . .

.55

somewhat below rated speed due to carriage
return, line feed, and other operations.
controlled by function codes; functions include
line feed, carriage return, case shift, backspace, and horizontal tab.
printing mechanism is similar to IBM
Selectric Typewriter .

no checking.
when punching cal'ds, an "X" punch is punched
in column 81 to indicate that the data on the
card has passed the LRC check.

Line Malfunctions
Type of checking: . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . . optionally monitors for loss of carrier.
I\.ction: . . . . . . . . • . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . automatic disconnect after 20 to 30 seconds.
CONDITION INDICATORS
The 1052 Printer Keyboard contains all important switches and lamps. If the 1050 station
does not include a 1052, the switches and lamps are located in a separate switch unit.
Input device available: . . . . . . . . . .. none.
Input device busy: . • . . . • . . . . . . . none.
Remote receiver ready: . . . . . . . . .
lamp (optional).
Remote receiver busy:* . . . . . . . . .
lamp.
Power on: .. . . . . . .
lamp.
Improper data entry: .
none.
Transmission error: .
lamp.
Recording error: . . . . . . . . .
none.
Request to send data: . . . . . . . . . .
lamp.
Open transmission line: . . . . . . . . .. lamp (optional).
* This condition is recognized by the remote terminal sending a negative response or no
response. Except when polling, this is equivalent to an error condition. When polling,
and a negative response or no response is received, the polling continues with no indication.
© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/68

6447: 12
IBM 1050

.7

DAT A TRANSMISSION
The 10ril Control Unit is the interface between all 1050 system components and a communications data set. Only one component can transmit or receive at a time .

. 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speecl:

Transmission method:
Transmission code: ..

Transmission mode:
Order of bit transmission: .
Synchronization: . . . . . . . .
. 72

Connection to Communications Lines
Data Set*

Communication Line
Common -carrier leased
telegraph-grade lines
(75 bits/sec): . . . . . .
Bell System Type 1006
Data Channel (150 bits/sec):
Western Union C las s D
Data Channel (180 bits/sec):
Common carrier leased voice-band
line: . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Public switched telephone network
or Bell System TWX CE network:
Privately-owned voice-band
network: . . . . . . .
. 73

Bell System Data Set l03F.
Western Union 180
Baud Data Modem.
Bell System Data Set
103F or Western
Union 180 Baud
Data Modern.
Bell System DataPhone Data Set
103A.
furnished by IBM .

manually by ('perator, or by polling or addressing by master station.
capable of unattended operation.
16 different function codes can be received from
a remote station to perform a variety of functions such as turning punch on, line feed, and
carriage return.

Call reception:
Functional operations:

Multistation Operation
Polling: . . . . . . . . . . . .

*
11/68

none required.

Transmission Control
Call initiation:

.74

14.8 char/sec (134.89 bits/sec) on voice-grade
lines.
8.33 char/sec (75 bits/sec) on telegraphgrade lines.
serial by bit.
IBM Standard Perforated Tape and Transmission
Code; see Table II.
a total of nine bits, including start, stop, and
parity bits, are transmitted for each character.
half-duplex.
B, A, 8, 4, 2, 1, C; see Table II.
start and stop bits are transmitted with each
character .

the master station transmits a two-character
code specifying a particular station and a
specific device. The polled station responds
with a negative response or a positive response
followed by text. If no response is received
within two seconds, polling is continued.

In some cases equivalent data sets can be used; see your
local common-carrier communications consultant.
AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

(Contd.)

A
a

.

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6447:13

IBM 1050

polling can be performed manually via the keyboard or automatically via a paper tape reader
or card reader. Sequence of polling is determined by the operator via the keyboard or as
punched in the paper tape or card.
the master station sends a station device code to
a particular station which will receive the
succeeding message.
addressing can be controlled through manual
operation of keyboard, by paper tape reader,
or card reader. If the addressed station responds positively, message transmission may
begin. If the addressed station responds
negatively, the next station on the line is
addressed; if no response is received, the data
check light is turned on .

Addressing:

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Component:

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (lbs.)
Power (KVA)
Voltage

Frequency (cps)
Phases
Temperature
range, OF
Humidity
range, %
Heat (BTU,
hr)*

1052
1051
PrinterControl Key1053
Unitt board PrinteI

1054
PaperTape
Reader
~3.75

1055
Paper- 1056
1057
Card
Card
Tape
Punch Reader Punch

1058
Printing
Card
Punch

15.375 12.5
17.125 15
8.25
27
26
40
0.200
0.115

31
28
39
215
0.420

31
28
39
215
0.420

26
15
27
195
0.375
115
(208/
230 optional)
60
1

23
19.75
9
65
0.115

23
11.5
9
35
0.115

50-100

50-100

50-100 50-100

50-tOO

50-100

50-100 50-100

IO-80

10-80

10-80

10-80

10-80

10-80 10-80

1280

392

392

870

690

1433

*

~3

~.375

~O

p.ll5

0-80
~70

1433

Based on maximum usage of optional features.

T The 1051 Control Unit supplies power to each component.

e

1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

t 1/68

6447:14
IBM 1050

.9

PRICE DATA
Component or Feature
1051 Control Unit
Modell
Model 2
Model N1

First Printer Attachment
Models 1 and 2
Model Nl
Second Printer Attachment
First or Second Punch
Attachment
:First Reader Attachment
Second Reader Attachment
IBM Line Adapter
Leased Line
Shared Line
Limited Distance
Type 2
Printer-Keyboard
Printer
Paper-Tape Reader
Paper-Tape Punch

1056 Card Reader
Modell
Pack Feed Feature
Model 2 (no provision for
Pack Feed Feature)
1057 Card Punch
1058 Printing Card Punch
Modell
Model 2
Programmed Keyboard
1092 Modell
1092 Model 2
1093 Modell
1093 Model 2
Special Features (aU models)
1051 Attaclililent
Multiple Key Depression
Tandem Operation
Telegraph Speed
Data Set Attachment

Purchase
Price

Monthly
Maintenance

$

$

3,410
2,475
2,960

10.00
9.75
10.50

10
2.50
15
3
10
3

560
115
820
135
560
105

0.75
0.50
0.50
0.25
0.50
0.25

5
2
5
5
2.50

230
100
230
230
115

0.50
0.25
0,50
0.50
0.50

5
5
9
?
5
Hi
3

250
250
400
?
250
500
150

0.75
0.50
2.00
?
NC
0.75
0.25

10
NC

500
NC

0.50
NC

10
5

500
275

0.50
0.25

10
5

550
275

0.25
0.25

10
20
10

400
800
450

1.00
1. 25
0.50

63
49
29
39

2,645
1,940
1,505
1,965

68
5
58

3,515
185
3,030

8.00
0.50
6.75

73
49
58

1051 Special Features
Line Correction
Line Correction Release
Master Station
Home Component Recognition
Home Correction
Automatic Ribbon Shift and
Line Feed Select
Reader Stop - Prefix J
Auto-Fill Character Generation
Audible Alarm
Automatic EOB
Home Loop Input Component
Interlock
Keyboard Request
Telegraph Line Attachment
Vertical Forms Control
Text Time-Out Suppression
Open Line Detection
CPU Attachment
Switch Unit

1052
1053
1054
1055

Monthly
Rental
$

1'1.00

to.OO
4.25
6.50

73

3,005

18.00

92
136

3,955
4,415

20.00
40.00

44
49
39
44

1,745
1,940
1,550
1,745

2.00
4.50
1.25
3.50

7

280
280
NC
NC
400

1. 00

7

NC
NC
10

NC - No charge

5/70

!

AUERBACH Data;.Communications Reports

0.50
NC
NC
3.00

A
~

IIIJDIIIACH

AUERBACH
DATA
CDMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6450:01

IBM 7702

•
IBM 7702 MAGNETIC TAPE TRANSMISSION TERMINAL
.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: •.••••••••••••••••••••

7702 Magnetic Tape Transmission Terminal .

• 12

Manufacturer: •••••••••.••.•••••

International Business Machines Corporation
Data Processing Division
112 East Post Road
White Plains, New York.

.13

Basic Function:

reads data from magnetic tape and transmits
it over voice-band lines; receives transmitted
data and records it on magnetic tape •

. 15

Description
The IBM 7702 contains a magnetic tape unit which serves as the input or recording medium
for transmission or reception of data over voice-band lines. The tape unit uses standard
O. 5-inch magnetic tape; the tape format is compatible with IBM 727, 729, and 7330 Magnetic
Tape Units at 200-bits-per-inch density.
The 7702 can operate over the public telephone switched network or over common-carrier
leased voice-grade lines, using appropriate data sets, or over any equivalent channel with
input-output connections conforming to the Electronic Industries Association Standard RS
232.
The transmission speed is selected by the operator and can be lfiO, 250, or 300 characters
per second; these correspond to speeds of 1200, 2000, and 2400 bits per second, respectively.
Synchronization is maintained by the data signals themselves or by idle characters transmitted when no data is being transmitted. The 7702 operates in a half-duplex mode; i. e.,
data can be transmitted bidirectionally, but in only one direction at a time. Reversal of
the direction of data transmission requires synchronization to be established in the reverse
direction prior to data transmission. Full-duplex communication facilities can be used to
maintain synchronization in both directions at the same time and reduce the turnaround time.
The 7702 is one of the IBM STR (Synchronous Transmit-Receive) terminals and can communicate with other members of this group when set to compatible data rates. The terminals with which a 7702 can communicate include:
• Another 7702.
• An IBM 1013 Card Transmission Terminal.
• An IBM 1401 or 1410 Data Processing System equippe I with an
IBM 1009 Data Transmission Unit.
• An IBM 7710 or 7711 Data Communication Unit.
• An IBM 7740 Communication Control System.
• An IBM 7750 Programmed Transmission Control.
• An IBM System/360 Data Processing System equipped with an
IBM 2701 Data Adapter unit.

©1965 AIII"RB"CH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. !nc.

10/65

6450:02
IBM 7702

· 15

Description (Contd.)
Error-control in the 7702 is extensive, including reading checks, transmission checks (character validity and message redundancy), and recording checks. Automatic retransmission
is performed when errors are detected.
The 7702 terminal can ::>perate in two self-test modes fot' testing the reading and recording
operations. The test provisions will help in isolating troubles in the 7702, the data set. the
communications link, or the remote terminal •

• 16

First Delivery: . • • . . • . . • . • . • • • • •.

first quarter, 1962.

• 17

Availability:....................

unit is no longer in production; availability
depends on returns •

•2

CONFIGURATION
The 7702 is composed of a magnetic tape unit and the synchronous transmitter-receiver
(STR). See Paragraph. 72 for the communications facilities to which the 7702 can be connected and the data sets required •

•3

INPUT

.31

Prepared Input
Input medium: . . . . . . . • . ' . . . . . • . . . .

O. 5-inch heavy-duty or Mylar magnetic tape.

Input cooe: . . . • . • . . . . -. . . . . . . . . . .

IBM 55-character or 63-character BCD
(even parity) or binary (odd parity); see
Table I.
1 to N characters.
see Table I.
150, 250, or 300 char/sec, set by switch.
depends on transmission speed, length of
blocks, and whether over half- or fullduplex facilities. For example, the effective speed for transmission of 1,000-character blocks at the 250 char/sec speed is 225
char/sec over half-duplex facilities and 230
char/sec over full-duplex facilities.

Quantity of data: • . . . . • . . • • . • • • . . .
Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .
Rated input speed: ....•••.•..•.•.•
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .

. 32

Manual Input:

no provision .

• 33

Fixed Input: . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . • . . •

no provision.

• 34

Transaction Code Input: . . . . . . • . . . • •

no provision .

. 35

Message Configuration: . . • . . • . • • . . ..

a message consists of a start-of-record
control code, the data characters, an endof-record control code, and a check character.
The control codes are supplied automatically
by the 7702.

· 36

Operating Procedure
The operator must make several switch settings to make the 7702 compatible with the remote
terminal. These settings can be obtained from a prearranged schedule or by voice communication with the remote operator. The sequence of events involved in use of the 7702 is as
follows:
•

Set full-duplex/half-duplex switeh.
(Contd. )

10/65

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
AUERBACH

6450:03
AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUfIIlCATIOfllS
REPORTS

IBM 7702

~

• Set transmission speed.
• Set blnary/BCD switch.
•

Load tape; check file-protect light.

• Establish voice connection with remote operator (may not be
necessary with leased-line operation).
• Press start key and observe synchronization indicator light
and run light.
• No further attention is required when receiving; an audible
signal is sounded if an end-of-file (end-of-transmission).
end-of-reel, or error condition occurs. When transmitting,
the end-of-transmission key must be pressed at the end of
the transmission.
A special key, TEL, can be used to signal the remote operator.

This is usually used to
indicate to the remote operator that voice communication is required, perhaps to check switch
settings.

.37

Entry of Time and Date:

•4

OUTPUT

.41

Output to Punched Tape:

none •

• 42

Output to Punched Cards:. • . • • • • • • • •.

none •

• 43

Output to Magnetic Tape

no provisions •

Rated output speed: •••••.••••.••..
Effective speed: ••••••.•..•.••.•.
FOl"lllat control: ••••••••.•.••.••.

O. 5-inch heavy-duty or Mylar magnetic tape.
IBM 55-character or 63-character BCD
(even parity) or binary (odd parity); see
Table I.
150, 250, or 300 char/sec, set by switch.
see Paragraph . 31.
none •

• 44

Output to Printer: ••••••••••••••.•

none .

.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

.51

Data Entry Errors

Tape size:
Tape code:

Type of checking: •••.•••••.•••..•
Error indication: ..•••..•...•.••.•
Correction procedure: ...•••.•.....

Comnlents: . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .

character and longitudinal parity checks.
light, buzzer, and terminal halt. if error
persists after two automatic retransmissions.
press start key to initiate an additional three
retransmissions; or press "substitute record
key" which causes a special one-character
record to be transmitted and all invalid characters within th,., message to be replaced with
a special character code.
tape is automatically backspaced for retransmission.

@1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

10/65

6450:04
IBM 7702

. 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking:

•.•..•.•...••..

Error indication: . . . • . . • . • . . . .
Correction procedure: .•.••.•..

character validity and longitudinal parity
check upon entire message.
see. 51, above.
see. 51, above.

Data Recording Errors

. 53

Error indication: . . . • . . . • • . • . . • . •
Correction procedure: . . . . . . • . • • . •

read-after-write character and longitudinal
parity checks.
see. 51, above.
see. 51, above.

. 55

Line Malfunctions: . . . . .

no direct provision for checking.

.6

CONDITION INDICATORS

Type of checking:

•.••...••.•••••

Input device available: . . . . • . . . . • . .
Input device busy: . . . . . • . . . . . • . . •
Remote receiver ready: . . . . . . . . . • .
Remote receiver busy: . • . . . . . . . • • •
Power on: . . • . • . . . . . . . • . . • • . . • •
Improper data entry: . . . . . . • . . . . • •
Transmission error: . • . • . . . . . . . • •
Hccording error: • . . . . . . . . • . . . . • .
Lo<;s of synchronization: . . . . . . . . . ..

lamp.
lamp.
none.
none.
lamp.
lamp and
lamp and
lamp and
lamp and

buzzer.
buzzer.
huzzer.
buzzer.

Note; There are many additional lamps to permit s(!rvice personnel
to monitor and test the various functions of the 7702 •
.7

DATA TRANSMISSION

.• 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed:
TransmissioQ method: ...
Transmission code: .
Transmission mode: . . . . . . . . . . .
Order of bit tran!-.m is~jon:

•..•..

Synchroni7ation: . . . . . . . . . • . . .
72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set*

Public switched telephone network
at the following speeds:
1,200 bits/sec: ..•••.•••••••.•
2,000 bits/sec: ..•.••.••••••••••
Common-carrier leased voice-band
line at the following speeds:
Up to 1,200 bits/sec: ••.••••••••••
2,000 bits/sec: ••••••.•.•.•••.••
2,400 bits/sec: •.•••••••.•••....

*

10/65

150, 250, or 300 char/sec.
(operator selectable).
serial by bit.
IBM 4-of-8 transmission code;
see Table 1.
half-duplex.
I, 2, 4, 8, n, 0, X, N; see Table 1.
synchronous; i.e., synchronization i1>
maintained by the data signals.

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C.
Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 201 A.
Bell System Data Set 202C or 2020, or
Western Union 1200 Baud Data Modem.
Bell System Data Set 201A.
Bell System Data Set 201B, or Western
Union 2400 Baud Data Modem.

In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant.
(Contd. )
AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6450:05
IBM 7702

e

TABLE L IBM 7702 DATA CODES
4 f 8 T, Code
I 2 4 8 R 0

Symbol
Space

2 4 8
0
2
8 R

f1
I
2

o
o

I
2
I 2

3

4
5
6

4
I

4
2 4

I 2 4

9

I
I

A
B
C

I

0
E

I

F

I

G
H

I
I

I
J
K

L
M

0

R

2
I 2

R

4
4
2 4
I 2 4

R

I

N

0
P
Q

R
S

I
2
I 2

T

4
4
2 4
I 2 4

U

I

V

W
X
Y
Z

I

/

I
=

I
I

2
2

X
X
X

R
R
R

8
0
8 R
R 0
2
R 0
2
0
4
R 0
4
0
2 4
0
2 4
8 R 0
8
0

8 R
8
R 0

0
R 0
0
u
0
8 R 0
8
0
R 0
8 R
8

Mc,g Tape Cade (BCD
I 248CA8

N
N
N
N
N
N
N

2
I
2
I 2
4
4
2 4
I 2 4

S

N

X
X
X
X

4
4
2 4
I 2 4
I

X
N

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

I
I
2
I 2

X

N
N
N
N
N
N

I
I
2
I 2
4
4
2 4
I 2 4
I

X N
X

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

@

.

C
C
C

I

C
C
C
8
8 C

A
C A
4
A
4
I
C A
L •
l. A
A
I 2 4
8
A
I
B C A
I
A
I 2
8 C
I 2
8 C A B
2
I 2

II

)

%
&

L
+

-?

I

X N

I 2
I 2

,

8

C
8 C
8
C A 8
C A B
A B
C A 8
A
A
C A
8 C A
8
A

4 of 8 T, Cade
I 2 4 8 R 0

Symbol

C A

R

7
8

#

X N

I
RM
GM
MC
SM
WS
TM

:

I
I
I

A

.....
V

t
>
<

I

,

Jel

,

Note 2

I
I

C Note 1
J
Blenk Note 3
Control
Character

0

I 2
I 2
N

X
X N
N
N

X
X
X N
N
N

0

X
0
R
R
R
R 0
R 0

X

R 0

R
R
R 0

Mag Tope Code (8CD)
I 2 4 8 CAB

X
X
X N

2

2
2
I
I
I
I
I

0

Inq - Error

8

R

4
X

1
1
1
1
4
2

2 R X
2 R 0
8 R X
8 R 0
8 R X
8 R X

2
2
2

8
8
8
A
4 8
4 8
A B
4 8 C
B
4 8 C A
A B
B
C
A B
8
8 C
B
8 C A
4 8
A B
4 8 C
B
4 8 C A
4 8

2 4 8
2 4 8
2 4 8
248
I
2 A~
4 8
I
I
4 8
4 8
I

..A
C
CAB

..A

B

C
C A B
B

Anal zer
Output

Emitter
Output
Input

ACKI - SOR 1
ACK2 - SOR2
Idle
TEL
EOT
CL
TL

N

X

8
8
0
4 8 R
4 8
0
4 8
4 8
0

2 4 8
2 4 8
2
8
8
2
8
2
4 8
4 8
4 8
8
2
4 8
2 4 8
2 4
4< 8,
2
8
2 4 8
2 4
4 8

X

Input

1
1
I
I
4
2
I
I

2
2
8
8
8
8

R X
R 0
R X
R 0
R X
R X
4 R X
4 R 0

R N

o

N

8 N
4
X
I
2

Note I--Valid in binary or expanded BCD only.
Note 2--Tronsmitted as the substitut~ character. Invalid if reod
from tape by a transmitter operating in the normal
(unexpanded) BCD mode.
Note 3--Volid in binary only.

Reprinted from IDM 7702 Magnetic Tape Transmission Terminal
Reference Manual, Form A22-6702, published by IBM •
. 73

Transmission Control
Call initiation:
Call reception:

• 74

Functional operations:

manual dialing or signaling.
operator must establish voice communication
and then switch to data mode.
none, except request retransmission •

Multistation Operation:

no provision.

©1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.'

10/65

6450:06
IBM 7702

•8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

7702 Magnetic Tape
Transmission Terminal

Component

29
31
60
950

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

.9

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phases

1.27
115 ± 10%
60 ± 1
1

Temperature Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

50-90
20-80
3,650

PRICE DATA
Monthly
Rental
$

Component

7702 Magnetic Tape Transmission
Terminal

5/70

1,260

Purchase
Price
$

56,260

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
MIOIIIIICH

6451 :01

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
RlPORTS

IBM 7710

•
IBM 7710 DATA COMMUNICATION UNIT
.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:....................... IBM 7710 Data Communication Unit •

• 12

Manufacturer:...................

. 13

Basic Function: . . . • . • . . . . • • . . . • .. provides IBM 1401 computer system with
transmission and reception facUities
via voice-band or broad-band communications facilities •

• 15

Description

International Business Machines Corporation
Data Processing Division
112 East Post Road
White Plains, New York .

The IBM 7710 Data Communication Unit is a communications line terminal device which
permits an IBM 1401 Data Processing System to communicate with a similarly-equipped
1401 at a remote location or with one of several other types of IBM data terminals. These
terminals can be any of the following:
• An IBM 1400 or 7000 Series computer system using an IBM 1009
Data Transmission Unit.
•

An IBM 1013 Card Transmission Terminal.

•

An IBM 7702 Magnetic Tape Transmission Terminal.

•

An IBM 7711 Data Communication. Unit.

•

An mM 7740 Communication Control System.

• An mM System/360 computer system using a 2701 Data Adapter
Unit.
The transmission speed can be 150, 250, 300, or 5,100 characters per second. Speeds
of 300 characters per second and lower are used over voice-band facilities; the 5,100characters-per-second speed requires broad-band facUities. Data is transferred in a
half-duplex mode. Full-duplex facilities can be used to maint.ain synchronization in both
directions at the same time, thereby reducing the turnaround times when sending control
signals.
The 7710 is controlled by the 1401 program. However, the 7710 performs code conversions
between the 4-of-8 transmission code and the 1401 BCD code, reqliests data transfers to and
from the 1401, and checks character and message parity. The 1401 contains instructions
which control the 7710 and which permit logical branching based on signals from the 7710.
These enable the 1401 to service 7710 data reqt,.;-sts and error indications, reverse transmission direction, and send control characters to the transmitting 1401/7710. If the remote
unit is not a 1401/7710 combination, the operator at the remote tL'lit must manually change
transmission direction when required. Automatic retransmission can be performed under
program control of the 1401.
To support the use of a 7710 with a 1401 to form a data transmission system, three IBM
utility programs are available for customer use:
•

1401-7710 Tape Transmit Program: Provides for transmission of tape
data from a 7710-equipped 1401 to a remote terminal.

@1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

10/65

6451:02
IBM 7710

.15

Description (Contd.)
•

1401-7710 Tape Receive Program: Provides for reception by a 7710equipped 1401 of data transmitted from a remote terminal.

•

1401-7710 Transmit-Receive Utility Program: Provides the user with
a means of controlling data transmission between a 1401 with an attached
7710 and a remote terminal, and performs the following functions:

(a)

Transmitting and receiving of data.

(b)

Integration with the user's operating programs.

(c)

Allowing special-purpose programming with a minimum
amount of programming effort.

The 7710 includes provision for self-testing. By switch control, it can receive its own
transmisRion, independently of the communications network. Data for the test can be
generated under switch control or can be received from the computer. Several diag!lostic programs are available for execution in the 141)1 to test the 7710, communications
link, and remote terminal.
The 7710 can be connected to mM computers other than the 1401 on a Request Price Quotation
(RPQ) basis. On the same basis, broad-band communications facilities can be used at transmission speeds of up to 28,000 characters per second .
. 16

First Delivery: . . . . . . . . . . • • . • . . ..

third quarter, 1963 .

• 17

Availability:....................

no longer in production; availability depf'flds
.
on returns.

. •2

CONFIG URA TION
A 7710 can be connected to any mM 1401 computer system except Models A and G via a Serial
Input/Output Adapter in the 1401. Two interfaces are available for connection to communications lines. The RS 232 Interface is required for connection to common-carrier voice- band
lines and the High-Speed Digital Interface is required for connection to TELPAK facilities.
One interface (either one) is standard; a second interface is optional, permitting alternate
transmission over both voice-band and broad-band facilities. Connection to communications
facilities r4~qllires an appropriate data set; the data set requirements are listed in Paragraph .72 .

•3

INPUT
All input to the 7710 is from the connected 1401 computer, under control of the program
stored in the 1401. Input to the 1401 can be from punched cards, punched paper tape, magnetic tape, or magnetic disc .

• 35

Message Configuration
Data is transferred in blocks under control of the stored program. Message length is
limited only hy core storage availability in the 1401 system. Each message is preceded
and followed by control characters automatically supplied by the 7710 .

• 36

Operating Procedure
The 7710 is normally initialized only during start-up at the beginning of the day; operation
thereafter is under control of the 1401. The start-up procedure is as follows:

10/65

(1)

Select BCD or binary code.

(2)

Set speed.

(Contd.
AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

DATA
~ COMMUNICATIONS

6451:03

AUERBACH

.IiIBACH

IBM 7710

aEPOIITS

•

•4

(3)

!Select ball-duplex or full-duplex operation.

(4)

Check that terminals are in phase.

(5)

Press Start switch; 1401 assumes control of transmissions .

OUTPUT
All output from the 7710 is to the connected 1401 computer, under control of the program
stored in the 1401. Output from the 1401 system can be to punched cards, punched paper
tape, printed copy, magnetic tape, or magnetic disc files .

.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

. 51

Data Entry Errors
Type of checking: . . • . . . . . • • . . . . . ..
Error indication: . • • • • • • . • • . • . • . ..
Correction procedure:. . • . • . • . • • • • ..

. 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking: . • • . • • • • . . • . • . • ..
Error indication: . • • • • • • . • • • • • • . •.
Correction procedure:. • • • • • • • • • . . .•

. 53

Error indication: • . • • • • . • • • • • • • • ••
Correction procedure:. • • • . • • • • • • • ..

the 1401 checks character parity of data transferred to the 1401 by the 7710.
light and error signal to the 7710, causing an
error control signal to be transmitted to the
remote terminal.
as programmed in the 1401: usually retransmission of an entire record .

Line Malfunctions
Detection: . • • • • . • . . . • • . • . • • • • • •.
Action.: . . • • • . . . • • • • . • . • . . . • • . •.

•6

character validity and longitudinal parity checks.
light and signal to the 1401.
as programmed in the 1401; usually retransmission of an entire record.

Data Recording Errors
Type of checking: . . . . • . . • • • • • • • • ..

• 55

character parity is checked on the data transferred from the 1401 to the 7710.
light and signal to the 1401.
as programmed in the 1401; usually retransfer
of data character to the 7710 .

loss of synchronization (lamp), continuous
retransmission attempts.
call service personnel .

CONDITION INDICA TORS
Input device available:. • .
Input device busy:. . . • . .
Remote receiver ready:. .
Remote receiver busy: . .
Power on: . . • • • • . . • • .

•
.
.
.
•

•
.
.
.
.

.
.
•
•
•

•••
•••
. • -.
. ••
. . .

.
•
•
•
•

.
.
•
•
•

. .•
. .•
• •.
. •.
. ..

lamp.
lamps.
no direct indicator.
no direct indicator.
lamp.

Transmission error:. . • . . . . . . . . . • ..
Recording error: . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . ..
End of transmission: . • . . . • . . • . . . . .
Computer connected and on: . . . • . . • . ..
Data set ready: . . . . • • • . • • . • . . • . ..

lamp, audible alarr"".
lamp, audible alarm.
lamp, audible alarm.
lamp.
lamp.

Loss of synchronization: . • • . • • • . • • ••
Computer error: . . . • . . • . • . . • • • . ..
Computer program not compatible
with record received: • . . . . . . . • . . .•

lamp, audible alarm.
lamp, audible alarm.

© 1965

lamp.

AUERBACH Corporation a'1d AUERBACH Info. Inc.

10./65

6451:04
IBM 7710

.7

DA TA TRANSMISSION

. 71

Basic Characteristics

. 72

Rated transmission speed: ...•..••••.. 150, 250, or 300 char/sec over voice-band lines.
5,100 char/sec over broad-band facilities.
Transmission method: •••••••••••••.. serial by bit.
Transmission, code: •••••••••••.•••• mM 4-of-8 code; see Table 1.
Transmission mode: .•.•••.•.••.•••. half-duplex.
Order of bit transmission: ..•.•.•..••. I, 2, 4, 8, R, 0, X, N; see Table 1.
Synchronization: . . . . • . . . . • . . • • . . . . . synchronous; i. e., synchronization is maintained
by the data signals •
Connection to Communications Lines
Data Set*

Communications Line

Public switched telephone network at
the following speeds:
1,200 bits/sec (150 char/sec): .•.... Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C or 202D.
2,000 bits/sec (250 char/sec): ...•.. Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 201A.
Common-carrier leased voice-band line
at the following speeds:
1,2(10 bits/sec (150 char/sec): . . . . . . Bell System Data Set 202C or 202D, or
Western Union 1200 Baud Data Modem.
2,000 bits/sec (250 char/sec): ....•. Bell System Data Set 201A.
2,,*00 bits/sec (300 char/sec): .••.•• Bell System Data Set 201B, or Western
Union 2400 Baud Data Modem.
Telpak A at 40,800 bits/sec
(5,100 char/sec): ••••.•...•...•... **
·.73

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . • . . . . . . • . . . • . . . • . . . "manual dialing or signaling.
Call reception: ..••.•••••.•.•••••.. capable of unattended operation.
Functional operations: ...•••••...•... no direct control; however, incoming data
can be used to control operations through
appropriate programming .

• 74

Multistation Operation: . . . . . . . . . • • . . . no provision .

•8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component:

7710

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inChes)
Weight (pounds)

38
32
70
500
Power (KVA)
0.7
208/230
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
60
Phases
1
Temperature Range eF.) 60-90
20-80
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)
1,650
* In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; see your local common-carrier communications consultant.
** Connection to Telpak A service requires a Telpak Channel Terminal A2, which includes
a data set.
(Contd. )
AUERBACH Data Communications

Ref.lort~

A
a

.

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
CDMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6451: 05
IBM 7710

TABLE 1. ffiM 7710 DATA CODES
TransmiS$ion Code

Symbol
Space (Note 1)
0
1
2

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D

"

8

0

2 4 8
2
8

0

1 2

0
0

2
2

..
4

8

2
2

4

..
4
4

J
K
L
M
N

0
0

N
N
N

4
4
2 4
2 4

X
X
X
X

2
2

4
2 4
2 4

4
4
4
4

4
4
2 4
2 4

4
'4
4
4

8
8
8
8
8

0
N

0
0

X
X

N
N

4 8
4 8
4 8
B
4 8

Group Mark
Delta
Segment Mark
Word Separator
Tape Mark
I

>
<

A
A
A
A

A
A
A
A
B
8 C A
C
C

4 8
4
4 8
2
8
2 4 8

(
)

4
4
4
4

8
8

I
I
Trans-Leader I
Cant-Leader I
SOR-I/ACK-I I
SOR-2/ACK-2 I

B
B

B

8 C
C

A

0

X
X
X

2
2
2

8 C
8
8

A

0

2 4
2 4
2 4
4
2 4

C

A

C

A
A

2 4
2 4
2 4
2 4
4

8
8
8 C
8 C
8

N
N
N

X

0
X

0
0
0
X
X
X

N

A

A

C

4 8
4 8 C
C

A

A
A

B

4
4

0
X

0
X
X

0

A

C

8 C
B
C

A
A
A

8 C
8 C
8 C
8
8

1 2 4

Transmission Control Code Combinations
(Note 2)

A
A
A
A
A

C

N
N

0

Idle
Error-Inquiry

C

C
8 C
8
C

MOll!etic Toee Code

OX

2 4
4 8

Blank (Note 1)

Note 1:

A set-up switch alters the code to correct the coding discrepancy
of l400-series machines as follows:

a. The binary mode is not affected.
b. In the BCD mode, the code for "space" is changed to the

C

X

2

Record Mark

4 8
4 8
4 8
8
8
8

C
C

2
2

N
N
N

N
N
N

2
2

C

4

N

2
2
2
2
2

f

C
C

8 C

N
N
N
N
N

2

&

C

8

8 R 0
8
0
0

"

Symbol

ii

2
2

N

N
N
N
N

2 4
2 4

Transmission Code

A B

8 C

N

0
0
0
0
0

4

Y
Z

2

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

T

%

X
X

0

U

D

0
0

8
8

V

@

X
X
X
X

2 4
2 4

R
S

$

X

0
0
0
0

"4

Q

~

X

N
N
N
N

N

8
8

H

X

X
X

8

I

W

0

4 8 C

N

A

R
R
R

4

E
F
G

0
P

0

Magnetic TOl!e Code
X

C-bit instead of the A-bit. The A-bit code is then treated
as Q non-valid code combination instead of the C code.

A
~

A

These code combinations are used exclusively for exchange of control
instruction across the communication channel and never appear
at the computer interface.

A

Reprinted from. mM 7710 Data Communication Unit Principles of Operation, p. 6, Form A22-6776,
published by ffiM.
.9

PRICE DATA

Component or Feature
7710 Data Communication Unit
Dual Communications Interface
Internal Clock*

Monthly
Rental

Purchase
Price

$

$

1,575
20

No longer
in production;
not possible
to purchase

145

* This feature is required when 7710 is used with a data set that does not provide
clocking pulses.

© 1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/70

A
~

~UERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6452:01
IBM 7711

'"
IBM 7711 DATA COMMUNICATION UNIT
.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: ..

IBM 7711 Data Communication Unit.

. 12

Manufacturer: .

International Business Machines Corporation
Data Processing Division
112 East Post Road
White Plains, New York.

. 13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

reads magnetic tape and transmits data over
voice-band or broad-band communications
facilities.
receives data from communications lines and
records it on magnetic tape .

. 15

Description:
The IBM 7711 Data Communication Unit is a communications line terminal device which permits transmission and reception of magnetic tape data, independent of computer control. It
can be connected to one IBM 729 or 7330 Magnetic Tape Unit, and provides transmission rates
of 150, 250, or 300 characters per second over voice-band lines, or up to 28, 800 characters
per second (230,400 bits per second) over leased broad-band communications services. Data
transmission is in a half-duplex mode. Full-duplex lines can be used to maintain synchronization in both directions at once; this reduces the turnaround time when reversing the direction of transmission.
The remote terminals with which a 7711 can communicate include:
• An IBM 1400 or 7000 Series computer system using a 1009 Data
Transmission Unit.
• An IBM System/360 computer system using a 2701 Data Adapter Unit.
• An IBM 1013 Card Transmission Terminal.
•

An IBM 7701 or 7702 Magnetic Tape Transmission Terminal.

• An IBM 7710 Data Communication Unit.
• An IBM 7740 Communication Control System.
• An IBM 7750 Programmed Transmission Terminal.
• Another IBM 7711.
This compatibility permits tape-to-computer, tape-to-tape, or tape-to-card communications.
The 7711 reads data from the magnetic tape unit, record by record, into its core storage
buffer. Records can be variable in length, up to the capacity of the buffer, and can be intermixed BCD and binary. The standard buffer size is 200 characters, and options provide for
buffer sizes of 400, 800, 1200, or 2400 characters. To increase transmission efficiency, tlle
buffer is loaded from the tape unit while the 7711 waits for verification of correct transmission
of the previous record.
Tape units available for use with the 7711 Data Communication Unit are the IBM 729 II and IV
and the IBM 7330. With an extra-cost option, the IBM 729 V or VI units can be used. The

6452:02
IBM 7711

· 15

Description (Contd.)
recording density of the tape at a transmitting 7711 terminal can be 200, 556, or (on the 729 V
or VI) 800 bits per inch. The tape at a receiving 7711 terminal can be recorded at 200, 556,
or (on the 729 V or VI) 800 bits per inch, as selected by the operator. Different densities can
be used at the transmitting and receiving terminals if desired. One tape unit can be connected
to a 7711 terminal and switched manually to an on-line computer near the 7711.
The 7711 provides tape character parity checking, 4-of-8 transmission code validity checking of the transmitted characters, longitudinal redundaIlCY checking, and automatic refilling
or message retransmission when errors are detected.

· 16

First Delivery: .• . . . . . . . • . • . . . . ..

third quarter, 1964.

• 17

Availability:....................

9 months •

.2

CONFIGURATION
A data communications terminal using a 7711 Data Communication Unit consists of the following components:
•

An IBM 7711 Data Communication Unit with either an RS 232
Interface for voice-band lines or a Digital Interface for broadband lines. One interface is standard; the Dual Interface optional
feature permits both interfaces to be included and selected under
operator control.

•

One IBM 729 Model II, IV, V, or VI Magnetic Tape Unit or one
IBM 7330 Magnetic Tape Unit. Use of a 729 Model V or Model VI
requires an optional feature.

•

An· appropriate data set, depending on the particular communications facility to be used. See Paragraph .72 for the usable
communications facilities and the required data sets •

.3

INPUT

.. 31

Prepared Input
IBM 729 or 7330 Magnetic Tape UnitInput medium: . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . •.
Input code: . • • • . . . . . . . . . • . . • .•
Quantity of data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .
Rated input speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .•

0.5-inch, IBM 729-compatible tape.
BCD (even parity) or binary (odd parity).
variable block size up to 200, 400, 800, 1,200,
or 2,400 characters, depending on size of
buffer.
7, 200 char/sec to 90,000 char/sec, depending
on tape unit model and recording density.
somewhat less than transmission speed; see
Paragraph . 71.

· 32

Manual Input: . . . . . . • • • . . . . . . • . • •

no provision.

• 33

Fixed Input: . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . • . . • .

no provision.

.34

Transaction Code Input:

no provision.

.35

Message Configuration:

up to 2,400 data characters, depending on
buffer Size, preceded and followed by
control codes automatically supplied by
the 7711.

«

. I.

A
~

AU[RtlACH

6452:03

AUEIlllACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
IllPOIITS

IBM 7711

•
• 36

Operating Procedure
•

Mount tape reels.

• Set tape density switch.
•

Set Speed.

•

Set parity (even or odd).

•

Select half-duplex or full-duplex operation.

• . Establish connection by manual dialing or signaling.
•

Check that terminals are in.phase (Ready light on).

• Press Start switch.
.37

Entry of Time and Date:

•4

OUTPUT

• 43

Output to Magnetic Tape

no provision .

IBM 729 or 7330 Magnetic Tape UnitTape size: .•......••.•.••...•
TaJ)e cooe: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated output speed: ..•..••••••.•

0.5-inch. IBM 729-compatible.
IBM BCD (even parity) or binary (odd parity).
7 • 200 char/sec to 90.000 char/sec. depending
on tape unit model and recording denSity.
Effective speed: . • . • . • • • • . . . . • • • somewhat less than transmission speed; see
Paragraph • 71.
Format control:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . none .

•5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

· 51

Data Entry Errors
Type of checking: ••.•.••••••..•..
Error indication: . . • • • . . • • • . . . • • ..
Correction procedure: .••.•••.••...

· 52

Data Transmission Errors
. Type of checking:

•••••••.••••••.•
Error indication: . • • • • . . • • • • • • • • ••
Correction procedure:. • . . • • • • . • . • •.

· 53

character validity and longitudinal parity.
light.
automatic retransmission of record.

Data Recording Errors
Type of checking: . . . . • . . . . • . . . . • •.

Error indication: . • . • • . . . • . . • • . • •.
Correction procedure: •••••.•.••.•.
• 55

character parity and longitudinal parity.
light.
automatic backspace and reread before transmission.

read-after-write check of character and longitudinal parity.
light.
automatic retransmission of record.

Line Malfunctions
Detection: . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . • . . • . • loss of synchronization (lamp); continuous retransmission attempts.
Action:
call service personnel.

@1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

10/65

6452:04

IBM 7711

.6

CONDITiON INDICATORS

Input device available: ...•.•.••••••
Input device busy: .••••...••••••••
Remote receiver ready:. • . • • • . •• • • •.
Remote receiver busy: . • . • • • . • • • • ••
Power on: . • • • • . • . • . • • • • • . . . • • ••
Improper data entry: •••..••.•.••••
Transmission" error: •..•.••..••...
Recording error: . • • • . • • • • • . • . • • ••
Half-duplex/full-duplex: • • . • • • • • • • ••
Recording density: • . • • • • • • • • • • • • ••
•7

DATA TRANSMISSION

• 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed: ..•••...••.
Transmission method: . • . • . . . . . . . • .
Transmission code: •...•...•...••.
Transmission mode: . . . • . • . . . . . . . • .
Order of bit transmission: . . . . . . . . . • .
Synchronization: . . . . . . . . • . . . . • . • .

. 72

lamp.
lamp.
lamp.
lamp.
lamp.
lamp.
lamp.
lamp.
lamp.
lamps •

150, 250, or 300 char/sec over voice-band lines.
5,100 char/sec over broad-band facilities.
serial by bit.
mM 4-of-8 code; see Table iin the report on
the mM 7710 Communication Unit, page
6451:05.
half-duplex.
1, 2, 4, 8, R, 0, X, N.
synchronous; 1. e. , synchronization is maintained by the data signals .

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Se1*

Public switched telephone networks
at the following speeds:
1,200 bits/sec (150 char/sec): . . . . .•
2,000 bits/sec (2bO char/sec): . . . . ..
Common-carrier leased voice-band
line at the following speeds:
1,200 bits/sec (150 char/sec): . . . . ..
2,000 bits/sec (250 char/sec): • . . . ..
2,100 bits/sec (300 char/sec): . • . . .•

Bell System Data-Phone
Data Set 202C or 202D.
Bell System Data-Phone
Data Set 201A.

Bell System Data Set 202C or 202D,
or Western Union 1200 Baud Data Modem.
Bell System Data Set 201A.
Bell System Data Set 201B, or Western
Union 2400 Baud Data Modem.

Telpak A at 40,800 bits/sec
(5,100 char/sec): . • . • . . • . . . . . . .

(1).

Telpak Cat 230,400 bits/sec
(28,800 char/sec): . • . • . . • . • . . • ••

(2).

*In some cases, equipment data sets can be used; sec your local COl.l1moncarrier communications consultants.
(1) Connection to Telpak A requires a Telpak Channel Terminal A2, which
includes a data set.
(2) Connection to Telpak C requires a Telpak Channel Terminal C3. which
includes a data set.
(Col1td. )
AUERBACH Data Communications Rep"'"

A
8

.

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

• 73

6452:05
IBM 7711

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . • • . • . • . • • • . . • . • • .•
Call reception:. . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . ..

manual dialing or signaling.
operator must establish voice communication
and then switch to data mode •

. 74

Multistation Operation: . . • • • . . • . . . ..

no provision .

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component

.9

7711

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

29
30.6
58
800

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phases

2.5
208 or 230
60

Temperature Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

60-90
8-80
3,600

1

PRICE DATA

Compoment or Feature

Monthly
Rental

$
7711 Data Communication Unit

Purchase
Price
$

1,065

46,755

Buffer positions 201-400
Buffer positions 401-800
Buffer positions 801-1200
Buffer positions 1201-2400
Dual Communications Interface
Internal Clock
729 VIVI Attachment

20
39
68
116
20
25
10

900
1,745
3,055
5,240
925
1,150
400

729 n Magnetic Tape Unit
729 IV Magnetic Tape Unit
729 V Magnetic Tape Unit
729 VI Magnetic Tape Unit
7330 Magnetic Tape Unit

680
875
725
920
435

34,920
40,010
36,085
41,175
21,340

Monthly
Maintenance
$
47
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
99
109
103
114
58

NC - No charge

© 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/70

A
~

AUERBACH

AU£RBACH
DATA
CDM.UNICAlIONS
REPORTS

6453:01
IBM 2712

•
IBM 2712 REMOTE MULTIPLEXOR

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2712 Remote Multiplexor, Model 1 and Model 2.

.12

Manufacturer:

International Business Machines Corp.
Data Processing Division
112 East Post Road
White Plains, New York

.13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . •

multiplex multiple low-speed data transmissions
onto a single voice-band line.

· 14

· 15

Basic Components
Name: . • . . . • . • . . . . . • . • • . . . . .
Model number: • . . . . . . • . . . . • • . • .
Function: . . • . • . . . • . . . . . • . • • • . .

2712 Remote Multiplexor.

Name:
Model number: •.•.••.••.••....•
Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2712 Remote Multiplexor.

1.

multiplex data from up to 10 lines operating at
134. 5 bits/sec over a single voice- band line.

2.
multiplex data from up to 14 lines operating at
74.2 bits/sec over a single voice-band line.

Description
The IBM 2712 Remote Multiplexor is intended to provide economies in communications line·
costs by permitting messages from multiple low-speed lines to be transmitted simultaneously
over a single voice-band line. The low-speed lines are terminated at the 2712 by data sets,
IBM line adapters, or relays in the normal manner. When transmitting, the 2712 selects one
bit from each low-speed line during each scan cycle, adds a sync bit, and transmits these
bits as a word. When receiving, the 2712 divides each word from the remote station into in-.
dividual bits and distributes each bit to the appropriate low-speed line. The 2712 can transmit and receive data simultaneously; i. e., full-duplex operation is possible.
The 2712's primary purpose is to concentrate data transmission between a low-speed network
and an IBM System/360 computer. The 2712 communicates with the computer via a 2702 or
2703 Transmission Control (see Reports 8443 and 8444), The 2712 has no effect on the programming of the computer; as far as the programmer is concerned, communications over
each low-speed line are handled as if the line were connected directly to the Transmission
Control.
Two models of the 2712 Remote Multiplexor are available. Modell can handle up to 10 narrow-band lines from IBM terminals operating at 134.5 bits per second. Model 2 can handle
up to 14 telegraph-grade lines operating at 74.2 bits per second.

• 16

First Delivery: ..•••.•.••.••.•.•

July 1966.

• 17
.2

Availability: • . . • . . • . . . • . • • . • • . .
CONFIGURATION

12 months .

The 2712 Modell requires, in addition to the basic unit, a line adapter for each line terminated on the low-speed side and a data set for the single voice-band line terminated on the highspeed side. Three line adapters are available:
•

Data Set Line Adapter - Provides for connection of a narrow-band line terminated
by a common-carrier data set; see Paragraph • 72.

•

IBM Line Adapter - Provides for direct cable connection of an IBM 1050 station
located not more than 40 feet away.

•

IBM Limited Distance Line Adapter - Type 1 - Provides for communication
with IBM terminals located not more than 4. 75 miles away, via a privately-owned
4-wire transmission line.
.

© 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/67

6453:02
IBM 2712

.2

CONFIGURATION (Contd.)
Any combination of these adapters that does not include more than one cable-connected IBM
Line Adapter, nor more than 10 adapters total, can be used.
The 2712 Model 2 requires, in addition to the basic unit, one Telegraph Line Adapter for each
pair of telegraph lines terminated on the low-speed side and a data set for the single voiceband line terminated on the high-speed side.
To allow servicing and testing to be performed, IBM requires that the 2712 Remote Multiplexor
be installed within sight (40 feet) of one of the terminal devices in the network.
See Paragraph. 72 for the standard communications facilities that can be used and the data
sets required, if any.

•3

INPUT: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

input to the 2712 is the data transmitted over a
group of low-speed lines; the 2712 multiplexes
this data for transmission over a single voiceband line.

.4

OUTPUT:

output from the 2712 is the data it transmits to a
group of low-speed lines; the 2712 receives this
data, in multiplexed form, over a single voiceband line and distributes the individual bits to
the appropriate low-speed lines .

.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION:

no provisions for checking.

.6

CONDITION INDICATORS
Power on: . . . . . . . . . ............ .
Out of synchronization: ••.••.••.••
Not connected to output line: ••.•••••
CE mode (test): ••••.•.••...•..•

lamp.
lamp.
lamp.
lamp.

DATA TRANSMISSION
At the present time, the 2712 Remote Multiplexor can only communicate, on the high-speed
side, with an IBM System/360 computer via a 2702 or 2703 Transmission Control Unit
equipped with the appropriate features (see Reports 8443 and 8444).
When transmitting to a remote System/360 computer, one bit is taken from each low-speed line
during each scan cycle. The data bits and one sync bit per cycle are formed into a word
which is transmitted over a voice-band line. When receiving data from the remote computer,
the word is broken down into individual bits which are distributed to the appropriate low-speed
terminals.
.
The word length for Modell is 11 bits (10 data bitsand 1 sync bit), and the word length for
Model 2 is 15 bits (14 data bits and 1 sync bit).
The 2712 Remote Multiplexor can handle data flow in both directions simultaneously, i. e. ,
full-duplex operation •
• 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed High-speed side Model 1: . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • . . • .
Model 2: . . . . . . . . . • . • • • . . • . .
Low-speed side (each line) Model 1: . . . . . . . • . . . . . • . • . . .
Mooe12: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission method: ••.•••••.••.
Transmission code Mooel 1:

.....•..............

Mooel 2:

................... .

1, 526 bits/sec.
1,113 bits/sec.
134.5 bits/sec.
74.2 bits/sec.
serial by bit.
11 bits/word.
15 bits/word.
(Contd. )

5/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

3Z

A

~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
CDMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6453:03
IBM 2712

"
Transmission mode: .•.••••••••••
Synchronization High-speed side: •.•.•••.••..•••
Low- speed side:
. 72

full-duplex.
synchronous (one sync bit is added to each word
transmitted).
start! stop.

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set*

Low-speed side
Model 1Bell System Schedule
3A or 4 Data Channels: ••••.••••
\Vestern Union Class D
Data Channels: •••••••••••••••
Model 2 Common-carrier leased telegraphgrade lines: ••.••••••••••••••

Bell System Data Set 103F.
\Vestern Union 180 Baud Data Modem.
none required.

High-speed side (Both models)
Bell System Schedule 4,
Type 4A or Type 4B leased
Data Channel**: •.•••...••....•

Bell System Data Set 202D.

.73

Transmission Control: •.••••.•••..

the 2712 is a completely passive element in a
communications network; it contains no facilities
for transmission control.

.74

Multistation Operation:

no provision.

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2712 Remote
MUltiplexor

Component

\vidth (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
\Veight (pounds)

43
24
29
Approx. 400

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
Phases

0.5
115
60
1

Temperature range
tF.)

Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU /hr)

*

50 to 110
10 to 80
1,500

In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant. See also Paragraph. 2, Configuration.

** Full-duplex Type 4A line is required for 2712 Model 2; full-duplex Type 4B line is required
for Modell.

© 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/67

6453:04
IBM 2712

.9

PRICE DATA
Monthly
Rental *
$

Component or Feature

2712 Remote Multiplexor:
Modell
Model 2
Data Set Line Adapter
IBM Line Adapter (for conn.ooting a nearby mM 10[0
station)
IBM Limited Distance Line
Adapter - Type 1
Telegraph Line Adapter (provides for connecting two
telegraph-grade lines to a
2712 Model 2)

Purchase
Price
$

460
495

20,080
21,605

28.75
30.25

10
10

450
450

0.75
0.75

13

585

1.00

40

1,750

1.75

* Monthly rentals are shown for 24-hour usage.

5/70

Monthly
Maintenance
$

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
AUERIIACH

6454:00

AUlnAeH
DATA
COMMUNICATIDNI
REPORTS

IBM 2740
REPORT UPDATE

•
REPORT UPDATE

~ IBM 2740 MODEL 2
IBM has introduced a buffered 2740 Communication Terminal, which is designated the Model 2;
the previous unbuffered 2740 has been continued with no changes, and is designated the Model 1.
Other than the differencl!s stated in this Report Update, the buffered 2740 Model 2 is identical to
the unbuffered Model 1.
The 2740 Model 2 can communicate only with a remote System/3S0 computer equipped with a 2701
Data Adapter Unit or a 2702 or 2703 Transmission Control (see Reports 8442, 8443, and 8444)
and only over a leased or privately owned communications facility.
The basic 2740 Model 2 is equipped with a 120-character core buffer. Data entered from the keyboard is stored in the buffer, which all.ows the typed copy to be visually verified prior to transmission. Received messages are transferred directly to the printer and are not stored.
Optional features include:
•

Buffer Expansion - one or two expansion modules can be added to increase the basic
buffer capacity to 248 or 440 character positions.

•

Buffer Receive - permits received messages to be stored in the core buffer prior to
printing; the contents of the buffer is printed when an EOT control character is received.

•

Document Insertion - permits single-part ledger cards to be inserted in front of the
typewriter platen without using the platen knobs. Manual positioning is required for
each new print line; the top 1-1/3 inch and the bottom 1 inch cannot be used for printing.
A pin-feed platen cannot be used with this option. The Document Insertion option can
be obtained for handling two widths of ledger cards: six or 7-3/8 inches. Either width
can be up to five inches long. The positioning of the ledger cards is such that a short
space is available ahead of the ledger card for printing on a form carried in the regular
carriage. A space 2.5 inches long is provided with the narrower card (S-inch width),
and a space 5.5 inches long is provided for the wider card (7-3/8-inch width).

•

Edit - provides two additional keys: Line Return and Line Type, to be used for keyboard
editing of incorrectly entered data prior to transmission.

•. Header Control - permits message header information to be entered from the keyboard
and stored in increments of four characters up to a total of 28 charaCters. The header
is stored beginning with the first character position of the buffer. The header is transmitted with each message and can be verified prior to a transmission. Header length
must be pre-designated.
• SOO BPS Speed Base - provides data transmission at 600 bits per second (6S. 7 char/sec)
over leased or privately owned facilities. The peak printer rate remains at 14.8 characters per second.
• Telegraph Line Attachment - provides data transmission at 75 bits per second (8.33
characters per second) over a leased telegraph-grade line. The print rate remains at
14.8 characters per second if Buffer Receive option is incorPorated. This option cannot be used if the 2740 is connected to an IBM 2712 Remote Multiplexor.
.
• Split Friction Feed Platen - provides a two-section platen; printing line length is 5-1/2
inches on left side, 7-1/2 inches on right. When this option is included with the Document Insertion option, two separate forms, in addition to a ledger card. can be inserted
and individually controlled. .Document Insertion and six-lines-per-inch vertical spacing
are prerequisite to this option.
.
Some options available for the Modell are not available for the Model 2; see Paragraph .9.
IBM 2750 MODEL 2 PRICES
The price data OJ;! page 6454:08 has been updated to reflect current prices and features included
with the IBM 2740 Communication Terminal, Models 1 and 2.

C 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/68

A
~

IUERHACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATlDNS
REPORTS

6454:01
IBM 2740

CO

IBM 2740 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL

.1

GENERAL

· 11

Identity:

2740 Communication Terminal.

· 12

Manufacturer:

International Business Machines Corp.
Data Processing Division
112 East Post Road
White Plains, New York.

· 13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

two-way typed-message data communication at
14.8 char/sec over narrow-band or voice-band
communications facilities.

· 15

Description
The IBM 2740 Communication Terminal is an adaptation of the IBM Selectric Typewriter
designed to provide half-duplex typed-message data communications at 14.8 characters per
second (134.5 bits per second) over a privately-owned or leased common-carrier narrowband or voice-band line, or the public telephone network.
The 2740 can communicate with other 2740 terminals or with a remote IBM System/360 computer equipped with a 2701 Data Adapter Unit or a 2702 or 2703 Transmission Control (see
Reports 8442, 8443, and 8444). An optional feature provides a 2740 terminal with the capability to respond to polling or selective addressing messages transmitted from the System/
360 computer.
The 2740 can operate in either a "communicate" mode for data communications or in a "local"
mode for local typing functions. The printing mechanism of the 2740 utilizes an interchangeable "type ball" similar to those used in IBM Selectric Typewriters.
Three different transmission codes and corresponding keyboards can be selected for use with
the IBM 2740 Terminal; see Figure 2 and Tables I, II, and III. The Standard Selectric
Typewriter code and keyboard permit the use of Selectric typewriter type-balls, but there
are differences in the selection of special symbols among the many type-balls offered. The
Paper Tape EBCn and BCD Transmission codes are compatible except for punctuation marks
and special symbols. These two codes are not compatible with the Standard Selectric Typewriter Codes. IBM emphasizes that any network employing multiple 2740 or 2741 (see
Report 6455) Communication Terminals should use the same keyboard and code for all units.
If a System/360 computer were included in the 2740 Terminal network, the computer could
perform code translations to iron out terminal code compatibility problems, but only at the
cost of extra programming and proceSSing time.
Optional features that are available for the 2740 Communication Terminal include:
•

Record Checking - Provides for automatic generation and checking of character
and message parity. A switch Js provided to enable or disable the checking
feature.

•

Automatic EOB - Provides for transmitting an End-of-Block (EOB) code and
message parity character after each line is typed and the carriage is returned.
This feature is available only with the Record Checking feature; it provides
message parity checking on a line-by..:line basis instead of on the whole
trans miss ion.

•

Dial Up - Permits the 2740 to be connected to the public telephone network via a
common-carrier data set.

•

Station Control - Provides the 2740 terminal with the capability to recognize and
respond to special addressing and control signals transmitted from a System/360
computer. Inclusion of the Station Control feature excludes the Dial Up feature.

•

Transmit Control - Allows a remote computer to control the transmit/receive
status of a 2740 terminal if operation is over the public telephone network. The
Dial Up feature is required for installation of the Transmit Control feature.

C 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/67

6454:02
IBM 2740

Figure 1.
· 15

IBM 2740 Communication Terminal

Description (Contd.)
•

Pin-Feed Platen - Allows sprocketed forms to be used and fed; provides more
precise control over vertical positioning and alignment of printing, which could
be important if preprinted forms are used.

The 2740 Communication Terminal is connected to a communications line via either a
common-carrier data set or an IBM line adapter. Four different IBM line adpaters are
available for various types of communications lines. These include:
.
•

Limited Distance Line Adapter Type 1 - For use with a two-wire or four-wire
privately-owned or leased common-carrier line not exceeding 4.75 wire-miles
in length. The four-wire version of the adapter can be used to communicate with
the IBM 2712 Remote Multiplexor.

•

IBM Limited Distance Line Adapter Type 2 - For use with a two-wire privatelyowned or leased common-carrier line not exceeding 8. 0 wire-miles in length.

•

IBM Leased Line Adapter - For use with a privately-owned or leased commoncarrier voice-band line.

•

IBM Shared Line Adapter - Provides the capability for transmitting over a
subchannel of a voice-band line; up to four subchannels can be "derived" from a
single line. Different models utilize different subchannels. The remote station
must be equipped with a similar modem, and only terminals on the same subchannel can communicate with one another.

· 16

First Delivery:

December 1965.

· 17

Availability:

12 months.

·2

CONFIGURA TION

A 2740 Communication Terminal consists of a manual input keyboard, a printing component,
special features as desired, and a common-carrier data set or IBM Line Adapter, depending
on the tranmission facility employed. See Paragraph. 72 for the standard communications
facilities that can be used and the data set required.
(Contd. )
5/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6454:03
IBM 2740

•
TABLE I: IBM STANDARD SELECTRIC TYEPWRITER CODE
In VALUE

LOWER CAY.

I
I

I • I C I .L . J 2 J I

•• ••

••

0

I
I

••

2
I

I

~

~.
2

,

I

•
••

C

7

-i-T

••

•

.

-

•
••

"
~

2
2

I

·
·

urPfR CASE

I

--}

•,

I

A

D

,

• •

H

•

J

1

l

··

•

N

P
Q

•

··
"

•
THE CODES BeLOw ARE NOT PfUNTAW

FUNCTION CODES
IV
RES

p,

IS
If
Nl
HI
UC

'OS
85
lC
'01

PRE
Il
D

CIlI

s,.. 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/67

6455:02
IBM 2741

Figure 1. IBM 2741 Communication Terminal
.32

Manual Input (Contd.)
Comments: . . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . ..

three keyboards are available which correspond to
the three different codes. The Standard Selectric
Typewriter keyboard is shown in Figure 2 of
Report 6454.

. 33
.34

Fixed Input: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •

no provision .

Transaction Code Input:

no provision.

.35

Message Configuration:

data characters are preceded by a@code (automatically transmitted) and followed by an endof-transmission code (EaT) keyed in by the
operator .

. 36

Operating Procedure
To transmit a message to the remote computer, the operator:
(1)

Places the terminal in the Communicate mode.

(2)

Establishes connection by dialing or manually signaling. On a
dedicated line, a ~rmanent connection can be maintained. (After connection
is established, a@is automatically sent to the computer and the keyboard is
unlocked. )

(3)
(4)

Keys in the message.
Presses either the Attention key or the Carriage Return key. When either
key is depressed, an EaT code is sent to the computer.

The terminal is automatically placed in the receive state when a@code is received from the
computer, in response to a transmitted message. An EaT code received from the computer
causes the 2741 to switch to the transmit state and unlocks the keyboard. Communication is
terminated by the operator who switches the terminal to the local mode. The terminal also
disconnects when power is switched off.
(Contd.)
5/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

44

A

~

..

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6455:03
IBM 2741

The 2741 Communication Terminal is designed to communicate with an IBM System/360 computer over a dedicated privately-owned or leased common-carrier communications facility;
a permanent connection is maintained between the two stations unless the Dial-Up feature is
used .
. 37

Entry of Time and Date: . . . . . . . • . . .• no provision .

.4

OUTPUT

.44

Output to Printer
friction-fed or pin-fed (optional) fanfold forms up
to 15.5 inches wide (13-inch writing width).
88 printable characters; see Tables I, II, and III
Character set: . . . .
in Report 6454.
Rated printing speed:
14.8 char/sec.
Effective speed:
less than rated speed due to carriage return,
line feed, or other format operations.
controlled by function codes in incoming data or
Format control:
manually by operator. Controls include line
feed, carriage return, case shift, backspace,
and horizontal tab.
Comments: •••••...••.•••..••.. horizontal spacing is 10 char/inch (12 char/inch
optional);
vertical spacing is 6 lines/inch (8 lines/inch
optional) .
Output medium: •.

.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION:. no provisions for checking except for visual
verification of input data when typed.

.6

CONDITION INDICATORS:

.7

DATA TRANSMISSION

.71

Basic Characteristics

visible switches for power on/off and terminal
mode (communications/local) only •

Rated transmission speed: .••••••••• 14.8 char/sec (134.5 bits/sec).
Transmission method: . • • • • . . • • • • •. serial by bit.
Transmission code: . . • • . . • • • • • • • •• identical with codes used by IBM 2740; see
Report 6454, Tables I, II, and III.
Transmission mode: . . . . . . . • . . . • . . half-duplex.
Order of bit transmission: .•.••••••• high-order bit is transmitted first.
Synchronization: • • • • . . . . • • • . . • • •• start/stop •
• 72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set*

Bell System Schedule 3A Data Channel:

Bell System Data Set 103F.

Western Union Class D Data Channel: •.• Western Union 180 Baud Data Modem.
Public switched telephone network: ••.•. Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 103A.
Privately-owned or leased commoncarrier narrow-band or voice-band
line: . . . . . • . . . • • . • . • • . . • • . . •. IBM Line Adapter. **
.73

Transmission Control
Call initiation:
Call reception:

manual dialing or Signaling.
operator attention is required.

*In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant.
** See Paragraph 6454.15, in the IBM 2740 report, for a description of the IBM Line Adapters
available.

A5

© 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/67

6455:04
IBM 2741

.73

Transmission Control (Contd.)
Functional operations: •••••••••••••

16 different control codes can be received from
a remote station to perform a variety of functions such as line feed, carriage return, case
shift, horizontal tab, backspace, etc •

• 74

Multistation Operation: • • • • • • • • • • ••

no provision•

•8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Component

2741
Communication
Terminal

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

28.75
25.25
36.50
325

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phases

0.15
115 or 208/230
60
1

Temperature Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)
•9

50-110
10-80
400

PRICE DATA

Component or Feature*
2741 Communication Terminal

Monthly
Rental**

Purchase
Price

Monthly
Maintenance

$

$

$

3,930

23.50

85.00

Optional Features
Dialup
Interrupt
Pin-Feed Platen
Typamatic Keys

3.00
2.50

-

5.00

NC - No charge
* See Paragraph 6454.9 for prices of the various IBM Line Adapters.
** Rentals shown are for 24-hour usage.
*** Time and materials only.

5/70

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

135
115
59.25
225
-

NC
NC
***
NC

A
~

AUERBACH

AU'RiACH
DATA
CDIIMUNICATIONS

6456:00
IBM 2260
REPORT UPDATE

IllI'OIITS

•
. REPORT UPDATE
~ IBM ASSIGNS MODEL NUMBERS TO ITS 2260 DISPLAY STATIONS

113M has assigned two model numbers to its 2260 Display stations without affecting the existing
configuration rules presented in the table on page 6456: 02. The 2260 Display station used with
the 2848 Model 3 is now designated the 2260 Modell; the Display station used with the 2848
Models 1 and 2 is now designated the 2260 Model 2.
~ DISPLAY STATION PRICES CHANGED

The price data on page 6456: 12 has been updated to reflect current prices and features included
with the 2260 Display Station.

~ IBM INTRODUCES TWO CONTROLS FOR LOCAL DISPLAYS
IBM has introduced two new models of the 2848 Display Control for local operation of the 2260
Display Station at a maximum data rate of 2560 characters per second. IBM found that the
2848 Models 1 and 2 could not adequately handle a large number of displays operating locally
(i. e., via direct cable connection). Models 21 and 22 have additional transfer buffering to
accommodate larger volumes of data. Models 1 and 2 can still be used for small-volume local
operation and are significantly less expensive than Models 21 and 22 (see page 6456:12).
The new 2848 Models 21 and 22 Display Controls correspond to the 2848 Models 1 and 2, 'respectively, in maximum display size and number of connected displays. Model 21 can flccommodate up to 12 (basic) or up to 24 (with an expansion unit) 2260 Model 2 Display stations.
Model 22 can accommodate up to 8 (basic) or up to 16 (with an expansion unit) 2260 Model 2
Display stations. A display adapter is required for each pair of 2260 Display stations. An
alphanumeric keyboard with the numbers arranged in a block format is available with the 2848
Models 21 and 22.

C 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

11/67

A

AUIIlUCH

6456:01

DATA

~

COIHIUNtCATlONS

AUER8ACH

IBM 2260

fIUiOIITI

•
IBM 2260 DISPLAY STATION

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity: . . • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .

• 12

Manufacmrer: . . . . • • . • . . • . • . . . . . .

• 13

Basic Function: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • visual display, via a cathode ray tube, of data
transmitted between a 2260 and a local or remote IBM System/360 computer; data can be
entered via a keyboard; printed output is
optional •

• 14

Basic Components

~

Name: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••
Function: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••

• 15

2260 Display Station; 2848 Display Control,
Models 1, 2 and 3; 1053 Model 4 Printer.
International Business Machines Corp.
Data Processing Division
112 East Post Road
White Plains, New York

2260 Display Station.
display of alphanumeric data.

Name: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• 2848 Display Control.
Model number: •••••••••••••••••• -I, 2, or S.
Function: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• provides basic control and buffer storage for
Display Stations; different models permit connection of different numbers of stations and
different display sizes.
Name: . . • . . • . • . . . • . . • • . • ..... • • .• 1053 ~inter.
Model number: . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . 4.
Function: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• provides printed output; maximum of one per
2848 Control •
Description
The IBM 2260 Display Station is designed to facilitate rapid access to data stored in an IBM
System/S60 computer, under control of a stored program in the computer. The 2260 displays
data on the face of a cathode ray tube and can include a keyboard for data entry by the
operator.
Multiple 2260 Display Stations can be controlled by a 2848 Display Control. The 2848 Control
can be connected directly to a Multiplexor or Selector Channel of an IBM System/360 Model
SO, 40, 44, 50, 65, 67, or 75 computer, or it can be connected remotely via a commoncarrier leased voice-band line, appropriate data sets, and a 2701 Data Adapter Unit incorporating an mM Terminal Adapter Type III (see Report 8442). Each 2260 Display Station can
be located up to 2,000 cable-feet from the 2848 Control.
The data transmission rate between a directly-connected 2260 station and the computer ill
2,560 characters per second. When the 2260 is connected remotely, the data transmission
rate is 120 or 240 characters per second (1,200 or 2,400 bits per second, respectively).
The flDlctional operation of the 2260 when connected to a System/360 computer is similar to
its operation when connected remotely. The remainder of this report reflects the 2260
Display Station operating remotely, as a communications terminal device, except where
specifically stated.
Basic Operation
The 2260 Display Stations and associated 2848 Display Control operate in a half-duplex mode.
,All communication between the display complex and the remote cQmputer is initiated by the
computer.
Displayed data is received from the remote computer or is keyed into the 2260 by the operator. When data is to be entered, the operator keys in the data and depresses the Enter Key.
The displayed data will be transmitted to the computer the next time the computer requests
a transfer.

645&:02
"IBM 2260

Figure 1. IBM 2260 Display Station
• 15

Descriptiop (Contd. )
Except when an error is detected in a command sequence, all data messages are acknowledged
to indicate correct or incorrect reception by both the 2848 Control and the remote computer.
The '(-level ASCII transmission code is employed, with an eighth bit added for ~haracter parity.
A total of 10 bits are transmitted for each character, including start and stop bits. The remote 'System/360 computer automatically converts the seven-level code into an eight-level
code by adding a bit; see Table II. These converted codes do not correspond to the internal
EBCDIC code of a System/360 computer; see T:~.ble IV. If extended internal computation or
output at the computer site is desired, data received from a 2260 Display Station will need to
be converted to the internal code by the stored program in the System/360 computer.
Display Complex
A display complex consists of the following components:
• One 2848 Display COl;ltrol, Modell, 2, or 3;
• Up to 24, 16, or 8 2260 Display Stations; depending on which model oithe 2848
is incorporated; and
• One 1053 Model 4 ~rinter (optional).
The maximum number of Display Stations and the maximum .display size for each mOdel of
the 2848 Display Control are shown in the table below.
.
2848 Display Control

Maximum .Number of
2260 Display Stations

Maximum Size of Display
.Lines

Modell

24

6

Char/Line
40

Ch.aracters

.Modet 2

16

12

40

480

Model 3

8

12

80

960

240

(Contd.)
1.1/66

AUI;:RBACH Data (,;ommunications Reports

A
~

.

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6456:03
IBM 2260

The 2848 Display Control provides the basic control logic and buffer storage for all units, and
a character generator for converting the 7-bit ASCII data codes into a 35-bit video display code.
Display adapters contain delay-line buffers for each Display Station; these buffers store video
display codes and continuously regenerate the display. Characters and symools are displayed
by a 5-by-7 dot matrix; each bit of the video display code corresponds to one dot-matrix position. One Display Adapter is required for each pair of Display Stations. A separate adapter is required for connecting the 1053 Printer.
The Display Station consists of a 12-inch-diameter cathode ray tube with a display field 4
inches high by 9 incnes wide. A numeric or alphanumeric keyboard can be incorporated in
each 2260 Display Station, or the station can be used without a keyboard for display purposes
only. Figure 1 shows the 2260 Display Station with alphanumeric keyboard.
The 1053 Model 4 Printer is a modified version of the IBM Selectric Typewriter and is similar
to the printers used in IBM 1050 Data Communications Systems. All Display Stations connected to one 2848 Display Control share the one 1053 Printer.
The Printer Adapter contains a buffer for storing data to be printed. This permits a printing
operation to proceed simultaneously with operations by the Display Station. A print operation
can be initiated by the remote computer, as described later; a Display Station operator can
also cause the station display to be printed.
Commands
The IBM 2260 Display Station, in combination with a 2848 Display Control, is capable of responding to eight commands transmitted by the remote computer.
There are four read commands for transmitting data from the Display Station to the computer:
•

Specific Poll to 2260 Station - initiates transfer of data displayed by a specific
station to the computer, provided that the Start symbol is displayed and the Enter
key has been depressed.
.

•

Specific Poll to Printer - initiates transmission of printer status to computer
(e. g., busy, ready, not ready).

•

General Poll - initiates transfer of data to C Jmputer from all stations that have
the Start symbol displayed and in which the Enter key has been depressed.
Messages are transferred sequentially and are accompanied by the address of the
corresponding Display Station.

• Read Addressed Full Display Station Buffer - initiates unconditional transfer
to the computer of the entire buffer for the addressed station.
Selected portions of the display can be transmitted in response to a Specific or General Poll;
see the paragraphs under Editing Facilities.
There are four write commands for transferring data to a Display Station or Printer:
• Write Addressed Display Station - conditions the 2848 Control and the addressed
station for reception and display of the associated message.
•

Erase/Write Addressed Display Station - causes the display of the addressed
station to be erased and the cursor to be positioned at the first displayable position.

• Write Printer - conditions the 2848 Control and the 1053 Printer for reception
and printing of the associated message. A positive indication of status is returned
if the printer is busy or not ready.
• Write Display Station Line Address - same as Write Addressed Display Station
except that the display is started on the indicated line instead of on the first line.
The Line Addressing Feature is required in the 2848 Display Control for the use
of this command.
Editing' Facilities
The 2260 Display Station makes limited editing facilities available to the operator. The
standard cursor (destructive) can be moved one position at a time either forward or backward;
each position occupied by this cursor is erased. The optional non-destructive cursor can be
moved forward or backward and also up or down one line at a time; this cursor does not

© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/66

6456:04
IBM 2260

.15

Description (Contd.)
erase the contents of each position it occupies. Either cursor "wraps around, " i. e., moves
from the first display position to the last when backspaced or from the last display position
to the first when advanced. The entire display can be erased by the operator at any time.
Either cursor can be advanced to be first position of the next line by depressing the New Line
key. This operation also causes the New Line symbol to be displayed in the cursor position
of the previous line.
When transmitting in response to a Specific Poll or General Poll command, data located between the New Line symbol and the end of that line is not transferred. When receiving, a
New Line code in the text data causes the display to jump to the beginning of the next line;
data between the New Line symbol and the end of the line is not erased. This "split-screen"
capability allows fixed information such as table or entry headings to be continuously displayed without the need for retransmitting them each time.
Error Checking and Correction
Character and longitudinal parity checking is performed on all data received by the 2848
Control from the remote computer; character parity bits and longitudinal check characters
are generated and transferred with all data transmitted from the 2848 Control. If the remote
computer returns a negative acknowledgment indicating that an error was detected at the
computer Site, the 2848 Control automatically retransmits the message.
The 2848 Control also checks the parity and validity of each command sequence received from
the computer. If errors are detected, the 2848 does not make a response of any kind.
Programming Support
IBM states that the software support for the 2701 Data Adapter Unit is being extended to cover
2260 Display Stations as remote terminals under BTAM and QTAM for the Operating System/
360 and under BT AM for the Disk Operating System; see Paragraph 8442.4 in the report on
the 2701. The Disk Operating System is the disk-resident version of the Basic Operating
System described in the 2701 report .

. . 16

First Delivery: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

June 1966.

• 17

Availability:...................

22 months, maximum .

.2

CONFIGURATION
A network of 2260 Display Stations is composed of:
•

One 284R Display Control, Model 1, 2, or 3.

•

Multiple 2260 Display Stations, each with no keyboard, a numeric keyboar:d,
or an alphanumeric keyboard; and

•

One 1053 Model 4 Printer if deSired.

Table I shows the maximum number of display units that can be connected to each model of
the 2848 Control. and the features required. The display size also varies for each model
of the 2848 Control; these variations are also shown in Table I.
Each 2260 station can be located up to 2,000 feet fron l the 2848 Display Control.
The 2M8 Control and 22GC Display Station network can communicate over a common-carrier
leasea voice-band line ",ith an IBM System/360 Model 30, 40, 44, 50, 65, 67, or 75 computer
system incorporating an IBM 2701 Data Adapter Unit. The transmission speed is 1,20(1 or
2,400 bits per second, depending on the Data Set Adapter selected. Once installed: the transmission speed is fixed; i. e., the operator cannot select between the two speeds. Sec
Paragraph . 72 for the communications facilities that can be accommodated and the data set
required for each.
The 2848 Control can also be connected directly to a control unit position of an input/output
channel of an IBM System/360 Model 30, 40, 44, 50, 65, 67 or 75 computer system.
In addition to the capability to connect a 1053 Printer, two other optional features are
available: Line Addressing and Non-Destructive Cursor. To incorporate the Line Addressing
capability, only one Line Addressing feature is required regardless of the number of Display
(Contd. )
11/66

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

DATA
~ COMMUNICATIONS
AUERBACH

6456:05

~

~BACH

IBM 2260

REPORTS

•
Stations. To incorporate the Non-Destructive Cursor, one Non-Destructive Cursor Feature
is required in the 2848 Control, and one Non-Destructive Cursor Adapter is required for each
Display Adapter. All Display Stations connected to the same 2848 Display Control must use
the same type of cursor •
•3

INPUT

.31
• 32

Prepared Input: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••
Manual Input

no provision•

Alphameric Keyboard Method of entry: •••••••.•••••••••
Quantity of data: ••••••••••••••••
Character set: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••
Comments: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • ••

via optional 50-key keyboard.
up to 240, 480, or 960 characters, depending
on the model of the 2848 Control used.
64 characters, including digits, upper-case letters,
and special symbols; see Table n.
6 keys provide control functions only and do not
produce a displayable symbol.

Numeric KeyboardMethod of entry: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••
Quantity of data: ••••••••••••••••
Character set: . . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••
Comments: . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • • ..

via optional 26-key keyboard.
up to 240, 480, or 960 characters, depending on
the model of the 2848 Control used.
25 characters, including the numeric digits and
15 special symbols; see Table m.
8 keys are unused.

TABLE I: 2848 DIS I"' LAY CONTROL CONFIGURATION POSSIBILITIES

------..- - -

-----

-,

2848 Display Control
Components
Basic 2848 Display Control; maximum number of:
Display Adapters
2260 Display Stations
1053 Printers
3857 Expansion Panel (2) ; maximum number of:
Display Adapters
2260 Display Stations
1053 Printers
3858 Expansion Panel (2); maximum number of:
Display Adapters
2260 Display Stations
1053 Printers
Fully expanded configuration; maximum number of:
Display Adapters
2260 Display Stations
1053 Printers
Display size:
Number of lines per display
'Number of characters per line
Total number of characters per display

f-

Modell

Model 2

Model 3

'"

0

1
2
1 (1)

4

3

8

6

0

0

0

4
8
1 (1)

3
6

-

4

2

..,1

0
6
12

.

1 (1)

-

12
24
1

8
16
1

8
1

6
40
240

12
40
480

12
80
960

4

(1) Requires special Printer Adapter.
(2) Either or both Expansion Panels can be included in a Modell
2848 Display Control configuration.
@

or 2

1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

11/66

6456:06
IBM 2260

TABLE

n:

IBM 2260 DISPLAY STATION ASCII DATA TRANSMISSION CODES (6)

Bih

•
•
•

B7
86
8x
85

...

•

Col"
B3 82

Bl

Rc:w

0
0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

I

1

SOH

0

0

I

0

2

srx

0

0

I

I

3

0

I

0

0

.-

0

I

0

I

5

0

I

I

0

6

0

1

I

1

0

0

0

1

8

I

0

0

1

9

I

0

I

0

10

I

0

I

I

11

--

1

Note I
Note '2'

~

3

2

SP

.-

I

A

Q

@

,---

liA

2

B

R

ETX

3

C

5 '

£or

$

..

.0

r

%

5

f

u

&

6

F

V

ACK

7

-

CAN

I

I

0

0

12

1

I

0

I

13

I

1

I ,0

14

I

I

I

1

15

B

R

C

5 :

r ,

I

0

Ii

E

G

....

t--""

7

G

W

8

H

X

1 H

)

9

I

V

·

:

J

l

;

K

<

L

-

M

/

>

N

?

0

V ,

F

(

·-

u ,

.-1--'
1-_,-

·

--

i

,

I
I

I

+

NoL

I--!
~ P ,
t--t
Q ,

1

-,

LF

7

6

5

P

0

I

0

I

0

I

I

,
NAK

I

I
I

1
I

0

I

0

0

0

0

I

I

I

0

I

I

0

I

0

0

0

0

Note4

,

W

I

X ,

vJ

..
I

Z ,
1 J
r.:-I ~~!!!
1 K 1 Note 5

..,

1 L~J ~
'

1M'

1--'
1 N 1~
-

t-o-'

~

1__ 1

Note 1.

Displayed on 2260's as the EOM (-) symbol. Prints on the 1053 Modell Printer
as the exclamation mark (I).

Note 2.

Displayed on 2260's as the Check (I) symbol. Prints on the 1053 Modell Printer
as the quote symbol (II).

Note 3.

Displayed on 2260's as the New Line (~) symbol. Causes a carriage return and
line feed on the 1053 Modell Printer.

Note 4.

Displayed on 2260's as the Start NIl
Printer as a cent sign (9).

Note 5.

The codes represented by the characters within the dotted outline are the ASCII-8
codes for the lower-case alphabetic characters. These codes are converted to
upper case by the 2848 and displayed as 'upper-case characters. If retrieved by a
read operation, the codes' will be in the upper-case bit configuration.

Note 6.

The 8-bit codes shown in this table are the codes as they appear in the core memory
of the remote computer. The ASCII transmission code is obtained by deleting Bit X.
This conversion is performed by the 2701 Data Adapter Unit prior to transmitting
data to a 2260 Display Station and after receiving data from a 2260. See Table IV
for the data codes used when a 2260 is connected directly to a System/360 I/O
channel.

Note 7.

Graphic representations are undefined for the bit patterns outside the heavily outlined portions of the chart. These bit patterns are referred to as undefined graphic
bit patterns. If an undefined graphic bit pattern is sent from channel to the deVice,
the graphic that will be displayed or printed by the device is not specified.

Note 8.

IBM reserves the right to change at any time the graphic displayed or printed by this
device for an undefined graphic bit pattern.

(~)

symbol. Prints on the 1053 Modell

Reproduced from IBM Form A27-2700-1, page 33.
(Contd. )
11/66

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUEII8ACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6456:07
IBM 2260

•
TABLE III: IBM 2260 NUMERIC KEYBOARD CHARACTER SET (1)
No Shift

Shift

1
2

$

3
4

%

@

,

.

5
6
7
8
9
0

Sp

/

-

+

*#
Advance

(1) Control characters are the same as for the alphanumeric
keyboard; see Table II.
• ;34

Transaction Code Input:

.35

l\Iessage Configuration

no provision.

Communication between the remote computer and a 2260 Display Station or 1053 Printer is
initiated when the computer transmits a four-character addressing sequence to the 2848 Display Control. This sequence consists of the following characters: EOT (poll or read) or SDH
(write), 2848 address, device address, and command character. The two general types of
commands are poll (or read) and write.
When a poll command addressed to a Display Station is received, the appropriate 2260 Station
responds with a text message consisting of the following characters: STX, 2260 address,
text, ETX, and LRC (longitudinal redundancy check). If a parity error is detected in the
buffer when transmitting, the CAN character will be inserted just before the ETX character.
If the computer receives the message without detectin~ an error, an ACK character is transmitted. If an error is detected, the NAK character is transmitted and the 2848 Control
automatically retransmits the message.
After the message has been correctly received and the acknowledgment transmitted, the
computer can transmit one or more messages to the Display Station. Each message from the
computer consists of the following characters: STX, text, ETC, and LRC. Each message
is acknowledged with an ACK or NAK character. If the command is a General Poll, the other
Display Stations connected to the 2848 Control are tested following the completion of the transmission from the first station. If the computer directs a message to one of the stations during
the execution of a General Poll operation, the operation must be reinitiated following the
transmission of text from the computer to ensure that all stations are polled.
If the command is a write command, the 2848 responds with an ACK character if it receives
the command correctly and a NAK if not. The computer then transmits one or more
messages to the addressed station in the same format as above. Each message is acknowledged with an ACK or NAK by the 2848. If the command is a Line Address Write, the line
address is inserted following the STX character in the computer text message.

The 2848 Control will make no response if"it detects a parity error or an invalid command or
address in the addressing sequence.
A one-character response of EOT or SOH from the 2848 Control is transmitted to indicate:
a negative response to a polling command, end of transmission to a read command, data lost
condition to a write command, buffer overflow, or printer busy when addressed. The EOT
character normally terminates communication.
The text can contain up to 240, 480, or 960 characters, depending on which model of the
2848 Control is being used; see Table 1. Except for data following a New Line symbol, all
displayed characters and symbols are included in the text, except the non-destructive cursor;
see Table II. The displayed data between a New Line symbol and the end of the line is not
transmitted when a 2260 is polled,. and will not be overwritten or erased during a write
operation.

C 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/66

6456:08
IBM 2260

TABLE IV: IBM 2260 EBCDIC DATA CODES FOR LOCAL OPERATION (6)
811.0, I

IIh 2, 3
BII.
4,5,67
,

'--__o0_---'1 L-I__0_1_---I11L-__10_---'1 L-I__"_---'

I I
00

01 110

I" 11 I
00

SP

0000

01 110

&

I" 11

-

0010

J

B

K

/

A

J

S

8

K

1
5

2

T

C

i.

T

3

U

0

M

U

4

E

N

V

E

N

V

5

01 10

F

0

W

F

0

W

6

0111

G

P

X

G

P

X

7

H

0

Y

H

-0

Y

8

Z

I

R

Z

9

100 I

f--Nor I
NL

Nole 2-Note 3 -

J

R

:

101 I

.
$

1100

<

I 101

(

I I 10
1111

I

J

1010

Note 5.

0

L

1000

Note 4.

A

I" I

M

0100

Note 3.

01 1 10

0

010 I

Note 2.

00

C

00 II

Note 1.

I" II I

Nole 5

/

0001

00 1 01 1 10

,

,

%

@

)

-

t

;

>

I

-,

?

,
:

f-~te 4

Displayed on 2260 l s as the New Line (~) symbol. Causes carriage return and line
feed on the 1053 Modell Printer.
Displayed on 2260's as the Start MI ( ..) symbol. Prints on the 1053 Modell Printer
as a cent sign (~)"
Displayed on 2260's as the EOM (-) symbol. Prints on the 1053 Modell Printer
as an exclamation mark (I).
Displayed on 2260's as the Check ( I ) symbol. Prints on the 1053 Modell Printer
as a quote (") symbol.
The codes represented by the characters within the dotted outline are the EBCDIC
codes for the lower case alphabetic characters. These codes are converted to
upper case by the 2848 and displayed as upper-case characters. If retrieved by a
read operation, the codes will be in the upper-case bit configuration.

Note 6.

The data codes in this table are used when the 2260 is connected directly to a
System/360 computer I/O channel (via a 2848 Control). These codes correspond to
the internal code of the System/360 computers. Bit 7 of the EBCDIC code is the
low-order bit and corresponds to bit 1 of the ASCII code.

Note 7.

Graphic representations are undefined for the bit patterns outside the heavily outlined portions of the chart. These bit patterns are referred to as undefined graphic
bit patterns. If an undefined graphic bit pattern is sent from channel to the device,
the graphic that will be displayed or printed by the device is not specified.
IBM reserves the right to change at any time the graphic displayed or printed by the
device for an undefined graphic bit pattern.
Reproduced from IBM Form A27-2700-1, page 21.

Note 8.

(Contd.,
11/66

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

IA
~

I[RBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6456:09
IBM 2260

•
• 36

Operating Procedure
A message to be transmitted from a 2260 Display Station is composed by positioning the cursor
at the desired starting position, depressing the Shift key and Start key (which enters the Start
MI symbol in the cursor position), and keying the data. Controls are provided to space forward or backward one position at a time and to move the cursor to the beginning of the next
line. The optional non-destructive cursor can be moved up Or down one line at a time. The
cursor identifies the next display position to be entered. When the standard destructive
cursor is moved to a position already containing a display character, that position is erased.
The non-destructive cursor can be moved freely without erasing data.
To transmit a message, the Shift key and Enter key are depressed; this action locks the keyboard and puts the Display Station in a wait condition. When the station is polled by the r~mote
computer, the data stored in the buffer will be transmitted to the computer. A successful
transmission causes the Start MI symbol to be erased and the keyboard unlocked. If a transmission error is detected at the remote computer, an automatic retransmission can be requested. For certain types of errors, ·other correction techniques may be used, as controlled
by the stored program in the remote computer •

• 40

Entry of Time and Date: • • . • • • • • • • ••
OUTPUT

.44

Output to Printer

• 37

no provisions •

1053 Model 4 Printer Output medium: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••

Character set: . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••
Rated printing speed: • . • • . • • • • • • ••
Effective speed:. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••
Format control:. • • • • • • • • . • • • • • ••

Comments: • . • • • • • • • • . • • • • • • • ••
. 46

friction-fed forms up to 15 inches in width; pinfeed platen is optional; 13-inch maximum print
line; printing is 6 or 8 lines per inch vertically
and 10 or 12 characters per inch horizontally.
63 characters plus space; see Table II.
14.8 char/sec.
somewhat below rated speed due to carriage return and line feed operations.
controlled by function codes in the data message;
EOM causes an exclamation mark to be printed,
followed by a carriage return and line feed; the
New Line code causes a line feed.
printing mechanism is similar to IBM Selectric
Typewriter •

Output to Visual Display Device
2260 Display Station Output medium: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Character size: • • • • • • .' • • • • • • • • •

Display size: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Characters per line: ••••••••••••
Lines per display: • • • • • • . • ••••••
Characters per display: •.•.• •••••
Buffer capacity:. • • • • • • • • • • •••••

@

cathode ray tube; displays orange characters
against gray background.
digits 0-9, upper-case letters A-Z, and 28
punctuation and special symbols; see Table n.
characters are formed by a 5-by-7 dot matrix
which is nominally 0.09 inch wide and 0.12
inch high; spacing between characters is 0.05
inch.
9 inches wide by 4 inches high on 12-inch diameter
tube.
40 (with 2848 Model 1 or 2) or 80 (with 2848
Model 3).
6 (with 2848 Modell) or 12 (with 2848 Model 2
or 3).
240, 480, or 960 with 2848 Modell, 2, or 3
respectively.
7,680 characters per 2848 Control.

1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/66

6456: 10
IBM 2260

.46

Output to Visual Display Device (Contd.)
Format control: ..•.•..•.••••.•

Rated output speed: . • . . . . • . • . . . .
Effective output speed: •.......•••
·5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

.51

Data Entry Errors: . • • . . . . • . . . • . .

• 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking: .•••••••••••••••
Error indication: . • • • • . • • • • • • . . . •
Correction procedure: • •.• • • • • • • . .•

.53

Data Recording Errors:

.54

Buffer Errors
Type of checking:
Error indication: .•••• : .......... .
Correction procedure: .•.•..••..•.

• 55
•6

Line Malfunctions: •••••.•••••••.•
CONDITION INDICATORS: ••••...•••

.7

DATA TRANSMISSION

• 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed: .••••..•••
Transmission method: .•.•.••••..•
Transmission code: ••••.••••••.••
Transmission mode: .••••.••••.••
Order of bit transmission: ••••••••••
Synchronization: ••••••.•••.•••••

each space position on the display occupies one
character position in the buffer; cursor can be
moved one space at a time horizontally in either
direction; autOmatic cursor wrap-around from
last position to first when advancing or first
position to last when backspacing; Non-Destructive Cursor (optional) can be moved up or down
one line at a time; a portion of each line can be
fixed and not transmitted; entire display except
for fixed portion is transmitted each time.
2,560 char/sec when connected directly to a
System/360 channel; 120 or 240 char/sec over
a voice -band line.
lower than rated speed due to exchange of control
messages and presence of header characters.
visual checking only;-depression of a key representing a non-existent character causes the
Check character to be displayed on the screen.
character and longitudinal parity checks.
negative response (NAIq if parity error is detected in text; no response if parity error is
detected in address sequence.
automatic retransmission by 2848; as programmed in computer.
no checking, except visual.
character parity is checked prior to transmission
from 2848 buffer.
inclusion of CAN character in transmitted
message.
as programmed at the computer.
no special provisions for checking.
no indicators other than visible display .

120 or 240 char/sec (1,200 or 2,400 bits/sec,
respectively) •
serial by bit.
7 data bits plus a parity bit and 2 start-stop
bits; a total of 10 bits are transmitted for each
character; see Table II.
half-duplex.
low-order bit is transmitted first, parity bit
last.
start and stop bits are transmitted with each
character.

(Contd.)
11/66

AUERBACH Data Communications Report5

A

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS

~

6456: 11
IBM 2260

.

AUERBACH REPORTS

. 72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line or Service

Data Set*

Bell System Schedule 4 Type 4A Data
Channel (1,200 bits/sec): •••••••••

Bell System Data Set 202D.

Bell System Schedule 4 Type 4B Data
Bell System Data Set 201B.
Chamel (2,400 bits/sec): ••••••.••
* In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant•
. 73

Transmission Control
Call initiation: .•••••••••••••••••
Call reception: •••••••••••••••••
Functional operations: ••••••••.•••

• 74

Multistation Operation
Polling: . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . .

Addressing: •••••••••••••••••••

•8

only when polled or addressed by remote
computer.
normally a 2260 complex operates over a dedicated line on which a permanent connection
is maintained.
line feed and carriage return operations can be
initiated by control characters in the text of a
message •
the 2260 stations and the associated 1053 Printer
are individually addressable; units can be
polled individually (Specific Poll) or all units
connected to the 2848 Control can be polled for
messages (General Poll); a Specific Poll directed toward the Printer ascertains whether the
Printer is ready or busy. A specific device
address is transmitted with the data in response
to polling commands. Only one 2848 Control
can be connected to a communications line.
Display Stations cannot communicate directly with
one another; the remote computer can selectively
communicate with each terminal •

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2260 Display Unit (all models)

Component
Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

Without Keyboard
13.75
13.19
17.38
30

With Keyboard
13.75
19.38
17.38
43

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
Phases

0.15
115
60
1

0.15
115
60
1

50 to 110
8 to 80
477

50 to 110
8 to 80
477

Temperature Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

2848 Display Con 1053 Model 4
trol (all models)
Printer
61.5
32.25
70.75
1000 (max)

14
14
17
40

3.3
208/230
60
1

0.1
115
60
1

60 to 90
8 to 80
10,000

© 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

60 to 90
20 to 80
335

11/67

6456: 12
IBM 2260

.9

PRICE DATA
Component or Feature
2260 Display Station
Modell or 2
Alphameric keyboard
Numeric keyboard
2848 Display Control
Modell
Model 2
Model 3
1053 Model 4 Printer
Pin- Feed Platen

Monthly
Rental

Purchase
Price

Monthly
Maintenance

$

$

$

30
20
10

970
600
300

8.25
1.50
1.00

360
390
420

15,715
16,840
17,975

23.00
23.50
24.00

49

-

1,940
59.25

10.00

-

Special Features for 2848
Display Adapter
For Modell
For Model 2
For Model 3
Expansion Unit (#3857; for connection
of up to 6, 4, or 3 Display Adapters
to 2848 Modell, 2, or 3)
Expansion Unit (#3858; for connection
of up to 4 or 3 Display Adapters and
a 1053 Adapter to 2848 Model 1 or 2.)
Line Addressing
Nondestructive CUrsor (1 per 2848)
Nondestructive Cursor Adapter (1
per Display Adapter)
1053 Adapter
For Modell or 2
For Model 3

40
80
100
44

1,5Q5
3,005
3,765
1,905

2.00
4.00
5.00
NC

55

2,260

NC

10
10
5

450
430
215

1.25
1.00
0.50

40
40

1,505
1,505

3.25
3.25

NC - No charge

5/70

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
zs:

~UERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
CDMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6457:01
IBM .2780

•
IBM 2780 DATA TRANSMISSION TERMINAL

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . 2780 Data Transmission Terminal;
Models 1. 2, 3 and 4.

· 12

Manufacturer: . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . International Business Machines Corporation
Data Processing Division
112 East Post Road
White Plains, New York .

. 13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . transmits data from punched cards; receives and
prints data or punches data into cards; operates
synchronously over a voice-band line at speeds
of 1200. 2000. or 2400 bits per second.

· 14

Basic Components
Name: . . . . .
. . . . . . . . 2780 Printer •
Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . includes line printer, buffers, and control circuitry. Printer is included in Models 1, 2. and
3.
Name: ..
Function:

· 15

. 2780 Card/Punch.
. provides punched card input and output. Card
reading is provided in Models 1, 2, and 4 j card
punching is provided in Models 2 and 4 o.nly.

Description
The IBM 2780 Data Transmission Terminal is available in four models that provide various
combinations of input/output components. The capabilities of the four models are:
•

2780 Modell - provides punched card input and printed output.

•

2780 Model 2 - provides punched card input and punched card and printed output.

•

2780 Model 3 - provides printed output only (no input capabilities).

•

2780 Model 4 - provides punched card input and output.

Figure 1 shows the 2780 Model 2.
The 2780 Data Transmission Terminal operates at 1200 or 2000 bits per second over the public telephone network or at 1200. 2000, or 2400 bits per second over a leased voice-band line.
The 2780 is designed to use the IBM Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) technique to
transmit data in a half-duplex mode. Essentially. the BSC technique provides for synchronous
transmission of a continuous stream of data with all error-checking information transmitted
at the end of a record. Alternatively. the USASCII code can be used with conventional character and message parity checking.
Although data can be transmitted or received only in a half-duplex mode. IBM recommends the
use of a full-duplex line to significantly reduce the turn-around time when exchanging acknowledgement messages.
The 2780 can be used to communicate with another 2780 Terminal or a System/360 Model 30.
40. 50. 65. or 75 computer equipped with the appropriate multi-line controller and transmission adapters (see Reports 8442 and 8444 on the IBM 2701 Data Adapter Unit and the 2703
Transmission Control). The 2780 can operate as one of several 2780 Terminals in a multistation arrangement operating over a single leased voice-band line under the control of a
System/360 computer. The 2780 can also operate off-line to print data from punched cards.
Three transmission codes are available for the 2780: the 8-level USASCII (formerly ASCll).
the 8-level EBCDIC. and the Six-Bit Transcode (SBT); see Tables I. II. and III. The same
data-link control characters. described in Paragraph. 35. are used with all three codes.
Table IV shows the special characters included in each transmission code.

C 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/67

6457:02
IBM 2780

Figure 1. IBM 2780 Data Transmission Terminal, Model 2
.15

Description (Contd.)
The card read/punch unit is a modified version of the IBM 1442 Card Read Punch having a
single card path with both read and punch stations. The printer is a modified version of the
IBM 1443 Printer which uses a horizontally oscillating type-bar. Both the 1442 and 1443 have
been used extensively as peripheral devices in IBM computer systems.
The peak card reading speed is 400 cards per minute; the peak card punching speed is from
91 to 355 cards per minute, depending on the number of columns punched. The cards are fed
from a hopper with a capacity of 1200 cards, read or punched column by column, and loaded
into a 1300-card-capacity stacker.
The peak printing speed is 240 lines per minute if the standard 52-character type-bar is used.
The Selective Character Set option permits the use of other type-bars having character sets
of 39, 47, or 63 characters. The peak printing speed with the non-standard type-bar varies
from 200 to 300 lines per minute.
The print cycle time for the standard 240-line-per-minute printer is 250 milliseconds. The
actual print operation requires 198 milliseconds; the remaining 52 milliseconds are used to
move paper and to restore the print hammers. Skips or line spaces greater than two lines
require an additional 10 milliseconds per line.
The print line can be optionally expanded from the standard 80 character positions to 120 or
144 character positions. All arrangements print 10 characters per inch, horizontally. A
12-channel punched tape loop, of which only nine channels can be used, is employed to define
the vertical format.
The 2780 contains two buffers which are used to transfer data between the communications line
and the reader, punch, or printer. A 400-character line buffer stores data transferred between the communications line and the 110 buffer. Without options, the line buffer can only
store up to two 80-character records. When the Multiple Record Transmission feature is
employed, all 400 character positions of the line buffer can be used. The I/o buffer contains
200 character positions and stores a single 80-character punched card record or a printer
record of up to 144 characters. The I/O buffer is used to interface the reader, punch, and
printer with the line buffer.

8/67

All models of the 2780 except the Model 3 can operate as either a receiving or a transmitting
terminal. Model 3 operates as a receiving terminal only. When transmitting, each data block
that is transmitted is acknowledged with a special message that specifies correct or incorrect
reception. When receiving, the 2780 responds to the transmitting station in the same manner.
(Contd. )
AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

IUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6457:03
IBM 2780

e

The 2780 operates in one of six modes that are switch-selected by the operator:
•

Print Mode - Received data is expected to be in the form of records containing up
to 80 data characters. or up to 144 data characters with an optional feature. Each
record is printed on one line; line spacing is initiated by a tWo-character sequence
(see Table V).

•

Punch Mode - Received data is expected to be in the form of records containing up
to 80 data characters: each record is punched into one card.
• Off-Line Mode - Data read from punched cards is transcribed to a printed listing.
One line is printed for each card; printing is single-spaced.
•

Receive Mode - Received data records are punched or printed according to the selection character in the data record. Cards are punched in IBM card code. Single-.
double-. or triple-line spacing or multi-line skipping can be performed after printing
each line. Spacing or skipping is initiated by a vertical format control code included
in the data record (see Tabie V). Multi-line skipping halts when a hole is sensed in
the specified channel of the vertical format control tape loop.

•

Transmit Mode - Data is read from cards and data records are transmitted. When
transmission is completed. the terminal is automatically prepared to receive data
and print it.

•

Transmit Transparent Mode - Operates the same as the Transmit Mode, except that
any EBCDIC bit pattern can be transmitted: control character recognition is inhibited
(see Paragraph. 35). This mode requires the EBCDIC Transparency optional feature.

Figures 2 and 3 show the operations of the 2780 in the Transmit and Receive modes. The possible modes of operation are restricted by the complement of input/output devices included in
the various models. The Print and Punch modes are inoperable if the Multipoint Line Control
feature is installed.
A number of optional features are available for the 2780 Terminal. including:
•

Multipoint Line Control - Allows a number of 2780 Terminals to communicate in a
multi station arrangement over a single leased line with a System/360 computer. All
communications are initiated by the computer by polling or addressing the terminals.
Individual 2780 Terminals cannot communicate directly with one another in this arrangement. See Paragraph. 35 for additional information on the control character
sequences used in this arrangement.

•

Printer Horizontal Format Control - Allows the 2780 terminal to store a horizontal
format record containing horizontal tab (HT) characters in specified positions; remaining data pOSitions are filled with space characters. The HT characters in the
format record identify the beginning of printed data fields. When an HT character
is received in an incoming message. the next data field will be printed beginning
with the next horizontal tab position as defined by the HT character in the stored
format record. The format record remains stored until a card is read or punched.
a new format record is received. or the power is removed from the terminal. Card
reading or punching has no effect on the stored format record when'SBT code is
used. A format record is identified by the prefix ESC HT. This feature cannot be
used when the 2780 is operating off-line. or when operating in the Transparent mode.

•

Synchronous Clock - Allows the 2780 Terminal to operate with data sets that do not
supply clocking pulses. such as the Bell System Data Set 202C or 202D. The Synchronous Clock provides clocking for operation at a specified data rate of 1200. 2000.
or 2400 bits per second. The sync pattern at the beginning of each transmission is
expanded from three to seven SYN characters when using the Synchronous Clock.

•

Auto Answer - Allows the 2780 Terminal to automatically answer calls from another
2780 Terminal or a System/360 computer. Calls are accepted only when either the
reader. punch. or printer is ready. The initial mode of operation (i. e .• Transmit
or Receive) must be anticipated by the operator. A 20-second timer is started when
a call is answered. If no data is received during this period. the terminal is automatically disconnected. A timed-out call is not considered an error condition. A
(Text continued on page 6457: 07)
@1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

8/67

6457:04
IBM 2780

TABLE I: USASCn DATA TRANSMISSION CODE
.......
IiI
Positions
b4

b3

J

J

b7
b6

.......

0
0

0
0

"
"
I J~
J.5

0

I

I
0

0
I

I

0

I

0

I

I

I
I
0

0
I

0

I
I

b2

bl

0

0

NUL

OLE

SP

0

@

P

I

I

A

Q

Q

q

"

2

I

R

b

r

J

C

5

c

•

.

0

0

0

0

0

I

SOH

DCI

0

0

I

0

STX

DC2

0

0

I

I

ETX

DO

,

0

I

0

0

EOT

DC4

S

4

0

T

d

I

0

I

0

I

ENQ

NAK

%

5

E

U

•

u

&

6

F

V

r

y

7

G

W

9

w

p

0

I

I

0

ACK

SYN

0

I

I

I

BEL

ETB

I

0

0

0

BS

CAN

(

8

H

X

h

I

0

0

I

HT

EM

)

I

"l.

i

Y

I

0

I

0

IF

SUB

.

9
:

J

Z

i

z

+

[

k

I

I

I

I

1-.

I

0

1

1

VT

ESC

1

1

0

0

FF

FS

1

1

0

I

CR

GS

1

1

I

0

SO

RS

1

1

1

1

51

US

I

,

K

<;

L

,

=

M

J

m

>

N

,,

/

>

47*

39

.

$

$

;

I

tI
*
%
@

(
)

-,
;

39

-

,,

·

Six-BIT Tramcode

EBCDIC

63*

&

/

ESC Q
ESCR
ESC S
ESC A
ESC B
ESC C
ESCD
ESC E
ESC F
ESC G
ESC H

Six-Bit Transcode
ESC /
ESC S
ESC T·
ESC A
ESCB
ESC C
ESCD
ESC E
ESC F
ESC G
ESC H

after Printing
Single Space
Double Space
Triple Space
Skip to Channel
Skip to Channel
Skip to Channel
Skip to Channel
Skip to Channel
Skip to Channel
Skip to Channel
Skip to Channel

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Reprinted from IBM 2780 Data Transmission
Terminal - Component Description, Form
A27-3005, published by IBM.

=

-

USASCII

&

/

I
\
Standard type-bar.
Reprinted from IBM 2780 Data Transmission
Terminal - Component Description, Form
A27-3005, published by IBM.

*

C 196TAUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

8/67

6457:06
IBM 2780

Transmit a
character
from the
Line Buffer

Establish
connection
with receiving
terminal (1)

Read character
from card into
I/O Buffer

Advance
Output
Counter by 1

Last record
of block has
lJeen read

Transfer character
from I/O Buffer to
Line Duffer

Endof
File

iteplal'(' US
with ETD

nelllac(' US
with ETX
Insert lJS in
Line Buff!',.

u.st card
has been
read
-Transmit
ETBor
ETX

Advance
Input

Switch to receive
modc and wait up
to 2 seconds for
block check reply
from receive
terminal

Counter hy

t:TB idenLifi('s ('luI of
hlock; ETX identifil's
end of last hlol'k;
both charaders cause
line lurn-a round

/----<0-1

(1) Conncction is e"tahlished by manually dialing or

signaling, or hy :uldrl'ssing or polling operation
wh!'n Multipoint Lin!' Control feature is used.

Figure 2. IBM 2780 Transmit Mode
(Contd. )

8/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AUER8ACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS

~

AUERBACH

6457:07
IBM 2780

REPORTS

•
Message Acknowledgement and Termination

, . . . - - - - - - - - - , Retransmit last
block of data
Clear
Output
03
Counter

Yes
Data
block
received
incorrectly

End
transmission

Block check
reply not
received

Yes

No

End
transmission

No

No

Transmit
EOT

Transmit

ENQ

Switch to receive
mode and wait up
to 1 second for
block check reply
from receive
terminal

Clear
Input and
Output
Counters

Transmission is
terminated and
connection is
broken
Yes

End
transmission

Figure 2. IBM 2780 Transmit Mode (Contd.)

completed call is ended when the calling terminal sends a two-character DLE EOT
sequence which causes the called terminal to automatically disconnect. When the
2780 is communibating with another 2780 on a point-to-point basis. there is a 20second delay between reception of the EOT character and disconnection.

\

•

Multiple Record Transmission - Allows the 2780 Terminal to use all 400 positions
of the line buffer and to transmit or receive up to seven records per block.. A linebuffer overrun will occur if more than seven records or 400 characters have been
read or received.

• Auto Turnaround - Allows the 2780 Terminal to switch automatically to Receive
mode. with punch ready. following the transmission of a message. Punch-ready
status is established when the reader senses a blank card following a series of data
cards. The blank card causes transmission of an ETX character. The punch must
be selected by the remote terminal by a component selection sequence.
\

•

120- or 144-Character Print Line - Allows the 2780 Terminal to print a total of
120 or 144 positions per line at 10 characters per inch. This f,eature is useful only
when communicating with aSystem/360 computer. because another 2780 can only
transmit '80-character records.
C 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

8/67

6457:08
IBM 2780

Print or Punch

Transfer a
character from
Line Buffer to
I/O Buffer

Connection Is
established (1)

Transfer
character
from line to
Line Buffer
Advance
Output Counter
by1

No

Initiate
output
operation

Yes

Print one line or
punch one card

End of record (US)
or end of block
(ETB or ETX)

No
Second record
in Line Buffer

If parity was

Yes

incorrect for
1st or 2nd record.
block must be
retransmitted

Yes; End of
2nd Record

Switch to transmit
mode and transmit
negative reply
(NAK)

Advance
Input
Counter
by 1

Clear Input
Counter to
zero

Switch to
transmit mode
and transmit
positive reply

Clear Input
and OUtput

Counters to
zero

Switch to
receive mode
(1) Connection is established by manually dialing or
signaling. or by addressing or polling operation.
when Multipoint Line Control feature is used.

Figure 3. IBM 2780 Receive Mode
(Contd. )
8/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6457:09
IBM 2780

•

.2

•

EBCDIC Transparency - Allows unrestricted transfer of all bit patterns within the
EBCDIC code; see Paragraph. 35. The optional Printer Horizontal Format Control
feature and component selection code~ are void when the 2780 is in Transparency
mode. The optional Multiple-Record feature can be used with Transparency, but
record length is fixed at 80 characters.

•

Selective Character Set - Allows the operator to replace the printer type-bar with
one containing a different character set than the standard EBCDIC or SBT type-bar.
This feature allows the use of a 39- or 63-character EBCDIC character set or a 39character SBT character set. This feature is a prerequisite when using the USASCn
code •

CONFIGURATION
The IBM 2780 Data Transmission Terminal is available in four models having different combinations of input/output capabilities as follows:
•

2780 Modell - provides punched card input and printed output.

•

2780 Model 2 - provides punched card input and output in addition to printed output.

•

2780 Model 3 - provides printed output only.

• 2780 Model 4 - provides punched card input and output.
The standard communications facilities that can be accommodated and the associated data sets
are listed in Paragraph . 72.
The optional features available for each model of the 2780 Terminal are described in Paragraph .15 •
•3

INPUT

· 31

Prepared Input
Card Read Punch (2780 Models 1, 2, and 4) Input medium: • • • . . . . . . • • • • • . . • • . standard IBM 80-column punched cards.
Input code: .•.••.•.....•.. " .•... standard Hollerith card code.
Quantity of data:. . • • . . . . . . • . . • • • • • up to 80 characters per card.
Character set: .•••...••...•.•••.• depends on transmission code; see Tables I. II.
andm.
Rated input speed: ...•••.•••••••• ~ 400 cards/min.
Effective speed: . . . • . . . . . • • . • . . . • . see Table VII .

• 32

Manual Input: .•••••..••..••...•... no provision .

. 33
• 34

Fixed Input: .•.•••...••....•.•••.. no provision.
Transaction Code Input:. • . . • . . • . . . . . • no provision.

· 35

Message Configuration
Data is transmitted and rec"eived by a 2780 Terminal in blocks of two records for a standard
configuration. If the optional Multiple-Record Transmission feature is included, a data block
can contain up to seven data records. A clata record normally consists of up to 80 data characters plus control characters. Records received from a System/360 computer can contain
up to 120 or 144 data characters to utilize the optional expanded print line features.
Data-Link Control Characters
Nine data-link control characters are automatically encoded by the control circuitry in the
2780. The data-link control characters are stripped from the data at the receiving terminal.
Table VI .describes the function of each data-link control character.
Message Format
A Start-of-Message (STX) character is used at the beginning of each block; the text contained
in the first record of the block follows the STX character. Each record is terminated by a
US. ETB. or ETX chttracter and is followed by one or two error-checking characters and one

C 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, loc.

8/67

6457:10
IBM 2780

.35

Message Configuration (Contd.)
sync (SYN) character. A Unit Separator (US) terminates each record of a block except the
final record, which is terminated by an End-of-Transmission Block (ETB) character. The
final record in the last block of a message is terminated by an End-of-Text (ETX) char!1cter.
The receiving terminal will accept an SOH character in place of the STX character; however,
the 2780 cannot transmit an SOH. A block of data is not accepted by the receiving terminal
if the STX or SOH character is missing.
Terminal Status Interrogation
Before transmitting a message to a remote terminal, the transmitting terminal must determine the status of the receiving terminal. The 2780 interrogates the receiving terminal by
sending an enquiry message consisting of four SYN characters followed by an ENQ character.
The receiving terminal must respond to the enquiry with a positive reply indicating that the
terminal is ready to receive or a negative reply indicating the terminal is not ready because
of an existing contingency. If a reply is not received from the remote terminal within a predetermined period of time, a second enquiry message is sent. An EOT character is sent and
disconnect procedure initiated after four unsuccessful attempts t.) interrogate the terminal.
The data message is transmitted when the 2780 receives a positive reply ~o an enquiry.
End-of-Block Response
The receiving terminal responds to an ETB or ETX character designating the end of a block
or end of the final block in a message, respectively. The terminal responds to a correctly
received block by sending a positive reply to the transmitting terminal; a negative reply is
sent in response to an incorrectly received block.
A positive reply to an ETX character causes the transmitting terminal to send an EOT which
terminates the transmission.
The transmitting terminal will retransmit an incorrectly received block up to three times
(when transmitting from 2780 to 2780) before operator intervention is required. When communication is between a 2780 and a System/360 computer, the number of retransmissions is
specified by the stored program in the computer. A negative reply to a final retransmission
causes the transmitting terminal to send an End-of-Transmission (EOT) character. followed
by disconnection.
Block Sequence Check
The 2780 Terminal employs an odd/even block count to insure the correct sequencing of data
blocks within a message. The first block in a message is identified as an odd block. Block
checking is performed at both the transmitting and receiving terminals. The odd/even count
is toggled at the receiving terminal in response to a correctly received block, and a positive
reply containing the toggled block c6unt is sent to the transmitting terminal, where it is compared to the transmitter block count. \\'hen the compared block counts do not agree, the
transmitting terminal sends an ENQ requesting that the receiving terminal retransmit the
positive reply. l..Jp to three enquiries can be sent before the transmitting terminal terminates
the call with EOT.
Output Selection
Selection between the printer or punch for output in a :2780 Model 2 in the Receive mode is
controlled by a two-character sequence: ESC plus a component-selection code. The sequence
must follow an STX or US end-of-record character, in the first record of the transmitted
message. Selection is sustained until the next selection code is received. The punch is selected by the digit "4" following an ESC; the printer, by any printer-control character following an ESC. Invalid codes are either ignored or cause an erroneous print operation to be
performed.
EBCDIC Transparency
When the EBCDIC Transparency feature is used, message Transparency is entered through a
DLE STX sequence and exited through a DLE followed by a US, ETB, or ETX character, two
sync characters, a second US character, and one or two check characters. Transparency can
be entered or exited only after a record check sequence. Record length is fixed at 80 characters; EM or ETX characters read from the card are ignored. Control character recognition
(Contd. )

8/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6457: 11
IBM 2780

~

TABLE VI: IBM 2780 DATA-LINK CONTROL CHARACTERS
Control
Character

Function

Character
Transmitted

Sync

To establish and maintain synchronization.

SYN

Enquiry

To interrogate remote terminal as to readiness
(a request to transmit).

ENQ

Start-of-Text

To alert remote terminal as to the beginning of a.
block of text.

STX

Unit Separator

To end record and in.itiate error checking.

US

End-of-Transmission Block

To initiate error checking at end of last record in
a block; initiates line turn-around to allow remote
terminal to respond with a positive or negative
reply.

ETB

End-of-Text

To initiate error checking at end of last record in
a message; initiates line turn-around to allow remote terminal to respond with a positive or negative reply.

ETX

Data-Link Escape

To acknowledge an enquiry from the transmitting
terminal, DLE is followed by a zero which indicates
the receiving terminal is ready to receive data.

DLE

To inform the transmitting terminal that the last
block of data was received without error, a DLE is
followed by an even or odd block designation. *
To enter into or exit from the EBCDIC Transparency mode, a DLE is followed by an STX or an ETB
respectively; to identify a control character when in
transparency, a DLE precedes the control character; to be accepted as data, a DLE is followed by
another DLE automatically inserted at the transmitting terminal and stripped at the receiving terminal.
Negative Acknowledgement

To acknowledge an enquiry from the transmitting
terminal, NAK indicates that the receiving terminal
is not ready to receive data; to inform the transmitting terminal that the last block of data transmitted was received in error.

NAK

End-ofTransmission

To inform the receiving terminal that the message
is completed and transmission is to be terminated;
to abort transmission when sent from the receiving
terminal; to indicate that the polled terminal does
not have data to transmit.

EOT

* The following odd! even block deSignations are for USASCIl, SBT, and EBCDIC codes:
USASCII: 1 (odd);
SBT:
T (odd);
EBCDIC: 61 (odd);
The EBCDIC designations
graphic characters ~
@

0 (even)
- (even)
70 (even)
are hexadecimal code representations and have no corresponding

1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/67

6457: 12
IBM 2780

TABLE VIT: EFFECTIVE DATA TRANSMISSION RATES OF IBM 2780 TERMINAL
Component and
Record Size (1)

Data Transmission Rate, records per minute (2)
Full-duplex, 2400 bits/sec (4)
Half-duplex, 2000 bits/sec (3)
SBT (5)

USASCIT or
EBCDIC (6)

SBT (5)

USASCIT or
EBCDIC (6)

Card Reader 24 char/record
40 char/record
80 char/record

215
199
143

196
171
118

390
355
237

370
310
182

Card Punch25 char/record
40 char/record
80 char/record

165
138
91

155
130
89

190
145
91

190
145
91

Printer 25 char/record
40 char/record
80 char/record
120 char/record
144 char/record

180; 195
168; 182
145
113
98

160; 171; 184
147; 157; 167
117
99
78

240; 300
240; 300
218; 233
170
145

199; 240; 300
199; 240; 277
177; 183, 183
130
110

(1) Record size includes HT horizontal format characters and ESC sequences controlling
vertical spacing but excludes all other control characters.
(2)

A record corresponds to one card or one line of print. The data transmission rates include
transmission of all control characters, turnaround times, and the transmission of acknowl. edgement messages. The blocking used is two records per block; slightly higher transmission rates may be achieved in some cases if the Multiple-Record Transmission feature is
installed and more than two records are transmitted per block. The actual rate when communicating between two 2780's will be the lower of the card reader and printer or punch rates,
depending on which is receiving.

(3) This transmission mode is normally used over the public telephone network.
(4) This transmission mode is normally

us~d

with a full-duplex leased voice-band line.

(5) Where two sets of figures are shown for the printer, the first corresponds to the 47-character type-bar, and the second to the 39-character type-bar. When only one figure is
shown, the rate is the same for both arrangements.
(6) Where three sets of figures are shown for the printer, the first corresponds to the 63-character type-bar, the second to the 52-character type-bar, and the third to the 39-character
type-bar. When only one figure is shown, the rate is the same for all three arrangements .
. 35

Message Configuration (Contd. )
is established by preceding a control character with a DLE character. A second DLE character is automatically inserted following a DLE read from a card; the receiving terminal treats
this sequence as one DLE data character. When the printer is receiving in Transparent mode
from a System/360 computer, the record length must be equal to the number of print positions
plus a two-character vertical forms-control sequence if other than Single-line spacing is desired.
Multipoint Line Control
When the 2780 Terminal is part of a multi-station configuration using the Multipoint Line Control feature, component selection differs from the basic operation. The computer polls or
addresses one of the remote terminals using a three-character address sequence. The first
character identifies the terminal, the second identifies the component (reader, punch, or
(Contd.)

8/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AU[RBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6457: 13
IBM 2780

•

printer). and the third character is an ENQ which ends the sequence. The printer, punch, or
reader is selected by the character "3", "4", or "6". respectively. Any character can be selected for terminal identification. An addressing sequence which contains a "3" or "4" is defined as a selection sequence; a "6" defines a polling sequence.
The 2780 Terminal responds to a polling sequence with a negative response (EOT) or a positive
response (STX). A negative response indicates that the terminal is not ready to transmit; a
positive response indicates that data will follow. No response is returned if the polled terminal is in the off-line mode.
The 2780 Terminal responds to a selection sequence with a negative response, which indicates
that the selected component is not ready to receive, or a positive response. No response is
returned if the selected terminal is in the off-line mode.
The basic terminal component selection sequence (ESC plus selection code) is inoperative when
the Multipoint Line Control feature is installed. All ESC sequence codes, when used in the
first two character positions of data, are interpreted as vertical or horizontal format-control
sequences. The 2780 Terminal, when initially switched on. remains in a non-addressable
receive-text mode until a sync pattern followed with an EOT is received. The terminal is then
sw~tched to control mode and will recognize a polling or selection sequence. An STX following
a sync pattern returns the terminal to its initial mode .
. 36

Operating Procedure
(1) Operator establishes connection by dialing or signaling, coordinates the transmission with the remote operator, checks that the data set is ready for transmission,
and switches to data mode.
(2) Operator verifies that synchronization between terminals has been established and
that all components are in a ready condition by observin,g the control panel lights.
(3) Operator selects proper operation mode and loads data cards if transmitting or
readies the card read punch or printer if receiving. The transmitting terminal operator then presses the Start key.
The exchanges of data messages and control signals an under the control of the terminals.
Further intervention by the operator is required only when errors are repeatedly detected in
retransmission of the same data block, when reading, punching, or printing component malfunctions or errors are detected. and when the call is terminated.
The Auto Answer option permits transmission or reception of messages by an unattended IBM
2780 Terminal.
Two special control characters, Bell (BEL) and End-of-File (EOF) , can be transmitted, under
certain conditions, by manually depressing a key. A BEL charact!lr can be sent in response
to polling, in place of a block-checking response, at any time between messages, or in place
of data. The BEL character lights an indicator and sounds an audible alarm at the receiving
terminal. Depressing the EO}t' key causes an ETX data-link control character to be transmitted after the last card has been read. An STX ENQsequence is normally sent after the
last card when the EOF key is not depressed •

. 37

Entry of Time and Date: .

.4

OUTPUT

. 42

Output to Punched Cards

~

. . . . . • . • . . • no provisions .

Card Read Punch (2780 Models 2 and 4) Card type and size: .••.••..•.•••••• standard IBM 80·-column punched cards.
Card code: . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . • . • • standard Hollerith card code.
Rated punching speed: . . • . . . . . . . . . . . 160 columns/sec; 91 to 355 cards/minute, depending
.
on number of columns punched.
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . see Table VII.
Format control: . . . . • . . . . . . . • • • • . • none except capability for punching records of less
than 80 characters.

C 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/67

6457:14
IBM 2780

. 44

Output to Printer
Printer (2780 Models 1, 2, and 3) Output medium: . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . . .• pin-fed continuous fanfold forms from 4. 00 to
16.75 inches in width; 80, 120 (optional), or 144
(optional) printing positions; 10 characters per
inch horizontal spacing and 6 or 8 lines per inch
vertical spacing.
Character set: . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . 47 or 39 (optional) with SBT code;
52", 39 (optional), or 63 (optional) with EBCDIC
code;
63 with USASCII code.
Rated printing speed With 39-character set: ..•.••••••.. 300 lines/min.
With 47- or 52-character set: . . . . • • . . 240 lines/min.
With 63-character set: . . . • . . • . . . . . 200 lines/min.
Effective speed: • . . • . . . . . . . • . • . • • • see Table VII.
Format contro]: • . . . . . " . . . . • • . . . . . vertical forms spacing is initiated by a 2-character control sequence (see Table V); skips of
over 3 lines are controlled by punches in carriage control loop; horizontal tab (optional) is
"initiated by HT character in data and controlled
by prestored format control record.
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the Selective Character Set feature is required to
use an optional character set or the USASCII
code •

.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION
IBM has introduced a polynomial checking technique, referred to as Cyclic Redundancy Checking
(CRC), for use with Binary Synchronous Communications. The CRC technique uses a checking
polynomial to generate a 12-bit (SBT code) or 16-bit (EBCDIC code) block check character
which is appended to each block of data transmitted. The received block check character is
compared with a block check character generated from the received data. Comparison of the
block check characters determines the validity of the received message block. Both EBCDIC
and SBT transmission ,codes use the CRC error checking technqiue. Transmissions using
USASCII are not checked by the CRC technique, but employ an odd-parity check bit for each
character and a longitudinal redundancy check character at the end of each record .

. 51

Data Entry Errors
Type of cheeking:, .. , . . . . . . . . . • . . . . character validity checks. card registration. card
column count, and photo.,...transistor check.
Error indication: • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . terminal halts, a lamp is lighted, and an audible
"
alarm is sounded.
Correction procedure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . manual intervention .

. 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking: . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . cyclic redundancy checking (CRC) for EBCDIC and
SBT; character parity (odd) and longitudinal redundancy check for USASCII.
Error indication: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . receiving terminal returns a negative acknowledgement (NAK) at the end of a block.
Correction procedure: . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . automatic retransmission of block received in error;
terminal halts, a lamp is lighted, and an audible
alarm is sounded if three retransmissions fail
when two 2780 Terminals are communicating; computer controls number of retransmissions when a
2780 is transmitting to a System/360 computer .

. 53

Data Recording Errors
Type of checking: . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . echo check to verify tlu... correct dies have been
activated in card punch; character parity checking
on data sent to printer, but no direc! check on
printed output.
(Contd. )
AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUlRBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6457: 15

IBM 2780

•

. 54

Error indication: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a lamp is lighted and an audible alarm is sounded.
Correction procedure: • . . . . . . . . . . . • . • operator intervention .
Buffer Errors

, 55

Type of checking: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . odd character parity checking on USASCII and SBT;
USASCII is checked on entering or exiting the buffers; SBT character parity is generated on entering
the buffers and checked on exiting; even longitudinal
parity is generated for each EBCDIC record entering and exiting the buffers, and entrance and
exit parity characters are compared for accuracy;
buffer is checked when transmitting or receiving
to insure buffer capacity is not exceeded and/or
that no more than two records per block are
received (overrun),
Error indication: . , , . . . . . . . . . . , ", ... when a buffer error is detected, the transmitting
terminal sends an ENQ code, the receiving terminal responds with NAK, and the transmitting
terminal sends an EOT which terminates the
transmission; the receiving terminal replies to
a block-checking sequence with a NAK response
(line buffer overflow) or with an EOT ",hich terminates the transmission; a lamp is lighted and
the audible alarm is sounded.
Correction procedure: . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . operator intervention.
Comments: . . . • . . • . , . . • . . . • . . . . • . the transmitting terminal immediately sends an
ENQ code to the receiving terminal if a line buffer parity error or overflow condition is detected;
an STX ENQ sequence is sent following a correct response to a block check to indicate an
I/o buffer Arror condition; the receiving terminal responds to the STX ENQ sequence with
NAK, and the transmitting terminal sends an
EOT code which terminates the transmission.
Line Malfunctions
Detection: • . . . . . • . • . . . . • . . . . . . . • • failure to receive data or a response within a 1,
2, or 3 second period, depending on operation
and whether the terminal is transmitting or receiving.
Action:. . . . • . . . , . . • . • . . • , . . • • . • • up to three enquiry sequences are automatically
transmitted; if an enquiry sequence or response
is still not received, the terminal halts and operator intervention is required. In addition the
Data Set Ready lamp is lighted •

.6

CONDITION INDICATORS
A comprehensive array of lamps and switches on the main operator panel, which is located
on the Card Read Punch in Models 1, 2, and 4 and on the Printer in Model 3, displays the
flow of data through the buffers, the mode of operation, the status of each component, and
transmission errors. The operator panel on the Model 3 (receive-only printer) is an abbreviated version of the operator panels used on the other models .

.7
. 71

DATA TRANSMISSION
Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed: ..•.•..••.•• 1200, 2000, or 2400 bits/sec.
Transmission method: ••.••.•••.•...• serial by bit.
Transmission code: ••........••.••• 8-level U8ASCII, EBCDIC, or 6-bit SBT; see
Tables I, II, and III.

01967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/67

6457: 16
IBM 2780

.71

Basic Characteristics (Contd.)
Transmission mode: ••...•.•••. ' .••.• half-duplex.
Order of bit transmission: . . . . . . . . . . . . low-order bit first.
Synchronization: • . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . • • synchronous; a special character (SYN) is transmitted between terminals prior to data transmission.

• 72

Connection to Communications Lines
Data Set*

Communications Line

Common-carrier leased voice-band
line operating at the following
speeds:
,
Up to 1200 bits/ sec: . . . . • • . • • . . . . . Bell System Data Set 202C or 202D or Western
Union 1200 Baud Data Modem.
2000 bits/sec: . . . • . . • • . • . . . . . • • . Bell System Data Set 201A or Western Union 2400
Baud Data Modem.
2400 bits/sec: . . • • . • . . . • • . . • . • . . Bell System Data Set 201B or Western Union 2400
Baud Data Modem.
Public telephone network operating
at the following speeds:
Up to 1200 bits/sec: . . • . . . . . . . • • . . Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C.
2000 bits/sec: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . BeH System Data-Phone Data Set 201A.
· 73

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . • . • . . . . . . . • • . • . • . . . manual dialing or signaling.
Call reception: . . . . • • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . capable of unattended transmit or receive operation with optional Auto Answer feature.
Functional operations: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Model 2 punch or printer can be selected by control codes; vertical form spacing or skipping
and horizontal tabulation on printer; audible
alarm can be initiated by Bell character.

· 74

Multistation Operation: . . . . . . . • . . • . . . the optional Multipoint Line Control feature enables the 2780 to respond to polling or addressing by the controlling System/360 computer
when a number of 2780 Terminals are connected in a multi station arrangement; see
Paragraph.15.

·8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IBM 2780 Data Transmission Terminal
Component
Modell
Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)
Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
Phases
Temperature Range (OF.)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

86
56
49
1700

Model 2
86
56
49
1700

Model 3
86
56
49
1500

Model 4
43
24
49
600

1.9
208/230
60
1

2.2
208/230
60
1

1.5
208/230
60
1

1.4
208/230
60

60 to 90
8 to 80
5300

60 to 90
8 to 80
6200

60 to 90
8 to 80
4200

60 to 90
8 to 80
4000

1

* In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant.
(eontd. )
8/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

fA
(&
AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6457:17
IBM 2780

co

.9

PRICE DATA

Component or Feature
2780 Data Transmission Terminal
Modell (card read and print)
Model 2 (card read, card punch,
and print)
Model 3 (print only)
Model 4 (card read and punch)

Monthly
Rental

Purchase
Price

Monthly
Maintenance

$

$

875
970

38,410
42,680

215.00
260.00

725
680

32,010
29,875

200.00
180.00

$

Optional Features
Auto Answer
Auto Turnaround
Multiple Record Transmission
Printer Horizontal Format Control
Print Line
120-character
144-character

15
10
15
29

660
440
660
925

1.00
1.00
2.00
1.00

82
44

3,630
1,920

6.00
3.00

Selective Character Set
Synchronous Clock
EBCDIC Transparency
Multipoint Line Control

25
25
15
25

1,065
1,065
660
1,065

3.50
1.00
0.50
2.50

© 1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/70

A

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
AUERBACH REPORTS

6458'01
IBMMT/ST

•

IBM MAGNETIC TAPE SELECTRIC TYPEWRITER
WITH REMOTE RECORD

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . IBM Magnetic Tape Selectric Typewriter (MT/ST)
with Remote Record .

. 12

Manufacturer: . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . International Business Machines Corp.
Office Products Division
590 Madison Avenue
New York, New York 10022

.13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . two-way recorded- or typed-message communication at 14.8 char/sec over the public telephone
network .

. 14

Basic Components
Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . IBM MT/ST with Remote Record.
Model number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model II.
Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data entered from keyboard or received from communications line is recorded on a magnetic tape
and printed; recorded data can be transmitted.
Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBM MT/ST with Remote Record.
Model number:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model IV.
Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . same as Model II, but includes two tape units and
has the'capability for transmitting or receiving
using either tape; one tape can be updated using
corrections recorded on the second tape; data
from the two tapes can be merged and the result
printed locally or transmitted .

. 15

Description
The IBM Magnetic Tape Selectric Typewriter (MT /ST) with nemote Record is designed to provide half-duplex typed- or recorded-message data communications at up to ,14.8 characters
per second over the public telephone network to a second MT/ST with Remote Record. The
MT/ST employs a: 6-level code; odd parity and unity start and stop bits, each character transmitted. Table I presents the MT/ST transmission code.
'
The MT /ST with Remote Record is an extension of the MT/ST originally designed for a typing
station in an office environment.
TheMT/ST with Remote Record is available in two different models; each model contains an
IBM Selectric typewriter and a magnetic tape console. MT/ST Model II contahls Ii single magnetic tape station; MT/ST Model IV contains two magnetic tape stations.
Each tape station of the MT /ST magnetic tape console contains one (Model II) or two (Model IV)
incremental tape recorders that employ a 35- or 100-foot reel of half-inch wide. 9-channel
magnetic tape enclosed in a plastic container (I!artridge) measuring 4-1/4 inches by 4'~1/4
inches. Up to 23.240 characters can be stored in each cartridge; recording density is 20 characters per inch.
The MT/ST can be operated in two modes: local and remote. Data can be entered on the magnetic tape from the keyboard when in local mode; a printed copy is produced while recording.
The recorded tape can be read back and edited from the keyboard; a typed copy is produced
while editing the recorded message. Recorded data can be updated when using the dual-tape
Model IV MT/ST; again. a typed copy is produced during this operation; When operating in the
remote mode. a recorded meSsage can be transmitted to a second MT /ST with Remote Record
over a communications line. A typed copy of all transmissions is also prodUced.
Editing is flexible; a complete line. word. or character can be added to or deleted from text by
simple keyboard operations. The text recording is automatically compensated for these changes
by expanding to insert data or by closing up when deleting data. Data updating can be performed
on the Model IV MT/ST by placing a clean tape on the left tape station and the tape to be updated

6458:02
IBM MT/ST

Figure 1. IBM MT /ST Model IV with Remote Record .
. 15

Description (Contd.)
on the right tape· station. After placing the Model IV in the proper mode, data'is read from
the right tape and recorded on the left; a typed copy of the recorded data is produced concurrently. Updating data is" entered from the keyboard, which" overrides the magnetic tape data
and permits data to be entered in any line, word, or character location on the updated page.
A search operation can also be performed to locate data at any desired location. Prior to the
search operation, the operator must enter a search code at specified locations while recording
data. To search, the operator dials the search code and initiates the search operation; The
MT/ST automatically searches the tape for the dialed code at 900 characters per second.
halting at tne desired lo.cation.
When it is aesired to transmit a recorded message to a,nother MT/ST with Remote Record. the
operator establishes the connection by dialing the remote MT/ST. Once the connection is established. the operator places the data switch on the data set in the data mode and depresses
the Start key on the magnetic tape console to initiate data transmission. The Start key automatically generates a bid character on the line which places the remote MT/ST in the receive
mode and locks its keyboard. Data can be transmitted frolJ). tape· or keyboard by selecting the
proper mode. When operating with the Model IV. left or right tape stations can be manually
selected.
A typed copy of ~he transmitted data is produ"ced concurrent to the transmission at both trans:""
mit and receive stations.
The receiving operator can interrupt the transmIssion when desired, by switching his data set
to voice, thereby halting tape action at both transmitting and receiving station"sand looking the
keyboard at the transmitting station. Voice coordination is" then required.
Messages of greater length than 23,240 characters can be transmitted by replacement and/or
manual seleCtion (Model IV only) of tape cartridges at both transmit and receive stations.
This procedure requires voice coordination at the end of each cartridge.
(Contd. )

5/68

AU ERBACH Oata" Communications Reports"

fA
a
AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
CDMMUNICATlDNS
REPORTS

6458:03
IBM MT/ST

'"
TABLE I: IBM MT/sT TRANSMISSION CODE
Bit Position
Lower Case

Upper Case

..
;

!

I

=

[

-/

1/)
2

3
4
5
6
7
8

9
0

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i

I

2

3

4

5

6

1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1

0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0

0
0
0

0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1

0
1
1
0
0
1

0

I

0
0
1·
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0

0
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0

0

0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0

j

k
I
m
n
0

P
q

II

1

r
s
t
u

v
w

x
Y

z

1

1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
1
0
1
0

0

0
0
1
1

I

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0

I
1

7 (P)

1
1
0
1
0
0

:

·
·
It

+

-?

0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1

II.:.

@

I$

%

•
&

*

(
)

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I

0

1
1
1
0
1

1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0

0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1

K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X

1

0

Y

0

1

Z

1)

1

J

Function Codes (non-printing)

I

Meaning

CR

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

TAB
SPACE
BKSP
STOP (1)
FEED (1)
AUTO SEARCH (1)
SWITCH (1)
STOP TRANSFER (1)
UC (2)
LC (2)
D (2)

0
0
0
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1

1
0
0
0

1

0

1
1
1
1

1
1
1
0

0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1

1
1
1
0
0

1
1

0
0
1
1
0
0
0

0
1
0
0
1

0
1
0
0

1

1
1
0
0
0

(1)

Tape codes not transmitted on line.

(2)

Line codes not recorded on tape.

0
1

New Line (Carriage Return and
Line Feed)
Horizontal Tab
Space
Backspace
Stop
Line Feed
Automatic Search
Switch
Stop Transfer
Upper-Case Shift
Lower-Case Shift
Bid

(P) Odd parity bit.

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

5/68

6458:04
IBM MT/ST

· 16
• 17

First Delivery: . • . . . • . • . . . . • . . . . . . April 1968 .
Availability:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . 4 months .

.2

CONFIGURATION
The IBM Magnetic Tape Selectric Typewriter with Remote Record consists of a manual input
keyboard, a printing component, a magnetic tape station, and a data set. The Model n MT/ST
includes a single tape station; the Model IV MT/ST includes two tape stations .

•3

INPUT

· 31

Prepared Input
Magnetic Tape Input medium: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 inch magnetic tape recorded at 20 char/inch.
Input code: • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-level IBM Magnetic Tape Selectric Typewriter
Code; see Table I.
Quantity of data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . variable; up to 23,240 characters.
Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 distinct codes, in conjunction with upper and
lower case control codes, provide 88 upper and
lower case alphabetic, numeric, and special
characters.
Rated input speed: . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8 char/sec.
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tape is synchronized with typewriter; see. 44.
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . each tape cartridge has a 23,240 character storage capacity; left or right tape stations can be
manually selected on Model IV to provide an
effective capacity of any multiple of 23,240
characters.

• 32

Manual Input
Keyboard Method of entry: .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . via 44-key keyboard; additional keys provide special functions such as backspace, carriage return, horizontal tab, etc.
Quantity of data: . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . variable, up to 23,240 characters.
Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 44 distinct character codes, in conjunction with
upper and lower case control code, provide 88
upper and lower case alphabetic, numeric and
special characters .
.33

Fixed Input:. . . . . . . . . . . . . "

. data entered from keyboard is recorded directly
on magnetic tape when terminal is in local mode;
several keyboard arrangements are available.

. 34

Transaction Code Input: .. .

. no provision .

. 35

Message Configuration: .. .

· 36

Operating Pro(,l'dUl'e
(1) Establish connection by dialing.
(2) Depress Data button data set.
(3) Depn'ss Start key on magnetic tape console.
If the magnetic tape console is in the Play mode, data is transmitted from the magnetic
tape; if data transmission from keyboard is desired, mode switches must not be in Play
mode or tape must be removed.
(4) Key in message (if applicable).
(5) Switch to voice (coordinate message with receiving operator).
(fi) H:lUg up f " • A"l',in'ltc call.

. . Bit character (" D ") followed by up to 23,240 text
characters; message is terminated when receiving
terminal switches to voice; bid character is autom:'til'ally transmitted by depressing Start key.

A
8

..

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

.37

6458:05
IBM MT/ST

Entry of Time and Date:

... no provision.

.4

OUTPUT

· 43

Output to Magnetic Tape

. 44

. . . . . . . . . . . 0.5-inch recorded at 20 char/inch.
Tape size:. . . . . . . .
Tape code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -level IBM Selectric Typewriter Code; see
Table 1.
Rated output speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8 char/sec.
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . synchronized with typewriter; see. 44; speed
dependent upon typing rate when entering data
via keyboard .
Format control: ..
. several types of function codes can be recorded.
Comments: . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . each tape cartridge has a 23. 240-character storage capacity; left or right tape stations can be
manually selected on Model IV to provide an effective capacity of any multiple of 23,240 characters .
Output to Printer
Output medium: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . friction-fed or pin-fed (optional) roll paper or
fanfold forms up to 15.5 inches wide (13-inch
writing width) .
Character set: . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . 88 printable characters; see Table I.
Rated printing speed: .. . ..
· ... 14.8 char/sec.
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . ..
· ... less than rated speed due to carriage return. line
feed. or other format operations.
Format control: . . . . . . . . . . .
· ... controlled by function codes in incoming data or
manually by operator. Controls include line
feed. carriage return. case shift, backspace,
and horizontal tab.
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . horizontal spacing is 10 char/inch (12 char/inch
optional) vertical spacing is 6 lines/inch (8 lines/
inch optional) .

.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

.51

Data Entry Errors: . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . no provision.

· 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . character parity is checked for each character
received from communications line.
Error indication: • . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . indicator lamp lights.
Correction procedure: . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . receiving operator switches to voice on data set.
interrupting data transmission; (transmitting
tape is automatically halted; voice coordination
is required; transmitting operator performs line
return function and retransmits data.

· 53

Data Recording Errors
Type of checking: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . read-after-write character parity check.
Error indication: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •... indicator lamp lights. operation halts, and keyboard is locked.
Correction procedure: • . . • . . . . . . . . • . . operator keys backspace and re-enters data.

· 55

Line Malfunctions
• . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .. line malfunctions are interpreted as incorrect
parity or no response.
Action: • . • . . . • . . • • . . . . . • . . . • . • . . indicator lamp lights; operation halts; operator
attention is required.
Detection: . .

10 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH InfO, Inc.

5/68

6458:06
IBM MT/ST

.7

DATA TRANSMISSION

. 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed: .....••.•..• 14.8 char/sec (134.5 bits/sec).
Transmission method: . . • . • • . • . . . . . . . serial by bit.
Transmission code:....•..•.••.•..•. 7-level IBM Selectric Typewriter Code (6 bits
plus parity); unity start and stop bits are added
to each character (total of 9 bits/char); see
Table I.
Transmission mode: •••...••.•...•.• half-duplex.
Order of bit transmission: .•.•...•••.• high-order bit of each character is transmitted
first.
Synchronization: •...•.•.•.•.....•.• start-stop .

• 72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line or Service

Data Set*

Public telephone network: . • . . • . . • . • . . Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 103A2 •
. 73

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . • . . . . . • . . . • . • . . . . . . manual dialing or signaling.
Call reception:. . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . • . . operator attention is recommended although terminal is capable of auto answer.
Functional operations: •••••.....•.... different control codes perform a variety of functions such as line feed, carriage return. case
shift. horizontal tab. backspace. etc .

. 74
•8

Multistation Operation: . . . • . . . . . . . . . . no provision .
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MT/ST
Typewriter and Desk

Component
Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

MT/ST
Magnetic Tape Console
15
34.5
36
242

45
30
29.5
62*

0.4
115
60

Power is derived
from magnetic tape
console

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phases
Temperature Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

33-85
8-80
1,100

33-85
8-80

-

* Weight of typewriter only
.9

PRICE DATA
Monthly
Rental

Component or Feature

Purchase
Price

Monthly
Maintenance

$

$

$

Magnetic Tape Selectric Typewriter
with Remote Record
Model II (single-tape station)

275

10,750

45.60

Model IV (double-tape station)

333

13,135

53.50

* In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; see Sections 4620 and 4640 for a current list of modems available from independent manufacturers of telephone equipment.

5/70

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

fA.
AUERBACH
co

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6459:01

IBM 2265

IBM 2265 DISPLAY STATION

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2265 Display Station; 2845 Display Control, and
1053 Model 4 Printer .

. 12

Manufacturer: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . International Business Machines Corp.
Data Processing Division
112 East Post Road
White Plains, New York

.13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual display, via a cathode ray tube, of data to
be transmitted between a 2265 and a remote IBM
System/360 computer; data can be entered via a
keyboard; printed output is optional.

.14

Basic Components
Name: . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2265 Display Station.
Model number:. . .
. . . . . . . . . 1.
Function: • . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . display of alphanumeric data.
Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2845 Display Control.
Model number:.
. . . . . .
. . . . . . . 1.
Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . provides basic control and buffer storage for one
2265 Display station and 1053 Printer.
Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053 Printer (optional).
Model number:. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . 4.Function: ....
. provides printed output; maximum of one per 28'15
Control .

. 15

Description
The IBM 2265 Display Station is designed t('l facilitate rapid access to data stored in an IBM
System/360 computer, under control of a stored program in the computer. The 2265 displays
data on the face of a cathode ray tube. and can include a keyboard for data entry by the operator.
The 2845 Control can be connected directly to a Multiplexor or Selector Channel of an IBM
System/360 Model 25, 30: 40, 44, 50, 65, 67, 75, or 85 computer, or it can be connected remotely via a common-carrier leased voice-band line, appropriate data sets, and a 2701 Data
Adapter Unit incorporating an IBM Terminal Adapter Type III (see Report 8442). The 2265
Display Station can be located up to 50 cable-feet from the 2845 Control.
The data transmission rate between a directly-connected 2265/2845 station and the computer
is 2560 character per second. When the 2265/2845 is connected remotely, the data transmission rate is 120 or 240 characters per second (1200 or 2400 bits per second, respectively).
The 2265/2845 station can operate in a multi-station environment. Up to 16 2265/2845 stations
can be connected to a single communications line.
'
The functional operation of the 2265 when connected to a System/360 computer is similar to its
operation when connected remotely. .The remainder of this report reflects the 2265 Display
Station operating remotely, as a communications terminal device, except where specifically
stated.
Basic Operation
The 2265 Display Station and associated 2845 Display Control operate in a half-duplex mode.
All communication between the display complex and the remote computer is initiated by the
computer.
Displayed data is received from the remote computer or is keyed into the 2265 by the operator.
When data is to be entered, the operator keys in the data and depresses the Enter key. The
displayed data will be transmitted to the computer the next time the computer requests a transfer.

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

5/68

6459:02
IBM 2265

Figure 1. IBM 2265 Display Station .
. 15

Description (Contd.)
Except when an error is detected in a command sequence, all data messages are acknowledged
to indicate correct or incorrect reception by both the 2845 Control and the remote computer.
The 7-level USASCII transmission code is employed, with an eighth bit added for character
parity. A total of 10 bits are transmitted for each character, including start and stop bits.
The remote System/360 computer automatically converts the seven-level code into an eightlevel code by adding a bit; see Table I. These converted codes do not correspond to the internal EBCDIC code of a System/360 computer. If extended internal computation or output at the
computer site is desired, data received from a 2265 Display Station will need to .be converted
to the internal code by the stored program in the System/360 computer.
Display Complex
A display complex consists of the following components:
•

One 2845 Display Control, Modell;

•

One 2265 Display Station, Modell; and

•

One 1053 Model 4 Printer (optional).

The 2845 Display Control contains the basic control logic, buffer storage, character generator,
and communications interface for the 2265 Display Station. The stroke technique is employed
to generate the display characters. A Data Set Adapter is required to interface the 2845 Control with a data set. Two Data Set Adapters are available for operation at 1200 and 2400 bits
per second. An interval clock is provided for 1200 bit-per-second operation; an external
clocking signal is required for the higher speed operation.

(Contd)
5/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

/

I

AUERBACH

./

J

6459:03

DATA
COMMUNICA nONS

IBM 2265

R£POAH>

AUERBACH
9

TABLE I: IBl\122GZi DISPLAY STATION USASCII DATA THAt\Sl\lISSION CODE (6)

Bits

L___

B7
R6
Ax
Br.----

..

----

A, 133 B;! Al

0

0

0

0

0

()

1

0

~

r----------

0

..

0

0

0

n
-----

ColRow

O

•0

---

0

;!

3

SP

0

--

0

0

1

0

;j

6

P

9.

- -

1
-------2

STX

2

-1

A
- --_._---

Q

A

R

('

S

T

-0

0

1

1

3

ETX

#

0

1

0

0

4

EOT

~
~

0

1

0

1

5

0

1

1

0

6

-.

0

1

1

1

7

1

0

0

0

8

1

0

0

1_

_9

1

0

1

0

10

I

0

1

1

11

1

1

0

0

12

1

1

0

1

13

1

1

1

0

ACK

LF

I

J

1

1

~ote

1
1.

1

-

--

4

5
6

F

V

7

G

w

(

8

II

X

)

9

I

Y

*

:

J

Z

+

;

K
Note 4

,

<

L

-

=

M

>

N

?

0

/

15_L

I>
- - - f--- - - - -

U

&

CAN

3

E

,

14

.

,-,(,

NAK

1
Note 3

7

r-p-,•

-- ._---

--

1

-

---.----

.

1

0

1

0

--->

1

1
1

1

1
1

-------

N()t(.,~
Not£':.! ""
SOH

1

0
0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1
1

0

0

~

0
1

()

1

I.

r-A-11I'

:iii

II

•
I

:I

B

R

I~

C

S

I.I

D

T

E

U

I

F

V

!

G

w

H

X

I

Ii
II
I!
Ii
~
I!
i

:I

I

J
K

•

i

i

-~

!
z .i
•--Note 5
i "'Y

L

!

M

I

iI-~Ii

.. _..
N

-

Q

~

I

Displayed and printed as the EOM (-) symhol.

I ) symbol.

Note 2.

Displayed and printed as the Check (

Note 3.

Displayed on 2265's as the New Line ( J ) symbol.
line feed on the 1053 Model 4 Printer.

Note 4. Displayed and printed as the SOM (

~

Causes a carriage return and

) symbol.

Note 5.

The codes represented by the characters within the dotted outline are the USASCII-8
codes for the lower-case alphabetic characters. These codes are converted to upper
case by the 2845 and displayed as upper-case characters. IT retrieved by a read
operation, the codes will be in the upper-case bit configuration.

Note 6.

The 8-bit codes shown in this table are the codes as they appear in the core memory
of the remote IBM System/360 computer. The USASCII transmission code is obtained
by deleting bit X. This conversion is performed by the 2701 Data Adapter Unit prior
to transmitting data to a 2265 Display Station and after receiving data from a 2265.

Note 7. Graphic representations are undefined for the bit patterns outside the heavily outlined
portions of the chart. These bit patterns are referred to as undefined graphic bit
patterns. IT an undefined graphic bit pattern is sent from channel to the device, the
graphic that will be displayed or printed by the device is not specified.
Note 8.

iBM resetves the right to change at any time the graphir. displayed or printed by this
device for an undefined graphic bit pattern.
© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

5/68

6459:04
IBM 2265

. 15· Description (Contd.)
The Display Station consists of a 14-inch cathode ray tube and an optional alphanumeric keyboard that can be directly attached to the display unit or located up to five feet away.
One of two display formats can be specified:
•

15 rows with 64 characters per row, or

•

12 rows with 80 characters per row.

A total of 960 characters can be displayed using either format.
The 1053 Model 4 Printer is a modified version of the IBM Selectric Typewriter and is similar
to the printers used in IBM 1050 Data Communications Systems. Only one 1053 Model 4 Printer
can be connected to a 2845 Display Control via an optional 1053 Adapter. The buffered Adapter
accepts computer messages of up to 240 characters or data entered via the 2265. A print operation can be initiated by the remote computer, as described later; a Display Station operator
can also cause the station display to be printed.
Commands
The IBM 2265 Display Station, in combination with a 2845 Display Control, is capable of responding to eight commands transmitted by the remote computer.
There are four read commands for transmitting data from the Display Station to the computer:
•

Specific Poll to 2265 Station - initiates transfer of data displayed by a specific
station to the computer, provided that the SOM symbol is displayed and the Enter
key has been depressed.

•

Specific Poll to Printer - initiates transmission of printer status to computer
(e. g., busy, .ready, not ready).

•

General Poll - initiates transfer of Printer status and/or. displayed data to computer from the addressed 2845 Display Control. The message from a 2265 Station
is transferred if the SOM symbol is displayed and the Enter key has been depressed.
Messages are accompanied by the address of the corresponding Display Station.

•

Read Addressed Full Display btation Buffer - initiates unconditional transfer to the
computer of the entire buffer for the addressed station.

Selected portions of the display can be transmitted in response to a Specific or General Poll;
see the paragraphs under Editing Facilities.
There are four write eommands for transferring data to

~

Display Station or Printer:

•

Write Addressed Display St~tion - conditions the 2845 Control and the addressed
station for reception and display of the associated message .

•

Erase/Write Addressed Display Station - causes the display of the addressed
station to be erased and the cursor to be positioned at the first displayable position.

•

Write Printer - conditions the 2845 Control and the 1053 Printer for reception and
printing of the associated message. A positive indication of status is returned if
the printer is ready and not busy.

•

Write Display Line Address - same as Write Addressed Display Station except that
the display is started on the indicated line instead of on the first line. The Line
Addressing Feature is required in the 2845 Display Control for the use of this command.

•

Editing Facilities
The 2265 Display Station provides a flexible set of edit functions inco:rporating a high degree of
cursor mobility. A non-destructive cursor is standardly used; a destructive cursor can be
specified at no additional cost.
Cursor controls include:
•

Advance - advances cursor one character position. The destructive cursor causes
a blank to be stored in the cursor position.
(Contd. )

5/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
a

.

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6459:05
IBM 2265

AU£RBA( h

• 1;:)

Description (Contd.)
•

BacI{space - backspaces cursor one character position. If cursor occupies first
character position on line it is moved to the last character position of the previous
line.

•

Space/ Erase - advances the cursor one character position erasing the position
occupied by the cursol'. A blank is stored in the cursor position when the destructive cursor is uscd.

•

Down - positions the cUI'sor down one line; cursor occupies samc location in line.
The cursor "wraps-a round;" i. e., moves from the last line to the first line.

•

l'p - positions til(' cUl'sor up one line; cursor occupies same location in line.
cursor '\\'l'aps-around"; i. ('., mo\'es from the first line to the last line.

The

The cursor is moved at a rate of nine characters per second when the Advance or Backspace
are held down. The destructive cursor erases each character location occupied by the
cursor.
k('~'s

Either eursor can be ad\'anced to tlw first position of the ne:\.1 line b~' depressing the Ne\\' Line
This operation also l'UUS(,S till' :\e\\' Line symbol to be displayed in the position occupied
by the cursor prior to initiat ing the New Line function. The cursor mov('s to the first position
of the first line wh(>n the cursor occupies a position on the last line prior to the New Line function (wrap-around).
ke~·.

When transmitting in response to a Specific Poll or General Poll command, data located between the New Line symbol and the end of that line is not transferred. When receiving, a New
Line code in the text data causes the display to jump to the beginning of the next line; data between the ~e\\' Line s~'l11bol and the end of the line is not erased. This "split-screen" capability
allO\\'s fixed information such as table or entry headings to be continuously displayed without the
need for retransmitting them eac h time.
The Line Addressing Feature permits the cursor, under urogram control, to be positioned to
the first character position of any line.
Other edit functions include:
•

Erase Disp1n~· - erases entire
character location.

disp1a~',

•

Erase to End of Line - erases entire line beginning \\'ith the character location
following the cursor; the cursor is not moved.

•

Erase to End of Screen - erases all data follo'\'ing the (.'Ursor to the last displayable
character location.

relocating cursor to the first displayable

Error Checking and Correction
Character and longitudinal parity checking is performed on all data received by the 2845 Control from the remote computer; character parity bits and longitudinal check characters are
generated and transferred with all data transmitted from the 2845 Control. If the remote computer retul'l1S a negati\'e acknowledgement indicating that an error was detected at the computer
site, the :28-15 Control automatically retransmits the message.
The :28-15 Control also checks the parit~' and validity of each command sequence received from
the computer. If errors are detected, the 2845 does not make a response of any kind.
Programming Support
IB:\I states that the software support for the 2701 Data Adapter Unit is extended to cover 2:265
Displa~' Stations as remote terminals under BTAM and QTA:\I for the Operating System/360 and
under BTA:'II for the Disk Operating System; see Paragraph 8-1-1:2. -1 in the report on the 2701.
.16

First Delh'ery:

. April 1969 .

. 17

A ya Ua bility:

. ?

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5 68

6459:06
IBM 2265

.2-

CONFIGURA TION
The 2265 Display Station includes:
•

One 2845 Display Control. Model 1,

•

One 2265 Display Station, Model 1, and

•

One 1053 Model 4 Printer if desired.

Up to 16 2265/2845 Stations can be connected to the same communications line (multi-station
operation) .
The 2265 Display can be located up to 50 feet from the 2R45 Display Control.
The 2845 Control and 2265 Display Station network can communicate over a common-carrier
leased voice-band line with an IBM System/360 Model 25, 30. 40, 44, 50, 65, 67, 75, or 85
computer system incorporating ari IBM 2701 Data Adapter Unit. The transmission speed is
1200 or 2400 bits per second, depending on the Data Set Adapter selected. Once installed, the
transmission speed is fixed; i. e. , the operator cannot select between the two speeds. See
Paragraph . 72 for the communications facilities that can be accommodated and the data set
required for each.
The 2845 Control can also be connected directly to a control unit pOSition of an input/output
channel of an IBM System/360 Model 25, 30, 40, 44, 50, 65. 67. 75, or 85 computer system.
In addition to the capability to connect a 1053 Printer, two other optional features are available:
Line Addressing and Destructive Cursor .
.3

INPUT

. 31

Prepared Input:

. 32

Manual Input

· no provision .

Alphanumeric Keyboard Method of entry:. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantity of data:. . .
Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

· via optional 50-key keyboard.
· up to 960 characters.
. . 64 characters, including digits, upper-case letters,
and special symbols; see Table I.
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 of the 50 keys provide control functions only and
do not produce a displayable symbol; 5 keys to the
right of the keyboard provide edit and control
functions .

. 33

Fixed Input: . . . . . . . . .

· no provision.

. 34

Transaction Code Input: .

... no provision.

.35

Message Configuration
Communication between the remote computer and a 2265 Display Station or 1053 Printer is
initiated when the computer transmits a four-character addressing sequence to the 2845 Display Control. This sequence consists of the following characters: EOT (poll or read) or SOH
(write). Control address. device address. and command character. The command character
specifies one of the eight commands discussed in Paragraph .15.
When a poll command addressed to a Display Station is received, the appropriate 2265 Station
responds with a text message 'consisting of the following characters: STX, Station address.
text, ETX, and LRC (longitudinal redundancy check). If a parity error is detected in the buffer
when transmitting, the CAN character is inserted just prior to the ETX character. If the computer receives the message without detecting an error. an ACK character is transmitted to the
2265. IT an error is detected. the NAK character is transmitted and the 2845 Contrcl automatically retransmits the message.
After the message has been correctly received and the acknowledgement transmitted. the computer can transmit one or more messages to the Display Station. Each message from the computer consists of the following characters: STX. text, ETX. and LRC. Each message is
acknowledged with an ACK or NAK character.
(Contd. )

5/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
I;'b...

AlI£RBACH
DAH
COMM,,'i1LA110N'
R£ PORTS

6459:07
IBM 2265

-

3;)

l\lessage Configuration (Contd.)
If the command is a General Poll, Printer status is first interrogated (if 1053 Adapter is installed) to determine that the Printer is waiting for a computer message and is not busy (ready
status). A positive response to printer status is provided by the ~R45 Control which responds:
STX. printer address, ETX. and LRC. The required response to this sequence is: STX. text,
ETX. and LRC. After accepting the Printer message. the 284G responds with ACK. Another
message may be received by the Printer or the operation is terminated by SOH or EOT.

The General Poll must be reinitiated after a printer operation to interrogate the 2265 Display
status, 01' if a negative response to printer status was transmitted by the 2845, the 2265 Display status is interrogated.
If the command is a write command, the 2845 responds with an ACK character if it receives
the command correctly and a NAK if not. The computer then transmits one or more messages
to the addressed station in the same format as above. Each message is acknowledged with an
ACK or NAK by the 2845. If the command is a Line Address Write, the line address is inserted
follOWing the STX characte1' in the computer text message.

The 3845 Control will make no response if it detects a parity error or an invalid command or
address in the addressing sequence.
A one-character response of EOT or NAK from the 2845 Control is transmitted to indicate: a
negative response to a polling command, end of transmission to a read command. data lost
condition to a write command, buffer overflow. or printer busy when addressed. The EOT
character normally terminates communication.
The text can contain lip to 960 characters. Except for data following a New Line symbol. all
characters and symbols are included in the text. excluding the cursor. The displayed
data between a New Line symbol and the end of the line is not transmitted when a 2265 is polled,
and will not be over-written or erased during a write operation .
displa~'ed

. 36

Operating Procedure
A message to be transmitted from a 2265 Display Station is composed by positioning the cursor
at the desired starting position. depressing the Shift key and Start key( which enters the SOH
symbol in the cursor position). and keying the data using New Line symbols where applicable.
Controls are provided to space forward or backward. move up or down a line at a time. and to
return the cursor to the beginning of the next line. The cursor identifies the next display position to be entered. When the optional destructive cursor is moved to a position already containing a display character, that position is erased. The standard non-destructive cursor can
be moved freely \\'ithout eraSing data.
To transmit a message. Enter key is depressed; this action locks the keyboard and puts the
Display Station in a wait condition. When the station is polled by the remote computer. the
data stored in the buffer ",ill be transmitted to the computer. A successful transmission causes
the SOH symbol to be erased and the keyboard unlocked. If a transmission error is detected at
the remote computer. an automatic retransmission can be requested. For certain types of
errors, other correction techniques may be used. as controlled by the stored program in the
remote computer .

. 37

Entry of Time and Date: . . . . . . . • . . . . . no provision .

.4

Ol'TPUT

. 44

Output to Printer
1053 Model 4 Primer Output medium: . . . . .

Character set: . . . . . . .
Rated printing speed: .
Effective speed: .

· friction-fed forms up to 15 inches in width; pinfeed platen is optional; 13-inch maximum print
line; printing is 6 or 8 lines per inch vertically
and 10 or 12 characters per inch horizontally.
· 63 characters plus space; see Table I.
· 14.8 char/sec.
· somewhat below rated speed due to carriage return and line feed operations.

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/68

6459:08
IBM 2265

.44

Output to Printer (Contd.)
Format control: . . . . . .

Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 46

· . controlled by function codes in the data message;
SOM and EOM cause an SOM and EOM symbol to
be printed, respectively; the New Line code causes
a carriage return, and line feed.
· . printing mechanism is similar to IBM Selectric
Typewriter .

Output to Visual Display Device
2265 Display Station Output medium: .

. . . . cathode ray tube; displays green characters against
gray background .
Character set: . .
. . . . digits 0-9, upper-case letters A-Z, and 28 punctuation and special symbols; see Table I.
Character size: .
· depends on display format specified; 0.16 inch wide
and 0.32 inch high* or 0.13 inch wide and 0.26
inch high; see Comments.
Display size: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . depends on display format specified; 10.4 inches
wide by 4. 8 inches high * or 10. 4 inches wide by
3.12 inches high; see Comments .
. . . depends on display format specified; 64* or 80; see
Characters per line: .
Comments.
Lines per display:. . .
· depends on display format specified; 15* or 12; see
Comments.
Characters per display: . . . . . . . .
.960.
· 960 characters.
Buffer capacity: .
Format control: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
· each space position on the display occupies one
character position in the buffer; cursor can be
moved one space at a time horizontally or vertically in either direction; automatic cursor wraparound from last position to first when advancing
or first position to last when backspacing; Destructive Cursor is optional; a portion of each line can
be fixed and not transmitted; entire display except
for fixed portion is transmitted each time.
Rated output speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2560 char/sec when connected directly to a System/
360 channel; 120 or 240 char/sec over a voiceband line.
Effective output speed: . . . . . .
· . lower than rated speed due to exchange of control
mes.sages and presence of header characters.
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
· two display formats are available; all entries
marked by asterisk belong to first display format;
those entries that are not marked belong to second display format.

.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

.51

Data Entry Errors: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual checking only; depression of a key representing a non-existent character causes the
Check symbol to be displayed on the screen .

. 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . character and longitudinal parity checks.
Error indication: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . negative response (NAK) if parity error is detected
in text or if LRC character is not correct; no response if parity error is detected in address sequence; character parity errors are displayed as
a Check symbol in place of the character in error.
Correction procedure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . automatic retransmission by 2845, or as programmed in computer.
(Contd. )

5/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
a

..

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6459:09

IBM 2265

. 53

Data Recording Errors: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no checking, except visual.

· 54

Buffer Errors
Type of checking: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . character parity i:;l checked prior to transmission
from 2845 buffer; because of buffer structure,
character pairs are checked for parity when refreshing display from buffer; character parity is
checked on each character transferred from 2845
buffer to print buffer.
Error indication: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . inclusion of CAN character just prior to ETX in
transmitted message; internal parity errors are
indicated by two Check ( ) characters displayed
approximately one-half screen apart; each Check
character is displayed in the character position
immediately following each possible parity error
and overwrites previous data; a Check symbol is
printed as the last character of a printer operation
and precedes the EOM symboi if the error was
detected in the display buffer, or follows the EOM
symbol if the error was detected in the print buffer; a space is substituted in place of the erroneous
character if the error was detected in the print
buffer.
Correction procedure:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . response to the CAN character is anticipated as a
NAK character, which initiates retransmission;
attempted keyboard entry following the displayed
Check characters causes the keyboard to lock;
depressing the Reset key unlocks the keyboard.
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . if a Read Buffer command is received prior to a
keyboard restoration, a CAN character is transmitted.

· 55

Line Malfunctions: . . . . ..

·6

CONDITION INDICATORS: .

.7

DATA TRANSMISSION

· 71

. . . message status, data set status and power.

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed: .
Transmission method:. . .
Transmission code:. . . . .
Transmission mode: . . . . . . . . .
Order of bit transmission: . . . . .
SYilchronization:. . . . . . . . . . . .

. 72

· no provisions for checking .

... 120 or 240 char/sec (1200 or 2400 bits/sec, respectively) .
.. serial by bit.
· 7 data bits plus parity bit and unity start-stop bits;
a total of 10 bits are transmitted for each character.
· half-duplex.
· low-order bit (B1) is transmitted first, parity bit last.
· unity start and stop bits are transmitted with each
character .

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line or Service

Data Set*

Bell System leased line Type 3002-C1
Data Channel (1200 bits/sec): . . . . . . . . . Bell System Data Set 202D.
Bell System leased line Type 3002-C2
Data Channel (2400 bits/sec): . . . . . . . . . Bell System Data Set 201B.
* In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant.

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/68

6459:10
IBM 2265

.73

Transmission Control
Call initiation:
Call reception:
Functional operations: . . • . . . . • . . .

. 74

Multistation Operation
Polling: . . • . • . . . . . . . . • . . • . • . .

Addressing: . • . . . • • • . • . . . • . • . .

.8

only when polled or addressed by remote computer.
normally a 2265 complex operates over a dedicated
line and a permanent connection maintained.
line feed and carriage return operations can be
initiated by control characters in the text of a
message .

up to 16 2845/2265 stations can be attached to a
communications line; units attached to a 2845
control can be polled individually (Specific Poll)
or all units connected to a 2845 Control can be
polled (General Poll).
2845/2265 stations cannot communicate directly
with one another; the remote computer can
selectively communicate with each terminal.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2265 Display Unit
Component

Without
Keyboard

With
Keyboard

2845
Display
Control

1053
Model 4
Printer

18.375
17.375
16.375
75

18.375
26
16.375
90

15
26
27
195

14
14
17
40

-

O. 1
115
60

1
50-110
8-80

1
60-90
20-80
335

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)
Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)

115
60

Phases
Temperature Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)
.9

-

1
50-110
8-80

-

115
60

-

1
50-110
8-80

-

-

PRICE DATA
Monthly
Rental

Purchase
Price

Monthly
Maintenance

$

$

$

2265 Display Station, Modell
Alphanumeric Keyboard

170
20

5,430
900

40. 00
5,00

2845 Display Control, Modell

170

8,295

28.25

1,940
59.25

10.00

Component or Feature

1053 Model 4 Printer
Pin- Feed Platen

49

-

Special Features for 2845
Destructive Cursor
Line Addressing
1053 Adapter

NC
10
73

NC - No charge
5/70

115
60

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

NC
450
3,275

-

NC
NC
2.25

fA
,~,
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA

6520:01

COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

KLEINSCHMIDT
300 SERIES

~

KLEINSCHMIDT 300 SERIES TELEPRINTERS

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: . . • . . . . . . . . • . . .

Kleinschmidt Model 311 Electronic Data Printer
and Model 321 High Speed Automatic Data Set
(ADS).

.12

Manufacturer: •..

Kleinschmidt Division of SCM Corporation
Deerfield. illinois

.13

Basic Function: . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . ..

transmit data from paper tape (Model 321) or
keyboard over a narrow-band or voice-band
line at transmission rates up to 37.5 char/sec;
receive data from a narrow-band or voice-band
line at transmission rates up to 37.5 char/sec
and punch it into paper tape (Model 321) and/or
print data on paper form .

. 15

Description
The Model 311 Electronic Data Printer and the Model 321 High Speed Automatic Data Set are
included in the SCM Kleinschmidt 300 Series of teleprinte:rs. These units serve as data
communications terminals when connected to a communications line or as input-output devices
when interfaced with a computer system.
Model 311 is available as a receive-only page printer. or as a send-receive set equipped
with a keyboard.
Model 321 is an automatic send-receive set conSisting of a keyboard. page printer. and
paper tape reader and punch. The set can provide printed copy and/or punched paper tape
copy fram received messages. and can transmit messages automatically from the tape
reader or manually from the keyboard.
All models and configurations require an Electronic Logic Module.
The .Electronic Logic Module for Model 321 is enclosed in the table (Figure 1). Model 311
Printers can have three different module configurations: a separate package. a "bustle"
behind the printer. or a table-mounted arrangement similar to the Model 321. These three
logic packages are utilized according to the specific equipment requirements.
Both models can be equipped with a 32-key (3-row) keyboard for operation with conventional
5-level Baudot .code. Alternatively. either model can be equipped with a 53-key or 52-key
(4-row) keyboard for operation with a 6-level code (6 data bits per character) or 8-level
ASCII code (7 data bits per character plus odd parity) respectively.
The keyboard is self-contained and does not require key pressure to drive the key-lever
mechanism. Model 321 keyboards are equipped with an end-of-line indicator and a character counter.
The page printer used in both m:odels employs a type drum containing the character set required by the keyboard type used. A double-hammer printing mechanism allows the printer
to operate at a peak speed of 37. 5 characters per second by processing two characters
simultaneously. Many previously-sold models use a Single-hammer printing mechanism
that limits the transmission rate to a maximum of 20 characters per second. A singlehammer printer is now offered as an option for compatibility with previous Kleinschmidt
Single-hammer printers. Single-hammer printers are not available with the Model 321.
Printed line length is 72 characters, spaced at 10 characters per inch, or an optional 76.
78, or 80 characters per line with the same spacing. Vertical spacing is 6 lines per inch.
Rolls of paper or fanfold forms can be used by the printers, with paper widths of S inches
for 72- or 76-character line lengths or 9 inches for SO-character line lengths. The printer
sprocket pins can be retracted by the operator when friction feed is desired. The sprocket
pins will feed the original and up to three copies, but only a single copy can be fed by friction
feed.

© 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

2/67

6520:02
KLEINSCHMIDT
300 SERIES

Figure 1. Kleinschmidt Model 311 Electronic Data Printer (left) and Model 321 High Speed
Automatic Data Set (right)
• 15

Description (Contd. )
The paper tape reader and punch, (Model 321) are provided with adjustable tape guides to
permit using standard 11/16-, 7/8-, or 1-inch paper tape with 5, 6, 7, or 8 code levels.
Partially-punched (chadless) or fully-punched paper tape can be used on the readers; the
punch produces fully-punched tape.
A wide range of serial-by-bit transmission rates is available when Models 311 and 321 are
used as data communications terminals. The Kleinschmidt devices in this report use an
8-unit or 11-unit code structure (see Table I) as standard; however, Teletype-compatible
unit-code structures of 7. 0, 7. 42, and 7.5 units at standard transmission rates from 45 to
75 bits per second are available. Unit-code structures of 9, 10, and 10.5 units are also
available over a wide range of transmission rates. To change unit-code structures or transmission rates, it is only necessary to interchange a few printed-circuit boards in the Electronic Logic Module.
A two-position switch is provided to select one of two customer-selected transmission rates.
TABLE I: BASIC TRANSMISSION RATES
Code
Level

Code
Structure,
Units*

Transmission Rate
Bits/Sec

Char/Sec

5

8.00

150
300

18.8
37.5

6

8.00

110
150

13.8
18.8

8

11.00

150
300

13.6
27.3

* Total number of bits per data character, including start and stop bits used for synchronization.
(Contd. )
2/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

IA
,~,
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6520:03
KLEINSCHMIDT
300 SERIES

III

Both models can be used on narrow-band communications lines when transmitting at the lower
transmission rates; a voice-band communications line is required for transmiS8ion at 300
bits per second.
Models 311 and 321 can be used as input-output equipment interfaced with a computer system.
Data transmission rates of up to 40 characters per second (parallel by bit) are obtainable.
An 8-leve1 (7 data bits plus odd parity) ASCII code is usually employed with this configuration.
Parallel data transmission can be used for data communications terminal applications, but is
not recommended.
The Electronic Logic Module, contained in both models, provides logic circuits necessary
for control of the page printer, tape reader and punch, and transmission rate regulation.
Space is available in the module for optional features including Form Feed, Vertical Tab, etc.
Optional features available for Models 311 and 321 include:
8~level

•

Choice of 5-, 6-, 7-, or

•
•

Low paper alarm,
Combined carriage return and line feed,

•
•

Automatic carriage return and line feed,
Various multistation operation control features,

•

Extended print line length from 72 characters to 76, 78, or 80 characters, and

code,

• Horizontal and vertical tabulation.
The keyboard page printer, pap~r tape reader, and punch contained in the Model 321 can be
operated in various combinations to perform a variety of functions. For example, the
keyboard and punch can be used for direct, off-line perforation of tape while the page printer
remains free to receive incoming messages or to monitor messages transmitted from the
tape reader.
• 16

First Delivery: . • • . • • • . • • • . • . • • ••

Model 311: August 1964; Model 321: January 1966.

• 17

Availability:....................

5 to 10 months, depending on configuration .

.2

CONFIGURATION
Model 311, when used as a receive-only set, contains a page printer and Electronic Logic
Module; when used as a send-receive set, it contains a page printer, keyboard, and
Electronic Logic Module.
Model 321 contains a page printer, keyboard, paper tape reader and punch, and Electronic
Logic Module.
Connection to standard communications facilities and the data set required, if any, are
described in Paragraph. 72 •

•3

INPUT

· 31

Prepared Input
Model 321 Paper Tape Reader Input medium: •..•.••...•.•.....
Input code: •.•..•.•••..••......
Quantity of data:. • • . . . . . . . • . . . • . .
Rated input speed: . . . . . • . • • • . . . . .
Effective speed: ••.••••••••••. •.
Comments:

11/16-, 7/8- or I-inch fully-punched or
partially-punched paper tape.
5-level Baudot, 6-level code, or 8-level ASCII;
see Tables II, ill anq. IV. Optionally, any
5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code can be used.
variable.
40 char/sec.
somewhat less than rated speed; depends on
transmission rate and block length.
holes are pin sensed; movement of the sensing
pins is photoelectrically sensed.

© 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

2/67

6520:04
KLEINSCHMIDT
300 SERIES

TABLE TI: KLEINSCHMIDT BAUDOT
5-LEVEL TRANSMISSION CODE
LETTERS
BIT5_

b 3 b,

b.

~ ~

~

0

b,~
•

FIGURES
I

BITS

0

I

b. b.

~

~

0

0

0

0

2

3

CALANK)

T

,tLANK)

5

[

l

3

"

0

0

,

0

LI.' '[(D)

L

,I£D'

~--

0

0

I

I

0

I

0
0

0

0

0

0

I

0
I

0

0

I

0

2

0

0

I

I

3

A

W

0

I

0

0

4

(SPACEI

H

0

I

0

I

s

y

0

I

I

0

0

I

I

I

I

0

0

I

0

0

I

0

I

I

0

I

I

I

I

0

I

13

F

x

I

I

I

0

14

c

v

I

I

I

I

15

K

(LTRS.

I I LINE

'HYPHEN)

CSPACEI

#

0

0

0

I

,

R

II

J

, ,

0

C

toO

F

X

0

12
13
14

N

0

I

15

I

I

1\

J

0

Manual Input
Model 311 and Model 321 Keyboard Method of entry: •••••••••.•••••
Quantity of data: •••••.•••••.••.
Character set:
.............. .
Comments:

p

9

0

(LT"S)

I

10

II

(

y

I

10

:

H

S

0

0

I

ISPAC[I

I

IC.'.

B
G

!

W

0

0

0

N

A

0

«C.R.)

9

,

,

,
,
,

,

, ,
I

I

I

0

,

j

t

C

x

•

L

ICL'NE FEED

0

8

I

12

5
"

Q

0

"'GS)

3

0

I

.

•

i!

U

7

C'ICS.
toO

2
3
4
5

3

le.R

Q

*

,

E

2

8

0

u

4

I

0

I

T

0

III

--

It

0

II

0

~

-'IIEL
8

6

I

?
a

0

ROW

10

6
7

5
6
7

-~-

,

0

0

01

, , 0
,
,

0

I

'H"P"[H)
J

..

2
tt

•
8
7

t

1

A

9

B

S

?

G

4

.

a __

~J"oP"'
I

to

,

I

Oft

.-- f - . _ . I
..-

V

"

,
•

1/1

"

.

(1) This code is the same as the 5-level Baudot
code in Table I with the addition of a sixth
bit to indicate Letters or Figures shift.

tt

Invalid code; the indicated symbol is printed
if the code is received, but the code cannot
be transmitted from the keyboard.

33-, 52-, or 53-key keyboard.
variable.
64 or 96 (ASCII) characters, including uppercase letters, digits, special characters and
functions; see Tables II, TIl, and IV.
there is no mechanical linkage between keyboard
keys and printing mechanism.
no provision.
no provision.
1 to N data characters with control characters
intel'spersed; control characters are keyed in
or are in the paper tape input (Model 321 only).

.33
• 34
.35

Fixed Input:
Transaction Code Input:. . . • . . • . • . . .
Message Configuration: .•.•••.•.•..

• 36

Operating Procedure
The operating procedure can vary greatly depending on the application and the optional control features installed •
Entry of Time and Date: • • • • • • • • • • •
no provision •
OUTPUT
Output to Punched Tape
Model 321 Paper Tape Punch Tape size: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11/16-, 7/8, or I-inch paper tape.
Tape code: •••••••.••••.••••.•
5-level Baudot, 6-level code, or 8-level ASCII;
see Tables II, m, and IV. Optionally, any
5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code can be used.
Rated punching speed: • • • • • • • • • • • •
40 char/sec.
Effective speed: ••••••••••••••••
somewhat less than rated speed; depends on
speed of transmitting device, block length,
and grade of transmission line used.
none.
Format control: •••••••••••••.••
(Contd. )

• 37
•4
.41

2/67

~

I

0

• 32

•,~ .

ROW.~

0

00

6,5_

b, b,

0

0

0

TABLE III: KLEINSCHMIDT 6-LEVEL
TRANSMISSION CODE (1)

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

~

..

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
CDMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6520:05
KLEINSCHMIDT
300 SERIES

TABLE IV: KLEINSCHMIDT ASCII TRANSMISSION CODE
alTS 7,',Ii_

••
~

·s ·2

~ ~

100

101

110

III

3

4

5

6

7

•

,

p

I

A

2

B

0
R

"

3
4

C

S

D

T

Yo

!I
6
7
8

E

U

H

X

9

y

Z

000

001

010

011

0

I

2

j'r::R

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0

0

0

NUll

OLE

.....<1.

I

I

SOH

DCI

!

I

0

2

sn

De2

I

I

3

ETX

DC3

I

0

(l

•

EOT

I
I

0

I

~

DC4
NACK

I

0

6

I

I

I

1

I

0
0
0
0

0
0

0
I

I
I

I

0
0
I
I

0
I

..

I
I
I
I
I

I

I
I

I
I

ENO
ACK

8

CNCl

9

HT

EM

0

10

LF

S$

I

10

VT

ESC

12

FF

11

RElURN

I

1+

•
•,

SYNC

BELL
15

0

·

ETa

I
I

F

V

G

W

:

t
J

+

;

K

[

FS

I COM ... I

<

l
M

'"

kwtMI!'

SO

GS
RS

51

us

>

N

I

?

0

*

·
·

-

1

....
""

utlDI_l._

DEL

TYPE WI1CEL SYMBOLS

NOTES:
(1) Odd parity bit be is generated.
(2) Shift key inverts bs and be.
(3) Control key (CTRL) changes try
from 1 to 0 and inverts be.
(4) Shift and control keys invert b s
and change ~ from 1 to O.
(5) n
is nonprint symbol in space position.
• 44

Output to Printer
Model 311 and 321 Page Printer Output medium: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . •
Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .•.
Rated printing speed: '. • • . • • • • • • ••
Effective speed: •••.••••••••••••
Format control: ••••••••••••••••
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION:

•7
• 71

DAT A TRANSMISSION
Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed: .•.•.•••••
Transmission method: .••..••••.•.
Transn1ission code: ••••.••.••••••

(6) Incoming codes from columns 0 and 1 will
be discarded except for Bell, LF and Return.
(7) Incoming codes for columns 6 and 7 will be
printed as corresponding characters in
columns 4 and 5. The DEL code will not
cause printing.
(8) All control characters appear on keys and
can be transmitted from keyboard.

friction-fed or pin-fed roll or fanfold forms,
8 inches wide (72- or 76-position line) or 9
inches wide (78- or 80 position line.
upper-case alphabetics, numerics, specials and
punctuation marks; see Tables II, m, and IV.
37.5 char/sec.
somewhat less than rated speed, depends on
transmission speed, block length, and operations such as carriage return, line feed, etc.
through the use of special control codes in the
received data.
horizontal spacing is 10 char/inch; vertical
spacing is 6 char/inch.
no detection facilities other than visual verification of manual input. A character parity bit is
generated and transmitted with each character
when using the ASCII keyboard arrangement.
Parity error detection is available by request
for ASCII models 311 and 321.

up to 300 bits/sec; see Table I.
serial by bit.
5-level Baudot, 6-level code, or 8-level ASCII;
see Tables II, III, and IV. Optionally, any
5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code can be used.

© 1967 AUERBACH Corporation anrt AUERBACH Info, Inc.

2/67

6520:06
KLEINSCHMIDT
300 SERIES

. 71 Basic Characteristics (Contd.)
Transmission mode: .••••••.••••.•
Order of bit transmission: ••.•.••••
Synchronization: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• 72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line or Service

Data Set*

Common-carrier leased telegraphgrade line (up to 75 bits/sec) ••..••.
Bell System Schedule 3A NarrowBand Data Channel (up to 150 bits/sec) ••
Western Union Class D Data Channel
(up to 180 bits/sec): •••••.•••••••
Public switched telephone network
(up to 300 bits/sec): •••..••.••.••
Common-carrier leased voice-band
line (up to 300 bits/sec): ..•.••.••.
• 73

half-duplex or full-duplex.
low..:.order bit of each character is transmitted
first.
start and stop bits are transmitted with each
character; see Table I for code structure •

none required.
Bell System Data Set 103F.
Western Union 180 Baud Data Modem.
Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 103A.
Bell System Data Sci- 103F, or Western Union
1200 Baud Data JI.lodem •

Transmission Control
Call initiation: •..•.••..•.•••.•••
Call reception: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional operations:. . • • . . • . .• • • •

manual.
manual.
carriage return, line feed, bell, horizontal tab,
and vertical tab are initiated by special control
codes .

• 74

Multistation Operation: . : ",' ••.•..••

various control units and additional Model 311
or 321 modifications allow multi station operation; e ..g., selective polling and addressing •
. This feature is based on specific customer
requirements .

.8

PHYSCIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component
Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

Model 311
R/O Printer
17
20.6
9.75
56

Model 311
SIR Printer
17
24.75
9.75
64

Model 321 ADS
- 21
25.6
35.9
130

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
Phases

0.150
115
50* or 60
1

0.150
115
50* or 60
1

0.250
115
50* or 60
1

Temperllture Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat kBTU!hr)

32 to 132
up to 95
NA

32 to 132
up to 95
NA

40 to 122
up to 95
NA

--

* Pulley change is required for 50-cycle operation.
NA - Information not available from Kleinschmidt.

* In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant.
(Contd. )
2/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AUERBACH
DATA

~

AUERBACH

6520:07

COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

KLEINSCHMIDT
300 SERIES

110

.9

PRICE DATA
Kleinschmidt states that a complete price list would be impractical due to the great number
of options and special arrangements possible. Price ranges for units equipped for bit-serial
data communications are listed below.
Component or Feature

Purchase Price Range, $*

Model 311 Electronic Data Printer:
Receive-Only Page Printer
I Send-Receive Set

I

2,370 to 3,355
3,790 to 4,470

I Model 321 Automatic Data Set

5,748 to 6,401

Options
Extended Print Line:
76 Character Positions
78 Character Positions
80 Character Positions
Horizontal Tab
Vertical Tab

7
10
15
100 to 235
105 to 165

'--

*

T.he price ranges reflect the use of different transmission codes and keyboards. The first
figure is for a 5-level Baudot arrangement; the second is for an 8-level ASCII arrangement.
Information on quantity discounts, lease rates, and maintenance charges can be obtained
from Kleinschmidt for specific equipment arrangements.

@

1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

2/67

A

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
COMPUTER
TECHNOLOGY
REPORTS

e

1.

I

MOHAWK 1100 SERIES
DAT A-RECORDERS

6540

GENERAL

1.1

Identity:......................

1100 Series Data-Recorders; see Table I for a
list of the current models in the line.

1.2

Manufacturer:

Mohawk Data Sciences Corporation
P.O. Box 630
Herkimer, New York 13350

1.3

Basic Function:

transmission of computer-compatible magnetic
tape data over a voiceband line; source tape
can be recorded and verified via keyboard.

1.4

Basic Units:

see Table I

1. 5

Description

The Mohawk 1100 Series Data-Recorders are designed to reduce or eliminate the need for punched
cards as an input medium for computer installations. The 1100 Series Data-Recorders record
data directly on magnetic tape in a format compatible with the IBM 729 Series Magnetic Tape
Units; this format has become a virtual industry standard for 7-track recording. The units used
to record data can also be used to verify previously recorded records.
TABLE 1. MOHAWK 1100 SERIES DATA-RECORDERS
Data-Recorder
Model (1)

Auxiliary Input/Output

Device

1

poolin
Control 2)

Communications
Interface

Standard
Features (3)

Optional
Features (3)

1101

None

No

No

None

All except 705, 707

1102

None

Yes

No

100

All except 705, 707

1103

None

No

Yes

100

All except 705, 707

1104

3021 Adding Machine

No

No

703

All except 707

1105

3005 Paper Tape Reader

No

No

703

All except 705, 707
All except 401-407,
705

1106

3011 or 3051 Punched
Card Reader

No

No

703

1109

3011 or 3051 Punched
Card Reader

No

Yes

100, 703

All except 401-407,
705

1112

3021 Adding Machine

No

Yes

100, 703

All except 707

1115

3005 Paper Tape Reader

No

Yes

100

All except 705, 707

1118

3013 Prtuter

No

No

703

All except 401-407,
705, 707

1122

None

Yes

No

100

All except 500, 501,
503, 705, and 707

902

None

Yes

No

100, 600

110 only

1181 (4)

3013 Printer

No

No

709

503 only

1183

3013 Printer

No

Yes

100, 703

All except 401-407,
705, 707

Notes:
(I) See text for additional details about the capabilities of individual models.
(2) Pooling control Is the capability for transcription of data from one magnetic tape
to another on a different unit.
(3) These numbers refer to the Special Feature numbers; see Paragraph. 9, Price Data.

(4) Data is entered directly from the typewriter keyboard; the standard Data-Recorder keyboard
Is not included.

e

1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc

6540

DATA COMMUNICATIONS

Figure 1. Mohawk 1103 LDC Data-Recorder
Different models of the 11 00 line provide limited capabilities for data input or output using a
variety of devices other than a keyboard; some models are equipped with a communications
interface for transmitting and receiving data over a voiceband line.
Only those models of the 1100 Series that are equipped with a communications interface are
described in this report. For a detailed analysis of the 1100 Series Data-Recorders as used for
input preparation, see AUERBACH Data Handling Reports, Report 2550.
Mohawk Data Sciences Corporation was formed in September 1964. Its first product, the 1101
Keyed Data-Recorder, was announced shortly afterward, and initial deliveries were made in
April 1965. Through the addition of auxiliary input or output units, special controls, and communications interfaces to the basic 1101, the product line has been expanded to include some 13
devices within the 1100 Series. In addition, Mohawk produces several units designed for sale to
computer manufacturers for inclusion in computer systems.
The 1101 Keyed Data-Recorder is the basic member of the 1100 Series. It permits data entered
via a keyboard to be recorded directly on magnetic tape in a format suitable for input to a computer. The same unit, operating in a different mode, can be used to verify a tape previously
recorded by itself or by another 1101. The 1101 Data-Recorder provides the same general
facilities for preparation and verification of magnetic tape records that a conventional keypunch
and verifier provide for punched cards. as well as some unique capabilities.
The models contained in the current 1100 Series line are listed in Table I along with the distinctive
features of each device; additional details on each model with a communications interface are
contained later in this section. All models (except the 902, which records in a 9-track format)

2

AUERBACH Computer Technology Reports
3001-128

MOHAWK 1100 SERIES DATA-RECORDERS

6540

TABLE II. AUXILIARY INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES

Mohawk Model
Number

Original Manufacturer
and Designation

Adding Machine

3021

Victor Digit-Matic Premier

Paper Tape Reader

3005

NCR EM-A4

Device

Punched Card Reader
Printer

3011 (80-column);
3051 (51-column)
3013

NCR EM-D2 (PE)
IBM Model 735 I/O
Typewriter

can be used to prepare or verify data in the same way as an 1101. Models with communications
interfaces transmit data from a previously prepared tape; manual or auxiliary input operations
cannot be performed during transmission.
The 1103 ltDC Data-Recorder
The 1103 LDC Data-Recorder is essentially an 1101 Keyed Data-Recorder with a communications
interface added. Other 1100 Series members that include a communications interface are
simply expanded versions of the 1103 LDC incorporating various input/output devices.
In addition to the basic functions of the 1101, the 1103 LDC is designed to provide buffered, syn-

chronous communications in a half-duplex mode with a remote 1100 Series communications
terminal over the public telephone network at 1200 or 1,600 (optional) bits per second, or over
a leased voiceband line at 2,400 or 4,800 (optional) bits per second. Speeds above 1,600 bits
per second require the optional High-Speed Communications Interface. Data transfer between
terminals is under control of the programs stored in the sending and receiving buffers.
The central component of the 1103 is the core storage unit which acts as a buffer. The buffer
holds the keyed-in or received data when recording and the record to be checked when verifying.
The use of the buffer eased Mohawk's task of designing a unit for recording tape in a format
compatible with the magnetic tape drives used with computers.
The core storage unit adds greatly to the ease and flexibility of preparing and verifying magnetic
tape records. This unit permits a program to be stored for defining the format of the tape
records and for automatically initiating certain operations; it also provides buffer storage for
data prior to recording or comparison. The basic 1101 contains 100 positions of core storage,
of which 80 are used. Usable storage can optionally be increased, in discrete amounts, up to
180 characters.
The Basic Program storage area contains three bits of storage for each character position of the
record. Codes stored in the program area are used to delimit fields within a record and to
define such operations as automatic duplication or verification of common information, automatic skipping, manual keying, and alphabetic (lower) or numeric (upper) shift. The Alternate
Program storage area (a standard feature on the 1103 LDC) provides an additional three bits of
program storage per character position.
The Basic and Alternate progTam storage areas allow two different record formats to be defined;
e. g., both a transmit and receive program could be stored for interchanging data between terminals. Control can be freely switched between the basic program and the alternate program
by the Program Revert switch located on the operator panel. Program memory can be loaded
from a strip of magnetic tape or by manual entry.

© 1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc.

3

6540

DATA COMMUNICATIONS

A separate bit, common to both the basic and alternate programs, is provided for each character
position. This bit is set during a verifying operation when the character read from a record is
not the same as that in data storage for the previous record. This technique permits manual
initiation of automatic verification of data fields duplicated in consecutive records.
Operating Modes
There are five principal modes of operation for the 1103 LDC Data-Recorder, of which two are
used for data communications. The five principal modes, as selected by the operator, are
Entry, Verify, Search, Send, and Receive.
Data is recorded on magnetic tape in the Entry mode. Data entered via the keyboard is stored
in the core storage unit. Fixed data can be automatically retained from record to record. When
a complete record has been assembled, the recording action can be initiated automatically or
manually. Data is written on the tape along with the character parity bits and the longitudinal
parity check character. Then the tape is automatically backspaced and read, and the recorded
data is compared bit for bit with the data stored in memory. The recorded character parity bits
and the longitudinal check character are also checked.
A magnetic tape previously recorded on an 1103 can be checked in the Verify mode. A record is
read into the unit's data storage area. Duplicate information in a series of records can be verified automatically as specified by the program. The operator can also initiate automatic verification of a data field by depressing the Dup key. Character and longitudinal parity are checked
as the record is read in.
If a discrepancy is detected while data is being keyed in to verify a tape record, the keyboard is

inter locked and the operator is alerted by indicator lamps and an audible alarm. The opera,tor
can determine whether there is an error in the tape record by making repeated attempts to key
in the character or by observing and interpreting the one-character binary data display. Corrections are easily made by depressing a special key and then keying the correct character. A
separate control key permits correction of an entire field. If a correction is made, the tape is
automatically backspaced. After completing the verification and correction of a record containing errors, the operator must reverify the entire corrected record. The record is written on
tape, backspaced, and checked as when recording.
The recorded and verified data is transmitted to the receiving terminal by placing the sending
and receiving terminals in the Send and Receive mode, respectively. Both operations are discussed in the following paragraphs.
Data is transmitted in fixed-length records as specified by the send and receive programs.
Record size can vary from a single character up to the 80-character capacity of the standard
buffer. A record can contain as many as 180 characters when the available buffer options are
employed at both the sending and receiving terminals.
Before a record can be transmitted, the sending terminal must read the record from tape, check
each character read for correct parity, and load the entire record into the ('ore buffer. Transmission begins when the core buffer contains the complete record and a ready status is received
from the receiving terminal. Each 6-bit character read from the core buffer during transmission
is translated to a 4-bit or an 8-bit character, serialized, and transmitted to the receiving
terminal.
The receiving terminal performs a validity check on each received character, translates the 4or 8-bit character to the internal 6-bit code, and stores each of the translated characters in the
core buffer. In addition to the validity check performed on each character, the receiving terminal
performs a longitudinal parity check at the end of the received record. After each character of
the record has been correctly received (i.e., no transmission errors), the record is written on
tape and the written data is checked for data recording errors. When the received. record is
successfully written on tape, the receiving terminal acknowledges the transmitting terminal via

4

AUERBACH Computer Technology Reports
300'-'30

MOHAWK

noo

6540

SERIES DATA-RECORDERS

the reverse-channel technique. Transmission of the next record begins when the acknowledge is
received from the receiving terminal and the sending terminal is ready to transmit (i. e., when
the next record is stored in its core buffer).
In the Search mode, a particular record can be located on the tape if it contains a unique identifying code or field. The identifying data is keyed into memory in the same position it occupies in
the record. The tape halts when a match is found or when blank tape is encountered. The Search
mode can be used to locate the beginning point of an interrupted recording or verifying operation,
or to locate a specific record for modification or correction.

TABLE Ill. MOHAWK 1100 SERIES
NUMERIC TRANSMISSION CODE
Numeric
to Be
Transmitted

0
1
2
3

4
5

6
7

8
9

Representation
in Buffer and
on Magnetic Tape*

Transmission
Code**

BA8421

8 4 2 1

o0
o0
o0
o0
o0

1 0 1
1 0 1
001
001
o1 0

0 0 0
000
001
001
0 1 0

0
1
0
1
0

000101
o 0 011 0
o0 0 1 1 1
00100 0
o 0 1 001

0
1
0
1
0

o1

0 1
011 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 0 0
1 001

*Each numeric includes a parity bit, which accompanies the numeric when
recorded on tape or in the buffer.
**The transmission code configuration provents more than two sequential
identical bits per numeric and permits a limited validity check.
Codes and Error Control
Internal 6-bit character codes are translated to one of two specific transmission codes. Buffer
positions designated as numeric locations by the stored program are translated from a 6-bit code
to a 4-bit transmission code. Alphanumeric buffer positions are translated from a 6-bit code to
an 8-bit transmission code. Table III shows the relationship between the numeric internal code
and the transmission code. Alphanumeric characters are encoded as follows:
Internal code

1248AB

Transmission code

12248AAB

The barred numbers indicate the two's complement of the preceding bit.
transmission code for alphanumerics.

Table IV shows the

The numeric and alphanumeric transmission codes permit a limited means for checking character validity. The stored program at the receiving terminal designates specific buffer positions
as numeric or alphanumeric codes. If an alphanumeric character is received in a position programmed for a numeric character, a character error results. A numeric character received in
a pOSition programmed for an alphanumeric character does not cause a character error.

© 1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5

DATA COMMUNICATIONS

6540

TABLE IV. MOHAWK 1100 SERIES ALPHANUMERIC TRANSMISSION CODE
Bit Position

Symbol

SYNC*
ODD*
EVEN*
(NOT USED)
1
2
3
4
5

6
7
8
9

0

'if
@

,

=

"
SPACE

/

S
T
U

V
W
X

Y
Z

F
,

%

-

Bit Position
Symbol
BAA8

4221

o0 1 1
o0 1 1
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100

10 10
1011
o 100
0101
o 0 10
0011
1100
1101
1010

1100
1101
1101
1101
1101

1011
0100
0101
0010
001 1

&

110 1
1101
1101
1101
1010

1100
1101
1010
1011
0100

A
B
C
D
E

1 01 0
101 0
1010
1010
1010

0101
0010
0011
1100
1101

F

1010
1010
1011
1 0 1 1
1 01 1
1011
1011
1011
1011
1011

1010
101 1
0100
o 10 1
0010
o0 1 1
1100
1101
1010
1 01 1

BAA8

4221

o 000
o 010
0100
0100
o 100
010 0
0100
0100
0100

111 1
1111
1 1 1 1
0100
0101
o 010
001 1
1100
110 1

0100
0100
010 1
010 1
010 1

101 0
101 1
0100
010 1
0010

010
010
010
010
010

001 1
1100
1101
1010
1011

*

0100
0101
001 0
0011
110 0

1
1
1
1
1

o 010
o0 1 0
o0 1 0
001 0
o 010
o0 1 0
o0 1 0
o 010
o0 1 1
o0 1 1
o0 1 1
001 1
o 011
o0 1 1

1101
1010
1011
0100
0101
o0 1 0
o0 1 1
1100
1101

'>

?

-

J
K
L
M
N
0

P

Q
R
!

$
)
;

G

H
I

9
<

(

+
I

*ODD or EVEN message codes precede data block for block count protection; see Paragraph
1. 5. SYNC, ODD, and EVEN codes are unique and are not generated from a character code
by the method described in Paragraph 1. 5.
An odd/even message code (8-bits) precedes each transmitted record to ensure against the loss
or duplication of records. The odd/even message code is generated at both sending and receiving
terminals. A message code error results when the two codes do not agree.
Error signaling in response to incorrect message codes or data transmission errors is performed
via the reverse-channel technique. The inherent value of this technique is that it eliminates the
time required for line turnaround to allow the receiver to transmit an acknowledge code.
An interrupted signal on the reverse channel during data transmission is interpreted by the send-:ing terminal as a request for retransmission. The signal on the reverse channel is normally
interrupted at the end of a transmission (i. e., after the last character is received correctly) and

6

AUERBACH Computer Technology Reports
3001-132.

MOHAWK 1100 SERIES DATA-RECORDERS

6540

is not returned until the currently received record has been successfully written on magnetic tape.
Once the signal is returned, the sending terminal, if ready, begins to transmit the next record to
the receiving terminal.
If the reverse-channel signal is not returned within a 20-second period, initiated at the start of
the last record, transmission is halted and operator intervention is required. For a further
description of the reverse-channel technique, see Report 6221, Digitronics Reverse-Channel
Dial-o-Verter Line.

Other 1100 Series Models
Other models in the 1100 Series line, which contain a communications interface, are described
in the following paragraphs. All these units can be operated as an 1101 Keyed Data-Recorder
when not in the send or receive modes. In appearance, the other models are identical with the
1103 LDC except for the addition of an auxiliary input or output device, which is usually located
on the desk to the left of the operator.
Model 1109 DPC Data-Recorder (Punched Card Input) - This unit is similar to the 1103 and includes a 3011 (SO-column) or 3051 (51-column) Punched Card Reader. Data is read photoelectrically from cards and can be entered into memory for recording on the magnetic tape in addition
to keyed-in data. The punched card reader is controlled from the 1109 keyboard and by program
codes in memory. Cards can be read continuously at 75 cards per minute for transcription of
data from the punched cards to magnetic tape. Cards can also be fed one at a time. The capacity
of both the input hopper and output stacker is 500 cards. The 11 09 is normally used to transfer
prepunched data contained in turnaround cards to magnetic tape as part of the total record.
Model 1112 Data-llecorder (Adding/Listing) - This unit is similar to the 1103 and includes a
Model 3021 14-column, net balance, adding/listing machine that can be operated from the 1104
keyboard. Data keyed into the fields specified by program codes is entered into memory and
transferred to the adding machine, where it is printed and added to the machine accumulator.
Non-add, identifying numbers, and negative numbers (subtraction) can also be entered. Printing
of a total can be initiated from either the keyboard or the adding machine; the total, however, is
not entered into the 1112's memory or recorded on the magnetic tape. A subtotal key is provided
on the adding machine keyboard with Feature 705. The adding machine can be used independently
of the 1112 for conventional functions. The 1112 provides a convenient method for accumulating
proof or hash totals when preparing a large number of records for input to further processing.
Model 1115 Data-Recorder (Paper Tape Input) - This unit is similar to the 1103 and includes a
Model 3005 Paper Tape Reader. Data can be read from paper tape and entered into data memory
for recording on the magnetic tape in addition to keyed-in data. The Paper Tape Reader is controlled from the 1115 keyboard and by program codes in memory and codes in the data from
paper tape. The 3005 Tape Reader can accommodate 11/16-, 7/S-, or 1-inch paper tape punched
in any 5- to S-level code. The rated reading speed is 400 characters per second. Mohawk states
that the unit will read a minimum of 100 SO-character records per minute and typically averages
120 to 130 records per minute.
Model 1183 Data-Recorder (Typewriter Output) - This unit is similar to the 1103 and includes
a MOdel 3013 Printer. Data previously recorded on magnetic tape can be printed in a separate
pass. Data within a record can be selectively printed as specified by the program codes in
memory. Horizontal tabulation can be initiated by a specific program code and controlled by the
tab stops set up in the printer. Printing can be initiated automatically for each record in a continuous run or initiated manually for selected records (located, perhaps, by search operations).
The 3013 Printer is the JBM 735 Input/Output Typewriter; it can be used as a conventional
electric typewriter when not being used with the 1183.

© 1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc.

7

DATA COMMUNICATIONS

6540

Model 1320 Buffered Line Printer - This unit consists of a line printer with a rated printing
speed of 250 lines per minute (using full character set) or 375 lines per minute (all numeric)
and a 132-character buffer. The printer can be connected to any 1100 Series Data-Recorder
and can receive data directly from a communications line or from magnetic tape; both operations are controlled by the program stored in the Data-Recorder buffer. The printer is capable
of printing up to 132 characters per line and can handle pin-fed fanfold forms up to 20 inches
wide.
The printer can operate in one of two modes: the edit mode or the non-edit mode. Format control operations, including horizontal tabulation, spacing, and line feed, are initiated by control
characters when the printer is in the edit mode. The non-edit mode is used for tape listing
operations; format control functions are not provided.

1.6

First Delivery:

May 1966.

1. 7

Availability:

4 to 6 weeks

2.

CONFIGURATION

The 1103 LDC Data-Recorder includes:
•

A magnetic tape drive.

II

A magIietic core buffer.

•

A keyboard for entering data.

•

A communications interface.

Other 1100 Series models that include a communications interface and an input or output device
include:
•

1109 DPC Data-Recorder - includes a punched card reader.

•

1112 DPA Data-Recorder - includes an adding/listing machine.

•

1115 DPT Data-Recorder - includes a paper tape strip reader.

•

1183 DPP Data-Recorder - includes an output typewriter.

Any 1100 Series Data-Recorder can also include a Model 1320 Buffered Line Printer. The 1320
Printer can be used to receive data from a communications line directly or can operate a data
transcription device to print data previously recorded on magnetic tape.
All auxiliary input/output devices included with Mohawk Data-Recorders except the 1320 Printer
can be used only for data transcription purposes or in the preparation of a tape; they cannot
interface directly with a communications line. The adding/listing device included with the 1112
Data-Recorder is operated from the 1112 keyboard concurrently with entering data in the 1112
buffer; data cannot be transferred from the buffer to the adding/listing device.
3.
3.1

INPUT
Prepared Input

Magnetic tape drive (with all 1100 Series Data-Recorders) Input medium:

8

0.5-inch magnetic tape recorded at 200 bits/in.
compatible with IBM 729 Series tape format.
AUERBACH Computer Technology Reports
3001-134

MOHAWK 1100 SERIES DATA-RECORDERS

Input code:

6540

6-bit BCD (even parity) or binary (odd parity);
see Tables III and IV.
80 characters; optionally 84, 90, 100, 120, 140,
160 or 180 characters.
64 characters; alphanumerics plus special and
record format characters.
6,250 char/sec.
limited by block length and transmission speed.

Quanti ty of data:
Character set:
Rated input spe ed:
Effective speed:

Punched card reader (with 1109 DPC Data-Recorder) .
Input medium:
Input code:
••.
Quantity of data:
Character set:
.
Rated input speed:
Effective speed:
Comments:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .•
. . ••. •. . . •. . . . ••••
••.•.•...........•
. . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • ..

standard 80-column punched cards.
standard Hollerith card code.
up to 80 characters per card.
64 characters.
100 chards/min.
75 cards/min.
Hollerith card code is translated to IBM BCD
code when data is transcribed on magnetic tape;
data is recorded on magnetic tape via the core
buffer.

Paper tape reader (with-1115 DPT Data-Recorder) Input medium:
Input code:
Quantity of data:
Rated input speed:
Effective speed:
Comments:

3.2

fully punched 11/16-, 7/8-, or 1-inch strips of
paper tape; tape widths are selectable by
switch.
any 5-, 7-, or 8-level code; parity can be
selected as odd or even when using 7- or 8level codes or can be ignored.
variable up to buffer capacity.
400 char/sec.
limited by record length.
paper tape data is transcribed to magnetic tape
via the core buffer.

Manual Input

Keyboard (with all 1100 Series Data-Recorders except 1181) Method of entry:
Quanti ty of data:
Character set:
Comments:

47-key keyboard; optional 64-key keyboard
available.
up to capacity of buffer.
47 characters; 26 alpha, 10 numeric, and 11
special.
64 code combinations can be produced when the
Multiple Code key is used; 13 of the 47 keys
are used to initiate special functions; keyboard
data is entered on tape via the core buffer.

3.3

Fixed Input:

a data field can be entered into the buffer and
automatically or manually duplicated in all
subsequent records.

3.4

Transaction Code Input:

no proviSion.

© 1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc.

9

DATA COMMUNICATIONS

6540

3. 5

Message Configuration:

messages are transmitted in fixed-length records
as specified by program; record size can be
from 1 to 80 data characters, or up to 180
characters optionally; each record is preceded
by a minimum of 3 sync characters followed
by an odd/even message code; each record
contains a longitudinal parity character at the

end.
3.6

OperatingProcedure

Before a message is transmitted, predetermined programs and time of transmission should be
established between the communicating terminals. Programs should be on program tapes and
ready for immediate use.
(1)

Load program into memory.

(2) Mount tape reel.
(3) Set control punch and keyboard switches.
(4) Establish connection by dialing or manually signaling.
(5) Depress Data key on data set.
3.7
4.

Entry of TIme and Date:

no provision.

OUTPUT

4.3

Output to Magnetic Tape

Magnetic tape drive (with al11100 Series Data-Recorders) Tape size:
Tape code: . . • . . . • . • . . . • . . . . . . . .
Rated output speed:
.•.•... . . . . . . . .
Effective speed:
.•...........•...
Format control:
.•..•............
Comments:

4.4

O.5-inch magnetic tape recorded at 200 bits/in.
compatible with IBM 729 Series tape format.
6-bit BCD (even parity) or binary (odd parity).
6,250 char/sec.
limited by block length and transmission speed.
extensive tape format control is provided by
stored program; see Paragraph 1.5 for description.
records are recorded in fixed-length format; an
80-character record is standard; with options,
records can be 84, 90, 100, 120, 140, 160 or
180 characters in length.

Output to Printer

Output typewriter (with 1183 DPP Data-Recorder) Output medium:

••••••

0·

••••

0

•••••

Character set:
Rated printing speed: .••....•.•..•.
Effective speed:
.•..........•....

10

friction-fed or pin-fed (optional) fanfold forms up
to 15.5 inches wide (13-inch writing width).
64 characters, including uppercase alphabetics,
numerics, punctuation marks, and special
characters; see Tables ITI and IV.
15 char/sec.
limited by carriage return, line feed, and other
format control functions.
AUERBACH Computer Technology Reports
3001-136

MOHAWK 1100 SERIES DATA-RECORDERS

Format control:
Comments:

...........

6540

controlled by horizontal and vertical tab function
codes.
horizontal spacing is 10 char/in.; vertical
spacing is 6 lines/in.; printer can operate in
either of 2 selectable modes; edit mode allows
format control; non-edit mode lists tape data;
data is transcribed from magnetic tape via the
core buffer.

1320 Buffered Line Printer (with any 1100 Series Data-Recorder) Output medium:
Character set:
Rated printing speed:
Effective speed:
Format control:
Comments:

5.
5.1

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION
Data Entry Errors

Type of checking:
Error indication:
. •. ••. . . •. . . •
Correction procedure:
. . . • • • • . •.

5.2

character parity and longitudinal parity are
checked when each record is read from
magnetic tape.
audible alarm sounds; lamp is lighted.
tape is automatically backspaced and read a
second time; operator intervention is required
when an error is detected a second time.

Data Transmission Errors

Type of checking:
Error indication:
Correction procedure:

5.3

printed fanfold forms up to 20 inches in width.
64 characters including alphabetic, numeric and
special symbols; see Tables III and IV.
250 lines/min (with full character set); 375 lines/
min (all numeric).
limited by character sequence, spacing, and
number of char/line.
controlled by horizontal and vertical tab function
codes.
horizontal spacing is 132 char/line; vertical
spacing is 6 or 8 lines/in.; printer can operate
in either of 2 selectable modes; edit mode
allows format control; non-edit mode lists data;
data can be received from remote terminal or
transcribed from magnetic tape via the core
buffer.

character validity and longitudinal parity.
indicator lamp is lighted; reverse-channel signal
is interrupted.
automatic retransmissions continue for up to 20
seconds; after this time period, transmission
halts, audible alarm sounds, lamp is lighted,
and operator intervention is required.

Data Recording Errors

Type of checking:

© 1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc.

each record is reread and checked bit for bit
with the buffer contents; character and longitudinal parity are also checked.

11

DATA COMMUN,ICATIONS

6540

Error indication:
Correction procedure: . . • . . . . . . . . . . . .•

5.5

Line Malfunctions

Detection:
Action:
6.

keyboard is locked, tape halts, lamp is lighted,
and audible alarm is sounded.
tape is automatically backspaced and data is
written a second time; operator intervention
is required when error occurs a second time.

•.........•...•......••••

•..•..•......••..•...•...•

absence of signal on reverse channel for 20
seconds.
operation halts.

CONDITION INDICATORS

A one-character binary data display. consisting of a group of lamps, is a standard feature of the
1100 Series Data-Recorders. The data character stored in the active memory position is displayed in 6-bit BCD code. The contents of the controlling program memory for that position are
also displayed, in 3-bit binary fashion. A separate lamp indicates whether the base or alternate
program is controlling. The number of the active memory position is displayed in decimal
fashion by two groups of ten lamps.
A comprehensive array of indicator lamps provides error status, transmission status, and
verification status displays. An audible alarm is included in conjunction with the error status
indicators.
DATA TRANSMISSION

7.
7. 1

Basic Characteristics

Rated transmission speed:

1,200 or 1,600 (optional) bits/sec over the
public telephone network; 3,400 or 4,800
(optional) bits/sec over a leased voice-band
line.
Transmission method:
• • . . . . . . . . . . . . • serial by bit.
Transmission code: . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . • • modified BCD code; see Paragraph 1.5.
Transmission mode: • . . . . • . . . . . • . . . . • half-duplex.
Order of bit transmission:
.. . . . . . • •••• low-order data bit first.
Synchronization: . • . . . . . . . . . . • . • . • ••. synchronous; each record is preceded by a
minimum or three sync characters.
7. 2

Connection to Communications Lines

Communications Line or Service
Public telephone network
operating at the follOwing speeds:
1,200 bits/sec: •.•••..••••••.••••
1,600 bits/sec: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common-carrier leased voiceband
line operating at the following speeds:
2,400 bits/sec: ••.•.••.•.••••.•••
4, 800 bits/sec:

Data Set*

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C
Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 201A

Bell System Data Set 201B or Western Union
2400 Baud Data Modem
Bell System Data Set 203 or Western Union
2481A Data Modem

*In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier communications consultant; also see Sections 4600, 4620 and 4640 for a current list of data sets available from
the common carriers and independent manufacturers.
12

AUERBACH Computer

Technolo~y

Reports
3001-138

6540

MOHAWK 1100 SERIES DATA-RECORDERS

7. 3

Transmission Control
manual dialing or signaling.
operator must establish voice communication and
then switch to data mode.
under control of stored program; see Paragraph
1.5 for description.

Call initiation:
Call reception:
Functional operations:

7.4
8.

no provision.

Multistation Operation:
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Component

1100 Series
Data-Recorders,
all models (1)

3021 Adding
Machine
(1112)
10
15
8.25
30

Width (in.)
Depth (in.)
Height (in.)
Weight (lb.)

31 or 43
29.25
43
260

Power (kva)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phases

0.31
115
60
1

0.06
115
60
1

Temperature Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

50-100
20-88
900

35-120
Up-95
160

Component
Width (in.)
Depth (in.)
Height (in.)
Weight (lb.)

3031 Printer
(1183)

21.75
15.75
9.75
61

Power (kva)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phases

0.12
115
60
1

Temperature Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

?
?
350

3005 Paper
Tape Reader
(1115)

20
10.5
10
35

-

0.07

-60-90
20-80
200

3011 or 3051
Card Reader
(1109)
18
10
8.25
25
0.07 (2)

-

-

59-98
20-75
190

1320 Buffered
Line Printer

39
24
48
500
?
115
60
1
60-95
40-80
?

Notes:
(1) This column applies to the basic keyed recording unit for all 1100 Series Data-Recorders.
Auxiliary input or output devices are listed separately. The reading table extension is 12
inches wide; this feature is standard on all models except the 1101, 1102, and 1103.
(2) Power for these devices is supplied from the basic 1100 Series unit.

© 1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc.
3001-139

13

6540

9.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS

PRICE DATA
Monthly
Rental
Component or Feature
1103
1109
1112
1115
1183
1320

LDC Data-Recorder
DPC Data-Recorder
DPA Data-Recorder
DPT Data-Recorder
DPP Data-Recorder
Buffered Line Printer

$

Purchase
Price

Monthly
Maintenance

Field
Installation

$

$

$

-

195.00
335.00
255.00
305.00
315.00
420

9,750
13,300
11,025
13,000
13,000
21,000

30.00
55.00
45.00
52.00
60.00
80.00

Std
5.00

Std
200

Std
0.50

50.00

7.00
10.00
6.00
20.00

280
400
240
990

2.00
2.50
0.50
5.00

FO
50.00
20.00
FO

990
1,200

5.00
5.00

40

NC

FO
FO
FO
25.00

3.00

120

0.50

10.00

NC

120

0.50

FO*

NC

120

0.50

FO*

3.00

120

0.50

FO*

3.00

120

0.50

FO*

3.00

120

0.50

FO*

3.00

120

0.50

FO*

3.00
5.00
5.00
2.00
10.00
20,00
30.00
40.00
50.00
NC

120
200
200
100
300
600
900
1,200
1,500
NC

0.50
0.50
0.50
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC

FO*
18.00
18.00
40.00
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
NC

-

-

-

-

Optional Features **
100 Block Counter
(incrementing)
110 In Lieu of Feature 100
132 Data-Recorder/1320
Interface for Second DataRecorder
150 Takeup Reel
200 Alternate Program
300 Self Check Digit (Mod 10)
302 Self Check Digit (Mod 11IBM Standard)
305 Universal Check Digit
310 Programmed Left Zero
311 Lette: Shift Lock
400 64-C racter Keyboard
(IBM)
401 64-Cbaracter Keyboard
(NCR)
402 64-Cbaracter Keyboard
(Honeywell)
403 64-Character Keyboard
(RCA-compatible)
404 64-Character Keyboard
(Burrough's 5000)
405 64-Character Keyboard
(GE)
407 64-Character Keyboard
(XS3-1050)
408 64-Character Keyboard
(RCA 381, 382 MTH)
500 90-Charapter Memory
501 84-Character Memory
502 Selective Record Limit
503 100-Character Memory
504120-Character Memory
505 140-Character Memory
506 160-Character Memory
507 180-Character Memory
600 Odd Parity
601 Odd/Even Parity Switch
(Toggle)

14

20.00
25.00
150.000TC
1.00

75.000TC

-

-

-

AUERBACH Computer Technology Reports
3001-140

6540

MOHAWK 1100 SERIES DATA-RECORDERS

Component or Feature
602 Odd/Even Parity Switch
(Momentary)
605 1,600-bps Transmission
Rate
606 Remote End of Transmission Alarm
608 High Speed 4-Wire
Interface for 11 03
609 End of File Recognition
Single Character
609-A EOF Recognition Single
Character and Full Block
630 Timing for Transatlantic
Communications
631 Western Union 2121B
Interface
632 ITT 2002 Interface
633 Data Rate Selection
GPO Modem
634 Data Rate Select
1200/1800
635 International/Domestic
Comm Adapter
700 Stroke Counter
702 End of Record Warning
Light
703 Reading Table Extension
w/o panel insert
704 Reading Table Extension
w/panel insert
708 RCA Compatible Hub
71 0 Document Holder
720 Memory Check

2105 GPO Modem Adapter
8641 ±. Phase Translator

Monthly
Rental
$

75.000TC
NC
50.000TC
30.00

Purchase
Price
$

-

-

-

NC

-

-

1,200

50.000TC

-

50.000TC

-

10.000TC

-

25.000TC
30.000TC
20.000TC
20.000TC
5.00
5.00
50.000TC

300
200

-

5.00
6.00
30.000TC
8.000TC

-

10.00

-

Monthly
Maintenance
$

50

-

57

Field
Installation
$

15.00

-

NC

35.00

-

90.00

NC

15.00

NC
NC

30.00
35.00

NC

35.00

NC

25.00

1. 00
0.50

30.00
10.00

-

-

NC

NC

NC

NC

-

400
NC

NC
NC

90.00

NC

-

Installed at
customer
engineer
request only
NC
15.00

Notes:
NC - No charge
OTC - One-time charge
FO - Factory only
*Field changes will be made by exchanging machines, at MDS discretion, for $25 maximum
freight charge.
**See Table I for the features included or available with each 1100 Series model.

© 1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc.

15

A

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS

6541:01
MOHA WK 4200 SYSTEM

AUERBACH REPORTS

•

ADVANCE REPORT
MOHAWK 4200 TTT DATA RECORDER SYSTEM

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:........................ 4200 TTT Data Recorder System .

. 12

Manufacturer: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mohawk Data Sciences Corporation
P. O. Box 630
Herkimer, New York 13350

.13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . translates and records data received from a TouchTone Telephone; can also consolidate several tapes
and convert between 7-channel and 9-channel format .
Description

. 15

The Mohawk 4200 TTT Data Recorder System, announced in early 1968, includes two Type 4201
magnetic tape units and a pooler control or a Type 902 interface. The 4200 TTT is functionally
similar to the other Mohawk Data Recorders discussed in Report 6540, but is packaged in a different cabinet and is arranged for receiving data from a conventional Touch-Tone telephone.
The information presented in this Advance Report was obtained from preliminary documentation. A complete report on the Mohawk 4200 TTT Data Recorder System will be published in
AUERBACH Data Communications Reports when detailed information becomes available.
The Type 4201 Unit is baSically a 7 -channel Data Recorder that includes a 64-character BCD
keyboard, an 80-character buffer, and an interface compatible with the Bell System Data-Phone
Data Set 403E3 for receiving the tones generated by a Touch-Tone Telephone set. The TouchTone telephone is discussed in Report 6040.
Data can be entered into the 4201 buffer via the keyboard or from a remote Touch-Tone telephone set. The Touch-Tone signals received by the Type 4201 Unit are translated to the BCD
code prior to buffer entry.
A single data set can be shared by both Type 4201 Units when the Type 4202 Electronic Switch
feature is incorporated.
A pooler control can be connected to the Type 4~01 Units to enable consolidating several short
tapes on a single tape for more efficient computer input.
A Type 902 interface can h~ used in place of the pooler control to permit data recorded at 200
bits per inch on 7-channd tapes to be pooled and converted to a 9-channel, 800-bit-per-inch
format.
All calls placed to the 4200 TT1' System are automatically answered. Originating devices include: a dial telephone with a 12-key Touch-Tone pad, a 12-key Touch-Tone telephone, or a
Touch-Tone Card Dialer.
Initial deliveries of the 420,0 TTT Data Recorder System are expected in the fourth quarter of
1968. The price of a typical 4200 TTT System is $430 per month. It can be purchased for approximately $25,800. A maintenance contract is available for $70 per month.

@

1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/68

A

AUERBACH
COMPUTER
TECHNOL.OGY
REPORTS

AUERBACH

1.

e

I

MOHAWK 6403
DATA-RECORDER

6543

GENERAL

1.1

Identity ..•..•.••...•••••••..... 6403 Data-Recorder.

1.2

Manufacturer.................... Mohawk Data Sciences Corporation
P.O. Box 630
Herkimer, New York 13350

1.3

Basic Function •.•••••••••.••••••. transmission and reception of data over a voiceband line; input is from magnetic tape recorded
in 9-channel, ffiM-compatible format; source
tape can be recorded and verified via keyboard.

1.5

Description

The Mohawk 6400 Series Data-Recorders are functionally identical to the 1100 Series discussed
in Report 6540. In the 6400 Series data is recorded on magnetic tape at 800 bits per inch in a 9channel format. Tapes prepared on a 6400 Series Data-Recorder are recorded in ffiM EBCDIC
code and are compatible with IBM 2400 Series Magnetic Tape Units.
The basic function of a data-recorder is to record data entered from a keyboard; i. e., it is intended as a replacement for keypunches. Various models in the 1100 Series provide auxiliary
input or output devices to add flexibility to the data preparation operation. The 6400 Series includes a wide range of models corresponding to the models in the 1100 Series line.
The 6403 is designed to provide buffered, synchronous communications in a half-/full-duplex
mode with a remote 6403 or 1100 Series communications terminal over the public telephone net- ,
work at 1,200 or 1,600 bits per second, or over a leased voiceband line at 2,400 or 4,800 bits
per second. The higher speeds of 2,400 and 4,800 bits per second require. the optional 8608 HighSpeed Communications Interface. Data transfer between terminals is under control of the programs stored in the sending and receiving buffers.
Mohawk also provides a line of adapters that permit the 6403 to be used over international commoncarrier facilities, including ITT, RCA, Western Union, and the British Government Post Office.
These adapters include timing for Transatlantic Communication, Western Union 2121B Interface,
ITT 2002 Interface, and the Data Rate Selection GPO Modem. A one-time charge of $10 to $30 applies for each of the adapters; and they can be installed only at the factory when the 6403 DataRecorder is ordered. The central component of the 6403 is the core storage unit, which acts as
a buffer. The buffer holds the keyed-in or received data when recording and the record to be
checked when verifying. Use of the buffer eased Mohawk's task of designing a unit for recording
tape in a format compatible with the magnetic tape drives used with computers.
The core storage unit adds greatly to the ease and flexibility of preparing and verifying magnetic
tape records. This unit permits storage of a program for defining the format of the tape records
and for automatically initiating certain operations; it also provides buffer storage for data prior
to recording or comparison. The standard 6403 contains 100 pOSitions of core storage; an 80- or
90-character buffer can be incorporated in place of the 100-character buffer at no additional cost.
A 180-character buffer with the selective block length device is also available at additional cost.
This option permits dialing any block length from 10 to 180 characters.
The Basic Program storage area contains four bits of storage for each character position of the
record. The alternate storage area (a standard feature on the 6403) provides an additional four
bits of program storage ?er character pOSition. Codes stored in the program areas are used to
delimit fields within a record and to define operations such as automatic duplication or verification of common information, automatic skipping, manual keying, and alphabetic (lower) or numeric
(upper) shift.

© 1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc.

6543

DATA COMMUNICATIONS

Figure 1. Mohawk 6403 Data-Recorder.
The Basic and Alternate program storage areas allow two different record formats to be defined,
e.g., both a transmit and receive program could be stored for interchanging data between terminals. Control can be freely switched between the basic program and the alternate program by
a Program Select key located on the keyboard. Program memory can be loaded from a strip of
magnetic tape or by manual entry.
A separate bit, common to both the basic and alternate programs, is provided for each character
position. This bit is set during a verifying operation when the character read from a record is
not the same as that in data storage for the previous record. This technique permits manual
initiation of automatic verification of data fields duplicated in consecutive records.
The 6403 incorporates a translator for translating the EBCDIC internal code to a modified EBCDIC
or modified BCD transmission code. The translator also translates the received BCD transmission code to the internal EBCDIC code. In addition to the character set defined in Table n, the
translator translates between BCD and EBCDIC plus zeros, minus zeros, and record marks. It
also translates EBCDIC right and left brackets to BCD plus and minus zeros, respectively, and an
EBCDIC colon to a BCD record mark.
Operating Modes
There are five principal modes of operation for the 6403 Data-Recorder, two of which are used
for data communications. The five principal modes, selected by the operator, are Entry, Verify,
Search, Send, and Receive.
Data is recorded on magnetic tape in the Entry mode. Data entered via the keyboard is stored in
the core storage unit. Fixed data can be automatically retained from record to record.

2

AUERBACH Computer Technology Reports
3001-144

MOHAWK 6403

6543

When a complete record has been assembled, the recording action can be initiated automatically
or manually. Data is written on the tape along with character parity bits and the longitudinal
parity check character. The tape is then automatically backspaced and read, and the recorded
data is compared bit for bit with the data stored in memory. The recorded character parity bits
and the longitudinal check character are also checked.
A magnetic tape previously recorded on a 6403 can be checked in the Verify mode. A record is
read into the unit's data storage area. Duplicate information in a series of records can be verified automatically as specified by the program. The operator can also initiate automatic verification of a data field repeated in successive records by depressing the Dup key. Character and
longitudinal parity are checked as the record is read in.
If a discrepancy is detected while data is being keyed in to verify a tape record, the keyboard is

interlocked and the operator is alerted by an indicator lamp. The operator can determine whether
there is an error in the tape record by making repeated attempts to key in the character or by
observing and interpreting the one-character binary data display. Corrections are easily made
by depressing a special key and then keying the correct character. A separate control key permits
correction of an entire field. If a correction is made, the tape is automatically backspaced. After
completing the verification and correction of a record containing errors, the operator must reverify the entire corrected record. The record is written on tape, backspaced, and checked as when
recording.
The recorded and verified data is transmitted to the receiving terminal by placing the sending and
receiving terminals in the Send and Receive mode, respectively. Both operations are discussed in
the following paragraphs.
Data is transmitted in fixed-length records as specified by the send and receive programs; record
size can vary from a single character up to the capacity of the buffer. A record can contain as
many as 180 characters when the available buffer options are employed at both the sending and
receiving terminals.
Before a record can be transmitted, the sending terminal reads the record from tape, checks each
character read for correct parity, and loads the entire record into the core buffer. Transmission
begins when the core buffer contains the complete record and a ready status is received from the
receiving terminal. Each 8-bit character read from the core buffer during transmission is translated to the modified BCD or EBCDIC transmission code, serialized, and transmitted to the receiving terminal.
The receiving terminal performs a validity check on each received character, translates the modified BCD or EBCDIC transmission code to the internal 8-bit EBCDIC code, and stores each of the
translated characters in the core buffer. In addition to the validity check performed on each character, the receiving terminal performs a longitudinal parity check at the end of the received record. After each character of the record ;las been correctly received (i.e., no transmission errors), the record is written on tape and the written data is checked for data recording errors.
When the received record is successfully written on tape, the receiving terminal acknowledges
the transmitting terminal via the reverse-channel technique. Transmission of the next record
begins when the acknowledge is received from the receiving terminal and the sending terminal is
ready to transmit (i. e., when the next record is stored in its core buffer).
In the Search mode, a particular record can be located on the tape if it contains a unique identifying
code or field. The identifying data is keyed into memory in the same poSition it occupies in the

record. The tape halts when a match is found or when blank tape is encountered. The Search mode
can be used to locate the beginning point of an interrupted recording or verifying operation, or to
locate a specific record for modification or correction.
Codes and Error Control
The specific codes transmitted are determined by both the Image Mode switch on the keyboard and
the program stored in the buffer memory.

© 1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc.

3

6543

DATA COMMUNICATIONS

When operating in the Image mode, the 6463 can transmit and receive any of the 256 code combinations in the EBCDIC code; this mode can only be used when communicating with a remote 6403.
When communicating with a remote 1103 IDC, the Image Mode switch must be placed in the Off
position to establish translation between EBCDIC and BCD codes. When operating in the BCD
mode, data communication between the 6403 and a remote 1103 IDe or another 6403 is limited to
the 64 code combinations compatible with the 1100 Series Data-Recorders.
When operating in the Image mode, redundancy is incorporated such that the 8-bit EBCDIC character is encoded as a 12-bit transmission code. AB with the 1100 Series Data-Recorders the
transmission codes are decoded in 4-bit groups. The following example illustrates the relationship between the internal code and the transmission code:
Internal code:

1 2 4 8 ABC D

Transmission code:

1 2 2 4 8 A ABC D

D

0

The barred symbols indicate the complement of the preceding bit; a binary 0 is transmitted in the
most significant bit poSition. EBCDIC codes structured in this format provide a limited means
for checking character validity.
When operating in the BCD mode, internal 6-bit character codes are translated to one of two specific transmission codes. Buffer pOSitions designated as numeric locations by the stored program
are translated from a 6-bit code to a 4-bit transmission code. Alphanumeric buffer pOSitions are
translated from a 6-bit code to an 8-bit transmission code. Table I shows the relationship between
the numeric internal code and the transmission code • Alphanumeric characters are encoded as '
follows:
Internal code:
, Transmission code:

1 2 4 8 A B
1

22

4 8 A

A B

The barred numbers indicate the complement of the preceding bit.
TABLE I. BCD MODE NUMERIC TRANSMISSION CODE
Numeric
to be
Transmitted

Representation
in Buffer and
on Magnetic Tape*

Transmission
Code**

BA8421

8421

0
1
2
3
4

000000
'000001
000010
.600011
000100

1010
1011
0010
0011
0100

5
6
7

DO{)101
{)00110
OGOlll
001000
001001

010 1
0110
1101
1100
1001

8
9

*Each numeric is accompanied by a parity bit when recorded on tape or
in the buffer.
**The transmission code configuration prevents more than two sequential
identical bits per numeric and permits a limited validity check.

4

AUERBACH Computer Technology Reports
3001-146

6543

MOHAWK 6403

The numeric and alphanumeric transmission codes provide a limited means for checking character validity. The stored program at the receiving terminal designates specific buffer positions
as numeric or alphanumeric codes. If an alphanumeric character is received in a position programmed for a numeric character, a character error results. A numeric character received in
a position programmed for an alphanumeric character does not cuase a character error.
The EBCDIC and BCD transmission codes are shown in Table II.

TABLE II. MOHAWK 6403 LDC TRANSMISSION CODE
Code

BCD

EBCDIC

Bit Position
Symbol*
SYNC**
ODD**
EVEN**
(NOT USED)
1
2
3

4
5

6
7
S
9

0

#
@
I

=
"
SPACE

/

S
T
U

V
W
X

Y
Z

: (~)

,

%

-

Bit Position

BAAS

4221

EDDC

BAAS

4221

0000
0010
0100
0100
0100
0100
0100
0100
0100

11 11
1 1 1 1
1111
0100
010 1
0010
o0 1 1
1100
1101

0011
1 1
0011
0011
0011

1010
1010
1010
1010
1010

010 1
0010
o0 1 1
1100
1101

o 100

1010
10 11
o 100
o 10 1
0010

o0 1 1
o0 1 1
0011
0011
o0 1 1

1010
1010
10 11
10 11
1010

1010
101 1
0100
010 1
0100

o0

0100
0101
0101
o 101

o0 1 1

o0

0101
0101
o 10 1
o 10 1
0101

110 0
110 1
1010
10 11

0101
010 1
010 1
0101
o 10 1

10 11
10 1 1
101 1
10 11
10 1 1

1 1
1100
110 1
1010
1011

0010
0010
0010
0010
0010

0100
1
0010
0011
1 100

010 1
010 1
0011
o0 1 1
o0 1 1

o 100
1 100
1100
1100
1100

0100
010 1
0010
o0 1 1
1100

0010
00 10
0010
o0 1 1
0011
0011
0011
0011
o0 1 1

110 1
1010
1011
0100
0101
0010
0011
1100
1 10 1

0011
0011
0011
0011
o0 1 1
o 10 1
010 1
o 10 1
0101

1100
1100
1100
0101
o 10 1
1011
110 1
1101
1101

110 1
1010
10 1 1
0100
0101
o0 1 1
1100
1101
1010

© 1970 AUER8ACH Info, Inc.

o 10

5

DATA COMMUNICATIONS

6543

TABLE ll. (Contd.)
EBCDIC

BCD

Code

Bit Position
Symbol*

Bit Position

BAA8

4221

EDDC

BAA8

4221

0011
001 1
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100

1010
1011
0100
0101
0010
o0 1 1
1100
1101
1010

0101
0101
0101
0011
0011
0011
0011
0011
0011

1101
10 11
1100
0010
0010
0010
0010
0010
0010

1011
0010
o 100
010 1
0010
0011
1100
1101
1010

1100
110 1
1101
110 1
1101

1011
0100
0101
0010
o0 1 1

0011
0011
o0 1 1
0101
0101

0010
0011
0011
0011
0011

0101
0011
1100

)
;
/\(1)
&

1101
110 1
1101
110 1
1010

1100
110 1
1010
1011
0100

0101
0101
0101
0101
0101

0011
0011
0011
0011
0010

1100
1101
1010
1011
o 100

A
B
C
D
E

1010
1010
1010
1010
1010

0101
0010
0011
1100
1101

o0 1 1
0011
0011
0011
0011

0100
0100
o 100
0100
o 100

0101
0010
o 0 11
1100
1101

F

1010
1010
1011
1011
1011
1011
1011
1011
1011
1011

1010
1011
0100
0101
0010
0011
1100
1101
1010
1011

o0 1 1
0011
o0 1 1
0011
0101
0101
0101
0101
0101
010 1

0100
0100
0101
0101
0101
0101
010 1
0101
0101
0101

10 10
1011
o 100
0101
0010
o 0 11
1100
1101
1010
1011

>
?

-J
K
L
M
N
0

P
Q
R
[(!)
$

*

G
H
I

](¢ )

.

<
(

+
! (I)

1011

o 100

*Symbols in parentheses indicate the corresponding symbol for the 1103 LDC.
**Odd or even message codes precede the data block for block count protection;
see Paragraph 1.5. Sync, odd, and even codes are unique and are not generated from a character code by the method described in Paragraph 1.5.
An odd/even message code (8 bits) precedes each transmitted record to ensure against the loss
or duplication of records. The odd/even message code is generated at both sending and receiving
terminals. A message code error results when the two codes do not agree.

6

AUERBACH Computer Technology Reports
3001-148

MOHAWK 6403

6543

Error signaling in response to incorrect message codes or data transmission errors is performed
via the reverse channel. The inherent value of this technique is that it eliminates the time required for line turnaround to allow the receiver to transmit an acknowledge code.
An interrupted signal on the reverse channel during data transmission is interpreted by the sending
terminal as a request for retransmission. The signal on the reverse channel is normally interrupted at the end of a transmission (i. e.. after the last character is received correctly) and is not
returned until the currently received record has been successfully written on magnetic tape. Once
the signal is returned. the sending terminal, if ready, begins to transmit the next record to the
receiving terminal.
If the reverse-channel signal is not returned within a 20-second period, which is initiated at the
start of the last record, transmission is halted and operator intervention is required. For a further description of the reverse-channel technique. see Report 6221, Digitronics Reverse-Channel
Dial-o- Verter Line.

The Model 1320 Buffered line Printer has a rated printing speed of 250 lines per minute (using the
full character set) or 3751ines per minute (all numeric) and a 132-character buffer. The printer
can be connected to. any 6400 Series Data-Recorder (except the 6404) operating in the BCD mode
and can receive data directly from a communications line or from magnetic tape; both operations
are controlled by the program stored in the data-recorder buffer. The printer is capable of
printing up to 132 characters per line and can handle pin-fed fanfold forms up to 20 inches wide.
The printer can operate in one of three modes: Full Edit. Line Edit. and List. Format control
operations, incl~ding horizontal tabulation, spacing. and line feed. are initiated by control characters when the printer is in the Edit mode. The List mode is used for tape listing operations;
format control functions are not provided.
Other Options
Other options for the 6400 Series Data-Recorders include:
•

Remote End-of-Transmission Alarm - audibly indicates the end of a transmission; the alarm
sounds for approximately 20 seconds at the end of transmission. The alarm can be located
50-cable feet from the data-recorder.

•

Negative Field IndicatioD./Record Delete - provides two separate and distinct functions. The
Negative Field Indication permits entering a minus sign in the zone portion of the last character of a field. The field to be affected must be a programmed left zero field. (programmed
left zero is a standard feature on the 6403.) The Record Delete feature permits erasing a
complete record on tape by reading the record into memory and initiating an Erase Backwards
operation. This feature is operational during Entry or Verify operations and is provided
mainly for correcting operator errors on tape. The Record Delete operation in the Verify
mode should be followed by a Release operation. which reads the next record into memory.
When deleting in the Verify mode, records can be removed if they were inadvertently entered
twice or contain parity errors.

•

Data-Recorder/1320 OUterface - provides a 1320 Buffered line Printer interface for a
second data-recorder to be used for backup.

1.6

First Delivery •••••..•••••....•.• Apri11968.

1.7

Availability ••••..••.•••..•.••.•. 5 months.

© 1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc.

7

6543

2.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS

CONFIGURATION

The 6403 Data-Recorder includes:
•

An mM 2400 Series compatible magnetic tape drive

•

A magnetic core buffer

•

A keyboard for entering data

•

A communications interface

3.

INPUT

3.1

Prepared Input
Magnetic tape drive (with all 6400 Series Data-Recorders) Input medium •.••••••••••••••••• 0. 5.... inch magnetic tape recorded at 800 bits/in.;
compatible with mM 2400 Series tape format.
Input code ••••••••••••••••••••• 8-level EBCDIC plus odd parity; see Table II.
Quantity of data ••••••••••••••••• 100 characters; with options, records can be 80,
90, or from 10 to 180 characters in length when
the l80-character buffer with the selective block
length device is incorporated.
Character set ••••••••••••••••.• 64 characters; alphanumeric plus special and
record format characters. See Tables I and II;
any of the possible 256 code combinations can
be recorded.
Rated input speed •••••••••••••••• 13,200 char/sec.
Effective speed ••••••••••••••••• limited by block length, transmission speed, and
transmission mode; see Table m.

3.2

Manual Input
Keyboard (with all 6400 Series Data-Recorders) Method of entry ••••••••••••••••• 47-key keyboard.
Quantity of data • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • up to capacity of buffer.
Character set •••••••••••••••••• 64 characters; 26 alpha, 10 numeric, and 28
special.
Comments ••••••••••••••••••••• 256 code combinations can be produced when the
Multiple Code key is used; 13 of the 47 keys are
used to initiate special functions; keyboard data
is entered on tape via the core buffer.

8

AUERBACH Computer Technology Reports
3001-150

6543

MOHAWK 6403

TABLE III: MOHAWK 6403 EFFECTIVE BLOCK TRANSMISSION SPEEDS
Effective Block Transmission Speed,
blocks/min
Block Size,
characters

Mode

Line Transmission Speed, bits/sec
1,200

1,600

2,000

2,400

20

Image
BCD, Alpha
BCD, Num.

140
152
166

153
163
175

161
170
181

168
176
185

100

Image
BCD, Alpha
BCD, Num.

45
60
91

56
73
106

66
84
117

74
94
126

180

Image
BCD, Alpha
BCD, Num

28
39
65

36
49
78

43
58
89

50
66
99

3. 3

Fixed Input • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • a data field can be entered into the buffer and
automatically or mamJ.ally duplicated in all
subsequent records. Receiving terminal can
substitute fixed fields for fields deleted from
transmiSSion; these fields need not have same
location as deleted fields.

3.4

Transaction Code Input •.••.••.••••. no proviSion.

3.5

Message Configuration ••••••••.•••• messages are transmitted in fixed-length records
as specified by program; the actual transmitted
record length varies with the program and with
buffer size; up to 25 consecutive characters can
be deleted; at least 1 character must separate
deleted fields; the last position must be transmitted. Fields deleted in the tranSmission can
be automatically filled from constant information preset in the receiving terminal buffer; see
Paragraph 3.3. Each record is preceded by a
minimum of 3 sync characters followed by an
odd/even message code; each record contains a
longitudinal parity character at the end.

3.6

Operating Procedure

Before a message is transmitted, predetermined programs and time of transmission should be
established between the communicating terminals. Programs should be on program tapes and
ready for immediate use.
The operating procedure is as follows:
(1)

Load program into memory.

© 1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc.

9

6543

DATA COMMUNICATIONS

(2) Mount tape reel.
(3) Set control switches on keyboard.
(4) Establish connection by dialing or manually signaling.
(5) Depress Data key on data set.
3. 7 Entry of Time and Date ••• '. ~ • • • • • • ••• no provision.
4.
4.3

OUTPUT
Output to Magnetic Tape
Magnetic tape unit (with all 6400 Series Data-Recorders) Tape size ••••••••••••••••••••• O. 5-inch magnetic tape recorded at-SOO bits/in.;
compatible with IBM 2400 Series tape format.
Tape code ••••••••••••••••••••• 8-level EBCDIC plus odd parity.
Rated output speed ••••••••••••••• 13,200 char/sec.
Effective speed • • • • . . • • • • • • • • • • • limited by block length, transmission speed, and
transmission mode; see Table m.
Format control • • • • • • • • • • • • • . ••• extensive tape format control is provided by
stored program; see Paragraph 1.5 for description.
Comments .••••••••••••••••••.. records are recorded in fixed-length format; a
100-character record is standard; with options,
records can be 80, 90, or from 10 to 180 characters in length when the 180-character buffer
with the selective block length device is incorporated.

5.
5.1

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION
Data Entry Errors
Type of checking • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••• character parity and longitudinal parity are
checked when each record is read from magnetic tape.
Error indication ••••••••••••••••. lamp is lighted.
Correction procedure •••••••••••••• tape is automatically backspaced and read a
second time; operator intervention is required
when an error is detected a second time.

5.2

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . character validity and longitudinal parity •
Error indication •••••••••••••• •.• indicator lamp is lighted; reverse-channel signal
is interrupted.

10

AUERBACH Computer Technology Reports
3001-15Z

MOHAWK 6403

6543

Correction procedure .••.•......•.• automatic retransmissions continue for up to 20
seconds; after this time period, transmission
is halted, error indicators are lighted, and operator intervention is required.
5. 3

Data Recording Errors
Type of checking • • • • • . • . . • .

.. each record is reread and checked bit for bit with
the buffer contents; character and longitudinal
parity are also checked.

Error indication •••••...•....• ••. keyboard is locked, tape is halted, and status indicators are lighted.
Correction procedure • • • • . . • . • . . ... tape is automatically backspaced and data is
written a second time; operator intervention is
required when error occurs a second time.
5. 5

Line Malfunctions
Detection • • . • . . • • • • . • • . • . • . . ••. absence of signal on reverse channel for 20
seconds.
Action • . • • . • • . • • • • . • • • •••••••• operation halts •

6.

CONDITION INDICATORS

A one-character binary data display, consisting of a group of lamps, is a standard feature on 6400
Series Data-Recorders. The data character stored in the active memory pOSition is displayed in
8-bit EBCDIC code. The contents of the controlling program memory for that poSition are also
displayed, in 4-bit binary fashion. A separate lamp indicates whether the basic or alternate program is controlling. The number of the active memory position is displayed in decimal fashion by
two groups of ten lamps and one group of two lamps.
A comprehensive array of indicator lamps provides error status, transmission status, and verification status displays.
7.
7.1

DATA TRANSMISSION
Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed .••••..•..• 1,200 or 1,600 (optional) bits/sec over the public
telephone network; 2,400 or 4, 800 (optional)
bits/sec over a leased voiceband line.
Transmission method . • • . . • . . . . . . • . serial by bit.
Transmission code ••••..•.••.•.••• modified BCD or EBCDIC code; see Paragraph
1.5 and Tables II and ill.
Transmission mode .••••.••.•••••• half-duplex.
Order of bit transmiSSion .••..•••••• low-order data bit first.
Synchronization ••••.•.•••••.••••. synchronous; each record is preceded by a minimum of 3 sync characters.

© 1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11

6543

7. 2

DATA COMMUNICATIONS

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line or Service

Data Set*

Public telephone network operating at
the following speeds:
1,200 bits/sec ••••••.•••••••••• Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C.
1,600 bits/sec. ,.••••••••.•.•••. Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 201A.
Common-carrier leased voiceband
line operating at the following speeds:
2,400 bits/sec ••••••••••••••••• Bell System Data Set 201B or Western Union 2400
Baud Data Modem.
4,800 bits/sec ••••••••••••••••• Bell System Data Set 203 or Western Union 2481A
Baud Data Modem.
7.3

Transmission Control
Call initiation •••.•.••••••••••••• manual dialing or signaling.
Call reception •••••••••••.••••••• operator must establish voice communication and
then switch to data mode.
Functional operations • • • • • • • • • • • • • . under control of stored program; see Paragraph
1.5.

7.4

Multistation Operation ••••••••.•••• no provision.

8.

PHYSICAL

SPECI~ICATIONS

Component

6403 Data-Recorder

Width (in.)
Depth (in.)
Height (in.)
Weight (lb.)

31.25
29.25
43
270

Power (kva)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)

0.31
115
60

Phases
Temperature Range eF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

1
50-100
20-88
885

* In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used: check with your local common-carrier communications consultant; also see Reports 4600, 4620, and 4640 for a current list of data sets
available from the common carriers and independent manufacturers.

12

AUERBACH Computer Technology Reports
3001-154

MOHAWK 6403

9.

6543

PRICE DATA

Component or Feature
6403 LDC Data-Recorder

Monthly
Rental

Purchase
Price

Monthly
Maintenance

Field
Installation

$

$

$

$

-

220.00

10,550

39.00

10.00
5.00

400
200

NC
0.50

NC
50.00

7.00

280

2.00

FO

10.00
20.00

400
990

2.50
5.00

50.00
FO

20.00

990

5.00

FO

20.00

990

5.00

FO

25.00

1,200

5.00

FO

115

-

0.50

600

1.00

FO
50.00
18.00
FO

-

NC
NC

18.00
. 15.00

Optional Fea1ures
2105 GPO Modem Adapter
8110 Block Counter (Decrementing)
8132 Data-Recorder/1320 Interface for Second Data-Recorder
8150 Take-up Reel
8300 Self-Check Number Device
(Mod 10)
8301 Self-Check Number Device
(Mod 7)
8302 Self-Check Number Device
(Mod 11)
8305 Universal Self-Check Number Device
8309 Negative Field Indication
8320 Single Run Entry/Verify
8500 90-Character Memory
8507 180-Character Memory
with Selective Block Length
Device
8508 80-Character Memory
8605 1,600-bit/sec Transmission Rate
8606 Remote End of Transmission Alarm
8608 High-Speed Four-Wire
Interface for 6403
8630 Timing for Transatlantic
Communications
8631 Western Union 2121B
Interface
8632 ITT 2002 Interface
8633 Data Rate Selection
GPO Modem
8634 Data Rate Select
1,200/1,800
8635 International Domestic
Communications Adapter
8640 :I:: Phase, Record Mark
Translator
8703 Reading Table Extension
without Panel Insert
8704 Reading Table Extension
with Panel Insert
8705 Subtotal for 3021 Adding
Machine

NC
2.00
NC
14.50
NC
NC
50.000TC

-

-

-

-

1,200

NC

35.00

10.000TC

-

NC

15.00

25.000TC

-

NC

30.00

30.000TC
20.000TC

--

NC
NC

35.00
35.00

20.000TC

-

NC

25.00

5.00

300

1.00

30.00

NC

-

-

15.00

30 .• 00

5.00

50

NC

NC

6.00

57

NC

NC

NC

FO

50.000TC

-

NC - no charge
OTe - one-time charge
FO - .factory only.
© 1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc.

13

A
AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6550:01

II

MOTOROLA
TP-4000 SERIES
MOTOROLA TP-4000 SERIES TELEPRINTERS

.1
. 11

. 12

. 13

. 15

GENERAL
Identity: ...
Manufacturer: .

TP-4000 Sertes Teleprinters .
Motorola Inc .
Government Electronics Division
1460 N. Cicero Avenue
Chioago, minois 60651
prSnts data received from a para1lel-by-bit source.

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DeSCription
A common misconception within computer circles is that the Motorola TP-4000 Series Teleprinter is a data communications device. The Teleprinter has been incorporated in special
systems in a data communications environment, but at present, an off-the-shelf TP-4000
Series Teleprinter with a communications interface is not available. Motorola is, however,
planning a oommunication capability for its TP-4000 Series Teleprinters to be avaUable in the
near future.
The Motorola TP-4000 Series Teleprinter is a high-speed, desk-top, non-impact printer
that uses an electrothermal printing technique simUar to the technique used by some facsimUe
devices. The Teleprinter prints at speeds up to 400 characters per second (4000 words per
minute) and features a core-rope translator and integrated circuity in addition to its unique
printing technique. Figure 1 shows a typical TP-4000 Series Teleprinter.
The special paper required for the Motorola Teleprinter contains a thin layer of aluminum
deposited on a paper base, smoothly surfaced by a light-gray chemical coating. Printing
appears as gray characters over the light gray background, with a limited degree of contrast
(see Figure 2). Multiple copies cannot be produced by the Teleprinter.
The Teleprinter prints 80 characters per line with a vertical line spacing of six lines per inch.
Maximum line length and paper width are 7. 2 inches and 8. 4 inches, respectively. Frictionfed roll forms are used.
The Teleprinter includes a code translator unit and a printer. The translator unit accepts
parallel-by-bit data characters and translates each character into five discrete seven-bit
codes required to form a printed character. Up to U (or optionally 33) printers can be
operated from a single translator unit.
The TP-4000 Series Teleprinter line includes six models ranging in speed from 125 to 400
characters per second. Table I lists the available models together with rated speed and
cost information.
TABLE I: TP-4000 SERIES TELEPRINTERS
Model

Speed,
char/Bec

Printer
Cost, $ (1)

Translator
Cost, $ (2)

TP-4125

125

5,400

3,900

TP-4200

200

5,400

3,900

TP-4225

225

5,400

3,900

TP-4250

250

5,400

3,900

TP-4300

300

5,000

3,800

TP-4400

400

5,400

3,900

(1) Discounts applying to purchases of printers in quantities exceeding nine are
approximately as follows:
10 to 19 printers: 12%
20 to 49 prtnte1'll: 23%
DtBcounts apply to all model. and refer to base prices shown in table.
(2) Discounts applying to purchues of translators in quantities exceeding nine are
approximately as follows:
10 to 19 tran.lators: 5%
20 to 49 translators: 10%
Diaoountll apply to all model. and refer to b..e prices .hown in table.

C 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

11/67

6550:02
MOTOROLA
TP-4000 SERIES

. 15

Figure 1. Typical Motorola TP-4000 Series Teleprinter .
Description (Contd. )
The Teleprinter accepts any customer-specified 6- or 7 -level code. Control-character
recognition, including Carriage Return/Line Feed and End-of-Transmission (EDT). is performed by the translator unit. A Carriage Return/Line Feed operation is automatic at the
end of an 80-character line; an EDT character inhibits further printer action. The character set contains up to 63 printable characters, including upper-case alphabetics. numerics,
punctuation marks, and special symbols.
Motorola's printing technique employs four equally-spaced printing heads attached to a continuous belt. The belt, which is slightly inclined from the horizontal. is driven at constant
speed across the paper from left to right. A single synchronous motor drives the paper and
the belt; both are in constant motion as printing is performed.
Print head spacing is such
that the departure of a print head from a completed print line coincides with the arrival of
the follOwing print head at the beginning of the next line. Figure 3 shows the relationships of
the various components.
A single print head is connected to the print circuitry during a line print period; connection is
made by seven fingers extending from the print head. When a print head enters the printing
zone, its fingers contact a commutator that extends the width of the paper. The fingers ride
against the commutator as the head moves across the paper from left to right. Head connection terminates as the print head exits from the print zone and the next print head contacts
the commutator to print the next line.
Each of the seven fingers extending from the print head terminates in a print stylus. The
seven styli are arranged in a vertical column. Printing is performed by an electrical discharge between a stylus and the platen; the discharge produces a small dark dot on the
chemically-treated paper. .A printed character appears as a pattern of dots arranged in five
columns of seven dots per column. The character is constructed by applying five sequential
electrical impulses to selected styli. Selection and sequencing of the print styli is a function of the print control circuits. Figure 2 shows a sample of the printing.
(Contd. )

11/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A..
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6~50:03

MOTOROLA
TP-4000 SERIES

CONCEPTS.

At"lONG THES:E ARE THE FOLLOt·.11 t'~G;:

Figure 2. Motorola TP-4000 Series Sample Printout.

PAPER
ROL.L.

SEVEN INPUT CONNECTIONS
FROM PRINT AMPL.IFIER

L.ETTER
SPACE

COL.UMNS
ROWS

I!

z.

~

; :

,,?-

! 6 '---.,

3.

PRINT

4....

HEAD

5 •
6 •
7 •••••

Figure 3.

TP-4000 Series Printing Technique.

© 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/67

A..

AUERBACH

AUERBACH

6650:01

DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

PHILCO-FORD 0-20

PHILCO-FORD ALPHANUMERIC COLOR DISPLAY UNIT MODEL 0-20

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alphanumeric Color Display Unit Model D-20 .

. 12

Manufacturer: .

.13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . displays, via cathode ray tube, data received from
a remote computer or entered via keyboard;
transmits data to a remote computer over the
public telephone network or leased voice-band
line .

. 15

Description

. . . . . . . Phllco-Ford Corporation
W D L Division
1002 Gemini Avenue
Houston, Texas 77058

The Philco-Ford Model D-20 Alphanumeric Color Display Unit is designed to communicate
with a remote computer over the public telephone network or a leased voice-band line, under
control of a stored program in the computer. The D-20 is a self-contained unit and includes
a keyboard, cathode ray tube, memory, and communications interface.
Data is transmitted asynchronously in a half-duplex mode at 110 bits per second (10 characters
per second).
A modified 7-level USASCn transmission code Is employed, with an eighth bit added for character parity; see Table 1. One start bit and two stop bits are appended to each character transmitted resulting in an 11-bit character.
The D-20 Color Display Unit contains a 768-character memory module, composed of magnetostrictive delay lines, in addition to editing logic, control logic, color circuits, character
generation circuits, and a communications interface that is compatible with the Bell System
Data-Phone Data Set 103A2.
The D-20 Color Display Unit provides a 10.4 inch by 7.4 inch image area. The long side of
the cathode ray tube (CRT) is mounted horizontally.
The image area is arranged in 24 lines of 32 characters per line. A maximum of 768 characters can be displayed on the screen. The D-20 can display data in three colors: red, green
and blue; data can also be displayed in white. Characters and symbols are displayed by a 5by-7 dot matrix.
The keyboard is attached directly to the Display Unit and has 53 keys arranged in conventional
typewriter style plus an array of 12 special function keys located at the right of the keyboard.
Of the 12 special function keys, 9 provide control functions that include color selection, local
operation, transmit, etc; three of these keys are not used at present.
Editing Facilities
Editing facilities are limited; they include the ability to replace a character with another character or space and to erase the screen by clearing the memory. Repetitive entry of characters
or space is provided by the simultaneous depression of the Repeat key and that of the desired
character to be repeated. Horizontal and vertical tab functions are not provided.
Cursor Controls
Cursor controls include:
• Skip - advances the cursor one character position. Simultaneous depression of the
Repeat and Skip keys causes repetitive cursor movement until the cursor moves off
the screen (after the last display position is located).
•

Backspace - backspaces the cursor one character position. Simultaneous depression of the Repeat and Backspace keys cause repetitive cursor movement until the
first display position is located.

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH !nfo, Inc.

5/68

6650:02
PHILCO -FORD 0 -20

Figure 1. Philco-Ford Alphanumeric Color Display Unit Model D-20.

· 15

Description (Contd.)
•

Carriage Return/Line Feed Down - establishes a single space between displayed
lines with the cursor positioned at the initial character location of the next line.
Simultaneous depression of the Repeat key and this key causes repetitive cursor
movement until the cursor is positioned at the initial character position of the last
line.

•

Carriage Return/Line Feed Up - establishes a single space between displayed lines
with the cursor positioned at the initial character location of the previous line. Simultaneous depression of the Repeat key and this key causes repetitive cursor movement until the cursor is positioned at the initial character location of the first line.

The non-destructive cursor is displayed as a caret (1\) and marks the next data-entry position.
The cursor color indicates the color of the next character to be displayed and can be switched
between red, green, blue, and white via the keyboard. A data code does exist for the cursor
sy~bol and can be received and displayed but cannot be entered and stored from the keyboard.
· 16

First Delivery:

........ ?

· 17

Availability:..................... 3 months.
(Contd. )

5/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

fA.
AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6650:03
PHILCO-FORD 0 -20

It

TABLE I: PHILCO-FORD D-20 COLOR DISPLAY UNIT USACII TRANSMISSION CODE
Bit
Positions

bT

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

be

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

b5

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

6·

T·

Column
b4

b3

b2

bl
Row

O·
NULL

1·

2

3

4

5

SP

;

/\

P

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

9

1

A

Q

0

0

1

0

2

C

2

B

R

0

0

1

1

3

,.

3

C

S

0

1

0

0

4

$

4

D

T

0

1

0

1

5

%

5

E

U

0

1

1

0

6

6

F

V

0

1

1

1

7

",

7

G

W

1

0

0

0

8

(

8

H

X

1

0

0

1

9

)

9

I

Y

•

:

J.

Z

+

;

K

••

<

L

=

M

>

N

?

0

1

0

1

0

10

1

0

1

1

11

0

0

12

1

1

1

1

0

1

13

1

1

1

0

14

1

1

1

1

15

LF

.

CR

/

NOT
DEFINED

•
t

••

• Codes contained in columns O. 1. 6. and 7 are not displayed or stored in the buffer memory .
•• These codes are displayed as spaces.
Special symbols:
•

Start-of-Entry symbol

9 End-of-Entry symbol.

.2

.3
.31

. 32

-

Tilde symbol; can be stored in memory and displayed only through keybo.ard entry.

t

Up Arrow symbol; can be stored in memory and displayed as I only through keyboard entry .

CONFIGURATION
The D-20 is a self-contained unit and includes a keyboard, cathode ray tube, memory, and
communications interface.
The data sets required for connection to standard communications facilities are specified in
Paragraph . 72 .
INPUT
Fixed Input:. .
· no provision .
Manual Input
Keyboard: ..
· via a 53-key keyboard.
Quantity of Data:
· up to 768 characters .
Character set: .
. 60 characters, including digits, upper-case letters,
and special symbols.
Comments: ..
· 6 keys provide control functions only and do not
produce a displayable symbol; 4 keys are blank
(no function).
© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

5/68

6650:04
PHILCO-FORO 0-20

· 33

Fixed Input: . . . . . . . . .

. no provision.

· 34

Transaction Code Input: .

. no provision.

· 35

Message Configuration
The D-20 accepts commands configured in a two-character sequence. Table II presents the
ten commands accepted by the D-20. Messages received by the D-20 must begin with an SOM
character sequence. Message transmission from the D-20 is initiated by a Request-for-Data
(RFD) character sequence or by depressing the Transmit key on the keyboard. Control characters are stripped from the incoming message and are not entered in the buffer memory .
Data received between the Up Arrow and Line Feed characters is also excluded from entering
the memory. Control characters can not be transmitted from the D-20 except by entering the
desired two-character control sequence via the keyboard; see Table II.
TABLE II: CONTROL CHARACTER SEQUENCES *
Control
Characters

Function

Control Codes

- 0

1011100

0110000

Initiates white color mode

- 1

1011100

0110001

Initiates green color mode

- 2

1011100

0110010

- 3

1011100

0110011

Initiates red color mode
Initiates blue color mode

- 4

1011100

0110100

Initiates carriage return

- 5

1011100

0110101

Initiates EOM sequence; unlocks Keyboard
at end of received message

- 6

1011100

0110110

Initiates character skip sequence (same
as Skip key)

- 7

1011100

0110111

Request-far-Data (RFD) sequence initiates transmit mode

- 8

1011100

0111000

Start-of-Message (SaM) sequence when received. positions cursor to
upper-left corner. initiates white
color mode. and locks keyboard

- 9

1011100

0111001

Initiates display erase sequence
(same as Erase)

* Control character sequences can be entered from the keyboard or received from
the communications line .

. 36

Operating Procedure
A message to be transmitted from a D-20 Alphanumeric COIOl' Display Unit is composed by
depressing the Erase key to clear the screen and pOSition the cursor at the upper left corner of
the screen (first position in memory), and then entering the data from the keyboard. Controls
are provided to advance or backspace the cursor one or several pOSitions at a time (when using
the Repeat key) to move the cursor to the beginning of the next line or to the beginning of the
previous line, or to return the cursor to the beginnin!; of tle first line. Composition errors
can be corrected or changes to existing text can be made by positioning the cursor to the character (s) to be changed and keying new data; existing text can only be erased by entering spaces
over the portion of tcxt to be erased.
The message to be transmitted is bracketed by the displayed Start-of-Entry and End-of-Entry
symbols which are entered from the keyboard. Once the message has been composed and is
ready for transmission, the operator depresses the On Line switch to On Line mode (which
locks the keyboard) and either awaits a Request-for-Data (RFD) sequence or depresses the
transmit key. Only the bracketed data is transmitted. Specific cursor positioning is not essential prior to transmission. Keyboard entery is inhibited while receiving or transmitting a
message .

. 37

Entry of Time and Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no provision.
(Contd. )

5/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

fA
a

..

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6650:05

PHILCO-FORD D -20

.4

OUTPUT

.46

Output to Visual Display Device
D-20 A/N Color Display Unit
Output medium: . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . cathode ray tube, displays red, green, blue, or
white characters against black background .
Character set: ...
. . . . . . . . . . digits 0-9, upper-case letters A -Z, and 24 punctuation and special symbols; see Table 1.
Character size: . .
. . . . . .. .. characters are formed by a 5- by 7 -dot matrix
which is nominally 0.20 inch wide and 0.21 inch
high.
· . 10.4 inches wide by 7.4 inches high.
Display size: . . . . . . . . . .
Characters per line: . . . . .
· .32 •
. . . . . . 24.
Lines per display: . . . . . .
Characters per display:. . . . .
· .768.
Buffer capacity: . . .
· 768 characters.
Format control: . . . . . . . . . . · . . . ., . flexible cursor movement controls: see Paragraph
.15; each space position on the display occupies
one character position in the buffer; horizontal
and vertical tab functions are not provided; color
selection; carriage return.
Rated output speed:. . .
· 10 char/sec over a voice-band line.
· . . lower than rated speed due to exchange of control
Effective output speed:
sequences.

·5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

· 51

Data Entry Errors: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no provision except visual checking of displayed
data.

· 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking: . . . . . . .
Error indication: . . . . .
Correction procedure:. .

· . . character and longitudinal parity.
· .. special symbol (customer option) is displayed in
place of error character.
. . . . . requires operator intervention.

· 53

Data Recording Errors,: .

· no provision except visual checking of displayed
data.

.55

Line Malfunctions:

· no special provisions for checking.

.6

CONDITION INDICA TORS: .

·7

DATA TRANSMISSION

.71

Basic Characteristics

. . . . . . . . . none.

Rated transmission speed: .
· . . . . . . 10 char/sec (110 bits/sec).
Transmission method:. .
· . . . . . . serial by bit.
Transmission code: ... . . . . . . · . . . . . . 7-level USASCII; a start bit, an even parity bit,
and two stop bits are added to each character;
a total of 11 bits are transmitted per character;
see Table 1.
· . . . . . . . half-duplex.
Transmission mode: . . . . .
Order of bit transmission: .
· . . . . . . . low-order bit (bl) is transmitted first, parity bit
last .
Synchronization:. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . start and stop bits are transmitted with each character.

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/68

6650:06
PHILCO-FORD 0 -20

. 72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line or Service

Data Set*

Bell System leased line Type 3002
Data Channel: . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. Bell System Data Set 103F.

Western Union Class E Data Channel: . . . . Western Union 600 Baud Data Modem.
Public telephone network: . . . . . • . . . . . . Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 103A2.
* In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; see your local common-carrier communications consultant .
. 73

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . • . . . . .

· .. manual dialing or signaling.

Call reception: . . . . . . . . .
Functional operation:. . . . .

· .. manual.
· .. carriabe return, line feed, and the control character sequences listed in Table II .

. 74

Multistation Operation: . . . . . . . • . . . . . . no provision .

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
D-20 Display Unit

Component

.9

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

18.25
28.5
19.5
125

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
Phases

0.35
115
60
1

Temperature Range rF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

59 to 95
10 to 90
?

PRICE DATA

Componcnt or Feature

Purchase *
Price,

$
Model D-20 Alphanumeric
Color Display Unit

*

5/68

7200

Philco-Ford states that a leasing arrangement and
a maintenance contract is available on request.

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6651:01
PHILCO-FORD 0-21

III

PHILCO-FORD ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY UNIT MODEL 0-21

.1

GENERAL

,11

Identity:..

. Alphanumeric Display Unit Model D-2L

.12

Manufacturer: .

. Philco-Ford Corporation
WDL Division
1002 Gemini Avenue
Houston, Texas 77058 .

. 13

Basic Function: . , . , . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . displays, via cathode ray tube, 'data received from
a remote computer or entered via keyboard;
transmits data to a remote computer over the
public telephone network or leased voice-band
line .

. 15

Description
The Philco-Ford Model D-21 Alphanumeric Display Unit is a stand-alone display unit developed
A detailed analysis of the IBM 2260/2848 can be found in Report 6456.
by Philco-Ford from the basic IBM 2260 Display Station and IBM 2848 Display Control.

This summary report presents the differences between the equipment marketed by Philco-Ford
and IBM and contains the information unique to the D-21 Display Unit. Except where noted in
this report, the Philco-Ford D-21 is functionally identical to the IBM 2260 (see Report 6456).
Differences Between Philco-Ford and IBM Equipment
Some major differences exist between the Philco-Ford Model D-21 Alphanumeric Display Unit
and the IBM 2260 Display Station/2848 Display Control. The D-21 features:
•

Increased memory size,

•

Increased viewing area,

•

A different display format, and

•

A different keyboard arrangement.

Transmission Characteristic s
The D-21 Display Unit operates asynchronously over the public telephone network or a leased
voice-band line at up to 120 characters per second (1200 hits per second), The D-21 interface
is compatible with the Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C or Data Set 202D.
A modified 7-level USASCII transmission code, presented in Table I, is used with an eighth
bit added for parity. Unity start and stop bits bracket each character transmitted to produce
a 10-bit character. The low-order bit (b1) of each character is transmitted first.
Display Unit
The display portion of the D-21 Display Unit is a 14-inch rectangular CRT with a 9-inch high
by 10.7 -inch-wide viewing surface. The characteristics of the display are presented in Table
II, Each character is formed by a 5- by 7-dot matrix. The display can be adjusted for intenSity and contrast.
Keyboard
The keyboard included with the D-21 Display Unit contains 65 keys, including cursor and control keys, arranged in a conventional typewriter style.
The non-destructive cursor is displayed as a caret ( 1\) and marks the next data entry position.
The cursor can not be entered in the buffer memory from the keyboard, but can be stored as
the result of a computer message.
Cursor controls include:
•

Skip - advances the cursor one character position. Simultaneous depreSSion of the
Repeat and Skip keys causes repetitive cursor movement until the cursor moves off
the screen (after the last display position is located).

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/68

665t:02
PHILCO -FORD 0 -2 t

Figure L
.15

Philco-Ford Alphanumeric Display Unit Model D-21.

Description (Contd.)
•

Backspace - backspaces the cursor one character position. Simultaneous depression of the Repeat and Backspace keys cause repetitive cursor movement until the
first display position is located.

•

Carriage Return/Line Feed Down - establishes a single space between displayed
lines with the cursor positioned at the initial character location of the next line.
Simultaneous depression of the Repeat key and this key causes repetitive cursor
movement until the cursor is positioned at the initial character position of the last
line.

•

Carriage Return/Line Feed Up - establishes a single space between displayed lines
with the cursor positioned at the initial character location of the previous line. Simultaneous depression of the Repeat key and this key causes repetitive cursor movement until the cursor is positioned at the initial character location of the first line.

Editing Facilities
Editing facilities are limited; they include the ability to replace a character with another character or space and to erase the screen by clearing the memory. Repetitive entry of characters
or spaces is provided by the simultaneous depression of the Repeat key and the desired character key. Horizontal and vertical tab functions are not provided. When it is desired to retain
fixed data, as in a fixed format, a New Line symbol is used at the end of each entry. The New
Line symbol causes the cursor to skip all succeeding characters in the line and move to the
beginning of the next line, this providing split-screen capability. The New Line symbol (displayed as -) can be entered from the keyboard or received as part of the computer message.
(Contd. )
5/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
..

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6651:03
PHIL-CO -FORD 0 -21

TABLE I: MODEL D-21 DISPLAY UNIT USASCII TRANSMISSION CODE*
b7

Bit
Positions

0
0
0

b6

b5

;

0
0
1

0
1
0

0
1
1

1
0
0

1
0
1

1
1
0

1
1
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

SP

0

1\

P

Column
b4

b3

b2

bl

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

SOH

9

1

A

Q

a

q

0

0

1

0

2

STX

0

2

B

R

b

r

0

0

1

1

3

ETX

#=

3

C

S

c

s

0

1

0

0

4

EOT

$

4

D

T

d

t

0

1

0

1

5

%

5

E

U

e

u

0

1

1

0

6

&;

6

F

V

f

v

7

G

W

g

w

It

Row

0

1

NAK
ACK

,

P

0

1

1

1

7

1

0

0

0

8

(

8

H

X

h

x

1

0

0

1

9

)

9

I

Y

i

Y

1

0

1

0

10

•

:

J

Z

j

z

1

0

1

1

11

+

;

K

k

1

1

0

0

12

.

<

L

I

1

1

0

1

13

-

=

M

1

1

1

0

14

>

N

1

1

1

1

15

?

0

-

/

t::.

m
n

-

I

0

All characters In columns 2 through 5 inclusive. are displayable; characters in columns 6 and 7 can be
received but. are displayed as their upper-case equivalents. The following symbols are displayed:
t::. - Start-of-Entry symbol

9 - End-of-Entry symbol
-

- New Line symbol

1\ -

.15

Cursor

Description (Contd.)
A Reset key is provided to initialize the D-21 Display Unit and. when depressed. resets the
cursor to the upper-left corner of the display; the memory is not cleared.
Message Configuration
The D-21 Display Unit employs the same message configuration and uses the same pclling sequence as the IBM 2260. Its five read and write commands are identical to the 2260; printer
commands are not included. Communication between the remote computer and a D-21 Display
Unit is initiated when the computer transmits a four-character address to the D-21 Display Unit.
This sequence consists of the characters: EaT (poll or read) or SOH (write), the D-21 address,
unit address, and command. Because the D-21 Display Unit is a stand-alone display unit, the
D-21 address is the only address recognized; the unit address character is converted but not
identified. The two general types of commands are poll (or read) and write.

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Il1fo. Inc.

5/68

6651 :04

PHILCO-FORD D-21

TABLE ll: D-21 DISPLAY UNIT CHARACTERISTICS
Characteristic

.15

Description

Output medium

Cathode ray tube; displays white characters against
black background.

Character set

62 characters, including upper-case alphabetics, numerics, punctuation marks and special symbols.

Character size

Characters are formed by a 5- by 7 -dot matrix which is
nominally O. 11 inch wide and 0 ~ 26 inch high.

Display size

10.7 inches wide by 9 inches high.

Characters per line

64.

Lines per display

24.

Characters per display

1536.

Buffer capacity

1536 characters.

Format control

Flexible cursor movement controls; each space position
on the display occupies one character pOSition in the
buffer; horizontal and vertical tab functions are not provided.

Rated output speed

Up to 1::!0 char/sec (1200 bits/sec).

Effective output speed

Limited by message length and communications facility.

Description (Contd.)
There are two read commands for transmitting data from the D-21 Display Unit to the computer and three write commands for transferring data to a Display Unit. These commands
include:
•

Specific Poll - initiates transfer of a message entered via the keyboard.

•

Read Full - initiates transfer of the entire buffer memory contents.

•

Write Addressed Unit - conditions the addressed D-21 for reception and display of
the associated message.

•

Erase/Write Addressed Unit - causes the display of the addressed D-21 to be erased
and the cursor to be positioned at the first displayable position.

•

Write Line Address - same as Write !\cldr'-'!"Co·'.:d 111":("
started on the addressed line instead .f dl.lll l~l·",l. l1:w.

c ')t

that the display is

When a poll command addressed to the D-21 Display Unit. is received, the D-21 responds with
a text message consisting of the following characters: STX, D-21 Unit Address, text, ETX,
and LRC (longitudinal redundancy check). If the computer receives the message without detecting an error, an ACK character is transmitted. If an crror is detected, a NAK character
is transmitted and the D-21 Display Unit automatically retransmits the message.
After the message has been correctly received and the acknowledgement transmitted, the computer can transmit one or 'TIore messages to the Display Unit. Each message from the computer
consists of: STX, text, ETX, and LRC. Each message is acknowledged with an ACK or NAK
response.
(eontd. )
5/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
8
.
,UERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

. 15

6651 :05

PHILCO-FORO 0-21

Description (Contd.)
If the command is a write command, the D-21 Display Unit responds with an ACK character if

it receives the message correctly and a NAK if not. The computer then transmits one or more
messages to the addressed D-21 in the same format as above. Each message is acknowledged
with an ACK or NAK by the D-21. If the command is a Write Line Address, the line address
is inserted following STX in the computer message.
The D-21 Display Unit will make no response if it detects a parity error or an invalid command
or address in the addressing sequence.
A one-character response of EaT from the D-21 is transmitted to terminate a message after
having received positive acknowledgement to a Read or Specific Poll command from the remote
computer. An EaT is transmitted by the remote computer to terminate a message after having
received a positive acknowledgement to a write command from the D-21. An EaT is also transmitted by the D-21 as a negative response (no message waiting) to a Specific Poll.
The text can contain up to 1536 characters. The displayed data between a New Line symbol and
the end of the line is not transmitted when a D-21 is polled; fixed data can be retained on the
screen during a write operation if New Line symbols are contained in the received message in
the appropriate places.
Operating Procedure
A message to be transmitted from a D-21 Display Unit is composed by depressing the Erase
key to clear the screen and position the cursor at the upper left corner of the screen (first position in memory), and then entering the data from the keyboard. Controls are provided to
advance or backspace the cursor one or several positions at a time (when using the Repeat key)
to move the cursor to the beginning of the next line or the beginning of the previous line, or to
return the cursor to the beginning of the first line. Composition errors can be corrected or
changes to existing text can be made by positioning the cursor to the character(s) to be changed
and keying new data; existing text can only be erased by entering spaces over the portion of
text to be erased.
The message to be transmitted is bracketed by the displayed Start-of-Entry and End-of-Entry
symbols which are entered from the keyboard. Once the message has been composed and is
ready for transmission, the operator depresses the Transmit key and places the Display Unit
in the On-Line mode. Only the bracketed data is transmitted when the D-21 is polled. Specific
cursor positioning is not essential prior to transmission. Keyboard entry is inhibited while
receiving or transmitting a message.
Error Detection and Correction
Character and longitudinal parity checking is performed on all data received by the D-21 Display Unit from the remote computer; character parity bits and longitudinal check characters
are generated and transferred with all data transmitted from the D-21. If the remote computer
returns a negative acknowledgement indicating that an error was detected at the computer site,
the D-21 Display Unit automatically retransmits the message.
The D-21 Display Unit also checks parity and validity of each command sequence received from
the computer. If errors are detected, the D-21 does not respond.
Software
Philco states that the D-21 is compatible with the IBM software (including BTAM and QTAM)
for the IBM 2260 Display Station.
. 16

First Delivery: . . . . . . .

. . March 1968 .

. 17

Availability:................

.. 3 months.

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/68

6651:06
PHILCO-FORO 0-21

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
D-21 Display Unit

Component

.9

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

18.25
28.50
19.50
125

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)

0.345
115
60

Phases
Temperature Range (OF.)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

1
59 to 95
10 to 90
?

PRICE DATA

Component or Feature

Purchase *
Price,

$
Model D-21 Alphanumeric
Display Unit

9200

* Philco states that a leaSing arrangement and a
maintenance contract is available on request.

5/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
8

.

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6700:01
RCA 70/653

RCA 70/653 COMMUNICATION CONTROL
(WITH RCA SPECTRA 70 COMPUTERS)

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity: ..

. 12

Manufacturer: . . . .

.13

Basic Function:

.15

Description

RCA 70/653 Communication Control (Single
Channel)
Radio Corporation of America
Electronic Data Processing Division
Cherry Hill, New Jersey 08101
transmission of data over a voice or broadband
line between an RCA Spectra 70 computer system
and another RCA computer, which has appropriate communications equipment

The single-channel RCA Communication Control was designed to permit synchronous, halfduplex communication between an RCA Spectra 70 computer system and a remote RCA 301,
3301, or Spectra 70 computer system equipped with the appropriate communications equipment.
All models of the 70/653 Communications Controls are functionally similar; they differ in
transmission speeds and in the communications facilities with which they can be used. In
general, communications between an RCA Spectra 70 computer equipped with a 70/653 Communication Control and a remote computer equipped with compatible equipment take place
as an interchange of data and and acknowledgment messages. An interrupt is generated only
at the end of a data block or because of errors or malfunctions.
A 70/653 Communication Control (any model) can be connected via one trunk of any type of
input/output channel in any Spectra computer system.
Three models of the 70/653 Communication Control are available. The 70/653-25 permits
communications at 2000 bits per second over the public telephone network or at 2400 bits
per second over a common-carrier leased voiceband line. The 70/653-26 is restricted to
transmission at 2000 bits per second over the public telephone network and includes provisions for programmed automatic dialing in conjunction with a Bell System Automatic
Calling Unit. The 70/653-34 operates at 40,800 bits per second over a leased broadband
line such as a Telpak A channel with a Type A2 termination arrangement.
All three models can use either an 8-level transmission code that contains 6 data bits,
1 parity bit, and 1 control bit or a 9-level code that contains 8 data bits and 1 parity bit;
the selected code level is permanently wired at installation time. The 8-level code is intended for communications with RCA 301 or RCA 3301 computer systems. For each message character, the RCA 70/653 transmits the 6 least Significant bits of one 8-bit byte in
core memory of the RCA Spectra 70 plus a parity bit and a control bit. If code interpretation is required, the stored program in the transmitting or receiving computer must perform
the code translation. The 9-level code is intended for communication with other Spectra 70
computer systems only. Character transmission speeds for the different code options are
listed in Table I.

TABLE 1. CHARACTER TRANSMISSION SPEEDS
Bit Rate, bits/sec

Character Rate, char/sec
8-level code

2,000
2,400
40,800

9-level code

250
300
5,100

© 1970 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

222
267
4,533

1/70

6700:02
RCA 70/653

Checking provisions in all models include character parity and block or longitudinal parity.
Errors or other conditions (such as no more data to transmit) are generally indicated by
failure to respond to a data or acknowledgement message within a specified time·. Upon
expiration of this time, the computer is interrupted and the message can be retransmitted
or the call can be terminated, depending on the program and the conditions .
. 16
.17
.2

First Delivery: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Availability:....................
CONFIGURATION

.3

A 70/653 Communication Control (any model) can be connected via one trunk of any type of
input/ output channel in any Spectra computer system. Connections to standard -communications
facilities and compatible data sets are listed in Paragraph. 72 •
INPUT

not specified
9 months

All input to the 70/653 Communications Control is transferred from the associated RCA computer system under control of the computer program. Input to the computer can be from the
console keyboard, punched cards, punched paper tape, magnetic tape, optically coded documents, inquiry stations, or other RCA computers .
. 35

Message Configuration: . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 36

Operating Procedure

.4

•5
.51

In attended operation, the operator establishes a connection by manually dialing or signaling.
The control is then ready for transmission or reception. Further action is controlled by the
stored program in the associated computer system.
Programmed automatic dialing over the public switched telephone network can be performed
with the 70/653-26. All models are capable of unattended call reception.
OUTPUT
All output from the 70/653 Control is transferred to the associated RCA computer under control of the computer program. Output from the computer can 'be printed copy, punched 'cards,
punched paper tape, or magnetic tape .
ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION
Data Entry Errors
Type of checking:

• 52

character ·parity checking is perfortned on data
transferred to the 70/653 from the assO'ciated
computer.
Error indication: .••. .....•.••.. '. an interrupt is .generated.
Correction procedure: . . . . . . • . . . . • . as programmed.
Data Transmission Errors
character and message parity checking.
an interrupt ·is generated.
as programmed; usually retransmission.

.53

Type of checking: •....•....•..••.
Error indication: .••.•.•..•.. •..•
Correction procedure: ...•.•..•.•.•
Data Recording Errors
Type of checking: .•.•..•••.. •.•..

character parity checking 'is performed on data
transferred from the 70/653 to the associated
computer system.
an interrupt is generated.
as programmed.

Error indication: • . . • . . • . . . . . . . . .
Correction procedure: . . . . . • . . . . . . .

1/70

10 to N characters per block, including 7 synchronization characters, message characters,
end-of-message character, and longitudinal
parity check character. Various control codes,
such as acknowledge, terminate message,
transmit next message, etc., are transmitted
as I-character messages, preceded by the 7
sync characters .

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

fA
a

..

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

. 55

6700:03
RCA 70/653

Line Malfunctions
Detection:

failure to receive a response from the remote
terminal within 19 seconds.
an interrupt is generated, and the Control is
automatically disconnected .

Action:
.6

CONDITION INDICATORS
A switch is provided to condition the 70/653 Control for operation over the public telephone
network or over a leased line. The 70/653-26 can be set to operate in either a manual or
automatic dialing mode. A switch is also furnished to allow signaling of the remote operator.
Lights are provided to indicate Transmit or Receive mode, transmission or reception errors,
and that the remote operator is signaling. A buzzer is sounded when errors are detected and
when the remote operator signals .

.7

DATA TRANSMISSION
In general, communications between an RCA Spectra 70 computer equipped with a 70/653
Control and a remote computer equipped with compatible equipment take place as an interchange of data and acknowledgment messages. Failure to receive an acknowledgment
within 1. 6 seconds causes an interrupt to be generated. Failure to receive a "continue-totransmit" character code within 19 seconds causes an interrupt to be generated and the 70/653
Control to be automatically disconnected .

. 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed 70/653-25: . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70/653-26: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70/653-34: . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission method: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmission mode: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Order of bit transmission: .. . . . . . . . .
Synchronization: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 72

2000 or 2400 bits/sec. *
2000 bits/sec. *
40,800 bits/sec. *
serial by bit.
any 8-level code including 6 data bits, 1 parity
bit, and 1 control bit or any 9-level code including 8 data bits and 1 parity bit. One of
these code levels is permanently wired at installation time. Data bits transmitted are the
lower 6 bits (8-level) or all 8 bits (9-level) of
one Spectra 70 core location (byte).
half -duplex
low-order bit first.
synchronous; synchronization is maintained by
idle characters transmitted at the beginning
of each data block .

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line
Public switched telephone network
(2000 bits/sec): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common-carrier leased voiceband line
(2400 bits/ sec): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telpak A (40,800 bits/sec): . . . . . . . . . .

Data Set**
Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 201A
Bell System Data Set 201B or Western Union
2400 Baud Data Modem
requires a Telpak Channel Terminal A-2.
which includes a data set

*See Table I for relationships between bits/sec rate and char/sec rate for 8-level and 9-level
codes.
**In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant.

© 1970 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

1/70

6700:04
RCA 70/653

.73

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . . . . . • . • . . . . • . . . . .

manual dialing or signaling; programmed automatic dialing with 70/653-26.
all models are capable of unattended operation.
no direct control, but incoming data can be
used to control operations via appropriate
programming of the associated computer
system.

Call reception:. . . • . • • • . . . . • . . ...
Functional operation: . . . . . . • . . . . . .

. 74

Multistation Operation: . . • . . • . . • . . .

•8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
RCA 70/653
(all models)

Component

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

27
25
62
440

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
Phases

1.2
208
60
3

Temperature range (OF)
Humidity range (%)
Heat (BTU /hr)

.9

60 to 90
20 to 80
3000

PRICE DATA
Monthly
Rental

Component or
Feature
RCA 70/653 Communication
Control (all models)

1/70

no provision other than the facilities of the
associated computer system; would require
program analysis of the responses of the
remote terminals .

Purchase
Price

Monthly
Maintenance

$

$

$

285

14,550

31

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AUERIACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS

z:s:

6701:00
RCA 6051
REPORT UPDATE

AUERBACH IllI'ORTS

•

REPORT UPDATE

•

RCA REPLACES THE 6051 DISPLAY UNIT WITH THE 70/752
RCA has introduced the 70/752 Video Data Terminal and 70/755 Video Data Switch (see Report
6702) to replace the 6051 Video Data Interrogator and its controller. the.6077 Interrogator Control Terminal. RCA states that the 6051 and 6077 are no longer in p.roduction but are available
on an "as returned" basis.

01967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/67

fA
~

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS

6701:01
RCA 6051

\UERBACH REPORTS

•

RCA 6051 VIDEO DATA INTERROGATOR

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity: •....•..• -..•..••.•••••

.12

Manufacturer:

• 13

Basic Function: ••...••...••.•.••

· 14

Basic Components
Name: ••....•.•...••..••..•••
Model number: .....•....•••.•••
Function: ••.....••..••.••..•••
Name: . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • • • • •
Model number: •..•.••.•....•.••
Function: . . . . . . • • . . . . • . . . . . . . •

· 15

6051-1, -2, or -3 Video Data Interrogator;
6077 Interrogator Control Terminal.
Radio Corporation of America
Electronic Data Processing Division
-Camden, New Jersey 081~1
displays, via cathode ray tube, data
received from a remote computer or
entered via keyboard; transmits data
to remote computer over a leased
voice-band line.
Video Data Interrogator.
6051-1, -2, -3.
display of alphanumeric data; keyboard data
entry.
Interrogator Control Terminal.
6077.
provides communications interface, buffer
storage, and basic control logic.

Description:
The RCA 6051 Video Data Interrogator is designed to permit rapid, convenient exchange of
data between an RCA 301, 3301, or Spectra 70 computer and a remote operator. Up to eight
6051 units can be controlled by a 6077 Interrogator Control Terminal. Each 6051 unit can be
located up to 650 feet from the Control Terminal.
There are three models of the 6051 Interrogator. Each can display a total of 480 characters,
but the models differ in the number of lines per display and the number of characters per
line. Table II shows the display characteristics of each model. Different models of the 6051
unit cannot be intermixed. Each unit can display 64 different characters and symbols including digits, upper-case letters, punctuation marks, and special symbols. Characters are
displayed on the face of a 14-inch rectangular cathode ray tube. A four-row keyboard, which
can be moved up to 1,300 feet from the display unit, is provided for data entry, but there
are no provisions for printed output of displayed data.
The 6077 Interrogator Control Terminal contains logic for character generation, display
regeneration, and control. The 6077 control also contains buffer storage for all units in the
form of a magnetic disc. (The RCA 6050 Video Data Terminal, which provided a video display unit and integrated control in a single cabinet, has been discontinued. )
A unique feature of the 6077 Control Terminal is its capability for storing up to 16 different
prerecorded formats on the magnetic disc. Each format defines areas open for operator data
entry, areas where the operator cannot write, and fixed data to be displayed (such as headings, titles, and entry legends). Data within the fixed area is not transmitted. The operator
can call for any of the prerecorded formats by depressing one of 16 switches. When trans- ,
mitting, a format identification code is transmitted, but not the locked-out area of the format.
The remote computer can specify any one (or none) of the 16 formats when transmitting a
message to a display terminal. Different formats can be recorded on the magnetic disc in
the Control Terminal only via a transmission from the remote computer.
The 6077 Control Terminal and associated 6051 display units operate in a half-duplex mode
over a common-carrier leased voice-band line. Operation over the public telephone network
is possible but not recommended if heavy message traffic Is anticipated due to the high cost
for prolonged calls. The transmission speed is either 120 or 180 characters per second
(1,200 or 1,800 characters per second, respectively), as specified when ordered. Start/
stop synchronization is used.

C 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/66

6701:02
RCA 6051

Figure 1: RCA 6051 Video Data Interrogator
• 15

Description (Contd.)
The Control Terminal scans the display units sequentially for messages to be transmitted.
When a display unit is found to have a message ready, the unit is shifted to the Transmit
mode and the message is transmitted. The Control remains locked to that display unit until
a response is received from the remote computer or until a predetermined amount of time
has elapsed. The Control then begins the scan again with the next sequential display unit.
Messages sent to the remote computer contain the identification of the transmitting display
unit. Return messages from the computer do not contain a display unit deSignation. The
computer cannot originate messages to particular units; it can only respond to inquiries from
the display units.
The communication line is terminated at the remote RCA computer by a data set and the
appropriate communications buffer and controller; see Report 8700 on the 378 CMC (RCA
301 computer), Report 8701 on the 3378 CMC (RCA 3301 computer), and Report 8703 on the
70/668 CCM (RCA Spectra 70 computers).
Local 6051 and 6077 units, located within 50 feet of the computer, can be connected to an
I/O channel of a 301, 3301, or Spectra 70 computer via the same controller and buffer as
when connected remotely; no data sets are required in this case.
Editing facilities available to the operator include movement of the cursor forward or backward, or to the beginning of the next line or to the next field as defined by the pre-recorded
format. The cursor is non-destructive; i. e., it does not erase the character displayed in
the position the cursor occupies. Only data not in the fixed portion of the format is transmitted.
Character parity is checked on all data received by the 6077 Control; a parity bit is generated
and transferred with each character transmitted from the Control. The Control and associated display units do not generate or recognize any acknowledgment messages. If a parity
error is detected by the Control, that character is displayed as a brightened area. The
Control Terminal contains a timer which is started when a message is transmitted to the
remote computer. If a response is not received within a predetermined time, the timer expires and causes the data display to be flashed on and off. This is the normal technique for
informing the operator that the message should be retransmitted. The message does not
need to be rekeyed for retransmission.
(Contd.)

11/66

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
ZSi

AUERBACH

AUI~'ACH

6701:03

DATA
COMMUNICA "ONS

RCA 6051

~11'O~TS

•

. 16

RCA states that I/O control routines are being provided under the operating systems of the
RCA 3301 and Spectra 70 computers for remote RCA 6051 Video Data Interrogator terminals.
The programmer specifies the formats of messages to be transmitted to the remote terminals
and must be aware of the formats of messages transmitted to the computer. RCA states that
no RCA 301 Software to support a display station network is available or being planned .
First Delivery: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
April 1966 .

• 17
.2

Availability: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 to 12 months .
CONFIGURATION
Up to eight RCA 6051-1, -2, or -3 Video Data Interrogator units can be connected to a 6077
Interrogator Terminal Control. No intermixing of models is possible. The differences in
the characteristics of the three models of the 6051 unit are shown in Table II.
The 6077 Control Terminal contains buffer storage and logic for all eight unitsj no extra-cost
features are required for the addition of Video Interrogator units.
See Paragraph . 72 for the standard communications facilities that can be used and the data
sets required .

.3

~

.31

Prepared Input:

. 32

Manual Input

no provision .

Keyboard Method of entry:
Quantity of data:
Character set:
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.33
.34

Fixed Input: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transaction Code Input:

.35

Message Configuration:

. 36

Operating Procedure

via 48-key keyboard, including some control
keys; 24 additional keys provide functional control.
up to 479 characters per display.
64 characters: digits, upper-case letters,
and 28 punctuation marks and special symbols.
standard keyboard layout is same as standard
typewriter keyboard except for punctuation
marks and special symbols.
no provision.
format identification code could be used as
transaction code; see Paragraph. 35.
each message transferred from the display
unit is transmitted in the (ollowing format:
DDl, VI, FI, Data, DDt. .
each message transferred from the remote
computer is transmitted in the following format:
SOH, FI, Data, DD2.
VI is· a one-character display unit address;
FI is a one-character identifier of the prerecorded format used; DDI and DD2 are
special characters specified when ordered;
DDI and VI are automatically generated by
the Terminal Control; FI and DD2 are
generated by depressing keys.
up to 479 characters of data can be included in
one message .

A message is composed for transmission by:
(1) Depressing the Write switch, which clears the displaYj
(2) Depressing the appropriate format switch, which displays 1 of 16 prel'ecorded formatsj
and
.
(3) Keying in the desired data, using the cursor controls as necessary to position the
cursor.
C 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/66

6701:04
RCA 6051

.36

Operating Procedure' (Contd.)
The cursor automatically skips locations occupied by thr prerecorded format. The display
is visually verified and corrections are made by positioning the cursor and rekeying. The
cursor is nondestructive.
To transmit the displayed 'data, the Transmit Switch is depressed. This disables the Write
mode and prevents any more data from being entered.
J! a response from the remote computer is not received within a predetermined period of
time, the display begins to flash on and off. Normally, this indicates that an error was
detected by the computer and that a retransmission is required. To retransmit, the
operator depresses the Write Switch and then the Transmit Switch.
J! the computer generates a response, the receiving display unit .is erased and the prerecorded format indicated in the message is transferred to the display unit buffer. After reception
is complete, the Write Switch is illuminated and the message is displayed.

· 37
.4

Entry of Time and Date: . . . . . . . . . .
OUTPUT

no provisions .

· 44

Output to Printer:

no provisions.

· 46

Output to Visual Display Device

......... .

Display unit Output medium:
Character set:
Character size: . . . . . .
Display size: . . . . . . . . .
Characters per line: . . . . . . . . .
Lines per display: .
Characters per display: . . . . . . .
Buffer capacity: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format control:

Rated output speed:
Effective output speed: . . . . . . • . . . .
·5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

.51

Data Entry Errors: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

cathode ray tube; displays black characters
on white background.
64 characters: digits, upper-case letters, alltl
28 punctuation marks and special symbols:
see Table 1.
see Table II.
displayed on rectangular tube with a 14-inch
diagonal; see Table II for display size for each
model.
see Table n.
see Table II.
see Table II.
11,536 characters total; 480 characters for
each of 8 display units and 481 characters for
each of 16 prerecorded formats.
cursor (underline) can be advanced or backspaced; movement of cursor does not erase
character positions; cursor can also be positioned at the beginning of the next line.
prerecorded formats can be transmitted from
the remote computer, stored in the buffer,
and displayed on command of the operator or
the computer; data and spaces can be included
in the format; cursor cannot be pOSitioned '
within the defined areas of the format.
120 or 180 char/sec (1,200 or 1,800 bits/sec.
respect ively) over a voice-band line.
less than rated speed, depending on message
length, turnaround time, etc.
no checking except for visual
verification of displayed data.

(Contd. )
, 1/66

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AU'UACH
DATA
CDMMUNICATlDNS
"'I'OIIT5

6701:05
RCA 6051

•
TABLE I: RCA 6051 ASCn DATA TRANSMISSION CODE

b7

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

b6

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

b5

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

b4

b3

b2

b1

0

0

0

0

SP

0

@

p

0

0

0

1

!

1

A

Q

0

0

1

0

"

2

B

R

0

0

1

1

#

3

C

S

0

1

0

0

$

4

D

T

0

1

0

1

C{

5

E

U

0

1

1

0

&

6

F

V

0

1

1

1

7

G

W

1

0

0

0

(

8

H

X

1

0

0

1

)

9

I

Y

1

0

1

0

...

:

J

Z

1

0

1

1

+

;

K

1

1

0

0

•

<

L

1

1

0

1

-

=

M

]

1

1

1

0

>

N

t

1

1

1

1

?

0

,

SKIP

RET

/

SOM

-

Note: Any displayable characters can be used for DD1 and DD2, as specified when ordered .
. 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking: • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error indication: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Correction procedure: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conunents: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

character parity; character validity.
received character with parity error is
displayed as a brightened area; invalid
codes are displayed as blanks; if a "no
response" is used to indicate detection of
an error by the computer. the display
flashes on and off.
manual retransmission by operator.
Remote computer can be programmed
to recognize a retransmission request.
unit does not transmit or recognize a positive
or negative acknowledgment message.

C 1966 AuERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/66

6701:06

RCA 6051

TABLE

n:

DISPLAY CHARACTERISTICS OF RCA 6051 MODELS
Model
6051-1

Model
6051-2

Model
6051-3

Character size Width, inches
Height, inches

0.18
0.22

O. 12
0.15

0.14
0.18

Display size Width, inches
Height, inches

8.0
6.0

8.16
4.0

8.0
4.B

Characteristic

Characters per line

32

48

40

Lines per display

15

10

12

480

480

4BO

Characters per display

.53

Data Recording Errors:

· 55

Line Malfunctions
Detection:

no checking except for visual verification
of displayed data.

Action: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

."

....... .

no data received within a predetermined time;
see also Paragraph . 52.
display flashes on and off.

.6

CONDITION INDICA TORS:

·7

DAT A TRANSMISSION
The Interrogator Control Terminal sequentially scans the associated Video Data Interrogator
linits. When one is found to be in the Transmit mode, transmission is initiated. The
connection between that display unit and the remote computer is maintained until the computer responds or until a predetermined amount of time has elapsed. The timer can be set
for a period of 5, 10, or 30 seconds or can be disabled. After the computer has responded
or the timer has timed out, the Terminal Control continues the scan with the next sequential
display unit.

· 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed:
Transmission method: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission mode: • . . . . . . . . . . . .
Order of bit transmission: . . . . . . . . .
Synchronization: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

a switch/lamp is provided on the Control
Terminal to indicate that the power is on; a
switch/lamp is provided on the Control and
each display unit to indicate that the data set
is ready; a sWitch/lamp is provided on each
display unit to indicate when the unit is
transmitting.

120 or 1BO char/sec (1,200 or 1, BOO
bits/sec, respectively).
serial by bit.
7-level ASCII plus an added parity bit; a
total of 10 bits are transmitted for each
character, including start and stop bits.
half-duplex .
low-order bit first, parity bit last.
start and stop bits are transmitted with
each character.

(Contd. )

t 1/66

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A•
~

4UEIIB4CH

6701:07

DATA
auoeACM

COMMUNICATIONS

RII'ORTS

• 72

RCA 6051

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line or Service
Public switched telephone network
operating at 1,200 bits/sec
(120 char/sec): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common-carrier leased· voiceband line operating at:
1,200 bits/sec (120 char/sec):

Data Set.

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C.

Bell System Data Set 202 €or 202D, or
Western Union 1200 Baud Modem.
1, BOO bits/sec (IBO char/sec):
Bell System Data Set 202D .
... In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant.
· 73

Transmission Control
Call initiation:
Can reception:
Functional operations: . . . . . . . . . . .

· 74

Multistation Operation
Polling: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

a

I

•••••

Addressing: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

•B

manual dialing (public telephone network);
direct transmission (dedicated line).
operator must establish voice communication
and then switch to data mode (public telephone
network); direct transmission (dedicated line).
receipt of SKIP character causes the succeeding character to be placed in the first position
of the next area available as defined by prerecorded format; receipt of RETURN character
causes the succeeding character to be placed
in the first available position of the next line.
remote computer cannot poll display units;
units transmit only to computer under control
of operator.
remote computer cannot selectively address
the display units connected to the Control
Terminal; display units can transmit only to
computer.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6051-1, -2, or-3
Video Display Interrogator

Component

Display unit

Keyboard

6077 Interrogator
Control Terminal

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

15
19
195
50

15
10
6
16

69.4
24
62
1,200

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
Phases

0.1
115
60
1

...
...
...

3.0
115
60
1

Temperature Range (oF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

10 to 120
o to 90
340

•
•

...

...

60 to 90
10 to BO
10,000

... Included in figures for Display unit.

C 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Iflc.

, 1/66

1701:08

RCA 6051

.9

PRICE DATA

Rental,·

,

Purchase
Price,
$

Monthly
Maintenance,
$

45

1,900

6.25

1,160

48,700

162.00

Monthly

Component or Feature
605-1, -2, or -3 Video
Display Interrogator
6077 Interrogator
Control Terminal
... Monthly rentals are for unUmited use.

11/66

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

~

..

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6702:01
RCA 70/752

RCA 70/752 VIDEO DATA TERMINAL

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70/752 Video Data Terminal.

. 12

Manufacturer: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Corporation of America
Electronic Data Processing Division
Camden, New Jersey OS101

.13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . displays, via cathode ray tube, data received
from a remote computer or entered via keyboard; transmits data to a remote computer
over a leased voice-band line .

. 15

Description
The RCA 70/752 Video Data Terminal is a visual communications terminal designed to permit
rapid exchange of data between an RCA Spectra 70 Model 35, 45, 46, or 55 computer and a
remote operator. The basic 70/752 Terminal is designed to operate as a single station in a
non-polling environment. Multi-station operation in a polling environment can be obtained with
optional components. An adapter is also available for connecting a Teletypewriter if hard copy
is desired.
Configuration
The 70/752 Video Data Terminal contains a cathode ray tube (CRT) display, a separate keyboard, a 10S0-character magnetostrictive delay-line buffer, and character generation and
control logic.
The 70/755 Video Data Switch allows multiple 70/752 Terminals at one location to share one
communications line in a non-polling environment. The Video Data Switch can accommodate
up to eight 70/752 Terminals. In this configuration, the Video Data Switch scans each of the
70/752 Terminals until it finds a Terminal in the Transmit mode. The scanning is then interrupted and that Terminal is connected to the line. A timer in the Data Switch monitors the
time required for the computer to respond. The Terminal is disconnected and the scanning
continues when the timed interval has elapsed. The timer can be manually set for an interval
of 15 or 30 seconds, or it can be locked out. Each 70/752 Terminal can accommodate a Teletype Model 33 or 35 Receive-Only Teletypewriter when the Printer Adapter feature is incorporated.
Transmission Characteristics
The 70/752 Video Data Terminal operates asynchronously in the half-duplex mode over the
public telephone network or a leased voice-band line at up to 120 characters per second (1200
bits per second). The Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C or Data Set 202D is compatible
with the 70/752 Terminal for use over the public telephone network or leased voice-band line,
respectively.
The transmission code used by the 70/752 Terminal is a modified 7-level USASCII code with
an even parity bit, a start bit, and a stop bit added. A total of 10 bits are transmitted per
character. The low-order bit of each character is transmitted first.
Display Unit
The display portion of the 70/752 Video Data Terminal is a 12-inch rectangular CRT with a
5. 6-inch-high by S-inch-wide viewing area. The characteristics of the display unit are shown
in Table I. The monoscope technique is used to generate each character of a 64-symbol character set consisting of upper-case alphabetics, numerics, punctuation marks, and special
symbols.
Keyboard
The keyboard included with the 70/752 Video Data Terminal contains 62 keys, including cursor,
editing, and control keys arranged in conventional typewriter style. The keyboard is not permanently attached to the display unit and can be positioned up to 20 cable-feet from the display.

@

1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/67

6702:02
RCA 70/752

Figure 1. RCA 70/752 Video Data Terminal.
.15

Description (Contd.)
Cursor controls allow the operator to position the cursor (an underscore) to:
•

The first character position of the next line (or to the first character position of the
first line when the cursor is positioned on the last line),

•

The next position to the right (which can be the first position of the next line or the
first position of the first line), or '

• The adjacent position to the left (this function is terminated when the first position
of the line is reached).
Editing Facilities
Editing facilities available for the 70/752 Video Data Terminal include the Data Insert function,
which allows data to be inserted in a line of text; existing data is displaced to the right with
each character inserted. Data displacement propagates from line to line, except that control
characters are not displaced beyond the end of a line. This function is deleted when the Data
Format feature is installed.
The Data Format feature provides for receiVing display format messages. The format message is displayed with reduced brightness. After receipt of a format message, the cursor is
positioned to the beginning of the first data field. As data is entered from the keyboard, the
cursor is advanced to the next position until the end of the data field is reached. At this point,
the cursor is positioned to the beginning of the next data field and data entry continues until
the last data field is completed. When data entry is completed and the transmit control is depressed, only the data that has been entered in the data fields within the format is transmitted.
(Contd. )
11/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AUERSACH

6702:03

DATA

~

..

AUERBACH

COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

RCA 70/752

TABLE I: 70/752 DISPLAY CHARACTERISTICS
Description

CharacterisUc
Output medium

Cathode ray tube; displays white characters agaiDat
black backgroUDd.

Character set

64 characters. including upper-caae alphabetics.
numerics. punctuation marks. and special symbols.

Character size

Nominally 0.10 iDch wide aDd 0.14 inch bigh.

Display size

8 inches wide by 5.6 inches high.

Characters per line

54 characters.

Lines per display

20 lines.

Characters per display

1080 characters.

Buffer capacity

1080 characters.

Format control

Retum characters. Data Insert function or Data
Format feature; split-screen capability; flexible
cursor movement controls.

Rated output speed

Up to 120 char/sec (1200 bps).

Effective output speed

Limited by message length and communications
facility.

Other editing facilities include: Screen Erase, which erases the entire contents of the buffer
memory and poSitions the cursor to the beginning of the display area; Line Erase, which
erases the character in the cursor position and all following characters on that line; Character Erase, which erases the character in the cursor pOSition; and Format Data Erase. which
erases the data entered from the keyboard in conjunction with the Data Format feature.
Erase functions are controlled by the Master Erase key and require simultaneous depreSSion
of two keys. The Line Erase function will erase only non-format data when the Data Format
feature is incorporated.
Operating Procedure
Message composition is performed when the terminal is in the Write mode. Data can be
entered at any location on the display by positioning the cursor and keying the data. The cursor
is advanced one character position for each character entered. The cursor returns to the
beginning of the next line when the end of a line is reached. The Return function erases the
characters to the right of the cursor in the current line when the Return key is depressed and,
unconditionally, returns the cursor to the beginning of the next line.
After the message is composed and the End-of-Text (ETX) character is entered, the message
can be visually verified; if in error. the message can be altered by means of the editing controls in conjunction with the cursor controls. When the message is. found to be correct. the
communications link is established and the Transmit mode enabled. The message is transmitted; the contents of the display memory remain unchanged. Following the transmission of
ETX, the Terminal is automatically.switched to the Receive mode, and the cursor returns to
the start of the message. If a computer response is not received within a reasonable period
of time, the operator can switch to the Write mode and retransmit the message.
The received computer message is preceded by start-of-text (STX) and is displayed beginning
at the first character pOSition of the first line. Existing data (the inquiry) is overwritten by
the message. The balance of the screen is erased; the Terminal is automatically switched to
the Write mode; and the cursor is returned to the beginning of the screen when ETX is received.
Further input from the communications line is inhibited, and the displayed computer message
remains on the screen until erased.
The Transmit and Receive modes are modified when the Message Segment Address (MSA) function is used. With MSA, each message transmitted begins at the cursor position and ends with
ETX. The cursor advances with each character transmitted as in the normal Transmit mode,
© 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/67

6702:04
RCA 70/752

. 15

Description (Contd.)
but the cursor does not return to the start of the message; it remains at the location following
the ETX character. A received computer message is displayed starting at that cursor location.
With the MSA function, both inquiry and response messages can be displayed simultaneously
and can be separated by the use of Line Return, Null, or Space characters at the beginning of
the computer-response message.
Message Configuration
The message configuration for the 70/752 Video Data Terminal includes a Start-of-Text (STX)
character (automatically inserted), the text, and an End-of-Text (ETX) character. When the
Station Selection feature is used, the Terminal is under the control of the computer. The
terminal is polled by a Transmit Start Code (TSC) , a two-character sequence including EOT
and a customer-assigned terminal address character. (Up to 26 address codes can be specified).
The received EOT character places all terminals on the multi station line in the Select mode.
The addressed Terminal responds to a TSC with a text message or a no-text message (identified
by an EOT) , or the Terminal does not respond. The remote computer must be programmed to
handle a no-response condition.
Multistation Operation
The Station Selection Feature allows up to 26 70/752 Video Data Terminals, each incorporating
this feature, to communicate in a multi station arrangement over a single leased line with a
remote computer. All communications are initiated by the computer by polling or addressing
the Terminals. The polling operation is described in the paragraph under Message Configuration.
Error Detection and Correction
Character parity is checked on all data received by the 70/752 Terminal; a parity bit is generated and transferred with each character transmitted from the Terminal. If a parity error
is detected by the Terminal, that character is displayed as a brightened area. The Terminal
does not generate or recognize any acknowledgement messages for automatic retransmission.
Software
RCA provides two software packages for implementing communications-oriented programs:
Primary Communications Oriented System (PCOS) and Multichannel Communications System
(MCS). PCOS provides an independent, though limited, operating environment. It permits
concurrent operation of a single user's communication program with up to six data transcription programs. MCS operates under the Tape/DiSC Operating System (TDOS) and provides extensive data communication support. Although message-switching applications can
be accommodated, MCS is primarily intended for use in either remote batch-processing or
inquiry/response data communications applications. Provisions are made to accommodate
the RCA 70/752 Video Data Terminal in both the PCOS and the MCS environment .

. 16

First Delivery: .

• . . . • . . . . April 1967 .

. 17

Availability:.

. . . . . . . . • ,9 months •

•9

PRICE DATA
Component or Feature

Monthly
Rental.

$

Purchase
Price.
$

Monthly
Maintenance.
$

70/752 Video Data Terminsl

190

8325

23.50

70/755 Video Data Switch

125

5900

13.75

20
20
40

850
850
1700
75*
75*

2.50
2.50
5.00

Options
Station Selection
Data Format
Printer Adapter
Keyboard Cable Extension (1)
Data Set Cable Extension (2)

--

--

* One-time charge.
(1) Allows keyboard to be located up to 20 cable-feet away from display.
(2) Allows 70/752 Terminal to be located up to 100 cable-feet away from 70/755
Video Data Switch.
11/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6703:01
RCA 70/750

•
RCA 70 750 MODULAR VIDEO DATA SYSTEM

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity:.......................

RCA 70/750 Modular Video Data System•

• 12

Manufacturer:...................

Radio Corporation of America
Electronic Data Processing Division
Camden, New Jersey 08101

.13

Basic Function: • . • • • • • • • • • • • • . • ••

displays via cathode ray tube, data received from
a remote computer or entered via keyboard;
transmits data to remote computer over a leased
voice-band line •

• 14

Basic Components
Name: . . . • • • . . • . • . • • • . • . . . . . • .

Mexiel ntIm.ber: . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . • •
F'UIlCtion: . • . • • . • . . . . . • . • . . . . . ••
Name: . • . • • . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Model number: . . • • . . • • . . • • • . . . . .
Function: . • • . . . • . . . • • . . . . . . . . • .
Name: . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model number: ..••..••.. . . . • . . . .
Function: . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• 15

Video Data Terminal.
70/751-10, -11, -12.
display of alphanumeric data; keyboard data entry.
Video Data Generator.
70/756-11, 21, -31.
provides display memory, character generator,
and control logic.
Video Data Controller.
70/759-11, -21.
provides communications interface and transmission control •

Description
The RCA 70/750 Modular Video Data System is a visual communications system designed to
permit rapid exchange of data between an RCA Spectra 70 Model 35, 45, 46, or 55 computer
and one or more remote stations in a single- or multi-station arrangement under control of a
stored program in the computer.
The 70/750 System can be operated in a single-station non-polling environment where all
message transmission is initiated by the operator, or the 70/750 System can be operated in a
multi -station arrangement under a polling and addressing environment.
The 70/750 System includes the 70/751 Video Data Terminal (a visual display with an independent keyboard) the 70/756 Video Data Generator, and the 70/759 Video Data Controller.
Each Video Data Generator can accommodate from two to eight Video Data Terminals; the
number of Terminals that can be connected is dependent upon the Video Data Generator
model employed. The Video Data Controller provides housing for the Video Data Generators
and can accommodate up to six (when directly connected to a multiplexor channel) or four
Video Data Generators (when remotely connected via a communications line).
The 70/750 Modular Video Data System can operate synchronously in a full-duplex mode over
a leased voice-band line at 300 characters per second (2400 bits per second). The transmission code used is a modified 7-level USASCII code with odd parity; see Table I. When
directly connected, the 70/750 system transfers data at 2400 bytes per second each way
simultaneously. The remainder of this report pertains to a remotely connected 70/750
system unless otherwise specified.
The 70/751 Video Data Terminal contains a 12-inch rectangular CRT with a 5. 6- inch-high
by 8-inch wide viewing area. The 70/751 can display from 270 to 1080 characters depending
upon the type of Video Generator employed. The monos cope technique is used to generate each
character of a 96-symbol character set consisting of upper- and lower-case alphabetics,
numerics, punctuation marks and special symbols. The characteristics of the display unit are
presented in Paragraph. 46. The 70/751 can be positioned up to 500 cable-feet from the
70/756 Video Data Generator.
The 70/751 Terminal includes a 66-key keyboard and is available in three different models:
70/751-10, -11, and -12. Model 70/751-10 provides a typewriter style keyboard capable of
generating a 70-character set. Model 70/751-11 provides a combination key-punch and
@

1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/68

6703:02
RCA 701750

Figure 1. RCA 70/751 Video Data Terminal, an integral component of the RCA 70/750
Modular Video Data System •
• 15

Description (Contd.)
typewriter style keyboard with selectable alphanumeric and numeric modes also capable of
generating a 70- character set. Model 70/751-12 provides a typewriter style keyboard
capable of generating a 96-character set that includes lower-case alphabetics. The keyboard
can be physically attached to the 70/751 Terminal or it can be positioned up to 12 inches frorr
the 70/751.
The cursor controls provide step-by-step operation or continuous movement-at nine steps per
second when a cursor control key is held in a depressed position. Cursor controls allow the
operator to position the cursor to:

11/68

•

The first character position of the next line or to the first character position
of the first line when the cursor is positioned on the last line (Return key).

•

The next position to the right, which can be the first position of the next line,
or the first position of the first line (Advance key).

•

The next position to the left terminating at the first position of a line (Backspace key).

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

(Contd.)

A

AUERBACH

6703: 03

DATA

~

AUERBACH

COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

RCA 70/750

'"
TABLE I: RCA 70/750 USASCII DATA TRANSMISSION CODE

~

b
7

0

b

~

~b5
~

ts

A
•
•
•
•

0

umn

•
~

Row

1

1
0

1

1

0
0

0

0

0
0

~

b 4 b) b Z b l

SHIFTING
TO NEXT LINE

NON-SHIFTING
TO NEXT LINE

DATA INSERTING - - - .

1

0

1

1

1

2

)

4

5

6

7

(blank)

I~I

0

0

0

~~

(blank)

SP

0

@

P

0

0

G

1

1

(blank)

(blank)

:

1

A

Q

0

0

1

0

2

~(STX)

(blank)

"

2

B

R

#

)

1

1

)

0

1

0

0

4

0

1

0

1

5

0

1

1

0

6

J (ETX)
~~~~~

II

(blank)

c

S

%

5

E

U

(blank)

~~~

&

6

F

V

r:~I

7

G

w

~I

~I

hi

~I

,

0

0

0

8

(blank)

~~~~~

(

8

H

X

1

0

0

1

9

(blank)

)

I

Y

1

0

1

0

10

(blank)

(blank)

.

9
:

J

Z

1

0

1

1

11

(blank)

(blank)

+

;

K

1

1

0

0

12

(blank)

(blank)

,

1

1

0

1

13

~

(blank)

-

1

15

LEGEND:

It~II

(blank)

1

1

r,

(blank)

(blank)

1

~I

}

T

(blank)

1

hi

D

7

14

~I

4

1

0

61

$

1

1

q

(blank)

1

1

f'

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

1
0

1

0

0

1
1

0

~(HT)

(CR)

~~
~~~

L

=

>

(blank)
(blank)

/

?

N

a

i-I

1\

?:

(blank)

x
i

M
1\

(blank)

tl

~I

il

~I

k'

¢

~I

I

~I

~I

bl

I

.u.
---,
(blank)

·United States (of) America Standard Code (for) Information Interchange
HT = tab character
SI = Data Format off
~~ = not displayed
may be manually generated from 70/751-12 boards only.
SO = Data Format On

11111=

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc_

11 /68

6703:04
RCA 70/750

• 15

Description (Contd.)
When the Data Format feature is incorporated. cursor controls allow the operator to position
the cursor to:
•

The first data position of the next variable data field (Skip key). The cursor
returns to the first position of the first line when format headings are not
present.

•

The first data position of the next variable data field. an HT character is
entered in the display memory at the location occupied by the cursor before
the action is initiated (Tab key).

•

The next position to the left terminating at the first position of the same variable
data field (Backspace key).

Editing facilities available for the 70/751 Video Data Terminal include the Data Insert function. which allows data to be inserted in a line of text; existing data is displaced to the right
with each character inserted. Data displacement propagates from line to line. except that
control characters are not displaced beyond the end of a line.
The Data Format feature provides for receiving display format messages. Mter receipt of
a format message. the cursor is automatically positioned to the beginning of the first data
field. As data is entered from the keyboard. the cursor is advanced to the next position until
the end of the data field is reached. At this point. the cursor is automatically positioned to
the beginning of the next data field and data entry continues until the last data field is completed. When data entry is completed and the transmit control is depressed. only the data that
has been entered in the data fields within the format is transmitted.
Other editing facilities include flexible erase functions that operate only in the Write mode.
Screen Erase erases the entire contents of the buffer memory and positions the cursor to the
beginning of the display area. Line Erase erases the character in the cursor position and all
following characters on that line and the cursor is positioned at the beginning of the next line.
(Execution of the Line Erase function when the cursor is positioned on the last line. causes
the cursor to move to the beginning of the first line.) When the Data Format feature is
incorporated. execution of the Line Erase function causes erasure of variable data in and to
the right of the cursor. terminating at the end of the variable data field, and the cursor is
positioned at the first position of the next variable data field. (When the cursor is located on
the last line. execution of the Line Erase function will position the cursor at first position
of the first variable data field.) Character Erase erases the character at the cursor position.
Variable Data Erase is provided with the Data Format feature and when executed. erases all
variable data fields. the cursor is positioned at the beginning of the first variable data field.
Options available for the 70/750 System include:
•

Variable Start-of-Transmission - permits the operator to indicate the starting
point of a transmission by inserting an STX character at any screen location
except within a format heading.

• Data Format - permits a rigid format. consisting of format headings and variable
data fields, to be constructed and displayed. The displayed format permits the
operator to insert data only in the variable data fields and to transmit only the
inserted data when the transmit function is initiated.
•

11/68

Station Selection - permits operation in a multi-station environment. Up to six
Video Data Controllers can be connected to a single commWlications line. The
computer polls for messages from the remote 70/750 System.

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

(Contd.)

A

~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6703: 05
RCA 70/750

'"
•2

CONFIGURATION
The 70/750 Modular Video Data System consists of:
•

The 70/759 Video Data Controller;

•

Up to four (remotely connected) or six (directly connected) 70/756 Video Data
Generators; and

•

Up to thirty-two (remotely connected~ or from two to forty-eight (directly connected) 70/751 Video Data Terminals.

Up to six 70/759 Video Data Controllers can be connected to a single voice-band line in a
multistation environment when the station Selection option is incorporated. The 70/759
Controller is available as two distinct models: 70/759-11, directly connects to a multiplexer
trunk of a Spectra 70/35, 45, 46, or 55 computer; 70/759-21, remotely connects to a
Spectra 70/35, 45, 46, or 55 computer via a 70/668 Communications Controller Multichannel
(CCM) and two 70/721 Communications Buffers.
Three distinct models of the 70/756 Video Data Generator are available; see Table II. The
70/756 model employed determines the maximum number of Video Data Terminals that can
be attached to it and the choice of character array.
Three distinct keyboard styles are available for the 70/751 Video Data Terminals. The three
keyboard styles are reflected in the three model numbers of the Video Data Terminal as follows:
•

70/751-10 - Typewriter-style keyboard capable of generating a 70-character
set excluding lower-case alphabetics.

•

70/751-11 - Combination typewriter- and keypunch-style keyboard capable of
generating a 70-character set excluding lower-case alphabetics.

•

70/751-12 - Typewriter-style keyboard capable of generating a 96-character set
including lower-case alphabetics.

See Paragraph. 72 for the standard communications facilities that can be used and the data
sets required •
•3

INPUT

• 31

Prepared Input: ••••••••••.••••••

• 32

Manual Input
Models 70/751-10 and -12 Typewriter
Style Keyboards;
Model 70/751-11 Keypunch Style Keyboard Method of entry: ••••••••••••.••
Quantity of data: . . .
Character set Model 70/751-10 and -11:
Model 70/751-12:

•..•.•.•.•..•

Comments: •..••••.•.••......•

no provision•

via 66-key keyboard including cursor, edit and
control keys.
up to 270, 480, 540, 960,. or 1080 characters
depending on Video Data Generator model used
and number of displays connected; see Table II.
70 characters including upper-case letters,
numerics, punctuation, and special symbols.
96 characters, including upper- and lower-case
letters, numerics, punctuation, and special
symbols.
16 keys provide cursor edit, and control functions
and do not produce a displayable symbol.

• 33

Fixed Input: ••.••.•..•..•...•.•

no provision.

• 34

Transaction Code Input:

no provision.

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11 /68

6703:06
RCA 70/750

TABLE II: DISPLAY CHARACTEIDSTICS OF RCA VIDEO DATA GENERATOR MODELS
Characteristics

Model
70/756-11

Model
70/756-31

Model
70/756-21

Character size Width, inches

0.10

0.10

0.10

0.10

0.085

6.10

0.085

Height, inches

0.14

0.14

0.14

0.14

0.12

0.14

0.12

4.0

8.0

4.0

8.0

8.4

8.0

8.4
3.4

Display size Width, inches

2.8

1.4

5.6

2.B

1.7

5.6

Characters per line*

27

54

27

54

BO

54

80

Lines per display*

10

5

20

10

6

20

12

270

270

540

540

4BO

lOBO

960

B

8

4

4

4

2

2

Height, inches

Characters per display
Maximum number of displays
.35

Message Configuration
The 70/750 System is designed to be operated as a single-station in a non-polling environment or as a multi-station arrangement in an addressing and polling environment where only
the computer can initiate data transmission from the 70/750 System. The message format
consists of a Start-of-Text (STX) character, two address characters, the text portion, and
an End-of-Text (ETX) character. The first address character identifies one of six Video
Data Controllers (three most significant bit positions) and one of six Video Data Generators.
The second address character identifies one of eight Video Data Terminals. Messages,
composed at the Video Data Terminal are automatically appended with the necessary control
and address characters except for ETX which can be automatically or manually generated.
Messages transmitted to or received from the spectra 70 computer via the 70/668 CCM are
preceded by three marking and four SYN characters.
A polling sequence, consisting of marking for a three character period, four SYN characters,
an EOT (which activates all controllers) and a controller identifier character is transmitted
by the computer where more than one 70/750 System is connected to a single communications
line. The station Selection option is required for the multi-station arrangement. The 70/750
System response to the polling sequence consists of a series of messages from the attached
Video Data Terminals or a "no-traffic" response consisting of four SYN characters, an EOT,
and marking which continues for a three-character period.
When the Data Format option is incorporated, data format characters" DF On and DF Off,
are employed in the text portion of the computer message to establish a fixed format, displayed by the addressed Video Data Terminal. The control characters DR On and DF Off
bracket each of the format headings; variable data fields are bracketed by the DF Off and DF
On characters. The DF On character can be used at the start of the first format heading and
serve all following format headings if NUL characters are employed to specify each of the
variable data fields .

• 36

Operating Procedure
Message composition is performed when the terminal is in the Write mode. Data can be
entered at any location on the display by positioning the cursor and keying the data. The
cursor is advanced one character position for each character entered. The cursor returns
to the beginning of the next line when the end of a line is reached. The Return function inserts
a CR character and erases the characters to the right of the cursor in the current line when
the Return key is depressed and, unconditionally, returns the cursor, to the beginning of the
next line. The Return key should not be confused with the Return cursor control key which
does not erase or insert data in the display memory.
'

t t /68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

(Contd. )

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6703:07
RCA 70/750

'"
• 36

Operating Procedure
After the message is composed and the End-of-Text (ETX) character is manually entered (if
automatic ETX is not selected). the message can be visually verified; if in error. the message can be altered by means of the editing controls in conjunction with the cursor controls.
When the message is found to be correct. the operator initiates the Transmit mode by
depressing the Transmit key.
The Video Data Generator. which sequentially scans the attached Video Data Terminals for a
request to transmit. transfer the data contained by those segments of the delay-line display
memory corresponding to the requesting Video Data Terminals. to the communications
facility under control of the Video Data Controller.
Transmission of data is initiated by the Video Data Controller except when the Controller js
operating in a multi-station environment where data transmission is initiated by the computer.
The Video Data Controller sequentially scans the attached Video Data Generators for a request
to transmit messages from the attached Video Data Terminals.
The scanning Video Data Controller advances its scan to the subsequent Video Data Generator
after having transmitted all messages from a previous Video Data Generator. Transmission
is terminated when the ETX character of the final message is transmitted. After each message is transmitted from a Video Data Terminal the terminal automatically enters the Receive
mode.
The Transmit and Receive modes are modified when the Message Segment Address (MSA)
function and/or the optional Variable Start of Transmission (VST) are employed. Normally.
message transmission begins with the first displayed message character and continues
through the ETX character; if an ETX character is not present when the ETX switch is in the
manual position. transmission is inhibited. The operator can choose to manually insert the
ETX character or the ETX can be generated automatically. The cursor advances with each
character transmitted. With MSA. each message transmitted begins at the cursor position
and ends with ETC or the end of the frame if ETX is nQt present. With VST, each message
transmitted begins with the first non-format STX. When both MSA and VST are selected,
the message transmitted begins with the first non-format STX only where the STX precedes the cursor position. The STX is erased unless it is positioned after the cursor
when it is transmitted as data.
When the Data Format feature is incorporated. only the data contained in the variable data
fields (non-format data) is transmitted.
When the Station Selection feature is employed. transmission from a Video Data Controller
is initiated only when the controller is polled. All messages are transmitted by the polled
controller followed by a "no traffic" response (see Paragraph. 35).
The operator can. by manual selection. permit computer messages to override data stored
in the display memory; otherwise. computer messages are lost if the Terminal is not in the
Receive mode.

• 37

Entry of Time and Data:

.4

OUTPUT

.44

Output to Printer:

• 46

Output to Visual Display Device

no provisions .
Copy key is provided for future implementation of
of a print function •

Display unit Output medium: ..•

Character set: . . . . . . . . . . • .•..••
Character size: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . e •
Display size: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lines per display: • • • • • . • • • . . . ••
Characters per display: •.• • • • . • • .

cathode ray tube; displays white characters
against black background.
96 characters. including upper- and lower-case
alphabetics. numeriCS. punctuation marks. and
special symbols.
see Table II.
B inches wide by 5. 6 inches high.
see Table II.
see Table n.

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11 /68

6703:08
RCA 70/750

.46

Output to Visual Display Device (Contd.)
Buffer capacity: •...•...•.•.•••
Format control: ••••..•.•.•.•.•
Rated output speed: •••••.•..•.••
Effective output speed: •.•••••••••

•5

1080 characters total, see Table II.
flexible cursor controls, Data Insert capability
Data Format feature, and flexible erasure.
300 char/sec (2400 bps).
limited by message length and communications
facility •

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION
The 70/750 System does not incorporate data transmission error detection circuits. The
70/750 converts between the odd character parity of transmitted and received data and the
even internal character parity. All characters are stored with even parity; parity is checked
for each character read from the display memory to be displayed at a Video Data Terminal.
A detected parity error causes a brightened rectangular area to appear on the screen in place
of the character read in error. All requests for retransmission must be performed by the
operator.

• 55

Line Malfunctions
Detection: • . . . . . .
Action: •.•••........•..•.•

absence of data.
time-out occurs and CAN (cancel) character is
transmitted.

•6

CONDITION INDICATORS
Each Video Data Terminal provides indicators for mode status, Memory Segment Address
and Data Insert functions, and power control. The Video Data Controller provides indicators
for control functions •

•7

DATA TRANSMISSION
The 70/750 Modular Video Data System is designed to communicate with a Spectra 70/35, 45,
46, or 55 computer equipped with a 70/668 Communications Controller Multichannel (CCM)
and two SDS 70/721 buffers.
.

• 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed:
Transmission method: •••••••.••••
Transmission code: ••.•••••••••••
Transmission mode: •••••••••.••••
Order of bit transmission: •.•.••••••
Synchronization: •••••••••..•••••

• 72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set*

Common-carrier leased voice-band line
(2400 bits/sec): ••.••••..••••••
• 73

Bell System Data Set 201 B, Western Union
2400 Baud Data Modem or equivalent.

Transmission Control
Call initiation •..••••...•
Call reception: • . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . •
Functional operations: •.•.••...•.•

11/68

250 char/sec (2000 bits/sec) or 300 char/sec
(2400 bits/sec).
serial by bit.
7-level USASCII plus an odd parity bit per
character.
full-duplex.
low-order bit (h1) first.
synchronous; synchronization is established by
SYN characters transmitted at the beginning of
code message •

terminals can initiate calls except when controller is operating in a multi-station environment
where calls are initiated by remote computer.
each terminal is directly addressable.
control characters in message initiate format
control functions.

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

(Contd. )

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6703:09
RCA 70/750

co

.74

Multistation Operation
Multistation operation requires the optional Station Selection feature. This feature provides
for operating with up to six Video Data Controllers connected to a single voice-band line.
Polling: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • • • • • • ••

Addressing: ••••••••••••••••••••
•8

the 70/759 Video Data Controller is polled for
all messages from the attached 70/751 Terminals;
the controller responds with sequential messages, including the address header of each
message, or a negative response indicating there
are no messages to be transmitted.
the 70/751 Terminals can be addressed individually for messages from the computer •

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component

70/759-21
Controller

70/756*
Generator

70/751
Terminal

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

49.5
24.75
62
400

20
21
14.5
40

16.9
20.5
14.5
80

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phases

1.1
115
60
1

Power derived
from controller

0.25
115
60
1

Temperature Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

40 to 110
10 to 90
3560

40 to 110
10 to 90

40 to 110
10 to 90
810

-

*Contained in 70/759-21 Controller
.9

PRICE DATA
Component or Feature

Monthly
Rental,
$

Purchase *
Price,
$

RCA Video Data Controller Model 70/759-11
Model 70/759-21

600
400

28,200
18,800

RCA Video Data Generator Model 756-11
Model 756-21
Model 756-31

275
225
200

12,925
10,575
9,400

RCA Video Data Terminal Model 751-10
Model 751-11
Model 751-12

75
75
75

3,525
3,525
3,525

25
10
10

1,175
470
470

Options Station Selection
Data Format
Variable Start-ofTransmission

*Monthly maintenance costs for purchased equipment is not available from RCA
at present.

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/68

A

AUlRBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
RlPORTS

6704:01

'UERBACH

•

RCA 70/740

RCA 70/740 DATA TERMINAL

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: •.....•..•..•.............•..

Model 70/740 Data Terminal.

. 12

Manufacturer: ...•...................

Radio Corporation of America
Information Systems Division
Cherry Hill, 204-2
Camden, N. J. 08101

.13

Basic Function:

reception and optional transmission of data over
a voice-band line with a wide variety of RCA
computer systems at up to 300 char/sec;
received data is printed, transmitted data is
read from punched cards •

. 14

Basic Components
Name: ••••••••••.••••.•.••••••••.••••

Model number: ......•.......•.•.•.•..
Function: •.•.•.••.•..•••...•••.•••••••

. 15

Data Terminal.
70/740-11.
provides basic control unit functions and prints
alphanumeric information at up to 300 lines/
min at up to 80 char/line.

Name: .............................. .
Model number: ...................... .
Function: ..................... '," ... .

Data Terminal.
70/740-21.
provides basic control unit functions and prints
alphanumeric information of up to 300 lines/
min at up to 132 char/line.

Name: .............................. .
Model number: .............•••.•••.•..
Function: ...•........•....•••...•..••

Card Reader (optional).
70/741.
reads cards at up to 300 cards/min.

Description
The RCA 70/740 Data Terminal, a high performance printer terminal with a card reader
option, is designed for remote operation with an RCA Spectra 70 Model 35, 45, 46, 55, or 60
computer via the RCA 70/668 Communication Controller-MultichalUJ.el and 70/721 Communication Buffer (see Report 8702) or the RCA 70/656 Communication Controller-Single channel.
The 70/740 is available in two models:
•

Model 70/740-11 -- provides printed output with an 80-character print line.

•

Model 70/740-21 -- provides printed output with a 132-character print line.

The optional Model 70/741 Card Reader can be used with either model printer terminal.
The 70/740 operates in a poll/address environment where all communication between the
Terminal and computer is under control of the stored program at the remote computer. The
Terminal can be used in a single-station or multi-station arrangement, communication
between two 70/740 Terminals, however, is not permitted. The 70/740 also operates in an
off-line mode to provide printed copy from punched card data.
The 70/740 operates over the public telephone network at 2000 bits per second or over a
leased voice-band line at 2000 or 2400 bits per second. Communications are synchronous

6704:02
RCA 70/740

Figure 1. RCA 70/740 Data Terminal (left) and Optional 70/741 Card Reader (right)
.15

Description (Contd. )
in a half-duplex mode, but full-duplex communications facilities can be utilized to maintain
synchronization in both directions; this reduces the turn-around time and consequently provides higher effective performance.
The transmission code is 7-level USASCII plus odd parity. An optional card-reader adapter
provides for translation from extended Hollerith to USASCII code.
The basic 70/740 consists of a 300-line per minute, 80- or 132-column impact printer and
a communications control unit, which includes I/O control logic and 446 characters of
buffering. The basic terminal can be expanded by the addition of the 5753 Card Reader
Adapter and 70/741 Card Reader, a 300-card per minute reader.
Communication between the 70/740 and remote computer constitutes an alternate series of
data messages and message acknowledgements. A data message can contain an unlimited
number of blocks, each composed of up to 16 sub-blocks; each sub-block is equivalent to
one print line or one 80-column card. Reader messages are restricted to a maximum
block length of 365 characters limited by the buffer capacity. Printer messages are not
restricted in this respect, since extensive buffering is not required.
The printing operation requires the use of alternate print areas within the buffer, each with
the capacity of a full print line. Alternate use of the two print areas permits printing to be
performed concurrent with receiving and assembling the following print line.
Horizontal and vertical tabulation are standard features on the 70/740. Horizontal tabulation is implemented through the use of a stored horizontal format record; vertical tabulation

8/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
JERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
R[PORTS

6704:03
RCA 70/740

•

is implemented through the use of a 12-channel punched tape loop, which defines the vertical
format. Horizontal and vertical tabulation respond to a two-character format-control
sequence contained within a Printer message; see Paragraph. 35 for a detailed description.
The peak printing speed is 300 lines per minute; the print cycle time is 200 milliseconds.
The actual print operation requires 175 milliseconds; the remaining 25 milliseconds are used
to advance paper one line and to restore the print hammers. Line advancement in excess of
one line requires 8.4 milliseconds maximum per line for six lines per inch vertical spacing
and 6.2 milliseconds maximum per line for eight lines per inch vertical spacing; both line
advance times are based upon a paper-slewing rate of 20 inches per second.
The print line consists of 80-character positions for the Model 70/740-11 and 132-character
positions for the Model 70/740-21. Features common to both models include horizontal
spacing at 10 characters per inch, programmed horizontal and vertical tabulation.
The peak reading speed of the 70/741 Card Reader is 300 cards per minute. The cards are
fed from a 1000-card-capacity hopper, read column by column, and loaded into a 1000-cardcapacity stacker. The extended Hollerith card code is translated to the 7-level USASCII code
by the 5753 Card Reader Adapter.
Protection against the loss or duplication of message blocks is provided by a block count
feature. Each block within a message is preceded by a block identification number ranging
in sequence from zero to seven. The block number is automatically assigned by the
70/740 when transmitting to the remote computer. The block count of each received message block is sampled and compared to the count of an internal counter for equality. The
received block is printed only when equal to the internal count and the count is advanced by
one. The 70/740 responds to a block count greater than the internal block count by transmitting a negative acknowledgement at the end of the block and by visually alerting the
operator. A received block count less than the internal block count results in a positive
acknowledgement at the end of the block.
. 16

First Delivery: ••..•...•...••.•...•••

February 1970 •

• 17

Availability: •.......•...•.•••••.•••.•

9 months (initially) •

.2

CONFIGURA TION
The baisc RCA 70/740 Data Terminal includes a communications control unit and a 300-line
per minute printer and is available in two models that differ only in the number of print
positions per print line:
•

Model 70/740-11 - provides printed output at 80 characters per line.

•

Model 70/740-21 -

provides printed output at 132 characters per line.

The optional RCA 70/741 Card Reader and 5753 Card Reader Adapter can be added to the
basic 70/740 Terminal.
The standard communications facilities that can be accommodated and the associated data
sets are listed in Paragraph. 72 •
.3

INPUT

. 31

Prepared Input
70/741 Card Reader -Input medium: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

standard IBM 80-column punched cards.
standard Hollerith card code; see Table II.

© 1969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

6704:04
RCA 70/740

TABLE I: USASCII DATA TRANSMISSION CODE

.,. ""'OIl1lon.

114

"'

bl

III

1 ! 1
D

D

f-"---

0

~-

D

0

0

D

-0

• •
• r-• - •
1--- r-•
•,
•
-- --• 0 ,
,
, ,
, ,
, • -- - •
-- • , ,
, , , ,

0

,.

It

SOH

DC.

I

1

II

Q

•

q

STX

DC2

B

R

b

r

ETX

DC3

..

2
3

C

I

c

EDT

DCC

$

D

T

d

•
•

ENO

NIIK

%

0

0

D

•

0

liCK

BYN

BEL

ETB

0

0

BS

CAN

(

0

HT

EM

)

LF

SUB

0

0

0

VT

ESC

FF

FS

CR

OS

80

RS

SI

US

0

0

-

0

•
•

,

0

0

••

1

--

--

0

1

II'

--

- --- r
0
f---- -- ---•
D
0
• -•0
0
0
•
-- - 1-- - 0
0
• -- --•r---

1

DLE

~

•-

•0

NUL

bl

0

•0

0
0

III

b'

0

0
0
0

bT

/

•
•

•

E

U

•

•

F

V

t

•

T

0

W

w

•

H

X

•
•

I

Y

,
;

•

+

•

•0

u

I

·

J

Z

I

z

K

I

k

I

"

I

I

"'

I

<

L

·

M

I

>

N

1\

?

0

-

y

·•

DEL

TABLE II: RCA 70/741 CARD CODE*
5

Col.
Row

__ tiUk _ _

12-0-9-S-1

_ _

_

Q.L~

_ _

Ii!' _____ Q.. __ l. __ f _ _ _ _'- _ _

12-11-9-S-1 no punches

0

8-4

11-7

8-1

r __ _

12-11-7

------8-7
__ E..QT_ _
9-7

_
-

!ll=L ___ l. ___ .J __ 12. __ 1:. __ .Ii _
9-8-4

11-8-3

- - - i - - .) - - i 0-8-4

--~

5

_ _ 1_ _ _ , _ _ _ _ _

.

EM

12

10
11

- _LF_
- 0-9- 5
_ _ VT_ _

12-9-S-3

-

S\!!l --9-8-7
_ E§.C

0-9-7

11-8-5

- -

-

12

_ U _ _ _ _ Ell_
12-9-8-4
11-9-8-4

13

__ C.It __ __ Q§ _ _
12-9-8-5
11-9-8-5

1~8=-4

-+
-12-8-6

- -

9

-

-

-

~

12-6

I

0-8-3

12-8-4

12-9-8-7

11-9-8-7

12-0-5 11-0-4
12-0-6 11-0-5

_'C _
0-8

J

Z

i
_ y__ _
12=-0-9 11-0-8

:L
- u-11-1

k
J
- (- - ii-11--2
·11-2 12-8-2

11

8-6

0-1

0-8-7

--L12-0

1
:
0-S-2 12-11-3 12-11-

11-3

11-4 11-8-2 12-11-4

11-6

z
11-0=-9

__, _

-= ____= __ .11 __ ~ __ J1l_

_ ...L _ _ _ 1 _ _ _0 _

15

0-5

-S:2- -11-1 -0=-9
.1

__ a_ _ _ 1!.. __

__ V ___ j . . _.v. __

__ ... ___ ~ _ _L .
_

11_ 0-4

E___

"9 - -i"i-9

11-8-6

_t _ _
12-0-4 11-0-3

0-3

12-5

Ii.. __
6

_ _ )_ _ _

il-9-=S=-1 -

12-4

4

_

-=- _

0

0-8-5 12-U-6

-:/ __

11-0

DEL

-i'2-9-7

* The Hollerith card code is translated to the USASCII character set, shown above the
dotted line, by the 5753 Card Reader Adapter.

8/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
JERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6704:05
RCA 70/740

8

Quantity of data: .
Character set: "
Rated input speed:
Effective speed: .

up to 80 characters per card.
128-character USASCII character set.
300 cards per minute.
less than rated speed depending on number of
characters per card, block length and limitations of communications facility; see Table VII.

Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hollerith code is translated to 7-level USASCII
code plus odd parity by the 5753 Card Reader
Adapter .

• 32

Manual Input: ••....•.••••...••••.•••

no provision .

. 33

Fixed Input: ...••...•...•..••.•••••.

no pro vis ion .

. 34

Transaction Code Input: ..•.•..••••••.

no provision .

. 35

Message Configuration
Message Types
The 70/740 employs five message types: Poll, Select, Request, Printer, and Reader; see
Table V.
Basic Format
Printer and Reader messages are divided into blocks; each block is divided into sub-blocks
or records. Each block can contain up to 16 records. The number of blocks per message
is unlimited.
Block Identification
Each block is assigned a module-8 number for identification. Block identification is
employed in both transmit and receive modes to prevent the loss or duplication of a data
block within a message. An internal block counter is preset to one by a Select message or
an EOT character prior to receiving the first message, which must be assigned a block
count of one. The received block count is sampled at the beginning of each block and compared to that of the block counter for equality. A message block is not printed when its
block count is less or greater than the internal block counter. Each block correctly
received is printed and the block counter is advanced by one.
Message Sequence
Both Printer and Reader messages are identical except for the format-control sequence
required by the printer. The text contained in the initial record of each block is preceded
by: four SYN characters; STX, BLK, and a two-character format-control sequence, (see
Tables IV, V, and VI) which is required for Printer messages only. Records other than the
initial record begin with text when contained in a Reader message and with a format-control
sequence followed by text when contained in a Printer message. Each record is terminated
by a US, ETB, or ETX character followed by a longitudinal parity character. A DEL
character terminates the last record of each block contained in a Reader message to allow
for equipment timing considerations. A Unit Separator (US) terminates each record of a
block except the final record, which is terminated by an End-of-Transmission Block (ETB)
character. The final record of the last message block is terminated by an End-of-Text
(ETX) character.

6704:06
RCA 70/740

TABLE III: RCA 70/740 PRINTER CHARACTER SET*
Print
Sequence
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

Symbol

USASCII Code,
Column/Row

@

4/0
2/13
3/0
3/1
3/2
3/3
3/4
3/5
3/6
3/7
3/8
3/9
2/4
2/14
2/12
4/5
4/15
4/14
5/3
4/9
4/3
5/2
4/7
4/8
4/10
4/4
4/13
5/7
4/2
4/11
5/8
5/10

-0

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
$

.
,

E
0

N
S
I
C
R
G
H

J
D
M
W
B
K
X
Z

Print
Sequence
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

Symbol
A
L
Q
T
U
P
F
Y
V

/
'I
):(
?

I
)
(
;

!
1\

"

:

T

>
<
=

*

#

%
&
~

+

USASCII Code,
Column/Row
4/1
4/12
5/1
5/4
5/5
5/0
4/6
5/9
5/6
2/15
5/13
5/12
3/15
7/12
2/9
2/8
3/11
2/1
5/14
2/2
3/10
5/15
2/7
3/14
3/12
3/13
2/10
2/3
2/5
2/6
5/11
2/11

* The symbols

], /, and [ can be substituted for the symbols at print locations
43, 44, and 63, respectively, at no additional cost •

. 35

Message Configuration (Contd.)
Poll and Select messages are also identical and are constructed as follows: four SYN, SID,
DEV, ENQ. The SID character identifies one of several stations in a multi-station environment. The DEV character identifies the device (printer or reader) and also defines the
message type as a Poll (reader) or Select (printer) message. An EOT character can be used
directly ahead of the SID character to ensure that the 70/740 is ready to respond to the Poll
or Select message.
The request message is manually initiated as an invitation to a Poll message. The message
is constructed as: four SYN, SID, ENQ, DEL.
Acknowledgement
The 70/740 acknowledges all messages received and requires an acknowledgement to all
messages transmitted, The 70/740 responds to an ETB or ETX at the end of a received
message block with one of the following replies:

8/69

•

DLE 1 - a positive reply to the first and all subsequent odd numbered blocks.

•

DLE 0 - a positive reply to all even numbered blocks.

•

NAK

- a negative reply prefixed by an A, B, or C to designate a specific
error condition.
AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~U[R8ACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6704:07
RCA 70/740

8

TABLE IV: RCA 70/740 PRINTER VERTICAL FORMAT CONTROL CODES
USASCII
Format
Control Code

Carriage Operation
after Printing

ESC 0

No Space

ESC 1

Single Space

ESC 2

Double Space

ESC 3

Triple Space

ESC 4

Skip to Channel 1

ESC 5

Skip to Channel 2

ESC 6

Skip to Channel 3

ESC 7

Skip to Channel 4

ESC 8

Skip to Channel 5

ESC 9

Skip to Channel 6

ESC:

Skip to Channel 7

ESC;

Skip to Channel 8

ESC <

Skip to Channel 9

ESC

=

Skip to Channel 10

ESC>

Skip to Channel 11

ESC?

Skip to Channel 12

A positive reply indicates a block was received without error and that the received block
count was equal to or less than the internal block count. The Terminal responds to a
received block count that is greater than the internal block count with a NAK.
The Terminal anticipates the computer to retransmit a message block following a NAK reply
or an acknowledgement following an ENQ reply.
The computer is required to acknowledge the Terminal within a predetermined period ranging
from 2.6 to 3.6 seconds following the transmission of ENQ, ETB, or ETX. Failure for the
computer to respond with STX, DLE 0/1 (ACK), NAK, BEL, EOT, or WABT within the
established period, results in a retransmission of the last message block, or if three
retransmissions have already occurred, an EOT is transmitted to terminate the transmission.
Printer Messages

.

Each record received consists of a format control sequence followed by the data to be printed
and represents one print line of up to 80 or 132 characters depending on the printer model.
Printing is performed first, vertical formatting last. Minimum record length requirements
are 49 text characters when receiving at 250 char/sec (4 Msec/char) and 59 text characters
when receiving at 300 char/sec (3.3 Msec/char). These minimum requirements can be
satisfied by the use of NUL characters in the print positions of each record.
Printer Format Control
Horizontal and vertical tabulation are standard features on the 70/740.
Horizontal tabulation is implemented through the use of a stored horizontal format record,
which contains horizontal tab (HT) characters in predetermined positions; remaining positions are filled with space characters. The HT characters in the format record identify the
8/69

6704:08
RCA 70/740

TABLE V: RCA 70/740 MESSAGE TYPES
Type of
Message

.35

Origin of
Transmission

Message Sequence

Purpose of Message

Poll

Computer

four SYN, EOT, SID,
DE V, ENQ

To request the addressed
70/740 to transmit a message
from the 70/741 Card Reader

Select

Computer

four SYN, EOT, SID,
DE V, ENQ

To request control unit/printer
status; i. e., "ready" or "not
ready" to receive a Print
message

Request

Terminal

four SYN, SID, ENQ,
DEL

To request a Poll message;
the Request message is manually initiated by Terminal
operator

Printer

Computer

Initial record:
four SYN, STX,
BLK, ESC, Text,
US, BCC
Following records:
ESC, Text,
ETB/ETX, BCC

To print message on paper

Reader

Terminal

Initial record:
four SYN, STX,
BLK, Text, US,
BCC
Following records:
Text, ETB/ETX,
BCC, DEL

To read message from
punched cards

Acknowledgement

Terminal

four SYN, SID, NAK,
DEL

To inform the remote computer that the Terminal is not
ready to receive a message;
the audible alarm is
activated

four SYN, DEL 0,
DEL, 0, DEL

To inform the remote computer that the Terminal is
ready to receive a message

four SYN, EOT,
DEL

To inform the remote computer that the 70/740 does
not have a waiting message

Message Configuration (Contd.)
beginning of printed data fields. When an HT character is received in an incoming message,
the next data field will be printed beginning with the next horizontal tab position as defined
by the HT character in the stored format record. The format record remains stored until
a new format record is received. A format record is identified by the prefix ESC HT.
Vertical tabulation is implemented through the use of a 12-channel punched tape loop, which
defines the vertical format. A print record is prefixed by a two-character sequence, ESC
followed by an address code, that specifies one of the twelve channels on the format loop or
paper advance positions up to three, see Table IV.

8/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
UERBACH
os

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS

6704:09

REPORTS

RCA 70/740

TABLE VI: RCA 70/740 DATA TERMINAL CONTROL CHARACTERS
Control
Character

Character
TrlUlBmltted

Function

Bell

To light BEL lamp and sound audible alarm when transmitted or received by the terminal.

BEL

Block Check
Character

To establish block parity check; generated and checked
by the terminal; follows US, ETB, or ETX control
characters.

BCC

Block Number

To identify the message block; immediately follows STX
control character.

BLK

Delete

To allow for equipment timing considerations; generated
by the terminal following last character of each transmission; ignored by the terminal when received.

DEL

Device Number

To identify a message for printer or card reader.

DEV

Data-Unk
Escape

To inform the transmitting terminal that the last block
of data was received without error; a OLE is followed
by a 0 (even) or 1 (odd) block designation.

OLE

Disconnect
Line, OEOT

To terminate a connection via public telephone network
when the two character sequence is transmitted or
received by the terminal.

OLE EOT

Substitute

To replace an invalid character from the 70/741 Card
Reader; automatically inserted by terminal.

SUB

Wait-BeforeTransmit
WABT

To indicate to the terminal that remote computer is not
ready to receive; initiates retransmission of previous
message from the terminal.

OLE?

End of
Transmission

To indicate a no-message status in response to a polling
message from remote computer.

EOT

Inquiry

To terminate a polling or selection sequence from
remote computer.

ENQ

To initiate retransmission of a response such as OLE,
OLE?, etc.
End-ofTransmission
Block

To identify the end of a message block.

ETB

End-of- Text

To identify the end of a message.

ETX

Format Control Character

To initiate a printer forms feed or horizontal tab operation; see Table IV. The two-character sequence
immediately follows a BLK or US, BCC control
characters.

ESC

Horizontal
Tabulation

To initiate printer horizontal tab operation; part of format
control character sequence; see Table IV.

HT

Negative
Acknowledge

To indicate to remote computer that last block of data
transmitted was received in error; it is prefixed by A,
B, or C to identify type of error

NAK

Null

To be used as a fill character only; causes no printing
or spacing.

NUL

Station
Identification

To identify the recipient terminal of a polling or selection sequence; one of 64 address combinations.

SID

Start-of-Text

To identify beginning of a message

STX

Synchronization
Character

To establish synchronization between transmitting and
receiving devices; can be used as a filler character.

SYN

Unit
Separater

To identify the end of a message block; initiates Block
Check Character generation or checking when transmitted or received by the terminal. (16 blocks per
message maximum.)

~

1

nco

A IICOCAf""U 1" .......................... ;,... ...

..... ""'~

1\ IICDOAf"U

1 ..... 1.......

I"' ....

6704:10
RCA 70/740

• 35

Message Configuration (Contd. )
The printer format-control sequence for vertical or horizontal formatting immediately
follows the Block Count (BLK) character of the initial record in a block and at the very
beginning of each of the following records. Compensation for the time required to space
paper in a vertical format operation is accomplished through the use of NUL characters
following the format-control sequence.
Reader Message
Each record represents one 80-column card. Block length is limited to 360 characters over
a maximum of 16 records. Record length is automatically set at 80 characters unless the
70/740 encounters a US, ETB, or ETX character punched into the card. Punched data
following one of these characters on the same card is ignored. Block length is established
at 320 characters (four punched cards) in the absence of punched control characters, unless
limited by the number of remaining cards .

• 36

Operating Procedure
The operator prepares the terminal by loading the printer with forms if required, by loading
the card reader with cards (if transmitting data), and by setting the switches on the Operator's Control Panel to conform with the desired operating procedure. Calls are initiated
manually and answered automatically. The subsequent transmission and reception of data
are largely automatic and require little operator attention, if any. Retransmission of data
blocks containing errors is automatic. Up to three retransmissions resulting from any
combination of a consecutively negative response or fixed time-out due to a no-response
condition will occur before operator intervention is required. The terminal halts, and
visual and audible alarms are activated in response to a fourth negative reply or time-out .

. 37

Entry of Time and Date: ...•..........

.4

OUTPUT

.44

Output to Printer
Printer (70/740 Models -11 and -21)
Output medium: . . . . . . . • • • • . • • . .

Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated printing speed: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed: . . . . . . . • . . • . . • . .

Format control: . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . .

Comments: . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . • . .

8/69

no provision .

pin-fed continuous fanfold forms from 4.00 to
22 inches wide and up to 17 inches long;
maximum printed line length is 80 characters
for Model 70/740-11 and 132 characters for
Model 70/740-21.
64 characters; see Table III.
300 lines/min.
less than rated speed depending on the number
of characters per line, transmission speed,
type of line, and size of message block; see
Table VII.
via Format Control Character (ESC) sequence
at beginning of each print record and stored
horizontal tab format; vertical and horizontal
tabulation is standard; see Table IV.
prints up to 16 lines per message block; available as a no-charge option, three RCA special
symbols replace three USASCII special
symbols; see Table III.

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

AUER8ACH

DATA
~ COIIMUNICATIONS

.ERBACH

6704: 11

REPORTS

RCA 70/740

•
.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION
The 70/740 classifies errors detected within a received message as belonging to one of three
general types: parity errors, block-count errors, and format errors. A negative acknowledgement (NAK) preceded by the prefix A, B, or C to define the error type is transmitted in
response to a message block containing anyone or combination of three error conditions.
When more than one type occurs in the same message block, the first to be detected is the
one reported. The prefix A, B, and C is assigned to parity, block-count, and format errors,
respectively. A parity error reflects either incorrect character or longitudinal parity. A
block-count error is reported only when the received block count is greater than the internal
block count. A format error includes anyone of the following conditions:
(1) the loss of received data due to a buffer-full condition.

· 51

(2)

a message block containing more than 16 records.

(3)

a record containing more than 80 (Model 70/740-11) or 132 (Model 70/740-21)
characters.

(4)

an invalid character code.

(5)

an undefined format-control sequence.

Data Entry Errors
Type of checking:
Error indication:

Correction procedure: • • . . • . • . . . . .
· 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error indication: . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .
Correction procedure: . • . . . . . . . . . .

• 53

Data Recording Errors: . . • . . . • . . . .

· 54

Buffer Errors
Type of checking: . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .
Error indication: . • . • . • • . . • . . . . .
Correction procedure: . . . . . • . . . . . .

· 55

validity checking on data read from cards.
indicator lights, SUB character substituted for
USASCII control character other than US, ETB
or ETX; character read in error is not transmitted.
operator intervention.

character and longitudinal parity check; modulo8 block-count check.
indicator lights, printing halts, and an acknowledgement (A NAK if parity error, B NAK if
block-count error) is returned at end of block.
automatic retransmission of block received in
error; terminal halts, a lamp is lighted and
an audible alarm is sounded after three
retransmissions; operator intervention is
then required.
no provisions .

odd character parity check on data read from
buffer storage.
indicator lights, terminal halts, and EOT is
transmitted.
operator intervention.

Line Malfunctions
The 70/740 guards against prolonged periods of inactivity on the public telephone network by
disconnecting the line and energizing the audible alarm and the respective indicator lamp
when a transmission has not begun within a 20-second period following the initial connection.

~,

laha 1I.11~RQlI.rl-l rnrnnr"tlnn "nrl

AIIFRRAr.H Info

Inc:

ft

J,..,..

6704:12
RCA 70/740

.55

Line Malfunctions (Contd.)
I>etection: ••••.•.•..••••••••••

Action: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
•7

DAT A TRANSMISSION

. 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed: . . . • • . . . .
Transmission method: . • . . • • . . . . . .
Transmission code: . • • . . • • • . • . . . .
Transmission mode: . . . . • . . . . . . . .
Order of bit transmission: . . . . • . • . .
Synchronization: . • . • . • . . . . . . . . . .

• 72

expiration of a fixed time interval (approximately
two seconds) between a received STX character
and a two-character sequence of SYN or any
character (selected manually).·
terminal halts indicator lights; terminal
responds to a received ENQ with A NAK .

250 or 300 char/sec (2000 or 2400 bits/sec).
respectively.
serial by bit.
7-level USAscn plus parity totaling 8 bits/char;
see Table 1.
half-duplex.
low-order bit first.
synchronous; a sequence of four SYN characters
precedes each message and acknowledgement
to establish synchronization between transmitting and receiving units .

COlUlection to Communications Lines
Communications Line or Service

Data Set*

Common-carrier leased voice-band
line operating at the following
speeds:

.73

2000 or 2400 bits/sec:

Bell System Data Set 201B or Western Union
2400 Baud Data Modem.

Public telephone network operating
at 2000 bits/sec:

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 201A.

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . . . . .
Call reception: .•..
Functional operations: . . . • . . . . . . . .

. 74

manual dialing or signaling.
capable of unattended transmit-receive operation.
printer or reader is selected by control codes;
vertical form spacing or skipping and
horizontal tabulation on printer. audible alarm
and indicator lamp can be energized by BEL
code .

Multistation Operation
Polling: . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

a polling sequence requests data from the
addressed 70/740; a request for a polling
sequence can be manually initiated.

* Equivalent data sets can be used;

see Section 4620 for a current list of modems available from
independent manufacturers of telephone equipment, then check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant.

8/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
..

UERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6704: 13
RCA 70/740

TABLE VII: EFFECTIVE DATA TRANSMISSION RATES OF
RCA 70/740 DATA TERMINAL

Component and
Record Size(l)

Printer(3) 50 char/record
65
80
95
110
120
130

Data Transmission Rate,
records per minute (2)
Half-duplex,
2000 bits/sec(5)
186;
165;
140;
120;
112;
105;
93;

Card Reader(4) 10
25
40
60
80
(1)

263
213
170
145
130
118
108

Full-duplex,
2400 bits/sec(6)
297;
240;
200;
168;
148;
137;
127;

281
270
253
188
142

300
270
220
185
162
145
137

300
300
295
265
200

Record size includes HT horizontal format characters and ESC sequences controlling
vertical spacing but excludes all other control characters.

(2) A record corresponds to one card or one line of print. The data transmission rates
include transmission of all control characters, turnaround times, and the transmission of acknowledgement messages.
(3)

The data transmission rate is based on a four-record block (first column) and a sixteenrecord block (second column).

(4)

The data transmission rate is based on a 360-character block.

(5)

This transmission mode is normally used over the public telephone network (300 msec
total turnaround time).

(6)

This transmission mode is normally used with a full-duplex leased voice-band line
(40 msec total turnaround time).

Addressing: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

•8

individual Data Terminals cannot communicate
directly with one another; such communication
could be provided on a store-and-forward basis
by appropriate programming of the remote
computer, utilizing the individual addressability of the terminal units .

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component
Width
Depth
Height
Weight

(inches)
(inches)
(inches)
(pounds)

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phases
Temperature Range rF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

70/740 Data Terminal
Models -11 and -21

70/741 Card Reader

57
30
54

25.5
36.25
46.5
150

3.5
208/240
60
1

0.75
120
60
1

50 to 110
10 to 90
9600

50 to 110
10 to 90
2560

© 1969 AUERBACH Corooratlon and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

R/fiq

6704:14
RCA 70/740

.9

PRICE DATA
Monthly
Rental,

Purchase
Price,

Monthly
Maintenance,

Component or Feature

$

$

$

70/740 Data Terminal:
Model 70/740-11
Model 70/740-21
70/741 Card Reader
5753 Card Reader
Adapter

857.50
1075.00
238.75
30.00

37,125
40,500
9000
1125

162.50
175.00
38.75
5.00

5750-01 Special Print
Symbols

NC

NC

NC - No Charge

8/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

-

A
~

AUERBACH


C

0

E

F

G CHARACTERS

K

L

M

H

0

Q

R S

T

U

V

W

y

Z

r j EB

'\

0

0

1

1

1

8

9

0

0

0

@

A.

B

,,

0

0

1

I,t

1

J

1

0

I

0

P
X

Modd 402 Display Terminal control
characters mcluuc ~l'X, El'X, EOT,

and CR onlr
(2)

•

+

*

(1)

SYN ETB

*

)

1

CR

%

(

I

CONTROL
CHARACTERS

S
,

-

0

~T

ERASE

!

1

. 15

0

b4

Morlel 425 Conlro! Unit tah control
option use!:; the "f" and "ESI' codes
for non-displayable <'ontrol
characters,

(:!)

&

-

/

7
?
I--

DISPLAYED

~

S"mhol iut'ntificalion:
- Cursor character
~ End of message eha r"acwr

\

Carriage return character

~ Parity error charact"r

Description (Contd. )
Message Configuration
The message configuration for the Model 425 Control Unit includes a Start-of-Header (SOH)
character, an Address character which identifies a specific control unit or display console,
the text, and an End-of-Transmission Block (ETB),character. Transmission is synchronized
by sync characters preceding each message.
Th~ message configuration for the Model 402 Display Terminal includes a Start-of-Text (STX)
character, a display address, text, and an End-of-Text (ETX) character. An EaT character can be substituted for the ETX character.

Error Detection and Correction
Errors that occur during off-line composition can be corrected by positioning the cursor over
the character in error and rekeying the correct character. A detected transmission error
occurring during a computer message causes a special symbol to be displayed in place of that
character. Atuomatic retransmission request upon detection of a transmission error is
optional.
If a transmission error occurs when the Start-of-Message (SOM) character or the Address

character is received, the message is not displayed and the operator must repeat the query.
If the End-of-Message character is not received by the display, the display remains on-line
and the message is displayed. The receive mode is terminated in this case by depressing
the Shift and Clear keys.
(Contd. )
11/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

fA
~

..

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6735:05
RAYTHEON

0105-400

Multistation Operation
Polling options are available for the Model 425 Control Unit and the Model 402 Display
Terminal.
The 425 Control Unit with the polling option responds to four separate commands: transmit
message from a specified display, transmit message from all displays associated with one
control unit, transmit message from the first display ready to transmit, and receive computer message addressed to a specified display.
The polling option available with the Model 402 terminal permits polling an individual display,
polling all displays common to a specific Multiplex Switch Unit, or both. A Broadcast Address
option, also available for the 402 terminal, allows all display devices to receive the same
computer message.
Options
Other options presently available for the Model 402 display terminal include a Keyboard
Lockout option which inhibits keyboard operation during the receive mode, special cursor
operation options, and non-standard USASCII coding for control characters. Raytheon states
that the cost of these options is negotiated individually. Similar options can be requested
for the Model 401 display terminal .
. 16

First Delivery:

November 1965 .

. 17

Availability:.

6 months .

.9

PRICE DATA
Component or Feature

Model 401 Display Console
(used with Model 425 Control Unit)
1040 Character Option (3)
Model 402 Display Console
(used as Single unit or with
Model 426 Multiplex Switch Unit)
1040 Character Option (3)
Model 402 Polling Capability
Model 425 Control Unid 1)
8-Module Add-On Capability
Model 426 Multiplex (2)
Switch Unit
Model 441 Printer
(used with Model
Unit)
Model 442 Printer
(used with Model
Switch Unit)

Adapter
425 Control
Adapter
426 Multiplex

Teletype Model 33
Receive-Only Teleprinter
Teletype Model 35
Receive-Only Teleprinter

Monthly
Rental,

Purchase
Price, (4)

$

$

114

4100

17
167

600
6000

17
11

600
400

225 to 390
31
32

8300to 14,000
1100
1160

78

2800

117

4200

19

660

52

1870

(1) Provides connections for any combination of up to eight Model
401 Display Consoles or Model 141 Printer Adapters; expandable
to 64 pOSitions in increments of 8 pOSitions. Price variation
reflects hardware additions required to operate with some
computers.
(2) Provides connections for any combination of up to five Model 402
Display Consoles on Model 442 Printer Adapters.
(3) Expands baSic 520-character capacity to 1040-character capacity
(13 lines at 80 char/line).
(4) The maintenance cost for purchased units is individually negotiated and is dependent upon the number of units installed and
their geographical location.

© 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

11/67

A
8
AUERBACH
s

AUERBACH

6744:01

DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

SANDERS 620

SANDERS 620 STAND-ALONE DATA DISPLAY SYSTEM

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:..

· 620 Stand-Alone Data Display System .

. 12

Manufacturer:

· Sanders Associates, Inc .
Data Systems Division
95 Canal Street
Nashua, New Hampshire 03060

.13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . displays, via cathode ray tube, data received from
a remote computer or entered via keyboard; transmits data to a remote computer over the public
telephone network or leased voice-band lines .

. 14

Basic Components

. 15

Name:...
Function:.

· Model 6220 Display Unit
· display of alphanumeric data.

Name: ...
Function:.

· Model 6240 Typewriter Style Keyboard Unit.
· provides entry of data into the buffer memory contained in the Display Unit.

Description
The Sanders 620 Stand-Alone Data Display System is designed to facilitate rapid exchange of
data between a computer and a remote station under control of a stored program in the computer. The 620 is a self-contained unit and includes a keyboard, I/O module, and memory
module. A Teletype Model 33 or 35 RO teleprinter can be connected to the 620 via a special
adapter.
The transmission rate is governed by the specific communications interface and can range
from 110 bits per second to 2400 bits per second. This report discusses the 620 Display System as used in a communications environment only, except where noted.
There are two communications interfaces available for the 620: asynchronous and synchronous.
The asynchronous interface provides selectable transmission rates of 110, 1000, 1200, and
1800 bits per second; the synchronous interface provides selectable transmission rates of 2000
and 2400 bits per second.
The 7-level USASCII transmission code is employed, with an eighth bit added for character
parity; see Table I, Report 6745 (Sanders 720 Data Display System). When the asynchronous
communications interface is used, one start bit and one or two stop bits are added to each
character transmitted, resulting in a 10- or l1-bit character. Character length is eight bits
with the synchronous communications interface.
The Model 6220 Display Unit contains a 768-character memory module, composed of magnetostrictive delay lines, in addition to editing logic, character generation circuits, control
logic, and a communications interface.
The Model 6220 Display Unit provides a 9. 5-inch by 7. 5-inch image area. Nqrmally, the long
side of the cathode ray tube (CRT) is mounted horizontally. The CRT can be mounted vertically if desired.
The image area is arranged in 32 lines of 64 or 84 (optional) characters per line when the
horizo'ntal orientation is specified, and 40 lines of 52 characters per line with the vertical
orientation. A maximum of 768 characters can be simultaneously'displayed on the screen,
but they can be displayed in any of the more than 2000 display locations. Various control and
format characters also occupy positions in the buffer and therefore reduce the number of data
characters that can be displayed.
The stroke technique is employed to generate the displayed characters.
The Display Unit provides controls for adjusting focus, brightness, page size, page centering,
character size, and the character tilt. The character tilt control varies all displayed characters from a vertical position to a slanted (italic) position.

tel 1968 AUERBACH Corooration and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

5/68

6744:02
SANDERS 620

Figure 1. Sanders 620 Stand-Alone Data Display
System with Horizontal Screen Orientation .
. 15

Description (Contd. )
The Model 6240 Keyboard Unit can be attached directly to the Display Unit or can be connected
remotely at a distance of up to 10 cable feet. The keyboard has 51 keys arranged in conventional typewriter style plus an array of 16 special function keys located at the right of the keyboard. Of the 16 special function keys, 11 provide discrete control functions; the 5 remaining
keys are adaptable to a variety of customer uses. Depressing a key causes the generation of
a Unique USASCn character or control code.
Editing Facilities
Four operating modes are available for the 620: Data Entry, Format (optional), Conversation
(optional), and Hard Copy (optional). Functional keys associated with these operating modes
include:
•

Format Type - initiates Data Entry mode; permits data to be entered into the buffer
memory replacing any previous text.

•

Type - initiates Format mode; permits data to be entered into the buffer memory
only in areas (variable fields) specified by a previously stored display format.

•

Conversation Type - initiates Conversation mode; permits data to be entered into
the buffer memory following the last line of displayed data.
(Contd. )

5/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
8

AUElleACH
DATA

..

AUERBACH

6744:03

COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

SANDERS 620

•

Clear - erases all data stored in buffer memory (Data Entry or Conversation modes);
erases only data contained in variable fields specified by stored format (Format mode).

•

Send - transmits the entire displayed page (Data Entry mode); transmits data contained in variable fields or data bracketed by left and right delta symbols (Format
mode); transmits last displayed line (Conversational mode).

The Hard Copy mode can be entered from the Format Type. Type. or Conversational mode to
specify transferring all data stored in the buffer memory or only data contained in variable
fields (Format mode). Data is transferred to the attached Teletype Unit when the Send key is
depressed.
Cursor Controls
Six control keys provide a high degree of cursor mobility by directing the cursor to anyone of
five positions. When used with the Format Type mode (requires Format option). four of the
cursor control keys place control characters (formaters) in the buffer memory. The formaters
are used to structure the data entered in the Format mode. and can be erased only by typing
over in the Format mode or when the Clear key is depressed in the Data Entry mode. Cursor
controls include:
•

Horizontal Tab (optional) - establishes four character spaces between segments of
the displayed teAi for each Horizontal Tab formater stored.

•

Vertical Tab (optional) - establishes four line spaces following the last displayed
line of text for each Vertical Tab formater stored.

•

Carriage Return - establishes a single space between displayed lines with the cursor
positioned at the initial character location for each key depression or each Carriage
Return formater stored.

•

Frontspace/Backspace - establishes a single character space forward or backward
for each key depression or Frontspace/Backspace formater stored.

•

Reset - returns the cursor to the display position of the initial character stored in
buffer memory; when used with Format mode, the cursor is returned to the initial
character position of the first variable field. Reset formaters are stored in buffer
memory.

•

Shift - provides control for dual-operation keys including the cursor control keys
described above.

•

Cycle Left/Right - steps the cursor forward or backward at a 30-steps-per-second
rate for duration of key depression. The backward limiting position is the initial
character location in memory or initial character location of the first variable field;
the forward limiting position is the last character location in memory or final character location of the last variable field. Cursor will not wrap-around when in Data
Entry mode.

A repeat key causes repetition of any operation associated with a simultaneously depressed
key as long as both keys are depressed.
.
The Sanders 620 Data Display System can also interface the 731 Display Communications Buffer for operation in an IBM System/360 environment; see Sanders 720 Data Display System (see
Paragraph 6745 .15). The Sanders file maintenance software package (AUTOGRAPH) is also
applicable with the 620 .
. 16

First Delivery: ..

. September 1968 .

. 17

Availability: . . . .

. 3 months (after initial deliveries) .

.2

CONFIGURATION
The 620 Data Display System includes:
•

A Model 6220 Display Unit.

•

A Model 6240 Keyboard. and

•

An optional Model 6250 Hard Copy Adapter.

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/68

6744:04
SANDERS 620

.2

CONFIGURATION (Contd. )
Up to 20 Model 620 Display Terminals can be connected to the same communications line via
a Model 716 Serial Distributor. One Keyboard Unit can be connected to each Display Unit.
The Keyboard Unit can be attached to the Display Unit or located 10 feet away from it.

. 32

Manual Input
Model 6240 Typewriter Style Keyboard;
Model 6242 Keypunch Sty Ie Keyboard Method of entry:. . . .
Quantity of data: ..
Character set: .
Comments: .

· via 51-key keyboard; an additional set of 16 keys
(grouped separately) is provided for editing.
· 768 characters.
· 64 characters including digits, upper case letters,
and special symbols .
. . 16 keys control edit operations only and do not
produce a displayable symbol.

. 33

Fixed Input: ..

· no provision.

.34

Transaction Code Input:. .

· no provision.

.35

Message Configuration
The 620 was designed to operate in a polled environment; only the computer can initiate data
transmission from the 620. The 620 accepts a request-to-send poll (SOH, AO, AI, DCI) and
replies with a negative (NAK) or positive (STX, AO, AI, Text,. ETX, and LPC) response. After
transmitting the message the 620 waits for a NAK (request for retransmission) or ACK (positive
acknowledgement) from the computer and responds with an EOT (End of Transmission) character. The 620 accepts a request-to-receive poll (SOH, AO, AI. and DC2) and replies with a
negative (NAK) or positive (ACK) response. An ACK response is followed by the computer
message (STX, Text, ETX, and LPC). The 620 responds with NAK (request for transmission)
or ACK (positive acknowledgement). The computer message is terminated by an EOT character. The Control characters are defined in Table I. All messages are preceded by from
two to five SYN characters when operating synchronously.
The size of the text portion of a transmitted or received message is variable up to 768 characters. Careful coordination is required when transmitting infol'mation between the 620 and
the computer; there are no interlocks to prevent the operator from interfering with a message
being received from the computer or to prevent a computer message from interfering with
message composition by the operator .

. 36

Operating Procedure
A message to be transmitted from a 620 Data Display System is composed by depressing the
Clear key to clear the screen and position the cursor at the upper left corner of the screen
(first position in memory), and then keying in the data. Controls are provided to space the
cursor forward or backward one or four (optional) positions at n time, to move the cursor to
the beginning of the next line or back to the end of the pJ'('violls line, step the cursor forward
or backward at a fixed rate, or to space the cursor down the page nne or four (optiol1

•

>

N

1

1

1

1

wledgement)

84 Character Horizontal Screen
Option
Model 716 Serial

D~stributer

Model 731 Display Cqmmunications
Buffer

*
**

5/68

5

-

The ~sic 620 Data Display System iucludes a Typewriter Style Keybo:;lrd and an
Asynchronous II 0 Control Module with or without LPC (longitudinal parity checking)
and pol;litive or negative (ACK/NAK) acknowledgement.
Replaces Asynchronous I/O Control Module.

AUERBACH Data Communications

R~ports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6745:01
SANDERS 720

'"
SANDERS 720 DATA DISPLAY SYSTEM

.1

GENERAL

· 11

Identity:..

720 Data Display System.

· 12

Manufacturer:

Sanders Associates, Inc.
Data Systems Division
95 Canal Street
Nashua, New Hampshire 03060

· 13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

displays, via cathode ray tube, data received
from a remote computeror entered via keyboard;
transmits data to a remote computer over the
public telephone network or leased voice-band
lines .

. 14

Basic Components

· 15

Name: ..
Function: .

Model 708 Display Unit.
display of alphanumeric data.

Name: ...
Function:

Model 722 Typewriter Style Keyboard Unit.
provides entry of data into the buffer memory
contained in the Control Unit.

Name: ..
Function:

Model 701 Control Unit.
provides basic control and buffer storage for
Display Units.

Description
The Sanders 720 Data Display System is designed to facilitate rapid exchange of data between
a computer and one or more remote stations under control of a stored program in the computer. A large number of cathode ray tube (CRT) Display Units can be connected to a Control Unit, which contains the interface for the communications line. The Control Unit can
also be connected directly to a computer. Each Display Unit can be located up to 1000 cable
feet from the Control Unit. Several types of non-display devices, including Teletype paper
tape readers and punches and Teletype Models 33 or 35 Receive-Only Printers, can also be
incorporated through the use of special adapters.
The data transmission rate between a directly-connected 720 station and the computer
averages about 47,500 characters per second. When the 720 is connected remotely, the
transmission rate is governed by the specific communications interface and can range from
110 bits per second to 2400 bits per second. This report discusses the 720 Display System
as used in a communications environment only, except where noted.
There are two communications interfaces available for the 720: asynchronous and synchronous.
The asynchronous interface provides switch-selected transmission rates of 110, 1000,
1200, 1800, 2000, and 2400 bits per second; the synchronous interface provides switchselected transmission rates of 2000 and 2400 bits per second.
The 7 -level USAScn (formerly ASCII) transmission code is employed, with an eighth bit
added for character parity; see Table 1. When the asynchronous communications interface is
used, one start bit and one or two stop bits are added to each character transmitted, resulting in a 10- or 11-bit character. Character length is eight bits with the synchronous communications interface; sync characters are transmitted whenever there is no data to be
transmitted.
The Model 701 Control Unit can contain up to three 1024-character memory modules composed of magnetostrictive delay lines. Each memory module provides buffering for one,
two, or four Display Units; the same number of Display Units must be attached to each
memory module. The 1024 character locations contained in a memory module are divided
equally among the number of attached Display Units. In addition to the memory modules,
the Control Unit contains the communications interface, editing logic, character generation
circuits, multiplexing logiC, and control logic.

© 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/67

6745:02
SANDERS 720

Figure 1. Sanders 720 Data Display System with
Vertical Screen Orientation.
.15 Description (Contd.)
The basic Model 716 Serial Distributor can accommodate up to four Control Units and is
used to interface the Control Units to a single leased line. The Serial Distributor operates
in the full-duplex mode, which permits concurrent polling of one Control Unit while transmitting from another. Up to 20 Control Units can be accommodated by the Serial Distributor
with the addition of Model 7180 Expansion Units; each ExpanSion Unit accommodates four
Control Units.
The Model 708 Display Unit provides a 7. 5-inch by 9. 5-inch image area. Normally, the long
side of the cathode ray tube (CRT) is mounted vertically so that the displayed information
app-ears in a conventional page format. The CRT can be mounted horizontally if desired.
The image area is arranged in 49 lines of 52 characters per line when the vertical orientation is specified, or in 32 lines of 64 or 84 (optional) characters per line with the horizontal
orientation. A maximum of 256, 512, or 1024 characters can be displayed on the screen,
but they can be displayed in any of the more than 2000 display locations. Various control and
format characters occupy positions in the buffer and th~refore reduce the number of data
characters that can be displayed.
The stroke technique is employed to generate the displayed characters.
Each Display Unit provides controls for adjusting focus, brightness, page size, page centering,
character size, and character tilt. The character tilt control varies the displayed character
from a vertical pOSition to a slanted (italic) position.
The Model 722 or 7240 Keyboard Unit can be attached directly to a Display Unit or can be
connected remotely at a distance of up to 10 cable-feet. The keyboard has 51 keys arranged
in either conventional typewriter (722) or keypunch (7240) style plus an array of 16
special function keys located at the right of the keyboard. Of the 16 special function keys,
11 provide discrete control functions; the 5 remaining keys are adaptable to a variety of
custom uses. Depressing a key causes the generation of a unique USASCII character or
control code.
(Contd. )
11/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6745:03

SANDERS 720

'"
Editing Facilities
The 720 Data Display System incorporates a very flexible set of edit functions. Editing
operations are divided into two categories: Data Entry (Operator) Mode operations and
Format (Programmer) Mode operations. Data Entry operations are controlled by a group
of four keys and enable the operator to enter. manipulate. or erase data within a preset
format. Format Mode operations are controlled by a group of seven keys and enable a
programmer or supervisor to enter, manipulate, or erase the data formats used to structure
data entered in the Data Entry Mode.
Data Entry Mode functional keys include:
•

Type - permits data to be entered into the buffer memory, replacing any previous
text.

•

Insert - permits data to be added to an existing text. As data is entered the
existing text is automatically spread to accommodate the added text.

•

Delete - permits data to be erased from the existing text while closing the text
to maintain continuity.

•

Send Block - transmits a block of text; a block is defined as the text that is
bracketed by two Home characters.

Format Mode functional keys include:
•
•
•

Format Type - permits format data to be entered into the buffer memory.
Format Insert - permits format data to be added to the existing format.
Format Delete - permits format data to be erased from the existing format.

•

Move Cursor - permits. the cursor to be positioned at any location on the viewing
screen.

•

Clear - erases all data stored in the buffer memory segment associated with
the display unit.

•

Send Page - transmits the entire displayed page.

•

Reset Cursor - returns the cursor to the display pOSition of the initial character
stored in the buffer memory (home position).
The newly announced Sanders Model 737 PHOTOPEN Cursor Controller can be used with a
Model 708 Display Unit. This device contains a light-sensing element and outputs a signal
in synchronization with the appearance of a character on the screen within the field of view
(one character) of the PHOTOPEN. An outlining circle of light, projected by the light pen,
identifies the field of view. The amplified output from the PHOTOPEN is used to reposition
the cursor to the PHOTOPEN's present location when the Cursor button on the PHOTOPEN
is depressed. The Send Block button on the PHOTOPEN initiates transmission of the block of
text identified by the cursor.
Cursor Controls
Six control keys provide a high degree of cursor mobility by directing the cursor to anyone of
eight pOSitions. When used with the Format Type or Format Insert functions, four of the
cursor control keys place control characters (formaters) in the buffer memory. The formaters
are used to structure the data entered in the Data Entry Mode, and can be erased only with
the Format Delete function. The formaters include:
•

Horizontal Tab/Back Tab - establishes four character spaces between segments
of the displayed text for each Horizontal Tab character stored.

•

Vertical Tab - establishes four line spaces following the last displayed line
of text for each Vertical Tab character stored.

•

Carriage Return/Back Return - establishes a single space between displayed
lines with the cursor positioned at the initial character location..

•

Home - establishes the initial position for a block of text; the "home" or
starting position for the first block of text is always the upper left margin.
(A block of text is the text that is included between two Home characters.)
The Send Block key transmits the block of text that contains the cursor.
© 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

11/67

6745:04
SANDERS 720

· 15

Description (Contd. )
•

Frontspace/Backspace - establishes a single character space forward or
backward.

•

Shift - provides control for dual-operation keys including the cursor control
keys described above.

Other Controls
A Repeat key causes repetition of any operation associated with a simultaneously depressed
key as long as both keys are depressed. Specific characters can be made to blink by entering a Start Blink (SB) control character before entering the characters to be blinked. A
Clear Blink (CB) control character is entered when blinking is to be discontinued. The SB
and CB control characters are located on the shifted positions of the Vertical Tab and Home
keys.
731 Display Communications Buffer
The 731 Display Communications Buffer is specifically designed to interface a 720 Data Display System with an IBM System/360 and is capable of operating in a local or remote mode.
In the local mode, data is transferred between the 720 system and the System/360 computer
in parallel-by-bit fashion at 47,500 characters per second. Up to 192 Display Units can be
directly connected to a single System/360 Multiplexor or Selector Channel. In the remote
mode, data is transferred synchronously, in serial-by-bit fashion, at 2000 or 2400 bits per
second. Up to 16 half-duplex lines can be connected to a 731 Buffer.
Sanders provides a software package called AUTOGRAPH that permits file maintenance functions to be performed via 720 Data Displays connected directly to an IBM System/360
computer. Sanders states that AUTOGRAPH is fully compatible with the IBM Disk Operating
System (DOS/360) or Operating System/360 (OS/360). A simple mnemonic language allows an
operator to insert, revise, or delete forms or records stored in anyone of several libraries.
Printed output of the additions or changes can be obtained via the System/360 printer or the
Sanders Hard Copy Adapter.
· 16

First Delivery
720 System without 731 Buffer
720 System with 731 Buffer ..

· 17

Availability
720 System without 731 Buffer
720 System with 731 Buffer ..

.2

October 1966.
December 1967.
3 months.
3 months (after initial deliveries).

CONFIGURATION
A 720 Data Display System includes:
•

A Model 701 Control Unit,

•

Up to 12 Model 708 Display Units,

•

Up to 12 Model 722 or 7240 Keyboard Units (one per Display Unit),

•

Optional Model 737 PHOTOPEN Cursor Controllers (one per Display Unit),

•

An optional Model 706 Hard Copy Adapter (one per Control Unit), and

•

An optional Model 718 Paper Tape Reader/Punch Adapter (one per Control
Unit).

Up to four Model 701 Control Units and their associated components can be connected to
the same communications line via a Model 716 Serial Distributor. Up to 3 Model 7180
Expansion Units CM he incorporated to expand the bas i~ inh~rface capability of 4 Control
Units to a mR.-dIllltn' of 20 in increments of 4.
A 701 Control Unit ean contain up to three memory n',){hl,,~:. Far'!; memory modllle (".111
s€I'Vice 011e, two. Pl' four 708 Display Units. The 1;[11'" 1:1 ,1I111'r II' Dil'pl:IY T:ni!s IllUf'1 hi'
C01!IWe{:('d to each "1 ",,,)}'Y module.
'Cont.d. \

II '{."I

AUI RBi\CIl U,ta COl "PII/f.icatioll ,

'}purl"

A

AUERBACH

6745:05

DATA

~

..

AUERBACH

COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

SANDERS 720

TABLE I: SANDERS 720 SYSTEM USASCII TRANSMISSION CODE
7, 6, 5

BIT
POSITION

4

3

2

I

000

0

0

0

0

NULL*

001

0

0

0

I

SOM *

RTS*

I

0

0

I

0

EOA*

RTR*

"

0

0

I

I

EOM*

.

EOT*

011

010

100

101

110

@

p

I

A

Q

2

B

R

TI

3

C

S

T2
II

0

5 (SP)

CM

0

I

0

0

S

4

0

T

0

I

0

I

%

5

E

U

12

0

I

I

0

&

6

F

V

01

0

I

I

I

I

0

0

0

FS

BS

I

0

0

I

HT

BT

I

0

I

0

I

0

I

I

I

I

0

0

HM

CB

I

I

0

I

CR

BR

I

I

I

0

I

I

I

I

7

G

W

02

(

8

H

X

01

)

9

I

Y

02

*

:

J

Z

INT

K

C

RC

\
]

(APOS)

VT

+

SB

<

L

-

=

M

>

N

i-

/

?

0

~

(COMMA

+

CONTROL&
OPERATION
CHARACTERS

SB

Start Blink

CB
BS

Clear Blink
Back Space

FS

Front Space

III

EDIT &
I/O
FUNCTION
CHARACTERS

ALPHANUMERIC

01

Send (output) mock
Send (output) Page

Reset cursor

02
INT

I}

Insert

SOM -

start of Message*

12

Format Insert

EOA EOMEOT-

End of Message*
End of Transmission*

BR CM RCU

Back Return
Cursor Motion

Clear (initiate)
End of Address-

HT

Horizontal Tab

BT

Back (horizontal) Tab

VT

Vertical Teb

D1
D2

Delete
Format Delete

HM -

Home

T}

Type

RTS -

Request to Send·

CR -

Carriage Return

T2

Format Type

RTR-

Request to Receive·

*These cOdes cannot be generated from the keyboard.

A memory module provides 1024 character display positions when servicing a single
Display Unit. When servicing two or four Displ!ly Units, a memory module provides
512 or 256 character positions per Display Unit, respectively.
One Keyboard Unit can be connected to each Display Unit. The Keyboard Unit can be
attached to the Display Unit or located up to 10 feet away from it.
The Model 718 Paper Tape Reader/Punch Adapter permits connection of up to three
Teletype Model CX Paper Tape Readers and one Teletype Model DRPE Paper Tape Punch.
.3

INPUT

.31

Prepared Input
Teletype Model CX Reader Input medium:
Input code: . .
Quantity of data:.

l-inch-wide punched paper tape; chad or
chadless.
7 -level USASCII plus character parity (8 bits);
see Table 1.
up to maximum size of associated buffer
segment. .
C 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

11/67

6745:06
SANDERS 720

.31

Prepared Input (Contd.)
Rated input speed: . . • . . • • . . • . . . •
Effective speed: . .
Comments: . . . . .

· 32

105 char/sec.
limited by transmission speed, turnaround
time, etc.
requires a Model 718 Adapter; CX Reader
must be obtained directly from Teletype
Corporation.

Manual Input
Model 722 Typewriter Style Keyboard;
Model 7240 Keypunch Style Keyboard Method of entry:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantity of data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character set: .
Comments: .

via 51-key keyboard; an additional set of 16
keys (grouped separately) is provided for
editing.
up to 1024, 512, or 256 characters, depending
on number of displays connected to a single
memory module.
64 characters, including digits, uppercase
letters, and special symbols.
16 keys control edit operations only and do not
produce a displayable symbol.

· 33

Fixed Input: ...

no provision .

. 34

Transaction Code Input:

no provision.

· 35

Message Configuration
The basic format for messages transmitted to or from a 720 terminal operating in a nonpolled environment is as follows: SOM, AO, AI, A2, EOA, Text, and EOM. The AO character is a control unit address; Al is a memory buffer address; A2 is a display unit
address. The control characters are defined in Table 1.
When operating in a polled environment, the 720 System responds to a request-to-send poll,
received from the remote computer, by replying with the requested message (SOM, AO, AI,
A2, EOA, Text, EOM, EOT, EOT) or by replying with a no-message response (SOM, AO,
AI, A2, EOA, EOT, EOT). The 720 System does not reply to the request-to-receive poll
that is used to select a display unit for receiving a message from the computer.
The message format for the request-to-send poll is SOM, AO, AI, A2, EOA, RTS, EOM,
EOM. The message format for the Request-to-receive poll is the same except that RTS
is replaced by RTR and the message, and the two EOM characters are replaced by EOT
characters.
Sanders states that a message format identical with the IBM 2260 message format is available at no extra cost. Changing from the Sanders ,standard message format to the IBMcompatible message format is easily accomplished by replacing the standard I/O control
module in the Model 701 Control Unit with an IBM-compatible I/O control module.
A request-to-send poll can be issued to a speCific control unit, memory buffer, or display
unit. When a request-to-send poll contains only the address of a control unit or the address
of a control unit and memory buffer, the 720 System replies to the request-to-send poll with
up to 12 sequential messages (one message from each display unit associated with the
addressed Control Unit) or up to 4 sequential messages (one message from each display unit
associated with th~ addressed buffer memory). Each sequential message is preceded by
an AO, AI, A2 address header and terminated with an EOM character.
The size of the text portion of a transmitted or received message is variable, and is limited
only by the buffer segment associated with the specifiC display device.
Careful coordination is required when transmitting information hetween a display unit and the
computer; there are no interlocks to prevent the operator from interfering with a message
being received from the computer or to prevent a computer message from interfering with
message composition by the operator.
(Contd. )

11/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

DATA
~
~, COMMUNICATIONS
AUERBACH

~

ERBACH

6745:07

REPORTS

SANDERS 720

co

. 36

Operating Procedure
A message to be transmitted from a 720 Data Display System is composed by depressing
the Clear key to clear the screen and position the cursor at the upper left corner of the
screen (first pOSition in memory), and then keying in the data. Controls are provided to
space the cursor forward or backward one or four pOSitions at a time, to move the cursor
to the beginning of the next line or back to the end of the previous line, or to space the
cursor down the page, four line spaces at a time. other controls allow data to be inserted
or deleted. The cursor can also be positioned by pointing the optional PHOTOPEN at the
desired cursor position on1he display screen.

.37

To transmit a portion of the displayed message (i.e., a single block of text), the operator
depresses the Send Block key, which transmits only that block of text containing the cursor.
A block is defined as a group of text characters bracketed by Home characters. To transmit
all the displayed data, the operator simply depresses the Send Page key. If a transmission
error is detected at the remote computer, a retransmission can be requested only when
operating with a System/360 computer.'
no provis ion.
Entry of Time and Date:

.3

OUTPUT

.41

Output to Punched Tape
Teletype DRPE PunchTape size: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape code: . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated punching speed: . .
Effective speed: ..
Format control: . .
Comments;

.44

I-inch.
7 -level USASCII including character parity
(8 bits); see Table 1.
105 char/sec.
limited by transmission speed, turnaround
time, etc.
none.
requires a Model 718 Adapter. DRPE Punch
must be obtained directly from Teletype Corp.

Output to Printer
Teletype Model 33 or 35 Receive-Only (RO) sets can be used for printed output at 10
characters per second. Each RO requires a Hard Copy Adapter. The Teletype equipment
is fully described in Reports 6804 and 6805. See Paragraph. 2, Configuration, for the
rules governing the number of RO sets that can be connected.

.46

Output to Visual Display Device
Model 708 Display Unit Output medium: ..
Character set: . . . . . .
Character size:
Display size: .
Characters per line: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lines per display: ....
Characters per display:
Buffer capacity:
Format control: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

@

cathode ray tube; displays white characters
against black background.
64 characters: digits, upper-case letters,
punctuation marks, and special symbols;
see Table I.
nominally 0.09 inch wide and O. 12 inch high.
display field is 7. 5 inches by 9. 5 inches;
CRT may be positioned vertically or
horizontally.
52 with vertical display; 64 or 84 (optional)
with horizontal display.
40 with vertical display; 32 with horizontal
display.
1024, 512, or 256, depending on the number of
Display Units connected to the Control Unit.
1024 characters per memory module; up to
three memory modules can be incorporated
in one Control Unto
horizontal or vertical tabbing; very flexible
cursor movement controls; see Paragraph
. 15, Editing Facilities.

1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/67

6745:08
SANDERS 720

. 46

Output to Visual Display Device (Contd. )
Rated output speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Effective output speed:
Comments:
.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

. 51

Data Entry Errors: .... .

. 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking: .

47 ,500 char/sec when connected directly to a
computer; up to 300 char/sec over a voiceband line.
limited by transmission speed, turnaround
time, block length, etc.
character size and tilt are adjustable.
no checking except for visual verification of
displayed data. Errors are corrected by
repositioning the cursor and rekeying the data .
character parity; longitudinal parity is optional
at no extra cost.
error character is replaced with question mark
character.
manually clear displayed message and request
retransmission. Automatic retransmission
when operating with an IBM System 360 computer.
no checking except for visual verification of
displayed data.

Error indication: .
Correction procedure:

. 53

Data Recording Errors: .

. 55

Line Malfunctions: ....

no special provisions for checking .

.6

CONDITION INDICATORS:.

a minimum of indicators are provided in a
720 system. Three yellow indicators centered
directly above the keyboard indicate (when
lighted) that the cursor is located directly on
an HM control character, a CR control character, or an HT character. The eursor does
not appear on the viewing screen under these
conditions .

.7

DAT A TRANSMISSION
The 720 Data Display System can be arranged for non-polling or polling operations; see
Paragraphs.73 and .74. The primary difference between the two arrangements is that the
Display Unit initiates all communications in the non-polling arrangement, while the remote
computer initiates all communications in the polling arrangement. The Control Unit performs a scan of associated devices when it receives a request in the polling mode. The
computer can request the Control Unit to scan all Display Units, Display Units associated
with a specific buffer memory, or a speCific Display Unit .

. 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed Asynchronous: .... .
Synchronous: . . . . . . .
Transmission method: ..
Transmission code: ...
Transmission mode: . . . . .
Order of bit transmission: .
Synchronization: . . . . . . .

100, 1000, 1200, 1800, 2000, or 2400 bits/sec.
2000 or 2400 bits/sec.
serial by bit.
7 -level USAscn plus an added parity bit; see
Table 1. A total of 8 bits are transmitted
synchronously, or 10 or 11 bits asynchronously.
half-duplex.
low-order bit is transmitted first, parity bit
last.
synchronous or asynchronous; start and stop
bits are transmitted with each asynchronously
transmitted character .

(Contd. )
! 1,'1" ']

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AUERBACH

6745:09

DATA

~

AUERBACH

COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

SANDERS 720

II

. 72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line or Service
Bell System Schedule 3A Data
Channel (up to 300 bits/sec): ..
Western Union Class D Data
Channel (up to 180 bits/sec): . . . . . . .
Public switched telephone network
operating at the following speeds 110 bits/sec: . . . . . . . . . . .
1200 bits/sec: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2000 bits/sec: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common-carrier leased voice-band
line operating at the following speeds Up to 1200 bits/sec: . . . . . . . .
Up to 1800 bits/sec: . . . . . . . .
2000 bits/sec: . . . . . . .
..... .
2400 bits/sec:

. 73

Western Union 180 Baud Data Modem.
Bell System Data Phone Data Set 103A.
Bell System Data Phone Data Set 202C.
Bell System Data Phone Data Set 201A.
Western Union 1200 Baud Data Modem.
Bell System Data Set 202C or 202D.
Bell System Data Set 201A.
Bell System Data Set 201B, or Western
Union 2400 Baud Data Modem .

manual dialing over switched network; direct
transmission over a dedicated line.
capable of unattended operation.
carriage return, horizontal and vertical tab,
blink, etc. can be initiated by control characters; see table I.

Call reception: . . . . . . .
Functional operations: "

only when polled by remote computer; display
stations cannot initiate a call.
capable of unattended operation.
same as non-polling arrangement.

Call initiation: . .
Call reception: .
Function operations: ..
Multistation Operation
Polling: . . . . . . . . . . .

Addressing: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
•8

Bell System Data Set 103F.

Transmission Control
Non-Polling Arrangement Call initiation:

. 74

Data Set*

the 708 Display Units are individually addressable; units can be polled individually or in
groups of four, or all units can be polled for
messages.
Display Units cannot communicate directly
with one another; the remote computer can
selectively communicate with each terminal .

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model 708
Display Unit

Component

Width (Inches)
Depth (Inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

15.5
21.5
18.5
60

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
Phases
Temperature Range (OF.)
Humidity Range ('!O)
Heat (BTU/hr)

Model 701
Control Unit
19
17
14
50

200
115
60

150
115
60

1
60 to 100
o to 90
?

1
60 to 100
o to 90
?

* In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant.
C 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/67

6745: 10
SANDERS 720

.9

PRICE DATA
Monthly
Rental,

Purchase
Price,

Monthly
Maintenance,

$

$

$

238

6,000

50

293

7,500

50

339

9,000

50

40
9

900
270

7
NC

100
20

2,550
475

35
NC

3

95

NC

25

65"0

NC

POR

POR

-

Model 718 Paper Tape Reader/Punch
Adapter (for Teletype CX or
DRPE paper tape equipment)
Model 706 Hard Copy Adapter

POR

POR

-

POR

POR

Model 731 Display Communications
Buffer

POR

POR

37

950

Component or Feature

Model 701 Control Unit*
with one memory module
Model 701 Control Unit*
with two memory modules
Model 701 Control Unit*
with three memory modules
Model 716 Serial Distribution
Model 7180 Expansion Unit
Model 708 Display Unit
Model 722 Typewriter Style
Keyboard
134 characters per line
(horizontal orientation only)
Model 7240 Keypunch
Style Keyboard
Model 737 PHOTOPEN Cursor
Controller

Model 713D Control **
Unit Cabinet
NC

No Charge.

POR

Price on Request.

*

NC

The Model 701 Control Unit price includes the communications interface.

** Two models of the 713D Control Unit Cabinet are available: Model 713 D-1
can house one 701 Control Unit plus power supply; Model 713 D-2 is capable
of containing two 701 Control Units plus a power supply.

11/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS

~

IERBACH

6750:01
SANGAMO DATA STATION

REPORTS

•
SANGAMO DATA STATION

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:.......................

DS-7300 and DS-9300 Data Stations.

· 12

Manufacturer:...................

Sangamo Electric Company
P.O. Box 359
Springfield, minois 62705

• 13

Basic Function: • . • • . • . • • . • • • • . . ..

transmission and reception of data over
a voice-band line; input is from magnetic tape
recorded in a 7 -channel or 9-channel mM
compatible format; source tape can be recorded
and verified via keyboard.

· 15

Description
Sangamo is one of the more recent manufacturers to enter the keyboard-to-magnetic-tape
market. Its two initial entries are the Model 7100 and 9100 Data Stations, the first members
of two proposed product lines that are to functionally correspond to the Mohawk and Honeywell
keyboard-to-magnetic tape product lines. Sangamo has also started production on the 7200
and 9200 Poolers and the 7300 and 9300 Communication Terminals. The Sangamo Data Stations are designed to reduce or eliminate the need for punched cards as an input medium for
computer installations. The 7000 Series Data stations record data entered from a keyboard
directly on seven-track magnetic tape in a format compatible with IBM 729 Series Magnetic
Tape Units; the 9000 Series record in a nine-track format compatible with mM 2400 Series
Magnetic Tape Units. The units used to record data can also be used to verify previously
recorded records. The Data stations provide the same general facilities for preparation and
verification of magnetic tape records that a conventional keypunch and verifier provide for
punched cards, plus some speCialized capabilities.
A magnetic core buffer, a central component of the Data Stations, holds the keyed-in data or
data received from a communications line (7300 and 9300 only) where recording and the
record to be checked when verifying. The core storage unit provides ease and flexibility of
preparing, verifying, and searching magnetic tape records and permits storing a program to
define the tape record format and to automatically initiate certain operations.
The basic core storage unit contained in the 7000 Series provides 100-character positions;
manual control is provided to permit selection of 80- or 100-character record lengths. With
options, the 7000 Series core capacity can be increased to 120 or up to 240 positions. Manual
selection of 80, 100, or 120 character records is provided for the 120 position option.
Manual selection of from 20- to 240-character records in increments of 20 character positions is provided with the 240-position option.
The basic core storage unit contained in the 9000 Series provides 120-character positions;
manual control is provided to permit selection of 80-, 100-, or 120-character record lengths.
As an option, the 9000 Series core capacity can be increased to 240 positions with prOVision
for manual selection of from 20- to 240-character records in increments of 20 character
positions.
The program storage area contains four bits of storage for each character position of the
record; the fourth bit is used to control auxiliary devices. Its function is similar to that of
a program card in keypunch units. Codes stored in the bits are used to delimit fields within
a record and to define operations such as automatic duplication or verification of common
information, automatic skipping, and alphabetic (lower) or numeric (upper) shift. The field
definition allows fields to be skipped out, either in their entirety" or after they have been
partially filled with data. The other program functions relieve the operator of the necessity
of depressing keys for the related functions. The Alternate Program feature provides additional bits for each character position to allow two different record formats to be defined.

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/68

6750:02
SANGAMO DATA STATION

Figure 1. The Sangamo Data Station
. 15

Description (Contd.)
The Program switch is used to select which of the two programs is to be active at the
beginning of each record. Program memory is loaded from the keyboard. A feature allowing
program data to be read from a magnetic tape is expected to be announced this year.
There are five principal modes of operation for all Data Stations; two additional modes are
incorporated in the 7300 and 9300 to be used for data communications. The five principal
modes, as selected by the operator, are Data Entry, Data Verify, Search, Program Entry,
and Program Verify. In addition to these principal operating modes, the 7300 and 9300
incorporate Send and Receive modes for data communication.
Data is recorded on magnetic tape in the Data Entry mode. Data entered via the keyboard is
stored in the core storage unit. Fixed data can be automatically retained from record to
record. When a complete record has been assembled, the recording action can be initiated
automatically or manually.
Data is written on the tape along with the character parity bits and the longitudinal parity
check character. The tape is then automatically backspaced and read, and the recorded data
is compared bit for bit with the data stored in memory. The recorded character parity bits
and the longitudinal check character are also checked. The keyboard is locked for apprOXimately 120 milliseconds during the checking operation.

11/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

(Contd.)

A

~

.,

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6750:03
SANGAMO DATA STATION

A magnetic tape previously recorded on a Data station can be checked in the Data Verify mode.
A record is read into the unit's data storage area. Duplicate information in a series of
records can be verified automatically as specified by the program. The operator can also
initiate automatic verification of a duplicate data field by depressing the Dup key. Character
and longitudinal parity are checked as the record is read in.
If a discrepancy is detected while data is being keyed in to verify a tape record, the keyboard
is locked and the operator is alerted by an indicator lamp and an adjustable audible alarm.
The operator can determine whether there is an error in the tape record by making repeated
attempts to key in the character or by observing the one-character data display; all characters
are displayed as real symbols. Corrections are easily made by depressing the Correction key
and then keying the correct character. After completing the verification and correction of a
record containing errors the operator depresses the Home key to verify the same record or
the Override key to go on to the next record. The verified record is written on tape, backspaced, and checked as when recording.
In the Search mode, a particular record can be located on the tape if it contains a unique
identifying code or field. The identifying data is keyed into memory in the same position it
occupies in the record. The tape halts when a match is found or when blank tape is
encountered. The Search mode can be used to locate the beginning point of an interrupted
recording or verifying operation, or to locate a specific record for modification or correction.

The basic or alternate program is entered via keyboard in the designated program storage
area of the core buffer when the Data Station is placed in the Program Entry mode. A previously entered program is checked in the Program Verify mode by rekeying the program in
sequence to the stored program. A verify error occurs when the key just depressed does not
compare with the corresponding program character in the core buffer.
A 47-key keyboard, arranged in a conventional keypunch style, is incorporated in the 7000
Series Data Stations; a 64-key keyboard is available as an option. The 9000 Series incorporates a 64-key keypunch-style keyboard. An option available for the 64-key keyboard permits
manual lockout of all upper case special characters.
The remainder of this report is devoted to describing the data communications aspect of the
Data stations equipped with a communications interface. See AUERBACH Data Handling
Reports for a detailed analysis of the other members of the Data Station family that are used
for input preparation.
Data station Models 7300 and 9300 are designed to provide buffered, synchronous communications in a half-duplex mode with a remote 7300 or 9300 Data Station over the public telephone
network at 1200 or 2000 (optional) bits per second, or over a leased voice-band line at 1600 or
2400 (optional) bits per second. The higher speeds of 2000 and 2400 bits per second require
an optional communications interface. Data transfer between terminals is under control of the
program stored in the sending and receiving buffers.
The Model 7300 Data Station translates its internal six-bit BCD code to one of two specific
transmission codes. Buffer positions designated as numeric positions by the stored program
are translated to a four-bit transmission code; alphabetic buffer positions are translated to an
eight-bit transmission code. Table I shows the relationship between the numeric internal
code and the transmission code. Alphabetic characters are encoded as follows:
Internal Code:
Transmission Code:

1248AB
12248 AAB

The barred numbers indicate the complement of the preceding bit.
The numeric and alphabetic transmission codes permit a limited means for checking character validity. The stored program at the receiving terminal designates speCific buffer positions
as numeric or alphabetic codes. If an alphabetic character is received in a position programmed for a numeric character, a character error results. A numeric character received
in a position programmed for an alphabetic character does not cause a character error.
The Model 9300 Data Station performs translation from its internal eight-bit EBCDIC code to
the six-bit BCD code as the first step prior to transmitting the data. The six-bit code is then
modified to the transmission code using the same procedure as the Model 7300. Because both
the 7300 and 9300 produce the same transmission code; the two terminals can intercommunicate.

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

tt

/68

6750:04
SANGAMO DATA STATION

TABLE I: SANGAMO NUMERIC TRANSMISSION CODE

Numeric
to be
Transmitted
0
1
2

3
4
5
6
7
8

9

Representation
in Buffer and
on Magnetic Tape*

Transmission
Code

B A 8 4 2 1

8 4 2 1

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

1
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
1

1
0
1
1
0

0
1
0
1
0

1
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
1

1
0
1
1
0

0
1
0
1
0

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
1
1

1
1
1
0
0

0
1
1
0
0

1
0
1
0
1

0
0
0
1
1

1
1
1
0
0

0
1
1
0
0

1
0
1
0
1

*Each numeric includes a parity bit which accompanies the numeric when
recorded on tape or in the buffer •
. 15

Description (Contd.)
Although 256 character codes can be generated by the Model 9300 keyboard by using the
Multiple Code key, the 9300 translator is designed to translate only those codes included in
the basic 64-character set employed by the Model 7300. Sangamo states that at present it has
not resolved the problem of what it intends to do with EBCDIC codes external to the basic 64character set. There are several alternates to be considered; some of the more obvious of
these are: (1) non-translated EBCDIC codes can be ignored, (2) the terminal can be halted
and the operator alerted, (3) a case shift character can precede the codes, (4) the 256 character set can be folded into the 64 character set with resulting ambiquities.
The modified BCD transmission code is shown in Table II.
The recorded and verified data is transmitted to the receiving terminal by placing the sending
and receiving terminals in the Send and Receive mode, respectively. Both operations are
discussed in the following paragraphs.
Data is recorded in fixed-length records as speCified by the manual switch settings. Transmission record size can vary from a single character up to the capacity of the buffer as determined by the send and receive programs. A record can contain as many as 240 characters
when the available buffer options are employed at both the sending and receiving terminals.
Before a record is transmitted, the sending terminal reads the record from the tape, checks
each character read for correct parity, and loads the entire record into the core buffer.
Transmission begins when the core buffer contains the complete record and a ready status is
received from the receiving terminal. Each character read from the core buffer during
transmission is translated to a four-bit or eight-bit character, serialized, and transmitted to
the receiving terminal. In addition to the transmitted data, a modulo four block count is inserted to identify the record sequence.
The receiving terminal performs a validity check on each received character, translates the
four- or eight-bit character to the internal code, and stores each of the translated characters
in the core buffer. In addition to the validity check performed on each character, the receiving terminal performs a modulo four block-count check and a longitudinal parity check
(modulo 64 count of all ones in the text portion of each record). After each character of the
record has been correctly received (i. e., no transmission or programming errors), the
record is written on tape and the recorded data is checked for data recording errors.

11/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

(Contd.)

A

~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6750:05
SANGAMO DATA STATION

"
TABLE II. SANGAMO BCD TRANSMISSION CODE
Bit Position

Bit Position
Symbol
A
B
C
D
E
F

G
H

I
J
K

L
M
N
0

P
Q
R

S
T
U
V

W
X

y

Z

-

Symbol

-

B A A 8

4 2 2 1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0 1 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1

0
0
0
0

1
1

1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1

1
1
1
1
0

1
1
0
0
1
0 1

0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
0 0
0 1

&

-#

<
>

=

-

+
!
?

,
;
)
(

$

i

%

#
@

/

l

*1

,
"

-

Space

-

-

B A A 8

4 2 2 1

1 0
0 0
1 0
0 0
0 1

0 1 0
0 0 1
1 1 0
1 0 1
1 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 1
0 0 1
1 0 1
0 0 1
0 0 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 0
0 0 1
0 0 1
1 1 0
0 0 1
1 1 0
0 1 0

1
1
1
1

0

1
1
1
0 1

1 1 0 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 1
0 0 1 1
1 0 1 1
0 0 1 1
1 1 0 1
1 1 0 1
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 1
1 0 1 1
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1
0 0 1 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 0 1
1 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1
0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0

1
1
1
1
1
1
0

0
1
0
1
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
0

1
1
1
0
0

1
0

1
1
0

1
1
1
1
0

An auxiliary or second buffer is used for retransmitting a record received in error (when the
terminal is operating in the transmit mode) and for receiving a record directly from the communications line (when the terminal is operating in the receive mode). When transmitting,
the auxiliary buffer is loaded with the record just transmitted in anticipation of a request for
retransmission. Concurrent with this operation, the next record to be transmitted is read
from tape and stored in the primary buffer. A record received from the communications
facility by the receiving terminal is initially checked for the anticipated block count and stored
in the auxiliary buffer. The record stored in the auxiliary buffer is then transferred to the
primary buffer, checked for character validity and longitudinal parity, and written on tape.
Concurrently with the tape write operation, the next record is received and stored in the
auxiliary buffer. After each record is written on tape, the tape is backspaced to the beginning
of the record, read forward and a bit-for-bit comparison to the data stored in the primary
buffer is performed.
Error signaling in response to incorrect message codes or data transmission errors is performed via the reverse-channel technique. The inherent value of this technique is that it
eliminates the time required for line turn-around to allow the receiver to transmit an
acknowledge code. Reverse-channel signaling occurs at interrecord intervals only .
. 16

First Delivery: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

April 1969.

.17

Availability:

8 months.

© 1968 AUERBACH Corooration and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

11/68

6750:06
SANGAMO DATA STATION

.2

CONFIGURATION
The Model 7300 and 9300 Data stations include:
•

A magnetic tape drive compatible with mM 729 Series units (7300) or mM 2400
Series units (9300),

•

A magnetic core buffer,

•

A keyboard for entering data, and

•

A communications interface.

A data set is required to connect either Data station to a communications line •

.3

INPUT

.31

Prepared Input
DS-7000 Series Magnetic Tape Drive Input medium: . . . . . • • • . . • • . . . . .
Input code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantity of data: . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .
Character set:

............... .

Rated input speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed:

.............. .

Comments:

O. 5-inch magnetic tape recorded at 556 bitS/inch:

200 or 800 bit/inch densities are optional:
compatible with mM 729 Series tape format.
6-bit BCD (even parity) or binary (odd parity);
see Table m.
80 or 100 characters: optionally up to 240
characters in 20-character increments.
64 characters; alphanumerics plus special and
record format characters.
16,680 char/sec (556 bits/inch), 6000 char/sec
(200 bitS/inch), 24,000 char/sec (800 bits/inch).
limited by block length and transmission speed:
see also Table IV.
maximum reel size permitted is seven inches.

DS-9000-Series Magnetic Tape Drive Input medium: • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • . .
Input code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
Quantity of data:. • . . . • . • • • . . . • . .
Character set: ••.....•••••••...
Rated input speed: . . . . • • • • • • • . . •
Effective speed: ..•••••••..••••
Comments:
. 32

compatible with mM 2400 Series tape format.
8-level EBCDIC code plus odd parity: see
Table m.
80, 100, or 120 characters; optional record
lengths can be switch selected in 20-character
increments from 80 to 240 characters.
256 characters"
24,000 char/sec.
limited by block length and transmission speed:
see also Table IV.
maximum reel size permitted is seven inches.

Manual Input
Keyboard (with all Data Stations) Method of entry: ••••••••••••••.
Quantity of data: . . . . . • . • . • . . . . .
Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments: . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 33

Fixed In.put: ....••••.•.••••••••

.34

Transaction Code Input:

11/68

O. 5-inch magnetic tape recorded at 800 bitS/inch:

49-key keyboard.
up to capacity of buffer.
64 characters: 26 alpha, 10 numeric, and 27
special.
256 code combinations can be produced when the
Multiple Cod!3 Key is used: keyboard data is
entered on tape via the core buffer.
a data field can be entered into the buffer and
automatically or manually duplicated in all
subsequent records.
no provisions.

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

(Contd.)

A
~

AUERBACH

6750:07

DATA
COMMUNICATIONS

SANGAMO DATA STATION

AUERBACH REPORTS


TABLE Ill: SANGAMO 9000 SERIES TAPE CODE
HexaDecimal
Code

Char.
A

Char.

C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
D1
D2
D3

B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
S
T

y

Z

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Space
]

D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
E2
E3
E4

Char.

.
<

[

$
*
)
;

/\

-

/
,

%

-

>
?
:
#

@

,

4B
4C
4D
4E

(

4F
50
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
61
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
00

&

4A

+

HexaDecimal
Code

,.

E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
40

V
W
X

D4

U

HexaDecimal
Code

=
"MC

TABLE IV: SANGAMO 7300 AND 9300 EFFECTIVE BLOCK TRANSMISSION RATES*
Effective Transmission Rate, records/min, at a
Transmission Speed of

Record Length,
characters
1200 bps

1600 bps

2000 bps

2400 bps

80

95

124

150

176

100

78

102

125

147

180

47

62

77

90

240

35

46

57

68

*Sangamo states that these rates can be attained Wlder the following conditions: all
al~habetic data; propagation delay of 15 milliseconds; single-bit error rate of 1 in
100 bits. The effect of retransmission due to the specified error rate is included•
. 35

Message Configurations: • . . • . • . . • • ..

messages are transmitted in fixed-length records
as specified by program; record size can be
from one character up to size of buffer. Fields
within a record can be skipped and nOt transmitted. All messages are preceded by idle
characters (used to synchronize transmission)
and a Start-of-Message characters that incorporates a modulo four block cOWlt. Records are
terminated with an End-of-Record character
repeated three Urnes.

© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

11/68

6750:08
SANGAMO DATA STATION

.36

Operating Procedure
Before transmitting a message, predetermined programs and time of transmission should be
established between the communicating terminals. Programs cannot be loaded from tape and,
therefore, must be entered manually from the keyboard. The sequence of operations in preparing to transmit is:
(1) Load program into memory.
(2) Mount tape reel.
(3) Set control switches on operator panel.
(4) Establish connection by dialing or manually signaling.
I

(5) Depress Data key on data set.
. 37

.4
.43

Entry of Time and Date:
OUTPUT
Output to Magnetic Tape

no provision•

DS-7000 Series Magnetic Tape Drive Tape size: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tape code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated output speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed: . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . .
Format control: . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . .
Comments: . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . • . • .

O. 5-inch magnetic tape recorded at 556 bits/

inch; 200 or 800 bits/inch densities are optional; compatible with mM 729 Series tape
format.
6-bit BCD (even parity) or binary (odd parity);
see Table m.
16,680 char/sec (556 bitS/inch), 6000 char/sec
(200 bitS/inch), or 24,000 char/sec (800 bits/
inch).
limited by block length and transmission speed;
see also Table IV.
extensive tape format control is provided by
stored program. See paragraph .15 for
description.
records are recorded in fixed length format; an
80 or 100 character record is standard; with
options, record length can be switch selected in
20 character increments from 20 to 240 characters; maximum tape reel size permitted is
seven inches.

DS-9000 Series Magnetic Tape Drive O. 5-inch magnetic tape recorded at 800 bits/

Tape size:
Tape code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rated output speed: •.•••••..••••
Effective speed: .•.•••.••.•••••
Format control:
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11/68

inch; compatible with mM 2400 Series tape
format.
8-level EBCDIC code plus odd parity; see
Table m.
24,000 char/sec.
limited by block length and transmission speed;
see also Table IV.
extensive tape format control is provided by
stored program. See Paragraph • 15 for
description.
records are recorded in fixed length format; an
80, 100, or 120 character record is standard;
with options records can be switch selected in
20-character increments from 20 to 240 characters. Maximum tape reel size permitted is
seven inches.

AUERBACH Data Communication.s Reports

(Contd.)

A

~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6750:09
SANGAMO DATA STATION

'"
·5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

· 51

Data Entry Errors
Type of checking: .••.•.••••••••..

character and longitudinal parity are checked as
each record is read from tape.
Error indication: . . . . • • • • • • • • • • • . • indicator lamp is lighted; audible alarm sounds.
Correction procedure: .••.••••••••. tape is automatically backspaced and read a
second time; tape halts and operator intervention is required when a second error is detected .

. 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking:
Error indication:

..••.••.•.•••...
...•.•.....•.•.

Correction procedure: . . . . . . . . • . • . .

.53

Data Recording Errors
Type of checking:

..... .

Error indication: . . . . . .
Correction procedure: ..

· 55

each record is re-read and checked bit for bit
with the buffer contents. Character and
longitudinal parity are also checked.
keyboard is locked, tape halts, lamp is lighted,
and audible alarm is sounded.
tape is automatically backspaced and data is
written a second time; operator intervention is
required when error occurs a second time.

Line Malfunctions
Detection: . . . . • . . . • • . . . • . . . . . . . .
Action:

.7

DATA TRANSMISSION

.71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed:
Transmission method: ••••••••.••••
• Transmission code: .••••.•••••••.
Transmission mode: ....••••••••...
Order of bit transmission: ..••••••..
Synchronization: . . . • . . . . . . • • . . . • .

. 72

character validity and longitudinal parity.
indicator lamp is lighted; reverse channel signal
is interrupted.
automatic retransmissions continue for up to 20
seconds; after this time period, transmission
halts, audible alarm sounds, and operator intervention is required.

absence of signal on reverse channel for 20
seconds.
operation halts.

1200 or 2000 (optional) bits/sec over the public
telephone network; 1600 or 2400 (optional) bits/
sec over a leased voi<:le-band line.
serial by bit.
.
modified BCD code (4 or 8 bits per character)
see Paragraph .15.
half-duplex.
low order data bit (b1) first.
synchronous; each record is preceded by idle
characters •

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Lines
Public telephone network operating
at the following speeds:
1200 bits/sec: . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
2000 bits/sec: . . . . . . . • . • . . . • . . .

Data Set*

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C
or equivalent.
Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 201A
or equivalent.

*In some cases, ~quivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant. Bell System 202C2 and 202D2 Data Sets provide reversechannel capability. Bell System 201A and 201B Data Sets and Western Union Data Sets do
not provide reverse-channel capability, except through the use of a full-duplex line.
© 1968 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

t 1/68

6750:10
SANGAMO DATA STATION

Common-carrier leased voice-band
line operating at the following
speeds:
1600 bits/sec: . . . . . . . . . • • • . . . .

Bell System Data Set 202D, Western Union 1800
Baud Data Modem or equivalent.
Bell System Data Set 201B, Western Union, 2400
Baud Data Modem, or equivalent .

2400 bits/sec:
. 73

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . .
Call reception: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional operations:

. 74

Multistation Operation:

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

I

no provision•

Sangamo
DS-7000/DS-9000
Series Data stations

Component
(inches)
(inches)
(inches)
(pounds)

42
24
28
200

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phases
Temperature Range eF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

0.29
115
60
1
36 to 100
?
750

Width
Depth
Height
Weight

.9

.....•.•...

manual dialing or signaling.
operator must establish voice communication and
then switch to data mode.
under control of stored program; see Paragraph .15 for description .

PRICE DATA

Component or Feature
Data Station Model 7300
Data Station Model 9300
Options 120-Character Core
Memory for Model 7300
240-Character Core (1)
Memory for both Models
7300 and 9300
High Speed Communications
Interlace

Monthly
Rental,

Purchase
Price,

Monthly
Maintenance,

$

$

$

232
255

9,510
10,310

32
35

10

(2)

NC

30

(2)

NC

30

(2)

NC

(1) 120-Character Core Memory is prerequisite to this option for Model 7300.
(2) Sangamo states it has not established a purchase price for these items.
NC -- No Charge

11/68

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERIACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6760:00
TALLY PARALLEL EQUIPMENT
REPORT UPDATE

'"
REPORT UPDATE

~

~EW 72 CHARACTER-PER-SECOND SENDERS

Tally has introduced a line of three punched tape senders for parallel data transmission at 72
characters per second. The new System 120, 122, and 128 Senders are the same as the System
100, 102, and 108 Senders respectively, except for the increased data transmission rate. The
recommended Tally Receiver for the System 120 and 122 Senders is the System 220; the recommended receiver for the System 128 Sender is the System 228. The prices for these units are
shown in the accompanying table (next page).
~ PUNCHED CARD TRANSMITTING TERMINAL

Tally has also introduced a punched card sender, the System 180 Card Transmitter. This unit
reads standard 80-column punched cards at 42 cards per minute. Data is translated from the
Hollerith card code to a 7-level BCD transmission code which includes an odd character parity
bit. Data is transmitted at 42 cards per minute (56 characters per second).
Data is transmitted in blocks. Each block contains the data from one card. A full 80 columns
can be transmitted, or the program disc can be utlized to specify deletion of any portion of the
card data. A customer-specified block character is automatically inserted after each card record.
The transmission format is compatible with Tally parallel punched tape equipment. The recommended Tally Receiver is the System 228 Punched Tape Receiver; Tally has not announced
a receiving card punch to date.
The System 180 Card Transmitter pauses momentarily after each card is read and transmitted.
If an error is detected at the remote station and signaled via the reverse channel, the System

180 Transmitter halts before the next card is read, and an error indicator lamp is lighted. The
operator must manually remove and reinsert the card containing the data that must be retransmitted. Mter reinserting the card, the operator pushes a reset button to resume transmission.
The input and output hoppers have a maximum capacity of 430 cards.
unloaded while the 180 Transmitter is operating.

Cards can be loaded or

The System 180 Card Transmitter operates over the public telephone network or a leased voiceband line and is compatible with the Bell System Data Set 402C.
~ OTHER CHANGES IN TALLY PARALLEL EQUIPMENT

•

The minimum leasing period is now 24 months. Other leasing periods include 36, 40,
48, and 65 months. Complete price information, including approximate discounts
for extended leases, is shown in the accompanying table.

•

New options for some models include cabinet installation with tape reeling prOVisions,
free-standing floor console, and 3000-foot tape supply provisions. The accompanying table shows the prices and applicable models.

•

The Tally System 300 Sender/Receiver has been dropped from the standard product
line.

C 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

8/67

TALLY PARALLEL EQUIPMENT
REPORT UPDATE

TALLY PARALLEL EQUIPMENT PRICE DATA

Component or Feature

Monthly
Rental, *

Punched TaEe Receivers
60 Characters per Second:
System 200
60 or 72 Characters per Second:
System 220
System 228

$

27.90
33.48
39.06

600
720
840

4.00
4.80
5.60

33.48
39.06
44.64

720
840
960

4.80
5.60
6.40

167.40

3600

24.00

91. 37

1965

15.00

136.48
180.42

2935
3880

18. 00
19. 00

23.25

500

3.50

17.44

375

2.50

16.97

365

2.44

Options
Error Detection (System 220)
Floor Console (Systems 200, 220,
and 228)
3000-Foot Tape Supply**
(Systems 200, 220, and 228)
Cabinet Installation with tape reeling
(Systems 100, 102, 108, 120, 122,
and 128)
*

These rentals are based on a two-year leasing agreement. Leases are also available
for 36, 40, 48 and 65 months. The approximate long-term rental rates are shown
below as a percentage of the two-year rate:
36 months - 70.5 percent.
40 months - 64.5 percent.
48 months - 55. 5 percent.
65 months - 43. 0 percent.
The rental rates do not include maintenance.

** The Floor Console is a prerequisite for the 3000-Foot Tape Supply.

8/67

Monthly
Maintenance,
$

$
Punched TaEe Senders
60 Characters per Second:
System 100
System 102
System 108
72 Characters per Second:
System 120
System 122
System 128
Punched Card Sender
System 180

Purchase
Price,

AUERBACH Data

c,) .... l1unications

Reports

A
fI!
,UERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6760:01
TALLY PARALLEL EQUIPMENT

"
TALLY PARALLEL DATA COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: ...

System 100, 102, 108, 120, 122, and 128 Senders .
System 200, and 228 Receivers •

. 1:2

Manufacturer:...................

Tally Corporation
8301 South 180th Street
Kent, Washington 98031

. 13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

transmission of punched tape data over a voiceband line at 60 or 72 char/sec .

. 14

Basic Components

. 15

Name: . . . . . . . .
Model number: ..
Function: .

Tally Bi-directional Tape Reader.
424.
reads punched paper tape at up to 60 or 72 char/ sec.

Name: ...
Model number: . . . .
Function: . . . . . .

Tally Paper Tape Perforator.
420.
punches paper tape at up to 60 char/sec.

Name: . . . . . . . .
Model number:
Function: . . . .

Tally Paper Tape Perforator.
P-120.
punches paper tape at up to 120 char/sec.

Description
In mid-1965 Tally Corporation renamed its line of punched paper tape data communications
equipment. Whereas Tally formerly used a Mark Series designation (Mark lA, Mark 1D,
etc.), the firm now uses a System-Series designation and groups the equipment uniformly
according to type of device. The Tally Systems are now grouped as follows:
Series
Series
Series
Series
Series
Series
Series

100
200
300
600
800
1000
4000

-

Transmitters
Receivers
Transmitter/Receivers
Magnetic Tape/Paper Tape Conversion Systems
Paper Tape Verify/Duplicate Systems
Magnetic Tape Data Terminal
Magnetic Tape Data Terminal

Within the Series 100, 200, and 300 line, Tally offers two basic types of equipment,
differing principally in the transmission method. The Tally Equipment which transmits or
receives data in a parallel fashion is described in this report; Tally's serial transmission
equipment is described in Report 6761.
The Tally Parallel Data Communications Equipment consists of a line of eight punched
paper tape senders and receivers that utilize the proven Tally mechanical punched tape
readers and punches. The various models operate at 60 or 72 characters per second,
but differ in their capability for unattended operation and error checking. Table I contains a summary of the characteristics of the Tally Parallel Data Communications
equipment, and also indicates the former Mark series designation for each device.

6760:02
TALLY PARALLEL EQUIPMENT

Figure 1. The Tally Series 100 Transmitter (left) and System 228 Receiver (right) .
. 15

Description (Contd.)
In general, all devices can intercommunicate, although some special features such as error
checking and automatic retransmission are not operable with certain combinations. All of
these devices operate over a voice-band line and utilize the Bell System 400 Series Data
Sets or equivalent data sets where permitted. A special option in the Tally serial equipment
permits the serial receivers to receive transmissions from the parallel senders at 60 or 72
characters per second; see Paragraph 6761.15.
Error-checking provisions are included only in the System 228 Receiver. The 228 Receiver
can perform odd or even character parity checks on 6-, 7-, or 8-level received data codes.
The 228 Receiver can also control the direction of reading of the 108 Sender via the reverse
channel of the data set. Upon detection of a parity error, the 228 Receiver punches a specified flag character and controls backspacing and retransmission of the flawed data block by
the 108 Sender. Parity information and blocking characters must be included in the data
input to the 108 Sender if the checking feature of the 228 Receiver is to be used.

.. ~,

Tally states that due to their error-checking capabilities when used in combination, the
System 108 and 128 Sender and 228 Receiver are the devices currently in highest demand.

8/69

. 16

Tally has discontinued the System 180 Card Transmitter. The former System 180 was
rated at 42 cards per minute and translated the Hollerith card code to a 7-level BCD transmission code •
First Delivery

. 17

System 100:
System 102:
Systems 108
System 200:
Availability:

............. .
......•............
and 228: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.................. .
•••..•.••..•.•...•.

January 1964.
November 1964.
June 1965.
January 1963.
60 days for all systems.

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

~
!D
ERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6760:03
TALLY PARALLEL EQUIPMENT

01

.2

CONFIGURATION
Each device consists of a punched paper tape reader or punch, or both, and the logic necessary to perform the functions indicated in Table 1. The particular Tally reader and/or
punch used in each model is indicated below:
•

Model 424 Tape Reader - modified version used in System 100, 102, 108, 120, 122,
and 128 Sender.

•

Model 420 Tape Perforator - used in the System 200 Receiver.

•

Model P-120 Tape Perforator - used in the System 228 Receiver.

The standard communications facilities over which the Tally parallel equipment can operate,
and the data sets required, are specified in Paragraph . 72.
TABLE I: CHARACTERISTICS OF TALLY PARALLEL DATA COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
Send
L'nattended

System (2)

Hated
Speed

100

60

~o

10~

60

Yes

10~

GO

Yes

120

72

No

1

)<)

72

Yes

12~

72

Yes

~OO

60

-

l2S

72

0

Heceive
L'nattended

-

-

Start
Unattended
Sender

Parity
Check

-

No

-

No

-

Xo

No

Yes

Yes

Automatic
Hequest
Retransmission

Automatic
Hetransmission

Tape
Handlin/{

Recommended
Hemote Tally
TC'rminals

No

Optional

200

No

Optional

228

Yes

Optional

22R

No

Optional

228,1021,4031

No

-

No

Optional

22H,1021,4031

No

-

YCH

Optional

2~8,

No
Yes(l)

No

-

Heels

100

Heels

10:!,10H

No
No

Yes

] 021, 4031

(11 Checking is performed by I'ecei\'in/{ punch,
(2) Series 100 devices are transmitters; Series 200 devices are recci\'crs,

.3

INPUT

· 31

Prepared Input
Model 424 Tape Reader (used in Systems 100, 102, 108, 120, 122, and 128 Input medium: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Input code: . . . • . . .
Quantity of data: . . .

Rated input speed: .
Effective speed: . . .
Comments: ..

fully-punched 11/16-, 7/8-, or I-inch, 5-,
6-, 7-, or 8-level paper tape. Tape can be
of any material, color, thickness, or
opacity.
any 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code.
data blocks can be of any size except when
transmitting to a parity-checking receiver;
in this case, each block must contain at
least 30 data characters.
60 or 72 char/sec.
somewhat less than rated speed, depending on
block length.
reader uses mechanical star-wheel sensing.

· 32

Manual Input: .

no provision .

. 33

Fixed Input: . . . .

no provision.

· 34

Transaction Code Input: .

no provision.

6760:04
TALL Y PARALLEL EQUIPMENT

· 35

Message Configuration: . . . • . . . . . . . .

· 36

Operating Procedure

1 to N data characters (no control codes); 30
to N data characters followed by a customerspecified block character (System 108, 128, and
228 in parity-checking mode only).

(1)

Operator establishes connection with remote station and exchanges instructions
with the remote operator.

(2)

Both operators select Attended and Send or Receive switch positions on control
panel.

(3)

Receive operator presses Data button on data set.

(4)

Send operator presses Data button on data set upon hearing tone.

(5)

Sender and receiver are started automatically.

(6)

If the sender runs out of tape, it will wait 30 seconds for possible operator inter-

vention and then automatically terminate the call.
See Paragraph. 52 for the resulting action if errors are detected by a System 228
Receiver.
.37

Entry of Time and Date:

.4

OUTPUT

· 41

Output to Punched Tape

no provision .

Model 420 Tape Perforator (used in System 200) Tape size: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated punching speed: . • . . . • . . . . .
Tape cooe: .. , .
Effective speed: . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . .
II

•••

II

••••

,

•••••

Format control: . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .

standard 11/16-, 7/8, or 1-inch.
60 char/sec.
any 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code.
up to 60 char/sec, limited by transmission
speed of sender.
none.

Model P-120 Tape Perforator (used in System 228) Tape size: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape cooe: ... , ...

II

•••••••••

,

•

Rated punching speed: . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format control: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

.51

Data Entry Errors: ........••.•.•

. 52

Data Transmission Errors (System 228 Receiver only)
Type of checking:. . . . • . . . . . . . . . • .

Error indication: . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . .

8/69

standard 11/16-, 7/8-, or 1-inch tape.
any 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code.
120 char/sec.
up to 72 char/sec, limited by transmission
speed of sender and by data set.
none .

no provision •

switch- selected odd or even character parity
check on 6-, 7-, or 8-level codes. Parity is
accumulated by sensing the movements of
punch pins.
in System 228, all eight holes of any character
received in error are punched (Delete character), a flag character (specified by the user

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
a
~ERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6760:05
TALLY PARALLEL EQUIPMENT

•
. 52

Data Transmission Errors (System 228 Receiver only) (Contd.)
when system was ordered) is punched.
punching halts. and the receiver signals the
sender at the end of the current data block to
reverse the tape to the beginning of the block
and retransmit.

• 53

Correction procedure: • • . • . . . . • . . .

automatic retransmission; if error persists,
receiver inhibits parity checking on the fourth
transmission of the same data block.

Comments: •.

parity checking can be inhibited. When checking
odd parity, Blank characters (no holes punched)
or Delete characters (all holes punched), do not
cause a parity error condition.

0

•••••••••••••••••

Data Recording Errors: .

0

•••••••••

no provision •

The parity checking mechanism of the 220 and 228 Receivers provides an indirect check on
data recording; see Paragraph. 52 .
. 55

Line Malfunctions
Detection:. . . . . . . .
Action: . . . . . . . . . .

.6

loss of carrier tone is detected.
automatic disconnect .

CONDITION INDICATORS
The various Tally devices described in this report contain a minimum of condition indicators.
In general, the only visual indicators provided are visible off/on switches and lamps for
indicating errors .

.7

DATA TRANSMISSION

.71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmiss ion speed: . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission method: • . . . • . • . . . . . .
Transmission code: .•

0

•••••••••••

Transmission mode: ..••.
Synchronization: .•••.•.•.•....••.
0

. 72

••••••

0

•

60 char/sec (480 bits/sec) or 72 char/sec
(576 bits/sec).
parallel by 8 bits (one character); serial by
character.
8 bits are transmitted for each character;
5-, 6-, and 7-level codes are zero-filled.
simplex (sender or receiver).
the receiver is actuated by the beginning of
each transmitted data character .

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set*

Public switched telephone network: . . .

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 402C
(send) and/or 402D (receive)
Bell System Data Set 402C (send) and/or 402D
(receive)

Bell System leased voice-band line: . . ..

* Equivalent data sets can be used; see Section 4620 for a current list of modems available
from independent manufacturers of telephone equipment, then check with your local commoncarrier communications consultant. The 108 Sender and 228 Receiver require the reverse
channel feature to enable automatic retransmission upon detection of an error.

© 1969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/69

6760:06
TALLY PARALLEL EQUIPMENT

.73

Transmission Control
Call initiation:

Functional operations: ....

manual or unattended, depending on model;
see Table I.
some units require an operator to' establish a
connection; some units are capable of unattended receiving; some units can start a
remote unattended terminal; see Table I.
none .

. 74

Multistation Operation: . . . .

no provision .

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Call reception:

Senders, System

Receivers, System

Component:
100,102,108,120,122, and 128
Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

8.81
12.5
4.81
10

Power (KW)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phases

0.15
115
60
1

Temperature range ("F)
Humidity range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)
•

.9

200

228

20

20

22

22

15
75

27
190
0.575
115
60
1

50 to 110
20 to 80
392

59 to 110
20 to 80
1962

Options permit operation on 230-volt, 50-hertz power •

PRICE DATA
Component or Feature

Monthly
Rental, •

Purchase
,Price,

Monthly
' Maintenance,

$

$

$

27
36
45

720
864
1008

4.00
4.80
5.60

35
44
55

864
1008
1152

4.80
5.60
6.40

105

2358

15.00

205

5000

19.00

10

180

-

25

525

2.50

25

438

2.44

Punched Tape Senders
60 Characters per Second:
System 100
System 102
System 108
72 Characters per Second:
System 120
System 122
System 128
Punched Tape Receivers
60 Characters per Second:
System 200
60 or 72 Characters per Second:
System 228
Options
Floor Console (Systems 200,
and 228)
3000-Foot Tape Supply"
(Systems 200 and 228)
Cabinet Installation with tape reeling
(Systems 100, 102, 108, 120, 122,
and 128)

• These rentals are based on a one-year leasing agreement and include maintenance •
•• The Floor Console is a prerequisite for the 3000-Foot Tape Supply.

8/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
8
..

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6761:01
TALLY SERIAL EQUIPMENT

TALLY SERIAL DATA COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: . . . . . . . . .

System 111 Sender .
System 211 Receiver.
System 311 Sender/Receiver .

. 12

Manufacturer:...................

Tally Corporation
8301 South 180th Street
Kent, Washington 98031

.13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . ..

transmission of punched tape data over a voiceband line at 120 char/sec; reception of punched
tape data over a voice-band line at 120 chari
sec; or both, depending on model.

.14

Basic Components

. 15

Name: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model number:
Function: . . . . . . . .

Tally Bi-directional Tape Reader.
464A.
reads punched paper tape at up to 120 char/sec.

Name: . . . . . . . . . .
Model number: .. .
Function: ..

Tally Paper Tape Perforator.
P-120.
punches paper tape at up to 120 char/sec.

Description
The Tally Serial Data Communications Equipment includes a punched paper tape sender, a
receiver, and a combination sender/receiver. Each of these units utilize the Tally Model 464
Tape Reader and/or the Tally Model P-120 Tape Perforator. Information about other data communications equipment produced by Tally can be found in Report 6760.
Each of the Tally serial devices transmits or receives data from pre-punched paper tape at
120 characters per second over a voice-band line. The characteristics of each System model
are summarized in Table 1. The primary difference between the various models, aside from
their functional differences, is the capability of some models for error checking and automatic
retransmission of data blocks containing detected errors. All models are provided with the
capability for handling reels.
The System 111 Sender, 211 Receiver, and 311 Sender/Receiver have error-checking provisions
similar to those implemented in the System 108 and 128 Sender and 228 Receiver in the Parallel
Equipment line (see Report 6760). The 211 Receiver and 311 Sender/Receiver can optionally perform odd or even character parity checks on 6-, 7-, or 8-level (including parity) received data
codes. The receiver portion of either a 211 or a 311 can also control the direction of reading
by a 111 Sender or by the sending portion of a 311 Sender/Receiver via the reverse channel of
the data set. Upon detection of a parity error, the receiver punches a specified flag character
and controls backspacing and retransmission of the data block containing the error. The 111
Sender and 311 Sender/Receiver can optionally be equipped to generate character parity and/or
blocking characters for input tapes.
All models in the Tally line of serial equipment can now be optionally equipped to transmit and receive data serially by bit at 60 characters per second in addition to the standard
rate of 120 characters per second. The alternate transmission rate is switch-selected.
The parallel receive option allows manual switching to an alternate data set (Bell System
402D Data Set); the de serializing logic is also bypassed. In this mode, a Tally serial
receiver or sender/receiver can receive data from a Tally parallel sender (see Report 6760)
at 60 or 72 characters per second. In effect, the serial receiver acts as a parallel receiver:
any error-checking and retransmission features are fully operative.

676 t :02
TALLY SERIAL EQUIPMENT

Figure 1.
. 15

The Tally System III Transmitter (left) and System 211 (right);
the System 311 combines both units in one cabinet •

Description (Contd.)
An IBM Selectric Input/Output Typewriter can be connected to a Tally System 311 Sender/Receiver.
The_ typewriter can be used off-line to:
•

Generate punched tape via manual keyboard entry, or

•

List data from a punched tape being read.
during listing.)

(A second, duplicate tape can be punched

The rated speed of the Selectric Typewriter is 14.8 characters per second. It incorporates a
roll-feed platen with 85 print positions. A platen with 135 printing positions is optionally available.
When not used for punched tape generation or data listing, the typewriter can be used as a normal electric office typewriter.
Tally has discontinued the card-reader option for the System 311 Sender/Receiver. The former
option provided rated input capability of 60 cards per minute (80 columns or characters per
second) and was used for direct transmission of card data to a remote Tally serial punched
tape receiver or for local transcription of punched card data to punched paper tape.
According to Tally, the System 311 Sender/Receiver is currently the most popular model in
the serial transmission equipment line.
"16

First Delivery
Systems 111 and 211: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System 311:
........•......

February 1966.
October 1965.

. 17

Availability:

60 to 90 days for all Systems .

.2

CONFIGURATION
Each device consists of a Tally Model 464A Paper Tape Reader or Model P-120 Tape Perforator, or both, and the logic necessary to perform the functions indicated in Table 1. The
standard communications facilities over which the Tally serial equipment can operate, and
the data sets required, are specified in Paragraph. 72.

8/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

DATA
~ COMMUNICATIONS
AU[RllACH

JERBACH

6761:03

R[PORTS

TALL Y SERIAL EQUIPMENT

•

TABLE I: CHARACTERISTICS OF TALLY SERIAL DATA COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Send
Unattended

System

Senders
111

Start
Unattended
Sender

Parity
Check

Automatic
Request Retransmission

Automatic
Retransmission

Recommended Remote
Tally Terminals

Yes

-

-

No

-

Yes

211, 311, 1021,
4031

-

Yes

Yes

Yes(l)

Yes'

-

Ill, 311, 1021,
4031

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes(1)

Yes

Yes

Heceivt'rs
211
Sendel'LHeceivers
:1l1

Heceive
Unattended

Ill, 211, 311,
1021, 4031

(1) Checking is performed by receiving punch •

.3

INPUT

.31

Prepared Input
Model 464A ReaderInput medium: . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantity of data: . . • . . • . . . . • . . • .

Rated input speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed:. . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments:" . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 32

fully-punched 11/16-, 7/8-, or 1-inch, 5-, 6-,
7-, or 8-level paper tape. Tape can be of any
material, color, thickness, or opacity.
any 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code.
1 to N data characters when parity checking is
not used; 30 to N data characters when transmitting to a parity-checking receiver (System
211 or 311). N is limited by capacity of reel,
which is approximately 90,000 characters.
120 char/sec; 60 or 120 char/sec optional.
somewhat less than rated speed, depending on
block length.
reader uses mechanical star-wheel sensing,
60 or 120 char/sec Speed - Selection option
provides manual selection of either speed •

Manual Input (IBM Selectric Typewriter Option)
Keyboard Method of entry: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

via 44-key keyboard; additional keys provide
special functions such as backspace, carriage
return, horizontal tab, etc.

Quantity of data: "

variable.

Character set: ....

44 distinct character codes, in conjunction
with upper- and lower-case control code,
provide 88 upper and lower case alphabetic,
numeric, and special characters .

. 33

Fixed Input: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

no provision .

. 34

Transaction Code Input: . . . . . . . . . . . .

no prOVision .

. 35

Message Configuration:. . . . . . . . . . . ..

1 to N data characters (no control codes); 30 to
N data characters followed by a customerspecified block character (Systems 111, 211,
and 311 in parity-checking mode only). N is
limited by capacity of reel, which is approximately 90,000 characters.

(C)

1q6q ALJFRBACH Corooration and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

6761:04
TALLY SERIAL EQUIPMENT

· 36

Operating Procedure
(1)

Operator establishes connection with remote station and exchanges instructions with
the remote operator.

(2)

Both operators select Attended and Send or Receive switch positions on control panel.

(3)

Receive operator presses Data button on data set.

(4) Send operator presses Data button on data set upon hearing tone.
(5)

Sender and receiver are started automatically.

(6) If the sender runs out of tape, it will wait 30 seconds for possible operator intervention and then automatically terminate the call. If the receiver runs out of
tape, the sender will automatically backspace and then terminate the call.
See Paragraph. 52 for the resulting action if errors are detected by a System 211 Receiver
or 311 Sender/Receiver.
. 37

Entry of Time and Date:

.4

OUTPUT

· 41

Output to Punched Tape

no provision .

Model P-120 Perforator Tape size: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T'ape code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated punching speed:. . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format control: . . . . . . . . .
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

· 4-1

.

standard 11/16-, 7/8-, or I-inch tape.
any 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code.
120 char/sec; 60 or 120 char/sec optional.
up to 120 char/sec.
none.
equipped with parity-checking mechanism when
used in Systems 211 and 311; 60 or 120
char/sec Speed-Selection option provides
manual selection of either speed.

Output to Printer (IBM Selectric Typewriter Option)
Output medium: . . . . . . . . . .

8/69

.
.
.
.

0

••

0

•

•

••

friction-fed or pin-fed (optional) roll paper
or fanfold forms up to 15. 5 inches wide
(13-inch writing width).

Character set: . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . ..
Rated printing speed: . • . . . . . . . • . . ..

88 printable characters.
14.8 char/sec.

Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

less than rated speed due to carriage return,
line feed, or other format operations.

Format control: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

controlled by function codes in incoming data
or manually by operator. Controls include
line feed, carriage return, case shift, backspace, and horizontal tab.

Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

horizontal spacing is 10 char/inch (12 char/inch
optional) ;
vertical spacing is 6 lines/inch
(8 lines/inch optional).

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6761:05
TALLY SERIAL EQUIPMENT

JfRBACH

'"
.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

.51

Data Entry Errors (System 311 only): ..

. 52

Data Transmission Errors (System 211 Receiver and 311 Sender/Receiver only)
Type of checking: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Error indication: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Correction procedure: . . . . . . . . . . . .

Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

the 311 Sender/Receiver can be operated in a
test mode, which allows the receiver portion
to receive transmission from the sender.
This mode can be used prior to transmission
to verify input tapes by means of the paritychecking mechanism described in Paragraph
.52, or after transmission to delete data blocks
which contained a detected error .

switch- selected odd or even character parity
check on 6-, 7-, or 8-level codes. Parity is
accumulated by sensing the movements of
punch pins.
all eight holes of any character received in error
are punched (Delete character), a flag character (specified by the user when system was
ordered) is punched, punching halts, and receiver signals sender at the end of the current
data block.
automatic retransmission if sender is capable
(e. g., System 111 or 311); if error persists,
receiver inhibits parity checking on the fourth
transmission of the same data block.
parity checking can be inhibited. When checking
odd parity, Blank characters (no holes punched)
or Delete characters (all 8 holes punched) do
not cause a parity error condition.

.33

Data Recording Errors: . . . . . . . . . . .

parity-checking mechanism of Sy.stem 211 and
311 receiver punch also provides an indirect
check on data recording; see Paragraph. 52.

.34

Equipment Errors (System 311 only):

the System 311 Sender/Receiver can be operated
in a test mode, which allows the receiver portion to receive transmission from the sender.
The parity-checking mechanism of the receiver,
as described in Paragraph. 52, can be used
to provide a measure of assurance that the
equipment is functioning properly .

. 53

Line Malfunctions

.6

Detection: ..
Action: . . . .

loss of carrier tone is detected.
automatic disconnect; receiver halts; sender
backspaces and halts.

CONDITION INDICATORS: . . . . . . . . . .

lamps are provided to indicate power on, device
ready, device busy, ahd a detected error.

© 1969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/69

6761:06
TALLY SERIAL EQUIPMENT

.7

DATA TRANSMISSION

.71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed: . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission method: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmission mode: . . . • . . . . . . . . . .
Order of bit transmission: • . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronization: . . • • • • . . . . . . . . . . .
. 72

. 73

120/char/sec (1200 bits/sec); optional 60 or 120
char/sec.
serial by bit.
any 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code; a total of 10
bits per character are transmitted including
start and stop bits; codes of fewer than 8
levels are zero-filled when transmitted.
simplex (sender or receiver); half-duplex
(sender/receiver) .
low-order bit is transmitted first.
start-stop; start and stop bits are each 1 bittime long .

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set*

Public switched telephone network: . . . ..
Common-carrier leased voice-band
line: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C.
Bell System Data Set 202C or Western Union
1200 Baud Data Modem .

Transmission Control

Functional operations: . . . . . . . . . . . . .

manual.
all models are capable of unattended operation; see Table I.
none .

. 74

Multistation Operation: . . . . . . . . . . . ..

no provision .

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Call initiation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call reception: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Component:
Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)
Power (KW)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phases
Temperature range eF)
Humidity range (%)
Heat (BTU /hr)

Sender and Receiver
System 211
System 111
20
22
13
75
0.460
115**
60**
1
50 to 110
20 to 80
1570

Sender/Recei ver
System 311
22
26.378
59
350

20
22
27
150
0.575
115**
60**
1

0.920
115**
60**
1

50 to 110
20 to 80
1962

50 to 110
20 to 80
3140

* Equivalent data sets can be used; see Section 4620 for a current list of modems available from independent manufacturers of telephone equipment, then check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant. Use of the automatic retransmission feature of the System 111, 211,
and 311 devices requires the reverse channel feature in data set.

**

8/69

Operation on 230-volt, 50-hertz power is optional at extra cost.

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

DATA
~ COMMUNICATIONS
AUERBACH

6761:07

..

ERBACH REPORTS

•9

TALL Y SERIAL EQUIPMENT

PRICE DATA

Component or Feature

Monthly
Rental, *

Purchase
Price,

$

$

Monthly
Maintenance,

$

Senders
System 111 (Options 1, 3, 4, 5, 8 available)

160

3500

15.00

Receivers
System 211 (Options 1, 2, 3, 6, 8 available)

280

6240

22.50

400

8628

28.00

10
30
15
30
35
25
120

180
240
180
720
720
525
2950

1. 00
2.00
4.00
4.00
2.50
25.00

Sender[Receivers
System 311 (Options 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9
available
Options
(1) Floor Console
(2) Parallel Receive Capability
(3) 60/120 char/sec Speed Selection
(4) Parity Generation
(5) Automatic Block Code Generation
(6) 3000 - Foot Perforator Tape Supply**
(7) ffiM Selectric Typewriter

-

* These rentals are based on a one -year rental agreement and include maintenance.
** The Floor Console is a prerequisite for the 3000-Foot Tape Supply.

IPt\

la~a

AIICDDAf"u

r' ............... ,.. .......... ; .........

.......... ....a

AII~nnA"1 J

'_.1.-

1 __

A
a
AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS
•

6762:01
TALLY 1021 DATA TERMINAL

s

TALLY 1021 DATA TERMINAL

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

.12

Manufacturer:

.13

Basic Function:

• 14

Basic Components

Tally 1021 Data Terminal.

..

Tally Corporation
8301 South 180th Street
Kent, Washington 98031
.................

transmission and reception of data over a voiecband communications line at 120 characters pe r
second; input-output options are available; input, transmission, and output operations are
performed separately, via internal magnetic tape
buffer; can also be used for off-line data transscription or can be connected directly to a computer .

Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data Terminal Controller.
1021.
provides data buffering and control; includes Model
1020 magnetic tape unit as buffer.

Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function: . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Typewriter Option.
1022.
receives data from internal magnetic tape buffer
and prints it; provides keyboard for recording
data on internal magnetic tape buffer.

Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model number: . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
Function: . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Paper Tape Reader Option.
1023.
reads data from punched paper tape and records
it on internal magnetic tape buffer.

Name:
Model number:
Function:

Serial Interface Option.
1025.
provides interface with serial data set at 120
char/sec.

Name: . . . . . . . .
Model number:
Function: . . . . . .

Parallel Interface Option.
1028P.
provides interface with parallel data set at 60 or
72 char/sec.

Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model number:
Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Serial/Parallel Interface Option.
1028SP.
provides interface with serial or parallel data set
at 60, 72, or 120 char/sec.

Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . .
Model number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function: . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . • . • . .

Teletype 33 ASR.
1033 ASR.
receives data from internal magnetic tape buffer
and prints it; provides keyboard for recording
data on internal magnetic tape buffer.

Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function: . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . .

360 Communications Buffer.
provides direct interface to System/360 computer.

6762:02
TALLY 1021 DATA TERMINAL

Figure 1. Tally 1021 Data Terminal .
. 15

Description
The Tally 1021 Data Terminal, a former product of the Dartex Division of Tally, consists of
a buffered controller (basic unit), a limited input/output capability that includes an IBM Selectric typewriter, a Teletype Model 33 ASR, and a Tally paper tape reader, an optional IBM
System/360 interface for local operation, and a communications interface option, which provides one of three interfaces: serial (120 char/sec), parallel (60 or 72 char/sec), and a serial-parallel interface that selectively combines the advantages of the two. The optional System/360 interface can be combined with a data communications interface option to create a
computer communications environment.
The flexibility of the ;:rally 1021 can be appreciated when considering that it can be used in
both a local and remote environment and that it is compatible with the other data communications devices in the Tally product line.
The basic Tally 1021 Terminal includes an incremental magnetic tape recorder (Tally Model
1020) which is employed as a data buffer. When transmitting over a communications line,
data is transferred from the buffer tape in the transmitting terminal to the buffer tape in the
receiving terminal. When performing an off-line data transcription operation, data is first
recorded on the internal magnetic tape buffer; the tape is rewound and the data is then transferred to the output device. Data cannot be transferred directly between an input--output device and the communications line or between an input device and an output devioe. This limitation is partially off-set by the flexibility provided by the removable buffer tape reel.

8/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

B
"ERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6762:03
TALLY 1021 DATA TERMINAL

s

The internal magnetic tape buffer unit handles a removable three-inch reel of 0.25-inch-wide
computer-grade magnetic tape. Data is recorded at a density of 800 bits per inch. The tape
speed is 40 inches per second when operating continuously or up to 3 inches per second when
operating in the start/stop mode.
Each eight-bit character is recorded serially by bit on a single track; a O. 013-inch gap separates each group of bits forming a character. The low-order bit is recorded first, the odd
parity bit and an end-of-character bit last. Concurrent with recording the data, a second
track is recorded as the complement of the first. Both tracks are read and compared when
reading the recorded data to ensure that the data is read correctly. The end-of-character bit
is recorded as a "one" on each of the two tracks. Records, consisting of a group of characters,
are separated by a O. 125-inch gap; blocks, consisting of one or more records, are separated
by a 2. 5-inch gap. Block size can be manually established at 16, 32, or 64 records per block
when the Model 1029 Block Forming Option is incorporated.

Four tracks are recorded (two "channels"); i. e., two data tracks and two checking tracks.
Data is recorded to the end of the first channel; the tape is rewound at 40 inches per second,
and recording begins .in the second channel. Each three-inch reel of tape has a maximum storage capacity of 280, 000 characters (140,000 characters per channel).
Any 5-, 6-, 7 - or 8-level code can be used when transcribing data from an input medium.
Although the Terminal can transmit variable-length data records, Tally does not recommend
the use of record lengths shorter than 30 characters. Character parity is transmitted with
each character.
Error signaling in response to detected transmission errors is performed via the reversechannel technique. The inherent value of this technique is that the process eliminates the time
required for line turn-around to allow the receiver to transmit an acknowledge code. The reverse-channel technique is described in Paragraph 6221. 15 in the Report on the Digitronics
Reverse-Channel Dial-o-verter Line.
When a transmission error is detected at the receiving terminal, the signal on the reverse
channel is interrupted. The interruption is interpreted at the transmitting terminal as a request to retransmit the incorrectly received record. Both transmitting and receiving terminal tapes are automatically reversed to the beginning of the incorrectly received record,
and the record is again read and retransmitted. Automatic retransmission of an incorrectly
received record will occur up to three times; after-three consecutive errors on the same
record, the receiving terminal writes an error flag at the beginning of the record and accepts
the record without further error checking. Error checking is resumed with the next record.
The Tally 360 Communications Buffer combines the 1021 Data Terminal, a communications
interface and an IBM System/360 interface in a single unit. Input/output operation with the
computer is performed at 1600 characters per second via the System/360 Multiplexor Channel.
Code translation between the internal EBCDIC code and the Tally 6-level BCD code is provided.
Two standard programming packages are available: diagnostic routines and a micro package
for the IBM Disc Operating System (DOS).
The Model 1022 Typewriter Option (an IBM Selectric Typewriter) enables keyboard data to be
entered directly onto the buffer tape and provides a hard copy when outputting from the buffer.
The Selectric Typewriter is rated at 15.5 characters per second. The keyboard provides a
64-character set; each character is encoded in an eight-level BCD code. The standard type
element provided is the IBM Type Style No.1, which contains a 64-character set; an optional
type element contains an 88-character set. A pin-feed platen is standard with the 1022 Typewriter Option; the typewriter
accept single sheets of paper or continuous marginallypunched forms. When the typewriter is not in use as a data entry device or as a printer, it can
be used as a conventional typewriter, even though the terminal is otherwise occupied.

will

The Model 1033 ASR Option, a Teletype Model 33 ASR, can be substituted for the Model 1022
Typewriter Option. Teletypewriter operation is similar to the typewriter operation.

A

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

lA'
-.II

6762:05
TALLY 1021 DATA TERMINAL

AUERBACH

"
Quantity of data: . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
Itated input speed: . • . . . . . . . . . . • . .
Effective speed:
Comments: ...

variable up to tape capacity of 280, 000 characters.
up to 120 char/sec (start-stop) or 1600 char/sec
(continuous) .
limited by block lcngth and transmission speed.
this unit serves as the data buffer; all transmission and transcription operations are performed
via this unit.

Model 1023 Paper Tape Reader Option Input medium: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input code: . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . •
Quantity of data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated input speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
Comments: • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
. 32

fully punched 11/16-, 7/8- or I-inch, 5-, G-, 7-,
or 8-level paper, paper-Mylar, or aluminumMylar tape; any color or opacity can be used.
any 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code.
variable up to capacity of 1020 magnetic tape reel
(280, 000 characters).
120 characters per second.
limited by block length.
data is transferred to the 1020 incremental recorder (tape buffer) from this unit .

Manual Input
Typewriter Option, Model 1022 Method of entry: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantity of data: • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

via a 53-key keyboard.
variable.
64 characters, including 26 alphabetics, 10 numerics, and 27 special symbols plus space .

. 33

Fixed Input: .' . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

no provision.

.34

Transaction Code Input:

no prOvision.

.35

Message Configuration:

data is transmitted in variable-length records;
each data record begins with a record-count
character and is terminated with a longitudinal
parity character; both of these characters are
automatically supplied by the terminal logic.
The end of the record is recognized by the endof-record gap .

. 36

Operating Procedure
To send or receive a data message, the operator:
•

Depresses the Data-Phone selection switch;

•

Depresses the Data-Phone Manual or Automatic (unattended) mode switch;

•

Depresses the Send or Receive switch if in Manual mode;

•

Establishes connection by manual dialing or signaling;

•

Ensures that the called terminal is ready (automatic when in unattended mode); and

•

Starts the tape action by depressing the data set Data button.

The subsequent transmission operation, including retransmission, is completely automatic.
Operator attention is required only if repeated errors are detected or to break the connection
when operating in the manual mode.

6762:06
TALLY 1021 DATA TERMINAL

. 37

Entry of Time and Date:

.4

OUTPUT

. 43

Output to Magnetic Tape

no provision .

Model 1020 Digital Magnetic Tape Recorder (contained in 1021 Data Terminal)
Tape size: • . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
O. 25-inch magnetic tape recorded at 800 bits/inch
on a 3-inch diameter reel.
Tape code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
any 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code.
Rated output speed: . . . • . . . . . . . .
up to 120 char/sec (start-stop) or 1600 char/sec
(continuously) .
Effective speed:
limited by block length and transmission speed.
Format control:
none .
. 44

Output to Printer
Model 1022 Typewriter OptionOutput medium: ... . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated printing speed: . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format control:
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

.51

Data Entry Errors

friction-fed forms up to 15. 5 inches in width; pinfed forms up to 13. 75 inches in width.
64 characters; optionally 88 characters.
15.5 char/sec.
less than rated speed due to carriage return, line
feed, and other operations.
controlled by function codes; functions include line
feed (index), carriage return, and horizontal tab.
pin-feed platen is standard; 85 or 130 (optional)
char/line at 10 char/inch; 6 lines/inch vertical
spacing; other vertical spacings are available
on request .

Model 1020 Magnetic Tape Recorder,
Model 1022 Typewriter Option, and
Model 1023 Paper Tape Reader Option
Type of checking:
Error indication:
Correction procedure:

. 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking:
Error indication:

8/69

........•

1020 checks character validity and character
parity; visual check for 1022; 1023 checks character validity.
lamp is lighted; 1022 types wrong character and
halts.
1020 and 1023 re-read error character up to three
times before operator intervention is required;
1020 flags error character; operator depresses
error key, backspaces once, and retypes correct
character on 1022 .

character parity.
lamp is lighted after three unsuccessful retransmissions (total of four transmissions) and error
record is flagged.

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
..

UERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

Correction procedure:

6762:07
TALLY 1021 DATA TERMINAL

~."

......••

Comments:
· 53

Data Recording Errors:

· 55

Line Malfunctions
Detection:
Action:

•6

incorrectly received record is retransmitted up
to three times, error record is flagged, and
operation continues.
both transmitting and receiving tapes automatically
backspace to beginning of record.
no provision for checking.

loss of carrier.
automatic disconnect.

CONDITION INDICA TORS
A comprehensive array of indicator lamps provides visual indication of error status, transmission status, and status of all components.

·7

DA TA TRANSMISSION

· 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed: . . . . . . . . .
Transmission method: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission cdde: . . . . . . • . . . • • .

Transmission mode: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Order of bit transmission:
....... .
Synchronization: . . . . . . . .
· 72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line or Service

Data Set*

Public switched telephone network (up to 1200 bits/sec): . . . . . . . .

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C. **

Common-carrier leased voiceband line (up to 1200 bits/sec):
.73

120 char/sec (1200 bits/sec.)
serial by bit.
any 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code can be used; a
total of 10 bits are transmitted for each character including parity, start, and stop bits;
codes of less than 8 levels are zero-filled.
half-duplex.
low-order bit of each character is transmitted
first, parity bits last.
start and stop bits are transmitted with each char':"
acter.

Bell System Data Set 202C or 202D, or Western
Union 1200 Baud Data Modem. **

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call reception: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional operations: . . . . . . . . . . . .

manual dialing or signaling.
capable of unattended operation.
printer only; carriage return, space, index (line
feed), and tab (horizontal).

*Equivalent data sets can be used; see Section 4620 for a current list of modems available
from independent manufacturers of telephone equipment, then check with your local commoncarrier communications consultant.
**Bell System 202C2 and 202D2 Data Sets provide reverse-channel capability. Western Union
Data Sets do not provide reverse-channel capability except through the use of a full-duplex
line.

6762:08
TALLY 1021 DATA TERMINAL

• 74

Multistation Operation: .•.•.•••••.

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model 1021
Data Terminal
Controller

Component

26
19
13
50

Width (inches
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)
Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
Phases

0.15
115
60
1

Temperature Range (" F. )
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

50 to 110
10 to 90
360
Models 1025, 1028P,
or 1028SP Communications Interface

Component

Model 1022
Typewriter
Option
17.25
15.75
9.75
52
0.15
115
60
1
50 to 110
10 to 90
360
360 Commu-.
nications
Buffer

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

Fits in 1021
Data
Terminal Controller

27
30
29
250

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phases

Power is
supplied
from Data
Terminal

0.345
115
60
1

Temperature Range (oF.)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

8/69

no provision.

50 to 110
10 to 90
?

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

50 to 110
10 to 90
?

Model 1023
Paper Tape
Reader Option
8.75
12.5
5.5
8
0.23
115
60'
1
50 to 110
20 to 85
?

A
'UERBACH

AU'R8ACH
DATA
COMMUNICATlDNS
Rt:PORTS

6762:09
TALLY 1021 DATA TERMINAL

•
•9

PRICE DATA
Component or Feature
Tally 1021 Data Terminal

Monthly
Rental,

Purchase
Price,

Monthly
Maintenance,

$

$

$

200

4800

30

115
25.30
75
85
90

2800
1265
2100
2400
2600

20
3.75
9.50
11
12

Options
Model 1022 Typewriter
Model 1023 Paper Tape Reader
Model 1025 Serial Interface
Model 1028P Parallel Interface
Model 1028SP Serial/Parallel Interface
Interface OptionsDelete Inhibit
Remote Channel Select
Remote Rewind
Auto Block Gap on BOT
Model 1029 Block Forming Option
Model 1033 ASR (Teletype Model 33 ASR)
360 Communications Buffer*

12
12
12
12
30
100
700

300
300
300
300
600
2100
15,000

*Includes 1021, 1025 with Auto Block Gap option, and IBM System/360 interface.

2
2
2
2
4
25
58

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6799:01
TELETYPE
TELESPEED 1200 EDC

@

TELETYPE TELESPEED 1200 EDC EQUIPMENT
(AT&T DATASPEED TYPE 4)

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: ...

Telespeed 1200 EDC Tape Sender;
Telespeed 1200 EDC Tape Receiver;
Dataspeed Type 4 Service .

. 12

Manufacturer:...................

Teletype Corporation
5555 Touhy Avenue
Skokie, illinois 60076

. 13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

read data from paper tape and transmit it over
a voice-band line.
receive data from a voice-band line and punch
it into paper tape .

. 15

Description
The Teletype Telespeed 1200 EDC equipment line consists of two independent units: a tape
sender and a tape receiver. The two units are available separately. This equipment is
available from Teletype Corporation on a purchase basis only. The Dataspeed Type 4 Service
offered by AT&T utilizes this equipment and is available on a rental basis.
Either chadless or fully-punched tape can be used in the Tape Sender, but the tape recreated
by the Tape Receiver is always fully-punched. The Telespeed 1200 EDC components have
adjustable heads to accommodate 5-level, 11/16-inch tape or 5-, 6-, 7-, or S-level, 1-inch
tape. By special request, 6-level, 7IS-inch Teletypesetter tape with advanced feed holes
can be accommodated.
Data is transmitted over a 2-wire voice-band line at 1050 or 1200 words per minute (105 or 120
characters per second). A 10-bit code, including unity start and stop bits, is transmitted for
each character regardless of the number of levels in the tape.
Error signaling via a "reverse channel" characterizes the 1200 EDC equipment. Reyersechannel operation is a monitoring process by which the transmitting device is made immediately cognizant of transmission errors detected at the receiver. This process eliminates the
time required for line turn-around to allow the receiver to transmit an acknowledge code.
Reverse-channel data sets divide the available bandwidth in a normal voice-grade circuit
into a forward data channel and a narrow reverse-signaling channel. Under normal circumstances, when no errors are detected, the receiving terminal allows a continuous tone to be
transmitted on the reverse channel. When an error is detected, the signal on the reverse
channel is interrupted. The interruption is interpreted by the transmitting device as a request
for retransmission of a record.
An extensive error detection and correction (EDC) capability is provided in both the 1200 EDC
sending and receiving units.
The sending unit includes a Teletype DX paper tape reader with two read heads. Data is read
from tape by one of the heads, and transmitted; the other head is used to generate two check
characters which are transmitted at the end of each SO-character record.
The receiving unit contains a Teletype DRPE paper tape punch which includes a read head.
As each character is received and punched into paper tape, the read head is used to generate
both check characters. The transmitted check characters are compared to the check characters generated at the receiving unit at the end of each record. A retransmission request
via the reverse channel occurs when the check characters do not agree.
Error correction is performed automatically by backspacing the tape to the beginning of the
record received in error at both sending and receiving units, deleting the incorrectly punched
record (by overpunching the complete record) and retransmitting the record.
In addition to the standard error detection and correction capability provided by the Telespeed

1200 EDC units, the units can be equipped to generate and check odd or even character parity
in the eighth bit pOSition.

6799:02
TELETYPE
TELESPEED t 200 EDC

\

Figure 1: The Teletype Telespeed 1200 EDC Tape Sender (left) and Tape Receiver (right).
Two options are available to provide unattended operation. One option provides the capability
to send or receive data from an unattended terminal with no restrictions. The second option, the Protected Unattended Operation feature, requires that the unattended terminal receive a specified data character prior to establishing data communication. With either option, a connection cannot be established if the terminal is in a non-serviceable state due to
equipment malfunctions or lack of power.
An optional interface is available which provides a parallel-by-bit data transfer to external
devices such as data display equipment.
The Telespeed sender and receiver take-up reel are 7 1/2 inches in diameter with a core
diameter of 1-15/16 inches. The reels are made of clear plastic with removable sides. The
capacity of these reels is 800 feet of fully-punched tape or 500 feet of chadless tape. A holder
(see Figure 1) is provided on the sender to hold the supply tape roll. A supply reel with a
3000-foot tape capacity is provided on the receiver.
· 16

First Delivery: . . . . . . . . . • . . • . • ..

1967.

• 17

Availability: • . . . . . . • .

approximately 4 months .

·2

CONFIGURATION
The 1200 EDC sending unit includes a Teletype DX paper tape reader with two read heads.
The 1200 EDC receiving unit includes a Teletype DRPE paper tape punch which contains a
read head. Telespeed 1200 EDC equipment can be connected to either the public switched
telephone network or to a common-carrier leased voice-band line. The data sets required
are specified in Paragraph. 72 .

.3

INPUT

· 31

Prepared Input
Telespeed 1200 EDC Tape Sender -

5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

(Contd.)

A

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

lA'

~

6799:03
TELETYPE
TELESPEED 1200 EDC

AUERBACH

•
Input medium: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantity of data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated input speed:
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 32

Manual Input: . . . . . . . . . . . . .

fully-punched or chadless 7/8, 11/16-, or
I-inch paper tape.
any 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code.
80 characters per bloc~.
105 or 120 char/sec.
somewhat less than rated speed.
take-up reel can hold 800 feet of fully-punched
paper tape or 500 feet of chadless paper tape; a
supply reel with a 3000-foot tape capacity is also
provided.
no provision .

. 33

Fixed Input: .. . . . . . .

no provision.

.34

Transaction Code Input:

no provision.

.35

Message Configuration: .

. 3'6

Operating Procedure

variable number of 80-character blocks; no
control characters are used .

(1)
(2)
(3)
. 37

Load punched tape.
Establish voice communication and switch to data mode.
Depress Start button.

Entry of Time and Date: . . . . . . . . .

.4

OUTPUT

.41

Output to Punched Tape

no provisions .

Telespeed 1200 EDC Tape Receiver Tape size: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.5

standard 7/8-, 11/16-, or I-inch, 5-, 6-, 7-,
or 8-level paper tape.
Tape code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . binary image of received data is punched.
105 or 120 char/sec.
Rated punching speed:. . . . . . . . .
Effective speed:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . somewhat less than rated speed.
Format control: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . none.
Comments:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . take-up reel can hold 800 feet of fullypunched paper tape or 500 feet of chadless
paper tape.
ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

. 51

Data Entry Errors: . . . . . . . . . . .

.52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking:. . . . . . . . .

Error indication: . . . .
Correction procedure:

. 53

Data Recording Errors:. . . . . . . . • . . ..

. 55

Line Malfunctions
Detection: . . . .
. . . . . . ..
Action: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

no checking.
two check characters (longitudinal parity and
spiral parity) are generated at the sending unit
and transmitted to the receiving unit at the
end of each record; the receiver generates
both check characters from the received data,
and both pairs of check characters are compared at the end of each received record.
signal on reverse channel is interrupted when
check characters do not compare.
automatic backspacing of tape to beginning of
record received in error at both sending and
receiving units: receiving unit deletes the
error record by over-punching in all channels;
then the record is retransmitted .
read-after-write check; see Paragraph. 52 .
reverse-channel signal is interrupted.
automatic disconnect or retransmission.

©1969AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

5/69

6799:04
TELETYPE
TELESPEED 1200 EDC

·7

DATA TRANSMISSION

· 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed: . . . . .
Transmission method: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Order of bit transmission:. . . . . . . . . .
Synchronization:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 72

.73

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set*

Public switched telephone network:
Common-carrier leased voiceband
line:

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C or 202D
Bell System Data Set 202D or Western Union
1200 Baud Data Modem

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call reception: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional operations: . . . . . . . . . . . .

.74

Multistation Operation: . . . . . . . . . . . .

·8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

manual dialing.
operator must establish voice communication and
then switch to data mode.
unattended operation is optional; see Description.
none.
no direct provision: but with the Protected
Unattended Operation feature, a Telespeed
Tape Sender will not respond to a call unless
a specified data character is received.

Telespeed 1200 EDC
Tape Sender

Component

.9

105 char/sec (1050 bits/sec) or 120 char/sec
(1200 bits/sec).
serial by bit.
a total of 10 bits are sent for each character,
including unity start and stop bits.
low-order bit each character is transmitted first.
start and stop bits are transmitted with each
character .

Telespeed 1200 EDC
Tape Receiver

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

20.5
24
54
325

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phases

115
60
1

0.771
115
60
1

Temperature Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

40-120
20-95
580

40-120
20-95
443

O. 345

20.5
24
54
350

PRICE DATA
The 1200 EDC equipment is available from Teletype Corporation on a purchase basis only.
Current prices, are $4,590 for the Tape Sender and $5,930 for the Tape Receiver. The
same eqUipment is used in the Dataspeed Type 4 Service, offered by AT&T on a rental
basis only. Pricing for optional features is available on request from Teletype Corporation.
* In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; see Sections 4620 and 4640 for a current
list of modems available from independent manufacturers of telephone equipment. Bell
System 202C2 and 202D2 Data Sets provide reverse-channel capability. Western Union
Data Sets do not provide reverse-channel capability except through the use of a fullduplex line.

5/70

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

lA'
~

6800:01
TELETYPE
TELESPEED 1050

AUERBACH

'"
TELETYPE TELESPEED 1050 EQUIPMENT
(AT&T DATASPEED TYPE 2)

\I
/

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

Telespeed 1050 Tape Sender;
Telespeed 1050 Tape Receiver;
Dataspeed Type 2 Service.

.12

Manufacturer:

Teletype Corporation
5555 Touhy A venue
Skokie, Illinois 60076

· 13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

read data from paper tape and transmit it over
a voice-band line.
receive data from a voice-band line and punch it
into paper tape.

· 15

Description
The Teletype Telespeed 1050 equipment line consists of two independent units: a tape sender
and a tape receiver. The two units are available separately. This equipment is available
from Teletype Corporation on a purchase basis only. The Dataspeed Type 2 Service offered
by AT&T utilizes this equipment and is available on a rental basis. Dataspeed Type 2 Service is described in the section on Common-Carrier Facilities; see Paragraph 3200. 51.
Either chadless or fully-punched tape can be used in the Tape Sender, but the tape recreated
by the Tape Receiver is always fully-punched. The Telespeed 1050 components have adjustable heads to accommodate 5-level, 11/16-inch tape or 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level, I-inch tape.
By special request, 6-level, 7/8-inch Teletypesetter tape with advanced feed holes can be
accommodated.
Data is transmitted over a 2-wire voice-band line at 1, 050 words per minute (105 characters
per second). A lO-bit code, including unity start and stop bits, is transmitted for each character regardless of the number of levels in the tape.
Two options are available to provide unattended operation. One option provides the capability
to send or receive data from an unattended terminal with no restrictions. The second option,
the Protected Unattended Operation feature, requires that the unattended terminal receive a
speCified data character prior to establishing data communication. With either option, a
connection cannot be established if the terminal is in a non-serviceable state due to eqUipment malfunctions or lack of power.
All reels mounted on the face of the Dataspeed sender and receiver are 7-1/2 inches in diameter with a core diameter of 1-15/16 inches. The reels are made of clear plastic with
removable sides. The capacity of these reels is 800 feet of fully-punched tape or 500 feet of
chadless tape. The supply reel on the tape receiver has a capacity of 3,000 feet.

.16

First Delivery:

1960.

\I

· 17

Availability: ..

approximately 4 months.

)

.2

CONFIGURATION
Telespeed 1050 equipment can be connected to either the public switched telephone network or
to a common-carrier leased voice-band line. The data sets required are specified in Paragraph.72.

©1969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/69

6800:02
TELETYPE
TELESPEED t050

Figure 1. The Teletype Telespeed 1050 Tape Sender (left) and Tape Receiver (right) .

.3

INPUT

. 31

Prepared Input
Telespeed 1050 Tape Sender Input medium:
Input code: . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . • . . .
Quantity of data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated input speed: . • . • . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed: . . . . . . . • . . . . . . .
Comments:

fully-punched or chadless H/16-inch or I-inch
paper tape.
any 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code.
variable.
105 char/sec.
somewhat less than rated speed, depending on
block length.
supply reel can hold 800 feet of fully-punched
paper tape or 500 feet of chadless paper tape.

. 32

Manual Input: .

no provision.

. 33

Fixed Input: ..

no provision .

.34

Transaction Code Input:

no provision.

.35

Message Configuration:

variable number of characters of data; no control characters are used .

. 36

Operating Procedure

• 37

(1)

Load punched tape.

(2)

Establish voice-communication and switch to data mode.

(3)

Depress Start button.

Entry of Time and Date: . . . • . . . .

no provisions.

(Contd. )
5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

6800: 03

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS

~

TELETYPE
TELESPEED 1250

AUERBACH REPORTS
."

.4

OUTPUT

• 41

Output to Punched Tape
Telespeed 1050 Tape Receiver Tape size:
Tape code: . . • . • . . . . • . • . . • . • • .
Rated punching speed: .•..••••...
Effective speed: . • • • . . . . . • . . . . .
Format control: ...•.•.•••.•.••
Comments: • . . • . . . • . . • • • • . . • . .

.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION:

• 55

Line Malfunctions

Action:
CONDITION INDICATORS
Input device available: •.••••••...•
Input device busy: .••..••.•••.•.•
Remote receiver ready: •••••..•..•
Remote receiver busy: •.•.•.••..••
Power on: ••.•••••...•.••.•.••

none.
none.
none.
none.
lamp.

Improper data entry: •...•••••.•••
Transmission error: ..•••.•..•.•.
Recording error: . . • . . . . . . . • . . . •
Line break (Tape Sender only): .•••••
Low tape (Tape Receiver only): .••..•

none.
optional.
none.
lamp.
lamp.

•7

DATA TRANSMISSION

.71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed: .••..•..•
Transmis sion method: •.•••..•....
Transmission code: •••••••••••.••
Order of bit transmission:
Synchronization: ..•.••••••......

• 72

optional error detection facilities are provided •

line breaks can be detected with optional equipment.
a lamp is lighted.

Detection:

.6

standard 11/16-inch or I-inch, 5-, 6-, 7-, or
8-level paper tape.
binary image of received data is punched.
105 char/sec.
somewhat less than rated speed, depending on
block length.
none.
supply reel has a capacity of 3,000 feet.

105 char/sec (1,050 bits/sec).
serial by bit.
a total of 10 bits are sent for each character,
including unity start and stop bits.
low-order bit of each character is transmitted
first.
start and stop bits are transmitted with each
character.

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set*

Public switched telephone network:

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C or 202D.

Common carrier leased voice-band
line: •.•...•..••..••••....••

Bell System Data Set 202D or Western Union
1200 Baud Data Modem.

© 1969AUERBACH Corporation

and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/69

6800:04
TELETYPE
TELESPEED 1050

.73

Transmission Control
Call initiation:
Call reception:
Functional ope rations: ••••••••••••

.74

Multistation Operation: ••••••••••••

*
•8

no direct provision, but with the Protected Unattended Operation feature, a Telespeed Tape
Sender will not respond to a call unless a
specified data character is received.

In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; see Sections 4620 and 4640 for a current
list of modems available from independent manufacturers of telephone equipment •

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Telespeed 1050
Tape Receiver

Telespeed 1050
Tape Sender

Component

.9

manual dialing.
operator must establish voice communioation
and then switoh to data mode.
unattended operation is optional; see Desoription.
none.

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

16
23.25
54.25
176

16
23.25
54.25
176

Power (KVA)
Voltage ± 10%
Frequency (Hz)
Phases

0.250
115
60
1

0.300
115
60
1

Temperature Range
(OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

40-120
20-95
580

40-120
20-95
443

PRICE DATA
Component or Feature

Purchase
Price *

$

*

5/70

Telespeed 1050 Tape Sender

1,900

Telespeed 1050 Tape Receiver

2,500

Unattended Operation

-

Protected Unattended Operation

-

This equipment is available from Teletype Corporation on a purchase basis only. However,
the same equipment is used in the Dataspeed Type 2 Service offered by AT&T on a rental
basis only. For a description of this service, see Paragraph 3200.51. Pricing for optional features is available on request from Teletype Corporation.

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A'A'

AUERBACH
DATA
.
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

~

6801:01
TELETYPE
TELESPEED 750

AUERBACH
®

TELETYPE TELESPEED 750 EQUIPMENT
(AT&T DATASPEED TYPE 5)

\

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: ...

Tele speed 750 Tape Sender;
Telespeed 750 Tape Receiver;
Dataspeed Type 5 Service.

· 12

Manufacturer: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Teletype Corporation
5555 Touhy Avenue
Skokie, illinois 60076

.13

Basic Function:

read data from paper tape and transmit it over a
voice-band line.
receive data from a voice-band line and punch it
into paper tape.

· 15

Description

;

The Teletype Telespeed 750 equipment line consists of two independent units: a tape sender
and a tape receiver. The two units are available separately, and the sender is available in
either a table-top version or a cabinet-mounted version. In the table-top version, the electronics are placed in a separate wall-box. This equipment is available from Teletype Corporation on a purchase basis only. The Dataspeed Type 5 Service offered by AT&T utilizes
this equipment and is available on a rental basis. Dataspeed Type 5 Service is described in
the section on Common-Carrier Facilities; see Paragraph 3200.51.
Either chadless or fully-punched tape can be used in the Tape Sender, but the tape recreated
by the Tape Receiver is always fully-punched. The Telespeed 750 components have adjustable heads to accommodate 5-level, 11/l6-inch tape or 5-, 6-, 7-, or S-level, I-inch tape.
By special request, 6-level, 7/S-inch Teletypesetter tape with advanced feed holes can be
accommodated.
Data is transmitted in parallel-by-bit, serial-by-character form over a voice-band line at
75 characters per second. A total of eight bits per character is transmitted regardless of
the number of levels in the tape.
Two options are available to provide unattended operation. One option provides the capability
to send or receive data from an unattended terminal with no restrictions. The second option,
the Protected Unattended Operation feature, requires that the unattended terminal receive a
specified data character prior to establishing data communication. With either option, a
connection cannot be established if the terminal is in a non-serviceable state due to equipment malfunctions or lack of power.
All reels mounted on the face of the Dataspeed sender and receiver are 7-1/2 inches in diameter with a core diameter of 1-15/16 inches. The reels are made of .9lear plastic with
removable sides. The capacity of these reels is SOO feet of fully-punched tape or 500 feet of
chadless tape. The supply reel on the tape receiver has a capacity of 3,000 feet.

~
)

· 16

First Delivery: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1964.

· 17

Availability: . • . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . .

approximately 4 months.

.2

CONFIGURATION
Telespeed 750 equipment can be connected to either the public switched telephone network or
to a common-carrier leased voice-band line. The data sets required are specified in Paragraph.72.

6801:02
TELETYPE
TELESPEED 750

Figure 1. The Teletype Telespeed 750 Tape Sender (left)
and Tape Receiver (right) .

.3

INPUT

.31

Prepared Input
Telespeed 750 Tape Sender Input medium: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .•
Quantity of data: . . • . . . • . . . . . . . .
Rated input speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed: . . . . . . • . . . . . • . . .

Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

fully-punched or chadless 11/16-inch or 1-inch
paper tape.
any 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code.
variable.
75 char/sec.
somewhat less than rated speed, depending on
block length.
supply reel can hold 800 feet of fully -punched
paper tape or 500 feet of chadless paper tape.

· 32

Manual Input: ...•••••••.••.•...

no provision.

• 33

Fixed Input: . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .•

no provision.

.34

Transaction Code Input:

no provision.

.35

Message Configuration:

variable number of characters of data; no control characters are used .

. 36

Operating Procedure

· 37

(1)

Load punched tape.

(2)

Establish voice communication and switch to data mode.

(3)

Depress Start button.

Entry of Time and Date: •.•.•...•..

no provisions.

(Cont

N

A

'V

1111

SI

US

?

0

-

/

UNUSED

I
I

DEL

Note: The eighth bit (not shown) is transmitted as even parity by Teletype Models 33 and 35 .

. 44

Output to Printer
Model 33 Page Printer (RO, KSR, and ASR Sets) Output medium: . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .. friction-fed forms, 72 char/line max.
pin-fed forms, 72 char/line max.
Character set: . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . 64 printable characters: ·upper-case alphabetics,
numerics, specials, and control codes.
Rated printing speed: . . . • . . . . • . . .. 10 char/sec max.
Effective speed: . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . somewhat less than rated speed due to operations
such as carriage return, line feed, etc.
Format control: . . . . . . • . . • . . . . . .. through the use of special control codes in the
received data .

.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION:.

even parity is generated and transmitted; no detection facilities except for visual verification of
manual input.
(Contd. )

5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6804:05
TELETYPE MODEL 33

'"
TABLE n~ USASCII CONTROL CODE IDENTIFICATION AND GENERATION (1)
Code

Identity

ACK
BEL
BS
CAN
CR
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
DEL
DLE
EM
ENQ
EOT
ESC
ETB
ETX
FF
FS
GS
HT
LF
NAK
NUL
RS
SI
SO
SOH
STX
SUB
SYN
US
VT

Acknowledge
Bell
Backspace
Cancel
Carriage Return
Device Control
Device Control
Device Control
Device Control (Stop)
Delete
Data Link Escape
End of Medium
Enquiry
End of Transmission
Escape
End of Transmission Block
End of Text
Form Feed
File Separator
Group Separator
Horizontal Tab
Line Feed
Negative Acknowledge
Null
Record Separator
Shift In
Shift Out
Start of Heading
Start of Text
Substitute
Synchronous Idle
Unit Separator
Vertical Tab

Generati n (2)
S
C
L
F
*
G
*
H
*
X
*
M
*
Q
*
R
*
S
*
T
*
Rub-Out
P
*

*
*
*
*
*

*

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

Y

E
D
K
W

C
L
L
M
I
J

U
P
N
0
N
A
B
Z

V
0
K

(1) These control codes are presently generated and interpreted by Model 33 and 35 Teletype
equipment.
(2) Control character generation, in most cases, is performed by simultaneously depressing
the Control (C) key and the appropriate letter (L) key; the Shift (S) key must be depressed
in addition to the control and letter keys where specified. Separate keys are also provided
for Carriage Return, Escape, and Line Feed codes •
•6

CONDITION INDICATORS: . . • • . • . • . ..

.7

DATA TRANSMISSION

.71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed: . . . . . • . . • . .
Transmission method: .••.••••••.••
Transmission code: ••..•...•.•..••
Transmission mode: •..••.••.••..•.
Order of bit transmission: ..••.•.•..•
Synchronization: . • . • • . . . • . . . . ••••

various indicators can be supplied, depending
upon the application •

10 char/sec (110 bits/sec).
serial by bit.
S-level USASCII plus start and stop bits for each
character.
half-duplex or full-duplex.
start bit followed by character bits, low-order
bit first, and stop bits.
start and stop bits are transmitted with each
character. Start pulse is one bit-time in length;
stop pulse is two bit-times in length.

© 1969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/69

6804:06

TELETYPE MODEL 33

.72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set*

Western Union 180 Baud leased
service: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Western Union 180 Baud Data Modem

Bell System or Western Union Type
1006 Data Channel: . . • . • • • . . . . . .
.73

Bell System Data Set 103F or Western Union 180
Baud Data Modem

Transmission Control
Call initiation:. . • . . . . • . • • . . • . • . .
Call reception: •...•••.•••.•....
Functional operations: . . . . . . . . . • • .

manual dialing or signaling.
capable of unattended operation.
carriage return, line feed, bell, horizontal tab,
vertical tab, etc. are initiated by special control codes.

. 74

Multistation Operation:

various control units permit a wide range of
multi station operation techniques. Facilities
provided can range from uncontrolled receiving
by all stations (broadcast operation) to selective
polling and addressing.

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

.9

Model 33
ASR

Component

Model 33
RO

Model 33
KSR

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height with stand (inches)
Weight with stand (pounds)

18.625
18.5
32.875
51

18.625
18.5
32.875
56

22
18.5
32.875
56

Power (KW)
Voltage, ±10%
Frequency (Hz), ±0.45 Hz
Phases

0.092
115
60
1

0.110
115
60
1

0.110
115
60
1

Temperature Range (0 F)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

40-120
0-90
409

40-120
0-90
409

40-120
0-90
682

PRICE DATA
Approximate Purchase
Price**

*

**
5/70

Component or Feature

$

Model 33 RO
Model 33 KSR
Model 33 ASR

500-600
550-650
700-850

In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; see Sections 4620 and 4640 for a current
list of modems available from independent manufacturers of telephone equipment.
This equipment is available from Teletype Corporation on a purchase basis only. However,
the same equipment is provided on a rental basis as part of many of the common-carrier
switched services and multi station leased systems; see Paragraphs 3100. 3 and 3100. 4 in
the Common-Carrier Facilities section.
AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
IA'\.
~

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6805:01
TELETYPE MODEL 35

.UERBACH
®

TELETYPE MODEL 35 LINE

.1

GENERAL

· 11

Identiw: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Model 35 Receive-Only Set (RO).
Model 35 Keyboard Send-Receive Set (KSR).
Model 35 Automatic Send-Receive Set (ASR).

.12

Manufacturer: . • . . . . . . • . . • • . . . • •

Teletype Corporation
5555 Touhy Avenue
Skokie, illinois 60076

· 13

Basic Function: • . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • .

send and receive data over telegraph-grade lines.
Different sets provide input from a keyboard or
punched paper tape, output to printed copy or
punched paper tape, or combinations of these.

· 14

Basic Components
Name: . • • . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . . .

Model number: • . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . .
Function: . • . . . . • . • . • . . . . . . . . . .

. 15

Receive-Only Set.
Model 35 RO.
receives data and prints it.

Name: •.
Model number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function: .' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Keyboard Send-Receive Set.
Model 35 KSR.
transmits data from keyboard input, receives
data and prints it.

Name: . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
Model number: • • • • . . . . . • . . . . • . .
Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Send-Receive Set.
Model 35 ASR.
transmits data from punched paper tape or keyboard input; receives data and punches it into
paper tape or prints it.

Description
The Model 35 Line is one of four main lines of data communications equipment manufactured
by Teletype Corporation. Announced in 1963, the Model 35 equipment uses the 8-level, 11. 0unit USASCII code and is designed for heavy-duty, unlimited usage at a speed of 100 words
per minute. The Model 35 equipment is compatible with the less-expensive, lighter-duty
Teletype Model 33 Line (Report 6804), but is incompatible with the 5-level Teletype Model 28
and Model 32 equipment.
The standard Model 35 Line consists of an RO Set, a KSR Set, and an ASR Set assembled from
the follOWing Model 35 components: a page printer, a manual keyboard, a paper tape reader,
and a paper tape punch. On special order, Teletype will provide other sets assembled from
these components in almost any configuration.
The Model 35 Keyboard Send-Receive Set (KSR) consists of a manual keyboard for originating
messages and a page printer that produces a record, on continuous paper forms, of both incoming and outgoing messages. The four-row keyboard is compatible with standard typewriter
keyboards. Both friction-feed and sprocket-feed platens are available.
The Model 35 Receive-Only Set (RO) contains the same printing and forms-handling mechanism
as the KSR Set, but has no keyboard; it cannot be used to originate messages. No attendant is
needed.
The Model 35 Automatic Send-Receive Set (ASR) combines the keyboard and printing facilities
of the KSR with a paper tape reader and punch. The result is a complete low-speed message

;/69

6805:02

TELETYPE MODEL 35

Figure 1. The Teletype Model 35 ASR Set.

• 15

Description (Contd.)
originating and receiving station in a single compact cabinet. The reader and pWlCh use
standard I-inch, 8-level tape. A mode-switching panel contains controls that permit two
separate operations to be performed at tile same time without interfering with each other
(e. g. , keyboard-activated tape punching in combination with printing of incoming messages).
The Model 35 units can be equipped with dialing units, pushbutton controls, and data sets for
use with telephone lines. They can communicate with unattended remote stations, turning
them on, transmitting messages to them, and then turning them off. An automatic answerback mechanism enables unattended receivers to identify themselves and notify the transmitting station that they are ready to receive messages.

• 16

First Delivery: . • . . . . . . • . . . . • . •

1963.

• 17

Availability: .••.••..•.•..••••.

approximately 4 months.

•2

CONFIGURATION
The RO Set contains a page printer only. The KSR Set contains a page printer and keyboard.
The ASR Set contains a page printer, a keyboard, a punched paper tape reader and a punched
paper tape receiver. Numerous control unit options are available, depending on the application. Other combinations of the basic page printer, keyboard, punch, and reader units can
be obtained from Teletype on special order. Connections to communications facilities are
described in Paragraph. 72.

(Contd. )
5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

fA
lA'
~

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6805:03
TELETYPE MODEL 35

AUERBACH
®

\

.3

INPUT

· 31

Prepared Input
Model 35 Tape Reader (ASR Set only)
Input medium: . . . • • • . . • . . . . • .
Input code: • . . • • . . . . . . . • • • . .
Quantity of data: . • . . . . . . . . . • .
Character set: . • . . . . • . • . . . . . .
Rated input speed: ••..••....•.
Effective speed: . • . . . • • . . . • • . .

· 32

1-inch, fully-punched, 8-level paper tape.
8-level USASCII, see Table I in Report 6804.
variable.
see Table I in Report 6804.
10 char/sec max.
somewhat less than rated speed, depending
on block length.

Manual Input
Model 35 Keyboard (ASR and KSR Sets only)
Method of entry:
Quantity of data: . . . • . . . • • . . . .
Character set:. . . • • . . • . . . . . . .

via 4-row, 45-key keyboard (additional keys
provide special functions).
variable.
96 characters: upper-case letters, digits,
special characters and control codes j see
Table I and Table II in Report 6804.

• 33

Fixed Input: • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .

no provision, except for a 20-character reply
to an "ENQ" (WRU) inquiry; these characters
are set up in the answer-back mechanism
and are usually used to identify the station.

· 34

Transaction Code Input: . . • . . . . . . .

no provision.

.35

Message Configuration: . . . . . . . . . . .

1 to N data characters with control characters
interspersedj control characters are keyed in
or are in the paper tape input .

. 36

Operating Procedure

/

The operating procedure can vary greatly depending on the optional control features installed
and the application. See Paragraphs 3100.31, 3100.32, 3100.41, 3100.42, and 3100.43 for
the manner in which Teletype units are being used in services offered by the common carriers.
.37

Entry of Time and Date:

•4

OUTPUT

.41

Output to Punched Tape

,

no provisions •

Model 35 Punch (ASR Set only)
\,
/

Tape size: . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . .
Tape code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated punching speed: . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed: . . . . • . . . . . . . . . .
Format control: . . . . . • • . . . . . . . .

1-inch, fully-punched, 8-level paper tape.
8-level USASCIIj see Table I in Report 6804.
10 char/sec max.
somewhat less than rated speed, depending on
block length.
none.

©1969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

5/69

6805:04

TELETYPE MODEL 35

.. 44

Output to Printer
Model 33 Page Printer (RO, KSR, and ASR Sets) Output medium: . . . . . . . . . . • . • . .
Character. set: . . • . . . . . . . . • . • . •
Rated printing speed: '.••.•.••...
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . • . . . . •
Format control: . . • . . . • • . . . . . . .

.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION:

even parity is generated and transmitted; no detection facilities except for visual verification
of manual input.

·6

CONDITION INDICATORS: . . • • . • . . ..

various indicators can be supplied, depending
upon the application •

.7

DATA TRANSMISSION

· 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed: . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission method: . . . • . . . . . . . .
Transmission code: .•..•.•.•.••..
Transmission mode: . • . • • . . . . . . . . .
Order of bit transmission: . • . . . . . . . .
Synchronization: . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .

· 72

. 73

10 char/sec (110 bits/sec.)
serial by bit.
S-level USASCII plus start and stop bits for each
character.
half-duplex or full-duplex.
start bit followed by character bits, low-order
bit first, and stop bits.
start and stop bits are transmitted with each
character. Start pulse is one bit-time in
length; stop pulse is two bit-times in length.

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set*

Western Union 180 Baud Data Channel: •.

Western Union 180 Baud Data Modem.

Bell System or Western Union Type
1006 Data Channel: • . . . . . . . .

5/69

friction-fed forms, S5 char/line max.
pin-fed forms, 80 char/line max.
64 printable characters: upper-case alphabetics.
numerics and specials; see Table I in Report
6804.
10 char/sec max.
somewhat less than rated speed due to operations such as carriage return, line feed, etc.
through the use of special control codes in the
received data .

Transmission Control

Bell System Data Set 103F or Western Union 180
Baud Data Modem .

Call initiation: • . . . . • . • . • . • . . . . • •
Call reception: ...•....•••.•.•.•
Functional Operations . . . . • . • . . . . . •

manual dialing or signaling.
capable of unattended operation.
carriage return, line feed, bell, horizontal tab,
vertical tab, etc. are initiated by special control codes.

.74

Multistation Operation: . . . . . • . . . . • •

various control units permit a wide range of
multistation operation techniques. Facilities
provided can range from uncontrolled receiving by all stations (broadcast operation) to
selective polling and addreSSing.

*

In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier

communications consultant.
AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
a

AUERBACH
DATA
CDMMUNICATlDNS
REPDRTS

AUERBACH

6805:05
TELETYPE MODEL 35

'"
.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model 35

Rio

Model 35
KSR

Model 35
ASR

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height with stand (inches)
Weight with stand (pounds)

20
24
38.5
164

20
24
38.5
180

40
24
38.5
320

Power(KW)
Voltage, ±10%
Frequency (Hz), ±O. 45 Hz
Phases

0.116
115
60
1

0.120
115
60
1

0.207
115
60
1

Temperature Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

40-120
0-90
409

40-120
0-90
409

40-120
0-90
682

Component

.9

PRICE DATA
Component or Feature

Model 35 RO
Model 35 KSR
Model 35 ASR

Approximate Purchase
Price*
$

1,300-1,400
1,600-1,800
2,600-2,800

* This equipment is available from Teletype Corporation on a purchase basis only. However,
the same equipment is provided on a rental basis as part of many of the common-carrier
switched services and multi station leased systems; see Paragraphs 3100. 3 and 3100. 4 in
the Common-Carrier Facilities section.

© 1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/70

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6806:01
TELETYPE MODEL 37

®

TELETYPE MODEL 37

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity: . . . . .

Model 37 Receive-Only Set (RO).
Model 37 Keyboard Send-Receive Set (KSR).
Model 37 Automatic Send-Receive Set (ASR) .

. 12

Manufacturer:...................

Teletype Corporation
5555 Touhy Avenue
Skokie, Illinois 60076

.13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . ..

send and receive data over telegraph-grade lines.
Different sets provide input from a keyboard
or punched paper tape, output to printed copy
or punched paper tape, or combinations of
these .

. 14

Basic Components

\I

Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . • . . .
Model number: . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function: . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . • .

Receive-Only Set.
Model 37 RD.
receives data and prints it.

Name: ., . . . • . • • . . . . . . • . . .
Model number: . . . . . . . . • . • . • . . • .•
Function: . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .

Keyboard Send-Receive Set.
Model 37 KSR.
transmits data from keyboard input, receives
data and prints it.

Name:

Automatic Send-Receive Set.
Model 37 ASR.
transmits data from punched paper tape or keyboard input; receives data and punches it into
paper tape or prints it •

)

......•.•....•......•..

Model number: . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Function: . , . • • • . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . .

. 15

Description
The Model 37 Line is one of five main lines of data communications equipment manufactured
by Teletype Corporation. Announced in 1966, the Model 37 equipment uses a 7-level, 10unit code and is designed for heavy-duty, unlimited usage at speeds up to 150 words per
minute.
The standard Model 37 Line consists of an RO Set, a KSR Set, and an ASR Set assembled
from the following Model 37 components: a page printer, a manual keyboard, a paper tape
reader, and a paper tape punch. On special order, Teletype will provide other sets assembled
from these components in almost any configuration.

;
/

The Model 37 Keyboard Send-Receive Set (KSR) consists of a manual keyboard for originating
messages and a page printer that produces a record, on continuous paper forms, of both
incoming and outgoing messages. The four-row keyboard is compatible with standard typewriter keyboards. Both friction-feed and sprocket-feed platens are available.
The Model 37 Receive-Only Set (RO) contains the same printing and forms-handling mechanism
as the KSR Set, but has no keyboard; it cannot be used to originate messages. An attendant
is not required.

6806:02
TELETYPE MODEL 37

Figure 1. The Teletype Model 37 ASR Set .
• 15

Description (Contd.)
The Model 37 Automatic Send-Receive Set (ASR) combines the keyboard and printing facilities
of the KSR with a paper tape reader and punch. The result is a complete low-speed message
originating and receiving station in a single compact cabinet. The paper tape reader and
punch use standard 1-inch, 5 to 8-level tape. A mode-switching panel contains controls that
permit two separate operations to be performed at the same time without interfering with
each other (e. g., keyboard-activated tape punching in combination with printing of incoming
messages). The Model 37 units can be equipped with dialing units, pushbutton controls,
and data sets for use with telephone lines. They can communicate with unattended remote
stations, turning them on, transmitting messages to them, and then turning them off. An
automatic answerback mechanism enables unattended receivers to identify themselves and
notify the transmitting station that they are ready to receive messages.
Four features distinguish the Model 37 from earlier Teletype sets (see Reports 6802 through
6805):
(1) It is faster; it can receive and print data at up to 15 characters per second.
(2) It can generate and print all of the 128 character codes contained in the U. S. A.
Standard Code for Information Interchange (USASCn, for!llerly ASCII).
(3) The appearance and arrangement of the keyboard have been altered to conform
to that of a conventional typewriter, as shown in the photograph.
(4) Forward and reverse line feeds can be executed a half-line at a time.
The capability for transmitting and receiving 128 different code combinations, including both
upper-case and lower-case letters, will greatly aid in applications such as on-line text
editing, which is now being implemented in some time-sharing computer arrangements. The
Model 37 will also be available for operation with any 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code, including
odd or even parity, and can print in two colors if desired.

(Contd.)
5/69

AUERBACH Data

Communi~ations

Reports

A

AUERBACH
OATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

lA'
~

6806:03
TELETYPE MODEL 37

AUERBACH
®

. 15

Description (Contd.)
Other features provided with the new keyboard include two Shift keys, two Control keys, a
Shift Lock key, and elimination of the need for a Repeat key. Characters can be repeated by
depressing the appropriate keys below their normal down positions. Control codes can be
generated from either the upper or lower case shift. Since line feeds can be executed a halfline at a time in either direction, scientific symbols having subscripts and superscripts, as
well as charts, can be printed.
The revised keyboard reduces the amount of training required to convert a typist to a teletypewriter operator. It also makes it more convenient to use the Model 37 for off-line copy
preparation since an ordinary typist can operate it.

. 16

First Delivery: . . .

. 17

Availability: . . . . . .

.2

CONFIGURATION

0

1968 .

•••••

6 months .

The RO Set contains a page printer only The KSR Set contains a page printer and a keyboard.
The ASR Set contains a page printer, a keyboard, a punched paper tape reader and a punched
paper tape receiver. Numerous control unit options are available, depending on the application. Other combinations of the basic page printer, keyboard, punch, and reader units can
be obtained from Teletype on special order. Connections to communications facilities are
described in Paragraph .72 .
0

.3

INPUT

.31

Prepared Input
Model 37 Paper Tape Reader (ASR Set only) Input medium: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantity of data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated input speed: . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed: . . • . . . . . . . .

. 32

I-inch, fully-punched, 8-level paper tape.
7-level USASCIIplus even parity; see Table 1.
variable.
see Table 1.
15 char/sec max.
somewhat less than rated speed, depending on
block length .

Manual Input
Mode137 Keyboard (ASR and KSR Sets only) Method of entry:
Quantity of data:
Character set:

\

via 4-row, 64-key keyboard (additional keys provide special functions).
variable.
128 characters: upper-case and lower-case
letters, digits, special characters, and control
codes; see Tables I and II.

.33

Fixed Input: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

no provision, except for a 20-character reply to
an "ENQ" inquiry; these characters are set up
in the answer-back mechaLism and are usually
used to identify the station .

. 34

Transaction Code Input: . . . . . . . . . . . .

no provision.

6806:04
TELETYPE MODEL 37

TABLE I: USASCn (UNITED STATES OF AMERICA STANDARD CODE
FOR INFORMATION INTERCHANGE)
Bits 7, 6, 5
Bits
4, 3, 2, 1

000

001

010

011

100

0000

NUL

DLE

SP

0

0001

SOH

DC1

!

0010

STX

DC2

0011

ETX

0100

EOT

0101

101

110

@

P

"-

P

1

A

Q

a

q

"

2

B

R

b

r

DC3

#

3

C

S

c

s

$

4

D

T

d

t

ENQ

DC4
NAK

%

5

E

U

e

u

0110

ACK

SYN

&

0111

BEL

1000
1001

111

6

F

V

f

v

ETB

,

7

G

W

g

w

BS

CAN

(

8

H

X

h

x

HT

EM

)

9

I

Y

i

:

J

Z

j

Y
z

1010

LF

SUB

.*

1011

VT

ESC

;

K

[

k

{

1100

FF

FS

+
,

<

L

1

I

1101

CR

GS

-

=

M

']

m

}

1110

SO

RS

>

N

A

n

'V

1111

SI

US

?

0

-

0

/

I

DEL

Note: The eighth bit (not shown) is always transmitted as even parity by
Teletype Models 33, 35, and 37 •
. 35

Message Configuration: . • . • • . . . . . • ••

• 36

Operating Procedure

1 to N data characters with control characters
interspersed; control characters are keyed in or
are.in the paper tape input .

The operating procedure can vary greatly depending on the optional control features installed
and the application. See Paragraphs 3100.31, 3100.32, 3100.41, 3100.42, and 3100.43 for
the manner in which Teletype units are being used in services offered by the common carriers •
. 37

Entry of Time and Date: • . . . • . • . . • ..

•4

OUTPUT

.41

Output to Punched Paper Tape

no provisions •

Model 37 Punch (ASR Set only) Tape size: ••.••....•.•••••••..
Tape oode: . ~ . • . . • • . . • . . . . . . . "
Rated punching speed: . • • • • • • • • • • ..
Effective speed: . • • • . • . . . • . • • • • .•
Format control: • . • • • • • • . . . • . . . ..

1-inch, fully-punched, 8-level paper tape.
7-level USASCII plus even parity.
15 char/sec max.
somewhat less than rated speed, depending on
block length.
none.
(Contd.)

5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6806:05

TELETYPE MODEL 37

@

TABLE ll: USASCII CONTROL CODE IDENTIFICATION AND GENERATION(l)
Code
ACK
BEL
BS
CAN
CR
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
DEL
DLE
EM
ENQ
EOT
ESC
ETB
ETX
FF
FS
GS
HT
LF
NAK
NUL
RS
SI
SO
SOH
STX
SUB
SYN
US
VT

Generation(2)
L
S
C

I

Identity
Acknowledge
Bell
Backspace
Cancel
Carriage Return
Device Control
Device Control
Device Control
Device Control (Stop)
Delete
Data Link Escape
End of Medium
Enquiry
End of Transmission
Escape
End of Transmission Block
End of Text
Form Feed
File Separator
Group Separator
Horizontal Tab
Line Feed
Negative Acknowledge
Null
Record Separator
Shift In
Shift Out
Start of Heading
Start of Text
Substitute
Synchronous Idle
Unit Separator
Vertical Tab

I

*
*

F
G

*

X

*
*
*
*

Q
R
S
T

*
*
*
*

P

BS

Return

Delete
Y

E
D

Prefix

*
*
*
*
*

W

C
L

-

TAB
LF

*

NUL

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

U

0
N
A
B
Z

V

-

K

(1) These control codes are presently generated and interpreted by the Model 37
Teletype equipment.
(2) Control character generation, in most cases, is performed by simultaneously
depressing the Control (C) key and the appropriate letter (L) key; the Shift (S)
key must be depressed in addition to the con trol and letter keys where specified. Some functions are provided by discrete keys.
.44

\

Output to Printer
Model 37 Page Printer (RO, KSR, and ASR Sets) Output medium:
Character set:
Rated printing speed: . • • . • . . • • • . • .

friction-fed forms, 82 char/line max.; pin-fed
forms, 84 char/line max.
94 printable characters: upper-case and lowercase alphabetics, numerics and specials; see
Table 1.
15 char/sec max.

© 1969 AUERBACH Corooration and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

6806:06
TELETYPE MODEL 37

.44

Output to Printer (Contd.)
Effective speed:

somewhat less than rated speed due to operations such as carriage return, line feed, etc.
through the use of special control codes in the
received data .

Format control:
.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION:.

even parity accompanies each character generated from keyboard; visual verification of manual input .

.6

CONDITION INDICATORS: . . • . . . • . . ..

various indicators can be supplied, depending
upon the application .

.7

DATA TRANSMISSION

. 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed: . . . . . . . . . • .
Transmission method: . . . . . . . • . . . . .
Transmission code: . . . . • • • • . . . • . . .
Transmission mode:
Order of bit transmission:
Synchronization: . . . . . • • . . . . • . . . • .

. 72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set*

Bell System or Western Union Type
1006 Data Channel (150 bits/sec): • . . • •.
. 73

Western Union 180 Baud Data Modem or Bell
System Data Set 103F .

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . . • • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call reception: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional Operations: . • . . . . . . • . . . .

. 74

15 char/sec (150 bits/sec.).
serial by bit.
7-level USASCII plus even parity, start, and
stop bits for each character. (11 bits/char.)
Simplex, half-duplex, or full-duplex depending
on model.
start bit followed by character bits, low-order
bit first, and stop bits.
asynchronous; start and stop bits are transmitted
with each character. Start pulse is one bit-time
in length; stop pulse is two bit-times in length .

Multistation Operation: .....•.•••.•..

manual dialing or signaling.
capable of unattended operation.
carriage return, line feed, bell, horizontal tab,
vertical tab, etc. are initiated by special control codes.
various control units permit a wide range of
multistation operation techniques. Facilities
provided can range from uncontrolled receiving
by all stations (broadcast operation) to selective polling and addressing.

*In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant.
(Contd. )

5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

lA'

r&.Jl!

6806:07
TELETYPE MODEL 37

.,

AUERBACH

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model 37
RO

Model 37
KSR

Model 37
ASR

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height with stand (inches)
Weight with stand (pounds)

32.5
24.5
36.25
221

32.5
27.5
36.25
214

44.5
27.5
36.25
340

Power(KW)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phases

0.200
115
60
1

0.300
115
60
1

0.550
115
60
1

40-120
0-90
409

40-120
0-90
409

40-120
0-90
682

Component

Temperature Range (0 F)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU /hr)
.9

PRICE DATA

Component or Feature
Model 37 RO
Model 37 KSR
Model 37 ASR

Ap'prmamate
Purcfiase Price *

$

1,977-2,162
2,325
3,870

* This

equipment is available from Teletype Corporation on a purchase basis only. However,
the same equipment is provided on a rental basis as part of many of the common-carrier
switched services and multi station leased systems; see Paragraphs 3100.3 and 3100.4 in
the Common-carrier Facilities section.

© 1970 AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/70

fA.
~

.

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6807:01
TELETYPE PUSH BUTTON
DATA GENERATOR
TELETYPE PUSH BUTTON DATA GENERATOR

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity: . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . • . . Push Button Data Generator (PBDG) •

• 12

Manufacturer: • . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . • Teletype Corporation
5555 Touhy Avenue
Skokie, Illinois 60078 .

. 13

Basic Function: • • . • • . . . . . . . . . • . . . . generates 1 to 24 characters of fixed data per
pushbutton .

. 15

Description
The Teletype Push Button Data Generator (PBDG) is a novel unit designed to facilitate the transmission of fixed data such as addresses, code numbers, identifications, and part order numbers.
The basic PBDG unit contains 12 nonlighted pushbuttons. Depression of each button can cause
from 1 to 24 characters of data to be generated. The fixed data is set up in the unit by changeable wiring for each pushbutton. Any number of basic 12-button modules can be combined to
provide unlimited fixed message transmission capabilities.
The unit can transmit either a 5-level or 8-level code; code changes are accomplished by
changing diode matrix cards. The fixed message can be automatically interrupted to allow
entry of variable data from an associated keyboard (teletypewriter), after which the remainder
of the fixed message is automatically transmitted.
The PBDG can also be used in conjunction with a Teletype teleprinter. Up to two modules (24
pushbuttons) can be incorporated into the housing of the printer console, as shown in the photograph on the next page. Additional units require a separate cabinet. Cabinets are available for
accommodating up to eight modules (96 pushbuttons).
The PBDG can also respond to control codes in incoming messages and transfer the fixed data
to the associated printer unit. This is particularly advantageous when receiving data in a fixed
format; the PBDG can be programmed to supply the header information and thus reduce the
amount of information that needs to be transmitted by the remote facility.

Figure 1. Teletype Push Button Data Generator
mounted in the cabinet of a Model 33 KSR Set.

49

© 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/67

A

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

lA.'

~

6808:01
TELETYPE INKTRONIC

AUERBACH
®

TELETYPE INKTRONIC LINE

.1

GENERAL

• 11

Identity: ...

Teletype Inktronic Receive-Only Set (RO).
Teletype Inktronic Keyboard Send-Receive Set
(KSR) .

• 12

Manufacturer:...................

Teletype Corporation
5555 Toughy Avenue
Skokie, Illinois 60076 .

. 13

Basic Function: . . . . • . . . . . . . . . • . .•

print data received locally from a computer (direct connection) or remotely over a voice-band
line; print data entered at keyboard while sending it over voice-grade line .

. 15

Description
The Teletype Inktronic RO and KSR Sets, the first members of a new high-speed non-impact
line of printers, electrostatically deflect successive electrically-charged jets of ink onto
standard teletypewriter paper to form 120 characters per second, or 1200 words per minute;
see Figure 1. This rapid printing rate, which is roughly twelve times that of most mechanical
terminals, and the virtually noiseless operation of the equipment are both made possible by
the elimination of nearly all moving mechanical parts and the absence of mechanical impact.
Control information that shapes the character patterns traced by the tiny ink jets is stored
in a transformer-core memory system (core-rope translator). Any number of alphanumeric
characters up to 64, including space can be stored, and in accordance with the specified line
code the translator will space them at up to 80 characters per line and provide automatic
line-feed carriage return after the 80th (or last) character if desired. An option that holds
the maximum number of characters to 72 is available. The horizontal and vertical spacing is
ten characters per inch and six lines per inch respectively. The memory core, or "font", can
be replaced in the field if transmission in a different language or symbol set is desired.
When the machines are printing 80-character lines at the rate of 1200 words per minute, a
standard 400-foot roll of 8. 5-inch-wide paper will last about five hours; a pint of the special
ink will suffice for roughly 200 rolls of paper. Although multiple copies cannot be produced,
reproductions can be made with office copiers at no loss of definition.
The Inktronic KSR Set incorporates a four-row keyboard similar to that of a conventional
typewriter, and as easy to operate. The complete 128-character standard USASCII code set
can be generated from the keyboard. Controls are provided for on-line, real-time communication with a computer as well as for tape-to-tape monitoring, straight computer printout,
and communication with other terminals.
The Inktronic RO Set also can be used for computer printout, either local or remote, or as a
monitor for tape-to-tape systems such as those employing Teletype Telespeed equipment with
operating speeds of 750, 1050, or 1200 words per minute, or as a terminal for communicating
over voice-grade channels. When used remotely, the RO operates in the simplex mode using
a voice-band line.

© f969AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

5/69

6808:02
TELETYPE INKTRONIC

Figure 1. The Teletype Inktronic RO Set .
• 15

Description (Contd.)
A noteworthy characteristic of the Inktronic Printers is their unrestricted message format.
Unlike most high-speed printers, which normally store characters in a buffer until printing
them simultaneously to produce a full print line, the Inktronic Printer can print each character as it is received. It can also intermingle short and long printed lines without the use of
"fill" characters.
As can be seen from Figure 2, the principle of Teletype Inktronic printing resembles that of
an electrostatic oscilloscope. The significant difference is that the electron beam of the
oscilloscope is replaced in the Printer with a stream of negatively charged ink particles.
These particles are electrostatically deflected to trace each character on paper in a manner
corresponding to the action of an electron beam tracing patterns on the oscilloscope phosphorcoated face. A series of liquid-ink jets are drawn from the ink-supply nozzle by high-potential
electrical pulses applied between the valving electrode (in proximity with the nozzle) and the
ink supply. The ink jets are deflected first vertically and then horizontally by varying electrical potentials across each pair of deflection electrodes. Interlinking black dots are thus
traced to form the desired characters. The nozzles and the valving and deflection electrodes
are, of course, completely stationary. This non-impact printing technique limits the printed
output to one copy, but results in greater reliability, as well as in faster and quieter operation, compared with conventional teleprinters.
The Printers use a friction-feed platen. According to the company, sprocket feed will also
become available. Electronic and mechanical assembles are of modular construction to
simplify maintenance. Extensive use of solid-state integrated circuits helps reduce the size,
weight, and cost of the equipment.
(Contd.)

5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6808:03
TELETYPE INKTRONIC

\UERBACH
®

Figure 2.
. 15

Teletype Inktronic Printing Technique .

Description (C ontd.)
The RO Set utilizes either 5-level, 10-unit Baudot code or 7-level, 10-unit USASCII code,
plus parity. The KSR set utilizes only the 7-level, 10-unit USASCII code.
The RO Set is available with a parallel communications interface compatible with the Bell
System Data Set 402D, or with a serial communications interface .

. 16

First Delivery: • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . ..

December, 1968 (RO Set).
First quarter, 1970 (KSR Set) .

. 17

Av.ailability: . • . . . . . . . . • . • • . . . .

About 6 months (RO Set) .

•2

CONFIGURATION
The RO Set contains a page printer, a transformer-core memory, and associated electronic
circuits.
The KSR Set contains a page printer, a transformer-core memory, associated electronic
circuits, and a four-row keyboard. Numerous control unit options are available, depending
on the application. Connections to communications facilities are described in Paragraph. 72 .

.3

INPUT

. 31

Prepared Input:

.32

Manual Input

no provision .

Inktronic Keyboard (KSR Set only) via 4-row, 64-key keyboard (additional keys provide special functions).
variable.
128 characters: upper- and lower-case alphabetics, numerics, special characters, and
control codes; see Table I in Report 6806 .

Method of entry:
Quantity of data:
Character set:

. 33

Fixed Input: • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . , . . . .

no provision, but a 14-bit binary identification
code can be transmitted by the RO Set to initiate a transmission.

© 1969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

I:;/t::Q

6808:04

TELETYPEINKTRONIC

.34

Transaction Code Input:

no provision.

.35

Message Configuration:

1 to N data characters with interspersed control
characters keyed in .

. 36

Operating Procedure
Both RO and KSR Sets provide straightforward controls for function selection, namely, tapeto-tape monitoring, direct computer printout, and in the case of the KSR model, real-time
computer communications. Operation of the KSR keyboard resembles that of a conventional
typewriter.

.37

Entry of Time and Date:

.4

OUTPUT

.44

Output Printer

no provision.

Inktronic RO and KSR Sets Output medium: . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . •.

Friction-fed forms, 72 (optional) or 80 char/line
max.

Character Set Baudot (RO Set only):
USAscn (RO or KSR Set): . . . . . . . . .
Rated printing speed: .•...
Effective speed: . . . . . . . .

Format control: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION:.

.6

CONDITION INDICATORS

58 printable characters: upper-case alphabetics,
numerics, and special characters; see Report
6802 Table I.
64 printable characters: upper-case alphabetics,
numerics, and special characters; see Report
6804 Table 1.
120 char/sec max.
slightly less than rated speed due to operations
such as carriage return and line feed, or reduced to limit set by transmission rate. Restricted to 75 char/sec when Bell System Data
set 402D or equivalent used.
through the use of special control codes in the
received data .
even parity accompanies each character generated from keyboard; visual verification of
manual input .

The Printers have six indicator lamps to indicate the following conditions of the equipment:
BRAKE (lamp and switch) : . . . . .
TRANSMIT-START:

..........

depressing switch interrupts supervisory channel and signals that transmission should stop.
when depressed, discrete call generator is activated to signal for start of transmission.

PRINTER ON: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

when depressed, printer motor and high-voltage
circuits are energized.

LOW PAPER ALARM : . . . . . . . .

indicates low paper supply.

PAPER ADVANCE: . . . . . . . . . .

initiates repetitive paper feeding action.

READY:

interlock and paper alarm are in ready state
and printer can operate.

....•..•...•.....

(Contd.)

5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

fA
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
CDMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6808:05

TELETYPE INKTRONIC

®

.7

DATA TRANSMISSION

. 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed: . . • • . . . . . . .
Transmission method: . . . . • . . . . . . . .

120 char/sec (1200 bits/sec).
serial by bit or parallel by bit, serial by character depending on communications interface.

Transmission code RO Set: . • . . . . . . . . . .

KSR Set: . . • • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission mode: . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
Order of bit transmission: . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronization: . . . • • . . • . . • . . • . . .

. 72

Connection to Communication Lines
Communications Line
Bell System or Western Union
Type 3002 Data Channel
(1200 bits/sec): • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . •

. 73

5-level, 10-unit Baudot (each character includes
two start and three stop bits) or 7-level,
10-unit USASCII (each character includes even
parity and unity start and stop bits).
7-level, 10-unit USASCII (each character includes even parity and unity start and stop bits.
simplex (RO) or half-duplex (KSR).
start bit(s) followed by character bits, low-order
bit first, and stop bits.
asynchronous; 5-level, 10-unit Baudot code includes two start and three stop bits; 7-level,
10-unit USASCII code includes unity start and
stop bits. When the parallel communications
interface is used, start and stop bits are not
employed .

Data Set*

Western Union 1200 Baud Data Modem or Bell
System Data Set 202D.

Bell System or Western Union
Type 3002 Data Channel
(75 char/sec): . • • . • . • . . . . . . . . • • • .

Bell System Data Set 402D.

Public Telephone Network
(1200 bits/sec): ..••••••.•...••.•.
(75 char/sec): ..••••..•••..••.•.

Bell System Data Set 202C.
Bell System Data Set 402D .

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . •. Manual dialing or signaling.
Call reception: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Capable of unattended operation.
Functional operations: • . • . . . . . . . . • .. Carriage return, line feed, bell, horizontal tab,
vertical tab, and so on are initiated by special
control codes .

. 74

Multistation Operation: . . . . • . . . . . . .. various techniques and optional accessories are
available for selective polling and addressing.
*In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant.

tel 1 Qj:;Q AIII'"RRA~I-I ~nrnnr,.tinn "nrl AIII'"RRA~I-I Infn In"

6808:06
TELETYPE INKTRONIC

.8

.9

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component

Inktronic
RO

Inktronic
KSR

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height with stand (inches)
Weight with stand (lbs.)
Power (KW)
Voltage, ±0.5Hz
Frequency, (Hz) to.5 Hz
Phases
Temperature Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTV/hr)

18
27
47
325
0.600
115
60
1
40-110
0-95
1800

36
29
33
350
0.600
115
60
1
40-110
0-95
1800

PRICE DATA
Component or Feature

Purchase Price, $
(approximate) *

Inktronic RO Serial Interface
Parallel Interface
Inktronic KSR

5450
5300
5800

*This equipment is available from Teletype Corp. on a purchase basis only. However, this
equipment is available on a rental basis as part of many of the common-carrier switched
services and multistation leased systems; see Paragraphs 3100.3 and 3100.4 in the Common-Carrier Facilities section.

5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

\UERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6850:01
ULTRONIC MT 3000

•
ULTRONIC SYSTEMS MT 3000 MAGNETIC TAPE TERMINAL

.1

GENERAL

· 11

Identity: . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . • . • . . . . . MT 3000 Magnetic Tape Terminal.

· 12

Manufacturer: . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . • • Ultronic Systems Corporation
Mt. Laurel Industrial Park
Moorestown, New Jersey 08057

.13

Basic Function: . . . • . . . . • . . . • • . . . . . reads data from magnetic tape and transmits it
over a voice-band or broad-band line; receives
data from a voice-band or broad-band line and
records it on magnetic tape •

. 14

Basic Units
Name: . . . . . . . • . • . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . Magnetic Tape Terminal.
Model number: . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . MT 3000-7.
FUllction: . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • transmission or reception of magnetic-tape data;
7 -track tape format is compatible with IBM 729
Series Magnetic Tape Units.
Name: . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • • • . . . • • . . Magnetic Tape Terminal.
Model number: . . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . MT 3000-9.
Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . transmission or reception of magnetic-tape data;
9-track tape format is compatible with IBM 2400
Series Magnetic Tape Units.

· 15

Description
The MT 3000 Magnetic Tape Terminal can transmit or receive data over a common-carrier
leased voice- or broad-band line or the public sw.itched telephone network. The terminal
operates in half-duplex mode and is used to communicate with a remote MT 3000 Magnetic
Tape Terminal or an equivalent device. A wide range of transmitting speeds, including 1200,
2000, 2400, and 40,800 bits per second, can be switch-selected.
The MT 3000 is available in two models. The MT 3000-7 contains a 7-track tape drive and is
compatible with the IBM 729 tape format. The MT 3000-9 contains a 9-track tape drive and
is compatible with the IBM 2400 Series tape format.
The MT 3000 Magnetic Tape Terminalis a buffered terminal consisting of a magnetic tape handler,
a basic 1024-character buffer memory, and circuits for both transmitting and receiving data.
Code translation is not provided. Any 6-1evel (MT 3000-7) or 8-level (MT 3000-9) code can be
handled.
The MT 3000 provides two switch-selected recording densities. Recording densities can be
specified to be either 200 and 556 bits per inch or 556 and 800 bits per inch. The tape speed
is 36 inches per second (standard) or 45 inches per second (optional). The MT 3000 can operate as a transmit terminal or a receive terminal. Mode selection is controlled by a selector
switch on the operator panel. Data is read from or written on magnetic tape in the form of
variable-length records. Record length is limited only by the memory buffer size of the transmitting or receiving terminal.
When the MT 3000 operates in the transmit mode, data is read from magnetic tape, checked
for correct character and longitudinal parity, and transferred to the buffer memory. When the
buffer memory contains a complete record, the record is transferred from the buffer memory,
serialized, and transmitted. The transmitted record includes odd or even character parity
and a longitudinal parity character generated from the transmitted data. Control characters
are automatically inserted into each record prior to transmission.
When the MT 3000 operates in the receive mode, data received serially by bit is assembled,
checked for correct character and longitudinal parity, and transferred to the buffer memory.
Data is transferred from the buffer memory and written on tape immediately after the last
character of the transmitted record is received. Control characters are stripped from the
data written on tape. A read-after-write check is performed on the written data.

C 196TAUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

8/67

6850:02
ULTRONIC MT 3000

Figure L

Ultronic MT 3000 Magnetic Tape Terminal

The receiving terminal acknowledges each record received by responding to the transmitting
terminal with a positive or negative reply message. When a data transmission error is detected, the receiving terminal sends a negative reply immediately after the last character of
the the transmitted record is received. The positive reply occurs after the received record
has been written on tape and the read-after-write check has been satisfied. Operator inter- .
vention is required after three unsuccessful attempts to write a correctly received record on
tape. In this case the record is not acknowledged, the transmitting terminal times out, and
the operator is alerted.
(Contd. )
8/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A..
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6850:03
ULTRONIC MT 3000

The transmitting terminal transfers the next record from tape to the buffer memory immediately
after the last character of the previous record is transmitted. The record is not transmitted
until the transmitting terminal receives a positive reply from the receiving terminal which indicates that the previously transmitted record has been successfully written on tape.
A negative acknowledgemenl is recognized by the transmitting terminal as a request to retransmit a previously transmitted record. The transmitting terminal responds to the negative acknowledgement only after the next record has been completely transferred to the buffer memory.
The terminal responds by backspacing the tape to the beginning of the previous record; the record is then transferred to the buffer memory and retransmitted to the receiving terminal. Retransmission is automatically executed up to three times before operator intervention is required.
Optional features for the MT 3000 Terminal include:
•

Master Terminal Data Director - allows an MT 3000-9 Terminal to select records
for transmission based on an address header contained in each record. Selection is
accomplished via switches located on the operator panel; only the records containing
the selected address are transmitted. Up to 10 different address codes can be specified.

•

Record Counter - provides a digital counter located on the operator panel; the number of successful transmissions is accumulated by this counter. The basic counter
capacity is 1024 and can be expanded. This feature is standard in the MT 3000-9.

• Increased Tape Speed - allows the MT 3000-7 or MT 3000-9 to operate with a tape
speed of 45 inches per second.
•

Optional Buffer Size - allows the MT 3000-7 or MT 3000-9 to employ a buffer other
than the 1024-character buffer included in the basic terminal. Buffer sizes available are 512, 2048, 4096, or 8192 character positions .

• 16

First Delivery: •.•••.••.•...•.•••• June 1964 •

• 17

Availability:..................... 4 to 5 months •

.2

CONFIGURATION
Both models of the MT 3000 Magnetic Tape Terminal include:
•
•

A magnetic tape drive,
Up to 8192 characters of buffer memory, and

•

Control circuits necessary to transmit and receive data.

Both MT 3000 models operate at tape speeds of 36 inches per second (basic) or 45 inches per
second (optional). The standard buffer size is 1024 characters; optional buffer sizes include
512, 2048, 4096, and 8192 characters.
See Paragraph . 72 for the standard communications facilities that can be used and the data
sets required •
.3
• 31

INPUT
---

Prepared Input

MT 3000-7 Magnetic Tape Terminal Input medium: ••.••..•••••.•••..• 0.5-inch magnetic tape recorded at 200, 556, or
800 bits/inch; 7-track tape format is compatible
with IBM 729 Series Magnetic Tape Units.
Input code: . . . • . . • . . . • • . • . . . . . . . any 6-level code; 6 data bits plus one parity bit
per character; even or odd parity can be switchselected.
Quantity of data: .....•••..•••.••.• 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, or 8192 characters per
record, depending on buffer size.
Rated input speed At 36 inches/sec tape speed and
the following recording densities 200 bits/inch: ••••.•.•.•••••.• 7200 char/sec.
556 bits/inch: ••••••.••••.•••• 20,700 char/sec.
800 bits/inch: ••••.••••••••••• 28,800 char/sec.
C 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/67

6850:04
ULTRONIC MT 3000

.31

Prepared Input (Contd.)
At 45 inches/sec tape speed (optional)
and the following recording densities 200 bits/inch: . . . . . . . • . • . • • . . •
556 bits/inch: •••......•.•.•.•
800 bits/inch: •..••..•••.•••..
Effective speed:. • • . • . . . . . . • . . . . .•

9000 char/sec.
25,000 char/sec.
36,000 char/sec.
varies widely depending on the communications
facility, transmission speed, and record size.
Comments: • . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . high or low recording density can be switch-selected on. operator panel; only two recording
densities per tape terminal are provided (200/
556 or 556/800 bits per inch).

• 32

MT 3000-9 Magnetic Tape Terminal Input medium: .••.•••...•••.•••.• 0.5-inch magnetic tape recorded at 200, 556, or
800 bits/inch; 9-track tape format is compatible
with IBM 2400 Series Magnetic Tape Units.
Input code: • . . • • • • • • • . . . • • . • • . • . any S-level code; 8 data bits per character; even
or odd parity can be switch-selected.
Quantity of data: .•.•.•...•.•••.•.• 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, or 8192 characters per
record, depending on buffer size.
Rated input speed At 36 inches/sec tape speed and
the following recording densities 200 bits/inch: . . • • . . . . . . . . . . • . 7200 char/sec.
556 bits/inch: ...••..•.•.•...• 20,700 char/sec.
SOO bitS/inch: • • . . . . . • . . . . . . • • 28,SOO char/sec.
At 45 inches/sec tape speed (optional)
and the following recording densities 200 bits/inch: •...••••...•...• 9000 char/sec.
556 bits/inch: . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . 25,000 char/sec.
SOO bits/inch: .••..••..•....•• 36,000 char/sec.
Effective speed: ..••••.••.•..••.•. varies widely depending on the communications
facility, transmission speed, and record size.
Comments: .•••.•.•.•.•.••....•• high or low recording density can be switch-selected on operator panel; only two recording
densities per tape terminal are provided (200/
556 or 556/S00 bits per inch) .
Manual Input: •.•.••..••..•••...••• no provision •

• 33

Fixed Input: •••••••.••.••.•.••..• no provision •

• 34

Transaction Code Input: .••••.•••••.•• no provision •

• 35

Message Configuration
Data is transmitted in variable-length records under control of the transmitting device. Record
length is limited only by the transmitting or receiving memory buffer capacity; the standard
buffer size is 1024 character positions. Each data record includes a Start-of-Message (SOM)
character, a Start-of-Record (SOR) character, data, an End-of-Message (EOM) character, and
a Longitudinal Parity Check (LPC) character. The SOR character is followed by a numeric one
or two which identifies the record sequence. Each transmitted record is acknowledged by a
positive or negative reply sent by the receiving terminal. The reply sequence is SOM, SOR
(lor 2), EOM, and LPC. If the reply is negative, the numeric identifier will be the same as
the identifier following the SOR in the incorrectly received record. A message is terminated
by an End-of-File (EOF) character •

• 37

Entry of Time and Date: .•.•••••..•.• no provision.

(Contd.)
8/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6850:05
ULTRONIC MT 3000

•
.4

OUTPUT

.41

Output to Magnetic Tape
MT 3000-7 Magnetic Tape Terminal Tape size: •.••...•.••.•••.•••••• O. 5-inch magnetic tape recorded at 200. 556, or
SOO bits/inch; 7-track tape format is compatible
with IBM 729 Series Magnetic Tape Units.
Tape code: •.•..••.•••.•...••••• any 6-level code; 6 data bits plus one parity bit per
character; even or odd parity can be switchselected.
Rated output speed At 36 inches/sec tape speed and
the following recording densities 200 bits/inch: ••••••.••.•.•••• 7200 char/sec.
556 biislinch: • . • • . • . • . . • .'. • • • 20. 700 char/sec.
SOO bitS/inch: •••..•...•..•••• 2S.800 char/sec.
At 45 inches/sec tape speed (optional)
and the following recording densities 200 bits/inch: ..•...•.••.•.••• 9000 char/sec.
556 bitS/inch: ••.••..••••.•••• 25.000 char/sec.
800 bitS/inch: ..••••.•.••..••• 36.000 char/sec.
Effective speed:. • • • • . . • • . • • • • • ••• varies widely depending on the communications
facility. transmission speed, and record size.
Format control:. • . . . . • . • • • . • ••••• none.
Comments: • . • . • • • . . . . • • . . . • • • •• high or low recording density can be switch-selected on operator panel; only two recording
densities per tape terminal are provided (200/
556 or 556/S00 bits per inch).
MT 3000-9 Magnetic Tape Terminal Tape size: ••.•...•.••.•••..••••• 0.5-inch magnetic tape recorded at 200.556. or
SOO bits/inch; 9-track tape format is compatible
with IBM 2400 Series Magnetic Tape Units.
Tape code: •..••••.••••...•••••• any S-level code; S data bits plus one parity bit
per character; even or odd parity can be switchselected.
Rated output speed At 36 inches/sec tape speed and
the following recording densities 200 bits/inch: .••.•••.•••..•.• 7200 char/sec.
556 bits/inch: •..••••..••..••• 20.700 char/sec.
SOO bits/inch: •••.•.•••.•.•••• 28, SOO char/sec.
At 45 inches/sec tape speed (optional)
and the following recording densities 200 bits/inch: ••••••••••.••••• 9000 char/sec.
556 bits/inch: ••.••.••.•...••• 25.000 char/sec.
SOO bits/inch: .••••••..••••••• 36.000 char/sec.
Effective speed:. • • • • . • • • • • • ••.••• varies widely depending on the communications
facility. transmission speed. and record size.
Format control: •••.•....•.•.•.•.• none.
Comments: . • . . • . • • • • • • • • . • . • • • . high or low recording density can be switch-selected on operator panel; only two recording
densities per tape terminal are provided (200/
556 or 556/800 bits per inch) •

•5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

.51

Data Entry Errors
Type of checking: ••••.•••.••••••••• character and longitudinal parity checking.
Error indication: ••••••..•••••.•••• indicator lamp is lighted and an audible alarm is
sounded.
C 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

8/67

6850:06
ULTRONIC MT 3000

· 51

Data Entry Errors (Contd.)
Correction procedure: .•••••.•.••••.• the data block is automaticallyre-read up to three
times (four read operations); if all attempts are
unsuccessful, tape halts and operator intervention
is required.

• 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of (lhecking: •.••••••••••.•.••• character and longitudinal parity are checked only
in receive mode.
Error indication: ...•••..•••.•..••• indicator lamp is lighted and audible alarm is
sounded.
Correction procedure: •.•••..•••••••• retransmission of record up to three times (four
transmissions); if all attempts are unsuccessful,
data transmission is interrupted and operator
intervention is required.

• 53

Data Recording Errors
Type of checking: . . . . • . • • . . • . . . . . . • read-after-write character and longitudinal parity
checks.
Error indication: ..••.•••••.••••... indicator lamp is lighted; audible alarm is sounded.
Correction procedure:. • • • • . . • . • • . . . • data is automatically rewritten up to two times;
operator intervention is required if error occurs
after second rewrite.
Comments: .•...••.....•..•.•.•.• operator can skip to new portion of tape and attempt to rewrite data.

• 55

Life Malfunctions
Detection: ..•..•••••••.••••.•...• when acknowledgement to transmitted record is
not received within three minutes.
Action: ••••••••.•..•••...•.•..•• transmission halts; operator intervention is required •

•6

CONDITION INDICATORS
A comprehensive array of indicator lamps on both models oJ the .MT 3000 Magnetic Tape Terminals provides visual indication of error status, transmission status, memory status, and
end-of-file status •

•7

DATA TRANSMISSION

.71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed MT 3000-7: •••.•••...•••.•....•• 171.4,285.7,342.8, or 5820.5 char/sec, corresponding to 1200, 2000, 2400, or 40,800 bits/
sec, respectively; transmission speed depends
on communications line, data sets, and receiving
terminal.
MT 3000-9: •.•••.•.....•.•.....• 133.3,222.2,266.6, or 4533.3 char/sec, corresponding to 1200, 2000,2400, or 40,800 bits/
sec, respectively; transmission speed depends
on communications line, data sets, and receiving
terminal.
Transmission method: ...•••..••..••• serial by bit.
Transmission code MT 3000-7: .•.•....•..•..•...••• 6 data bits plus one parity bit per character; a
total of 7 bits are transmitted for each character.
MT 3000-9:. • . • • • • . • • . . . . • • • • . • . 8 data bits plus one parity bit per character; a
total of 9 bits are transmitted for each character.
Transmission mode: •.•••....•••.... half-duplex.
Order of bit transmission:. . . . • • . • . . . • low-order bit of each character is transmitted
first.
Synchronization: .•••••......•••••.• synchronous; SOM character at beginning of each
data block is used as sync character.
(Contd. )

8/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
CDMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6850:07
ULTRONIC MT 3000

II

Comments: • . . • • • . . . . . . . • . • . . . • • • other transmission rates from 3000 to 6000 bits/
sec are available for special applications .
• 72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set*

Public switched telephone network at
the following speeds 1200 bits/sec (150 char/sec): . . . . . . . . Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 202C.
2000 bits/sec (250 char/sec): . . . . . . . . Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 201A.
Common-carrier leased voice-band
line at the following speeds 1200 bits/sec (150 char/sec): . . . . . . . . Bell System Data Set 202C. Western Union 1200
Baud Data Modem. or Ultronic Systems Data
Pump.
2000 bits/sec (250 char/sec): . . . . • . • • Bell System Data Set 201A.
2400 bits/sec (300 char/sec): • . . . . . . . Bell System Data Set 201B or Western Union 2400
Baud Data Modem.

• 73

Telpak A (40.800 bits/sec): . . . . . . . . . . . requires a Telpak Channel Terminal A-2. which
includes a data set .
Transmission Control
Call initiation: ••..••••••..•••.•••• manual dialing or signaling.
Call reception: • . • . • • • . . • . . . . . • • . • • attended operation; operator must establish voice
communication and then switch to data mode.
Functional operations: •..••••.•• •••• none; except request retransmission •

• 74

Multistation Operation: •.•..•••..•.•• no provision •

•8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component

MT 3000 Magnetic
Tape Terminal *

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

50
24
73
1000

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
Phases

1.2
115 or 208/230
50 or 60
1

Temperature Range (OF)
Humidity Range (%)
Heat (BTU/Hr)

60 to 90
40 to 70
9000

* Physical size of the MT 3000-7 and MT 3000-9 Magnetic
Tape Terminals is identical.

* In some cases. equivalent data .sets can be used; check with the local common-carrier
communications consultant.

C 1967 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

8/67

6850:08
ULTRONIC MT 3000

.9

PRICE DATA
Ultronic Systems is currently reviewing the price structure for the MT 3000 Magnetic Tape
Terminals, and a firm price structure is not available. The data in the following table represents approximate current pricing; prices are negotiable based on quantity and individual
situations. Maintenance charges are individually negotiated based on geographical location.
Component or Feature

Monthly
Rental,

Purchase
Price,

$

$

MT 3000-7 Magnetic Tape Terminal
(with 1024-character buffer)

1,400

45,000

MT 3000-9 Magnetic Tape Terminal
(with 1024-character buffer)

1,700

59,000

25

995

25
50
NC

995
1,990
NC

?
?
?
?

?
?
?
?

Optional Features
Record Counter
(MT 3000-7 option)
Master Terminal Data Director
(MT 3000-9 option) 5 address selections
10 address selections
Optional tape speed
(45 inches/sec)
Buffer size options 512 characters
2048 characters
4096 characters
8192 characters
NC - No Charge.

8/67

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

6860:0t

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

IA'\.

~

UNIVAC t004

UERBACH
®

UNIVAC 1004 CARD PROCESSOR

.1

GENERAL

.11

Identity:

UNIVAC 1004 Card Processor, Models I, II, and
III.

Data Line Terminal Type 1 (DLT-l).
Data Line Terminal Type 2 (DLT-2).
Data Line Terminal Type 3 (DLT-3).
.12

Manufacturer:

UNIVAC Division, Sperry Rand Corporation
Post Office Box 8100
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19101

. 13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

compact, free-standing, plugboard-programmed
computer;
can transmit or receive data over voice-band communications facilities .

. 14

Basic Components

. 15

Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UNIVAC 1004 Card Processing System.
Models I, II, and III.
small plugboard-programmed computer system.

Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data Line Terminal.
Typel.
provides a 1004 with the ability to communicate
with a remote 1004 or larger UNIVAC computer
system over a voice-band line.

Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data Line Terminal.
Type 2.
provides a 1004 with the ability to communicate
with a remote 1004 or a Digitronics D520 Magnetic Tape Terminal over a voice-band line.

Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model number: . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . •
Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data Line Terminal.
Type 3.
similar to Type 1, but permits data transmission
to be overlapped with processing or input-output operations .

Description
The UNIVAC 1004 is a compact, plugboard-programmed computer which, with the inclusion
of a Data Line Terminal Type 1, Type 2, or Type 3, can function as a communications terminal over either the public switched telephone network or common-carrier leased voice-band
facilities. A number of other Data Line Terminals are available on a "Request Price Quotation" (RPQ) basis; different models enable transmission over Telpak A at 40,800 bits per
second, permit communication with IBM Synchronous Terminals such as the IBM 1013, 7702,
etc., and enable communication with various military networks.
There are two basic models of the 1004. The 1004 I utilizes core storage with an 8. O-microsecond cycle time and comes equipped with a 400-card-per-minute card reader and a 400-lineper-minute line printer. The 1004 II uses faster core storage (6. 5-microsecond cycle time)
and comes equipped with a 615-card-per-minute reader and a 600-line-per-minute printer.
Additional peripheral equipment that can be connected to either the 1004 I or 1004 II includes

~

fnl'!'I't. I\llrnDI\f"'U ,..... ____ ..... .,.;_. .... .............. I\IIC"DCI\.('U I .... .f ....

In,...

5/69

6860:02
UNIVAC 1004

Figure 1. The UNIVAC 1004 Card Processor. Integral units
include card reader, line printer, and processor;
the card punch stands alone .
. 15

Description (Contd.)
a card punch (200 cards per minute), a second card reader (400 cards per minute), a card/
read punch unit (200 cards per minute), a paper tape reader (400 characters per second), and
a paper tape punch (110 characters per second).
A special model of the processor, the 1004 III, permits the inclusion of additional peripheral
equipment. The 1004 III is similar to the 1004 II but can also control one or two Uniservo
Magnetic Tape Units with a peak data transfer rate of 33,664 characters per second.
Each model of the UNIVAC 1004 has 961 alphameric character positions of core storage standard, with an additional 961 positions optional. Each core position contains six data bits.
Core storage cycle time is 8.0 microseconds in the UNIVAC 1004 I and 6.5 microseconds in
the UNIVAC 1004 II and III.
The plugboard of the basic machine has a capacity for 31 program steps (expandable to 62).
Each step can specify two operand addresses, and multiple operations can be performed in a
single program step. Arithmetic operations include add and subtract (both algebraic and absolute) and compare. Multiply and divide operations require the use of wired subroutines.
Seven types of transfer processes are provided, including several with editing facilities. Input-output areas are assigned fixed locations in core storage. Input-output commands can be
combined in the same step with other operations.
Operands can be of any length up to the capacity of core storage. Operand length is specified
by the operand addresses wired in each program step. Instructions are executed at the rate
of about 6, 500 instructions per second in the 1004 I processor and about 9,000 instructions
per second in the 1004 II and III.
The UNIVAC 1004 can be used with more than one coding system. It normally operates with
either the standard UNIVAC XS-.3 code (80-column) or with the Remington Rand 90-column
card code. Models of each processor are available that can use both codes under control of
the plugboard wiring. When the code to be used is program-selectable, it is possible to use

(Contd.)

5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6860:03
UNIVAC 1004

®

.15

Description (Contd.)
both codes within a single program. This allows, for instance, reading a mixture of 80column cards, and 90-column cards or reading 80-column cards and punching 90-column
cards. Codes other than the XS-3 and the 90-column codes can be automatically translated
to either of these codes by a special Translate Feature, provided that there are no more
than 6 data bits per character in the original code.
The Data Line Terminal Type 1 (DLT-1) permits a 1004 to communicate with a UNIVAC 418,
490, 1050, 1107, 1108, or another 1004. Data is transferred from or received into the core
storage of the 1004 via the DLT-1 and the appropriate communications facilities. The data
is transmitted as a binary image of the data in core storage, but with a parity bit appended to
each character. Synchronization is maintained by the data signals (synchronous transmission).
The transmission rate is 285 characters per second (2, 000 bits per second) over the public
telephone network and 342 characters per second (2,400 bits per second) over common-carrier leased voice-band lines.
The DLT-2 is similar to the DLT-1 except that an eighth bit is added to each character. The
eighth bit is a synchronizing bit, and it permits a 1004 equipped with a DLT-2 to communicate
with a Digitronics D520 Magnetic Tape Terminal (see page 6216:01). Two 1004's equipped
with DLT-2's can also communicate with each other. The addition of the extra bit reduces
the transmission rate to 250 or 300 characters per second for the public telephone network or
common-carrier leased voice-band lines, respectively.
The transmission characteristics of the DLT-3 are similar to those of the DLT-1; with the
DLT-3, however, data transmission operations can be overlapped with processing or inputoutput operations.
Data is transmitted in a half-duplex mode; i. e., in either direction, but in only one direction
at a time. Full-duplex communications facilities can be used, however, to maintain
synchronization in both directions at once and thereby reduce the turnaround time. This reduction in turnaround time can be important when transmitting small blocks of data, since a
confirmation that the previous message was received without detecting an error is necessary
before the next message can be transmitted; this requires two "turnarounds" or reversals of
the .direction of transmission.
'\/

The effective transmission speed depends on the amount of data per transmission and the
amount of computation necessary prior to transmission. Maximum message lengths are restricted to the size of core storage, either 9610r 1, 922 characters. Data read from punched
cards can be transmitted at approximately 180 cards per minute; if the receiving terminal is
a 1004 using the card punch for output, transmission is limited to 125 cards per minute.

In addition to the parity bit that is transmitted for each character, a longitudinal parity check
character is transmitted with each message. Detected errors result in an "error" acknowledgement return. This activates a special hub on the 1004 plugboard, permitting retransmission of data received in error. A count can be made of the retransmissions to limit their
number.
In October, 1965, UNIVAC announced the 1005; this system is identical with the 1004 except
that the newer 1005 is a stored-program computer with 2,048 or 4,096 core memory locations.
The 1005 is offered in the same three basic models as the 1004 and utilizes the same peripheral
devices. The performance of the 1005 for data communications applications will be similar to
that of the 1004.
. 16

First Delivery:

March 1963 .

.17

Availability:

no longer actively marketed; available on an "as
returned" basis only.

© 1969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/69

6860:04
UNIVAC 1004

.2

CONFIGURATION
A UNIVAC 1004 system intended to serve as a communications terminal includes the following
units:
•

One 1004 Model I, II, or III Processor with built-in console and 961-character core
memory. An additional 961 characters of core memory are optional.

•

One Card Reader - peak speed is 400 cpm in 1004 I; 615 cpm in 1004 II and III.

•

One Printer - peak speed is 400 lpm in 1004 I; 600 lpm in 1004 II and III.

•

One Data Line Terminal, any type.

Other peripheral equipment that can be connected to a 1004 includes:
•

One Card Punch or Card Read/Punch (200 cpm).

•

One additional Card Reader (400 cpm).

•

One Paper Tape Reader (400 cps).

•

One Paper Tape Punch (110 cps).

•

One or two Uniservo Magnetic Tape Units (on 1004 III only).

The requirements for connection to various communications facilities are listed in Paragraph.72 .
•3

INPUT

. 31

Prepared Input
1004 I Card Reader and Auxiliary Card Reader IBM 80-column or UNIVAC 90-column cards,
Input medium: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
depending on model.
Input code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
standard 80-column Hollerith or 90-column card
code; see Tables I and II.
1 to 80 or 1 to 90 characters.
Quantity of data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
see Tables I and II.
Rated input speed: . . . . • . . . . . . . . .
400 cards/min.
depends on amount of data transmitted, amount of
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
computation per record, and the communications facilities.
a speed of approximately 180 cards/minute can be
attained when transmitting data from two fullypunched cards at a time over half-duplex facilities.
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .
80-column or 90-column versions are available;
a column binary feature is available for the 80column model which treats each 12-row card
column as containing two 6-bit characters, permitting up to 160 characters to be recorded on
a card.

(Contd. )

5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
lA.'

~

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6860:05
UNIVAC 1004

AUERBACH
®

TABLE I: UNIVAC 1004
80-COLUMN DATA CODES
8O-Col. Printable
Card Characters
Code
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-9
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6
0-7
0-8
0-9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6

A
B
C
D

E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q

R
S
T
U

V
W

X

y
Z

0
1
2
3
4
5
6

XS·3

Code
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01

0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100

10 0100
100101
10 0110
10 0111
10 1000
10 1001
10 1010
10 1011
10 1100
11 0101
11 0110
11 0111
11
11
11
11
11
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001

SO·Col. Printable
Card Characters
Code
7
8
9
12
11
12-0
11-0
0-1
2-8

7
8
9
&
... (minus}

?
!htxclam.
I

+

#
3-8
I§
4-8
:
(colon)
5-8
6-8
>
7-8 • (apos.)
12-3-8 • (period)
12-4-8
12-5-8
12-6-8
<
12-7-8
=
11-3-8
$
11-4-8

1[1
•

11-5-8
1
11-6-8 i( ••mi ..col)
11-7-8
~
0-2-8
~
0-3-8 , (comma)
%
0-4-8

0-5-8

0-6-8
0-7-8

(

\
)

Blank Space N.P.

TABLE II: UNIVAC 1004
90-COLUMN DATA CODES
XS·3

Code

00
00
00
01
00
01
10
11
11

1010
1011
1100
0000
0010
0011
0011
0100
0011

01 1101
10 1110
01 0001
11 1110
10 0000
01 0010
11 1101
00 1111
01 1110
01 1111
100010
100001
00 0001
00 1110
10 1111
11 0000
11 0010
11 0001
10 1101
00 1101
11 1111
00 0000

Reproduced from UNIVAC 1004 Card
Processor
80 Column, Publication
UT 2543 REV. lA, page 4.

PRINTED
CHARACTERS

90·COLUMN
CARD CODE

PRINTED
CHARACTERS

A
B
C

1-5-9
1-5
0-7
0-3-5
0-3
1-7-9

7
8
9

D
E
F
G
H
I

L

5-7
3-7
3-5
1-3-5
3-5-9
0-9

M

0-5

J
K"

N

&
(- minus)

?
! (exclam.)

I
+
/I
@

: (colon)

>
• (apos.)
• (period)

0~5-9

a

1-3

p

1-3-7
3-5-7
1-7

)::\

1-5-7
3-7-9

=
$

Q

R
S
T
U

[

<

0-5-7

•

W
X

0-3-9
0-3-7
0-7-9

1

Y
Z
0

1-3-9
5-7-9
0

1
2
3

1
1-9
3

\

4
5

3-9
5
5-9

SPACE N.P.

V

6

; (sem ... colon)
~

iI

(comma)
%
(
)

9D-COLUMN
CARD CODE
7
7-9
9
0-1-3-5-7
0-3-5-7
0-1-3
0-3-7-9
3-5-7-9
1-5-7-9
0-1-5-7
0-1-3-7
1-3-7-9
0-3-5-7-9
0-1-5-7-9
1-3-5-9
0-1-3-9
0-5-7-9
0-1-5-9
0-1-3-5-7-9
0-1-3-5-9
0-1
1-3-5-7
1-3-5-7-9
0-1-7
0-1-7-9
0-3-5-9
0-1-5
0-1-9
0-1-3-7-9
0-1-3-5
BLANK

Reproduced from UNIVAC 1004 Card
Processor - 90 Column, Publication
UT 2541 REV. 1B, page 4.
1004 II/III Card Reader Input medium:
Input code: .•
Quantity of data:
Character set: . .
Rated input speed:
Effective speed:

Comments: • . . . • . . . • . • . • • • . . . •

©

IBM 80-column or UNIVAC 90-column cards, depending on model.
standard 80-column Hollerith or 90-column card
code; see Tables I and II.
1 to 80 or 1 to 90 characters.
see Tables I and II.
615 cards/min.
depends on amount of data transmitted, amount of
computation per record, and the communications facilities.
a speed of approximately 180 cards/minute can be
attained when transmitting data from two fullypunched cards at a time over half-duplex facilities.
80-column or 90-column versions are available;
a column binary feature is available for the 80column model which treats each 12-row card
column as containing two 6-bit characters, permitting up to 160 characters to be recorded on
a card.

1969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/69

6860:06
UNIVAC 1004

1004 Paper Tape Reader Input medium: . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
Input code: ... '. . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .

Quantity of data: . . . • . . • . • • • . . . •

Rated input speed: . . . . . . • . . . . • . .
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

fully-punched 11/16, 7/8, or 1-inch, 5-, 6-, 7-,
or 8-level paper tape.
any 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code. The 7- and 8level codes require two core storage locations
to store each character if more than 6 data bits
are used per character.
limited by core storage size to 960 or 1, 920 characters for 5- or 6-level codes, and to 480 or
960 characters for 7- and 8-level codes (see
above).
400 char/sec.
depends on the amount of data transmitted, the
amount of computation per record, and the communications facilities.
odd or even parity can be checked on 7- and 8level paper tape input.

1004 III Uniservo Magnetic Tape Unit Input medium: . . . . . . • . . . . . . . • • .
Input code: . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . • . .
Quantity of data: . • . . . . . . . • . . . . •
Rated input speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed:
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 32

Manual Input: . . . . . . • . . . . • • • . . . .

limited capability via console switches.

. 33

Fixed Input: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

five different alphabetics (C, D, G, R, and T) and
six different special characters (. , $ * - +) can
be emitted under control of the plugboard wiring.
a character of any bit configuration can be emitted
by the bit generators under control of the plugboard wiring.

.34

Transaction Code Input:

no provision.

.35

Message Configuration
DLT-1 and DLT-3: . . . . . . . . . • . . . .

DLT-2: . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . .

5/69

0.5-inch, IBM 729-compatible magnetic tape.
any 6-bit code.
limited by the size of core storage to 960 or 1, 920
characters.
8,416, 23,396, or 33,664 char/sec at recording
densities of 200, 556, or 800 bits/inch, respectively.
depends on block length, recording density, amount of computation per record, and communications facilities.
magnetic tape reading or writing cannot be overlapped with computation or data transmission .

five-character header including synchronizing
codes and a start-of-message code, followed
by the data, an end-of-message code and a
longitudinal parity character, making a total
of 7 characters plus the data. The synchronization and LPC characters are automatically supplied by the DLT-1 or -3. The
acknowledge message is in the same format,
with fewer data characters.
five space codes followed by the data, an end-of.block code, a longitudinal parity cha.racter,
and two space codes. Special formats are used
for the control messages, usually consisting of
seven characters.
(Contd.)

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

~

6860:07
UNIVAC 1004

AUERBACH
®

.36

Operating Procedure
(1) Operators establish connection through manual dialing or signaling.
(2) Receiving-terminal operator conditions the terminal to receive.
(3)

Phones are switched to data mode.

(4)

Transmitting terminal is started.

(5) After transmission, voice communication is again established and the phones are "hung
up."
. 37

Entry of Time and Date:

.4

OUTPUT

.41

Output to Punched Tape

no provision .

1004 Paper Tape Punch Tape size:
Tape code:

Rated punching speed:
Effective speed: . . . . . . . .
Format control:
Comments:
. 42

fully-punched 11/16, 7/8, or 1-inch, 5-, 6-, 7-,
or 8-level paper tape.
any 5-, 6-, 7-, or S-level c.ode. The 7 and 8-level
codes require two core storage locations to store
each character if more than 6 data bits are used
per character.
110 char/sec.
depends on the amount of data transmitted, the
amount of computation per record, and the communications facilities.
as specified by the plugboard wiring in the 1004
processor.
odd or even parity can be generated and punched
on 7- or 8-level paper tape output .

Output to Punched Cards
1004 Card Punch or Card Read/Punch Card type and size: . . . .
Card code:
Rated punching speed:
. . . . . . .
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Format control: . . . • . .
Comments: . . . . . . . . .

©

IBM SO-column or UNIVAC 90-column cards, depending on model.
standard 80-column Hollerith or 90-column card
code; see Tables I and II.
200 cards/min.
depends on amount of data transmitted, amount
of computation per record, and communications
facilities; a speed of approximately 125 cards/
min can be attained when receiving data from two
fully-punched cards at a time over half-duplex
facilities.
as specified by the 1004 processor plugboard.
80-column or 90-column versions are available;
a reading station ahead of the punching station
is available; a column binary feature is available for the SO-column model which treats each
12-row card column as containing two 6-bit characters, permitting up to 160 characters to be recorded on a card.

1969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

6860:08
UNIVAC 1004

· 43

Output to Magnetic Tape
1004 ill Uniservo Magnetic Tape Unit

· 44

see Paragraph . 31.

Output to Printer
1004 I Printer Output medium:
Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated printing speed: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format control:
Comments:

pin-fed, fanfold forms from 4 to 22 inches wide;
132 printing positions per line.
see Tables I and II.
400 lines/min.
depends on amount of data transmitted, amount
of computation per record, and communications
facilities.
three-column paper tape loop controls vertical
format; plugboard programming controls horizontal format.
can be field-modified to the higher printing speed
of the 1004 II/ill printer.

1004 II/ill Printer Output medium:
Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated printing speed: . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format control:

·5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

.51

Data Entry Errors
Type of checking . . . .

Error indication:
Correction procedure: . . . . . . . . . . .
· 52

pin-fed, fanfold forms from 4 to 22 inches wide;
132 printing positions per line.
see Tables I and II.
600 lines/min.
depends on amount of data transmitted, amount
of computation per record, and communications
facilities.
three-column paper tape loop controls vertical
format; plugboard programming controls horizontal format.

character validity on card input; character and
longitudinal parity on magnetic tape input; optional character parity on 7- or 8-level paper
tape input.
light; machine halts if programmed recovery
fails.
manual intervention to correct source, if pr9grammed recovery fails.
A

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking:
Error indication:
Correction procedure: . . . . . . . . . . .

character and longitudinal parity.
return of error-control code and an impulse from
the error hub on the 1004 plugboard.
as specified by the plugboard wiring; usually retransmission.

(Contd.)
5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A(0)

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS

6860:09
UNIVAC 1004

AUERBACH REPORTS
®

· 53

Data Recording Errors
Type of checking: . . .

Error indication:
Correction procedure:
· 55

Line Malfunctions:

·6

CONDITION INDICATORS

weighted hole-count check on punched-card input;
no checking on paper tape or printer output;
read-after-write character and longitudinal parity
check on magnetic tape output.
light; machine halts if programmed recovery
fails.
manual intervention, if programmed recovery
fails.
no special provisions for checking.

Numerous lamps are provided on the console for monitoring the internal functions of the
processor, but no indicators are specifically oriented towards data communications functions.
·7

DAT A TRANSMISSION

· 71

Basic Characteristics*
Rated transmission speed:

Transmission method:
Transmission code DLT-1 and DLT-3:
DLT-2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission mode:
Order of bit transmission:'
Synchronization: . . . . . . .

2,000 bits/sec over public switched telephone
network;
2,400 bits/sec over leased common-carrier
voice-band line.
serial by bit.
a total of 7 bits are transmitted for each character (a 6-bit binary image of a core storage
location and a parity bit. )
same as DLT-1, except that an additional bit
is transmitted for each character, making a
total of 8 bits per character.
half-duplex.
low-order bit of each character is transmitted
first, parity last.
synchronous; i. e., synchronization is maintained
by the data signals; external synchronization
required.

* Unless otherwise specified, all entries apply to Data Line Terminals Type 1, 2, and 3.

6860: 10
UNIVAC 1004

. 72

. 73

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line**

Data Set*

Public switched telephone network or
common-carrier leased voice-band
line (2,000 bits/sec): . . . • . . . . . . . .

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 20lA.

Common-carrier leased voice-band
line (2,400 bits/sec): . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bell System Data Set 201B.

Transmission Control
manual dialing or Signaling.
operator must establish voice communication
and then switch to data mode.
no direct control, but incoming data could be
used to control operations through appropriate
plugboard programming.

Call initiation:
Call reception:
Functional operations: .

no provision.

. 74

Multistation Operation:

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component
Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

1004
Processor***
(all models)
71
63
55
2,021

Power (KVA)
Heat (BTU/hr)

Auxiliary
Card
Reader
31
24
42
415

3.0
8,500

0.3
683

Card Punch
or Card
Read/Punch
42
25
49
870
1.5
3,500

Uniservo
(first and
control)

Uniservo
(second)

52
32
72.5
920

27
32
72.5
470

1.4

1.0

5,200

4,700

General Requirements
Operating temperature: . . • • . . . . . . .
Relative humidity: . . . . . • . . • . . . . . .
Power: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . .

50 to 90° F.
20 to 85%.
208-230 volt, 60-cycle, I-phase, 3-wire AC.

* In some cases,equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant.
** Other Data Line Terminals are available on special request for operation over Telpak A
at 40,800 bits/sec.
*** The standard card reader and paper tape reader and punch, and the Data Line Terminal
(any type) are housed in or on the Processor cabinet and are included in these figures.

(Contd.)
5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
,Jt,.,
~

6860: 11

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

UNIVAC 1004

"", AUERBAC~

.9

PRICE DATA
Component or Feature

Monthly
Rental,

$

./

Purchase
Price,

$

Monthly
Maintenance,

$

1004 I Card Processor, 80- or 90column* (includes 400 cpm Reader,
400 lpm Printer, 31 program steps,
and 951 positions of core storage;
8 jLsec cycle time)

975

46,000

225

1004 II Card Processor, 80- or 90column* (includes 615 cpm Reader,
600 lpm Printer, 31 program steps,
and 961 positions of core storage;
6. 5 jLSec cycle time)

1035

51,000

300

1004 ill Card Processor, 80- or 90column* (includes 615 cpm Reader,
600 lpm Printer, 31 program steps,
and 961 positions of core storage;
6. 5 jLsec cycle time)

1035

51,000

300

Data Line Terminal Type 1, Type 2,
or Type 3 (max. of one)

150

8000

60

Card Punch - 80-column, 200 cpm
Card Punch - 90-column, 200 cpm
Card Read/Punch - 80-column, 200 cpm
Card Read/Punch - 90-column, 200 cpm
Auxiliary Card Reader - 400 cpm

215
215
320
320
150

12,000
12,000
18,000
18,000
7200

100
100
150
150
40

Paper Tape Reader - 400 cps
Paper Tape Punch - 110 cps

140
225

6000
10,000

20
35

First Uniservo and Control
Second Uniservo

400
240

17,350
10,470

115
70

95
235

2950
10,000

5
25

95

4000

10

140

6000

20

95
30
20

4000
1000
1000

10
10
7

23

1000

5

Optional Features
Auxiliary Core Storage (961 locations)
Processor, Expansion Kit* (includes 16
additional program steps and additional
plugboard facilities; (one max)
Processor, Expansion Kit* (includes 15
additional program steps and additional
plugboard facilities; one max; requires
the 16-Step Expansion Kit)
80/90-Column Read (processor must include 62 program steps)
Code Conversion
Short Card Feeding
Code Image Read (column-binary; 80column only)
Code Image Punch (column-binary; 80column only)
*

UNIVAC markets many models of the 1004 I, II, and III Card Processors; these models
are combinations of the basic 80- or 90-column Card Processors listed here, the Processor Expansion Kits, and the 80/90-Column Read feature. These models follow the configuration rules presented for the optional features, and the price for each model is the sum
of the separate component prices.

A

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

lA'
~

6861:01
UNIVAC WTS

\UERBACH
®

UNIVAC WORD TERMINAL SYNCHRONOUS

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity: ...

UNIV AC Word Terminal Synchronous (WTS).

.12

Manufacturer: . . . . . . . . . .

UNIV AC Division
Sperry Rand Corporation
Box 8100
Philadelphia, Pa. 19101

.13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

enables UNIVAC computers to transmit and receive data over a single voice- or broad-band
communications line; different interfaces are
provided for connection to the various computers .

. 15

Description
The UNIVAC Word Terminal Synchronous (WTS) serves as an interface between a UNIVAC
418 or 1100 Series computer and a single voice-band or broad-band communications line.
The WTS enables transmission and reception of data in a six-level (plus parity) character
code at rates of 2,000 bits per second over the public switched telephone network, 2,400
bits per second over a leased voice-band line, or 40,800 bits per second over a broad-:band
line. Data is transferred between the WTS and the associated computer one word at a time.
The WTS disassembles words for serial transmission to a remote terminal and assembles
words received serially from a remote terminal. Once initiated the transmission or reception of a message proceeds independently of the main program in the associated computer
system; an interrupt is generated only upon completion of a message.
A word parity check is performed on data transferred between the WTS and the associated
computer system. The WTS performs character and message parity checking on data received from a remote terminal, and inserts character parity bits and longitudinal check
characters in data transmitted to a remote terminal.

. 16

First Delivery: . . . . . . . . .

September 1965 (with UNIVAC 1107).

. 17

Availability: . . . . . . . . . .

4 months .

.2

CONFIGURATION
A basic UNIVAC Word Terminal Synchronous (WTS) consists of a Data Communications
Terminal Control Unit, a Word Terminal Synchronous Module (18- or 36-bit interface),
a power supply, and either a voice-band or a broad-band adapter. Unattended answering
and automatic dialing are optional features.
Each WTS fully occupies one computer input-output channel.
Connections to standard communications facilities are described in Paragraph. 72 .

.3

INPUT
All input to the WTS is transferred from the associated UNIVAC computer under control of
the computer program. Input to the computer can be from the console keyboard, punched
cards, punched paper tape, or magnetic tape or drum.

6861:02
UNIVAC WTS

. 35

Message Configuration: .

· 36

Operating Procedure

each message is preceded by a start-of-message
character and followed by an end-of-message
character; message length is dependent upon
the remote terminal and computer core storage availability and is determined by the stored
program in the associated computer.

In attended operation, the operator establishes a connection manually by dialing or signalling

and switches the data set to data mode. The WTS is then ready for transmission or reception.
Further action is controlled by the stored program in the associated computer system.
Programmed automatic dialing and unattended operation features are optional .
.4

OUTPUT
All output from the WTS is transferred to the associated UNIVAC computer under control of
the computer program. Output from the computer can be printed copy, punched cards,
punched paper tape, or magnetic tape or drum .

.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

· 51

Data Entry Errors
Type of checking:. . . . . . . . . • . . . . . .
Error indication: . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
Correction procedure: . . . . . . . . . . . .

· 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking:.·. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error indication: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Correction procedure: . . . . . . . . . . . .

• 53

word parity checking is performed on data transferred to the WTS from the associated computer.
interrupt is generated.
as programmed.

character and message parity checking.
interrupt is generated.
under computer program control; usually
retransmission.

Data Recording Errors
Type of checking:. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

word parity check is performed on data transferred from the WTS to the associated

Error indication: . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Correction procedure: . . • . . . . . . . . .

interrupt is generated.
as programmed.

~omputer.

. 55

Line Malfunctions
Detection:. . . . . . . . • . . .
Action: . . . . • • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.6

CONDITION INDICATORS: . . . • . • . . . .

failure to receive any data within a predetermined period of time; time out is controlled
by circuitry and is adjustable.
interrupt is generated.
lamps and/or switches are provided to indicate
power on, physical faults, and activity of
terminal.

(Contd.)
5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
III.."\,
~

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6861:03
UNIVAC WTS

~UERBACH
®

.7

DATA TRANSMISSION

. 71

Basic Characteristic s
Rated transmission speed: . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission method: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission code: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission mode: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Order of bit transmission: . . . . . . . . .
Synchronization: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line
Public switched telephone
network (2,000 bits/sec): . . . . . . . . .
Common-carrier leased voiceband line (2,400 bits/sec): . . . . . .
Common-carrier leased broad-band
line (40,800 bits/sec): ..••••••...

• 73

Data Set*
Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 201A.
Bell System Data Set 201B or Western Union
2400 Baud Data Modem.
Bell System Data Set 301B .

Transmission Control
Call initiation: • . . . . . . . .
Call reception: . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional operations: . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 74

2,000, 2,400, or 40,800 bits/sec.
serial by bit.
any 6-level code (plus parity); a total of 7 bits
are transmitted for each character.
half-duplex or full-duplex.
low-order bit is transmitted first.
synchronous; i. e., maintained by the interpretation of special characters sent prior
to sending data .

Multistation Operation: .

manual dialing or signaling, or optional programmed automatic dialing.
capable of unattended operation.
no direct control, but incoming data can be
interpreted to control operations with appropriate programming.
no provision other than facilities offered by
programming in the associated computer; it
would depend on the remote terminal's ability
to respond to messages, and would require
program analysis of responses.

* In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant.

© 1969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/69

6861:04
UNIVAC WTS

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component

UNIVAC Word Terminal
Synchronous

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

24
24
72
600

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
Phases

1
208;120
60;60
3;1

Temperature range (OF)
Humidity range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)
.9

55 to 85
30 to 70
4,500

PRICE DATA

Component or Feature

Monthly
Rental,

Purchase
Monthly
Price,
Maintenance,

$

$

Data Communication Terminal
Control Unit

190

8380

80

Word Terminal Synchronous Module
includes one of the following interfaces:

325

14,210

160

Voice-Band Adapter
Broad-Band Adapter
Power Supply

5
5
80

225
225
3335

NC
NC
30

Options
Unattended Answering
Automatic Dialing

5
40

225
1670

NC
15

$

18-bit interface (for 418 Series)
36-bit interface (for 1100 Series)

NC - No charge.

5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

~

..

Al'E'lBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6862:01
UNIVAC CTS

UNIVAC COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL SYNCHRONOUS

.1

GENERAL

. 11

Identity:

· 12

Manufacturer:

.13

Basic Function:

· 15

Description

....

UNIVAC Communications Terminal Synchronous
(CTS).
..................

.................

UNIVAC Division
Sperry Rand Corporation
Box 8100
Philadelphia, Pa. 19101
enables UNIVAC computers to transmit and
receive data over a single voice- or broad-band
communications line; different interfaces are
provided for connection to the various computers.

The UNIVAC Communications Terminal Synchronous (CTS) serves as an interface between a
UNIVAC 1100 Series or418-2 Series coi:nput~r and a single communications line. The CTS
enables transmission and reception of data in a 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level (plus parity) character
code at rates of 2, 000 bits per second over the public switched telephone network, 2, 400 bits
per second over a leased voice-band line, or 40,800 bits per second over a broad-band line.
Data is transferred between the CTS and the associated computer one character at a time,
and is stored in the computer memory one message character per computer word. Once initiated, the transmission or reception of a message proceeds independently of the main program in the associated computer system; an interrupt is generated only upon completion of
a message.
The CTS imposes a greater demand on the central processor than does the Word Terminal
Synchronous (see Report 6861), but is less expensive.
Character parity is checked on data received from a remote terminal, and character parity
bits are automatically inserted in data transmitted to the remote terminal.
· 16

First Delivery: ...

June 1965 (with UNIVAC 1107).

· 17

Availability: . . . .

3 months.

·2

CONFIGURA TION
A basic CTS consists of a Data Communications Terminal Control Unit, a Communications
Terminal Synchronous Module, and a power supply. A broad-band adapter, an unattended
operation feature, and an automatic dialing feature are optional.
Each CTS fully occupies one computer input-output channel.
Connections to standard communications facilities are described in Paragraph. 72 .

.3

INPUT
All input to the CTS is transferred from the associated UNIVAC computer under control of the
computer program. Input to the computer can be from the console keyboard, punched cards,
punched paper tape, or magnetic tape or drum.

© t 969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.

5/69

6862:02
UNIVAC CTS

· 35

Message Configuration: . . . . . . . • . . .

· 36

Operating Procedure

each message preceded by a start-of-message
character and followed by an end-of-message
character; message length is dependent upon
terminal equipment and computer core storage
availability, and is determined by the stored
program in the associated computer.

In attended operation, the operator establishes a connection manually by dialing or signalling,
and switches the data set to data mode. The CTS is then ready for transmission or reception,
and all further action is under control of the stored program in the associated computer
system.
Programmed automatic dialing and unatt.ended operation features are optional.
.4

OUTPUT
All output from the CTS is transferred to the associated UNIVAC computer under control of
the computer program. Output from the computer can be printed copy, punched cards,
punched paper tape, or magnetic tape or drum .

.5

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

.51

Data Entry Errors: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

· 52

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking: .. ,
Error indication:
Correction procedure:

character parity checking only.
interrupt is generated.
under computer program control; usually retransmission.

· 53

Data Recording Errors: . . . . . . . . . . .

no checking of data transferred to the computer
from the CTS .

. 55

Line Malfunctions
Detection: . . . . .
Action: . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.6

CONDITION INDICATORS:

.7

DATA TRANSMISSION

· 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed:
Transmission method: ..
Transmission code: . . . . .
Transmission mode: . . . .
Order of bit transmission:
Synchronization: . . . . . . .

5/69

no checking is performed on data transferred to
the CTS from the computer.

failure to receive any data within a predetermined period of time; time out is controlled by
circuitry and is adjustable.
interrupt is generated.
lamps and/or switches are provided to indicate
power on, physical faults, and activity of
terminal.

2,000, 2,400, or 40,800 bits/sec.
serial by bit.
any 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code (plus parity).
half-duplex or full-duplex.
low-order bit is transmitted first.
synchronous; i. e., synchronization is maintained
by the interpretation of special characters sent
prior to sending data.
(Contd. )

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

~

AUERBACH

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6862:03
UNIVAC CTS

'!J

.72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set*

Public switched telephone network
(2, 000 bits/sec): . . . . . . . . . .
Common-carrier leased voice-band
line (2, 400 bits/sec): . . . . . . . . .

Bell System Data Phone-Data Set 201A.
Bell System Data Set 201B or Western Union 2400
Baud Data Modem.

Common-carrier leased broad-band
line (40,800 bits/sec): . . . . . . . . . . . •

Bell System Data Set 301B.

\

)

.73

Transmission Control
manual dialing or signaling, or optional programmed automatic dialing.
capable of unattended operation.
no direct control, but incoming data can be
interpreted to control operations with appropriate programming.

Call initiation:
Call reception:
Functional operations:

\

i

. 74

Multistation Operation:

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component:

....... .

no provision other than facilities offered by programming in the associated computer; it would
depend on the remote terminal's ability to
respond to messages, and would require program analysis of responses.

UNIVAC Communication
Terminal Synchronous

Width (inches)
Depth (inches)
Height (inches)
Weight (pounds)

24
24
72
600

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (cps)
Phases

1
208;120
60;60
3;1

Temperature range (OF)
Humidity range (%)
Heat (BTU/hr)

55 to 85
30 to 70
4,500

\
i

/

* In some cases, equivalent data sets can be used; check with your local common-carrier
communications consultant.

6862:04
UNIVAC CTS

.9

PRICE DATA

Component or Feature

Monthly
Rental,

$

Monthly
Maintenance,

$

$

Data Communications Terminal
Control Unit

190

8380

80

Communication Terminal
Synchronous Module

190

8380

80

Power Supply

80

3335

30

Options
Broad-Band Adapter
Unattended Answering
Automatic Dialing

80
5
41

3335
225
1670

30
NC
15

NC - No charge

5/69

Purchase
Price,

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

lA'
~

6863:01
UNIVAC OCT 2000

AUERBACH
'!>

UNIVAC DCT 2000

.1

GENERAL

· 11

Identity:....

Data Communication Terminal, DCT 2000.

· 12

Manufacturer:

.13

Basic Function: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UNIVAC Division
Sperry Rand Corporation
Box 8100
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19101
transmission and reception of data over a voiceband line with a wide variety of UNIVAC computer systems at up to 343 char/sec.

· 14

Basic Components
Name: . . . . . . . .
Model number: .. .
Function: ..

Control Unit.
USASCII or DLT 1/3.
provides basic control and buffering functions.

Name: . . . . . . . .
Function: . . . . . .

High-Speed Printer.
prints alphanumeric information at up to 250
lines per minute.

Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F tlllctipn: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Card Reader/Punch.
reads cards at 200 cards/min or punches cards
at 75 to 200 cards/min.

Name:

Paper Tape Subsystem.
reads punched paper tape at 300 characters per
second or punches paper tape at 110 characters
per second.

...

II

0

••••••••••••••••••

Function: . . . . . . .

.15

0

•

0

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Description:
The DCT 2000 Data Communication Terminal is the first of a series of terminals to be
announced by UNIVAC. The DCT 2000 is primarily intended for use as a remote terminal for
a computer, but direct communication between two DCT 2000 terminals is possible.
The basic DCT 2000 consists of a control unit and a 250 line-per-minute line printer. The
printer has a standard complement of 80 print positions and is capable of printing 63 separate
characters. A 128-character-position printer carriage is available as an option. A card
reader/punch is available that reads 80-column cards at up to 200 cards per minute and
punches from 75 to 200 cards per minute depending on the number of columns punched.

\.

l'he input/output capabilities of the basic DCT 2000 can be augmented by adding the Paper
Tape Subsystem, which connects to the optional Peripheral Input-Output channel and provides
both paper tape punching and/or reading capabilities. The subsystem accommodates 5through 8-level paper tape and permits any paper tape code to be read or punched limited
only by the I/O channel capacity. Punching is performed at 110 characters per second,
reading at 300 characters per second. Data is transferred serially between the Paper Tape
Subsystem and the DCT 2000 under control of a read or punch command. Character parity
is generated when punching and checked when reading by the paper tape control unit; parity
does not accompany data transferred between the Paper Tape Subsystem and the. DC T 2000.
A patch-board translator permits interchanging the code levels of data transferred between
the Subsystem and the DCT 2000 interface to accommodate punching or reading various
paper tape codes. The patch-board translator also permits the selection of odd, even, or
no parity, Delete and Read Error character configurations for the respe.~tive punch and
read operations, and prevents erroneous control-code recognition at the DCT 2000 when
reading 5-level paper tape.
UNIVAC states that additional types of input/output units will be announced for use with the
DCT 2000 in the future. The Peripheral Input-Output Channel feature provides for the addition of up to four units to the basic terminal.

6863:02
UNIVAC OCT 2000

Figure 1. The UNIVAC DC T 2000 Data Communication Terminal Shown
With the Paper Tape Subsystem (right) .
. 15

Description (Contd.)
The DCT 2000 operates O'V'er 1fl!re public telephone network at 2, 000 bits per second or over a
leased voice-band line at 2,000 or 2,400 bits per second. Communications take place in a
half-duplex mode, but full-duplex communications facilities can be used to maintain synchronization in both directions at the same time; this reduces the turnaround time and consequently provides higher effective performance.
Two control units are available. One utilizes the 8-level USASCII transmission code (7 data bits
plus parity); the other uses the 7 -level UNIVAC XS-3 transmission code (6 data bits plus
parity). The second control unit is compatible with a remote UNIVAC 1004 equipped with a
Data Line Terminal (DLT) Type 1 or Type 3, and with other devices using the XS-3 code.
The DLT Control Unit incorporates certain features that are options with the USASCII Unit; see
the listing of options at the end of this Description.
Communications between a nCT 2000 and a remote terminal take place as a series of data
messages and acknowledgement messages. The control unit contains two 128-character
buffers, which are alternated betwea mput/output and transmission. Each message contains
80 or 128 data characters, as selected by the operator. The block length can be different
for transmission and reception, and is independent of the peripheral device. A Short Block
feature is available; see the listing of options below.
Character parity and longitudinal parity are generated and transmitted for each data block.
Error detection and automatic retransmission are standard in the DLT 1/3 Control Unit and
optional in the USASCII Control Unit.
One feature of the DCT 2000 is of particular interest when operating as a remote terminal to
a computer system. The DCT 2000 expects an acknowledgement reply to each data block
transmitted; if a reply is not received within a fixed period of time, the DCT 2000 will retransmit the data block continuously until a Positiweacknowledgement is received or until the
termirial operator intervenes. The retransmissioms continue even though a connection may be
broken and re-established. This technique allows the remote computer to temporarily ignore
a particuliU" DCT 2000 during a peak period and pick up again when it has time.
Protection against message redundancy is provided by the Duplicate Block Protection feature,
which insures that the same message block is not received twice due to an unsolicited retransmission initiated by a no .... response condition~ This technique employs the fifth bit of
the SEL character position within the message header as a block identifier. During normal
(Contd. )
AlJERBACH Data Communications Reoorts

A

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

lA'
~

6863:03
UNIVAC OCT 2000

AUERBACH
'!l

.15

Description (Contd.)
message transmission, this identifier bit is toggled between alternate binary states once for
each block except when the block is retransmitted. Block-duplication detection is performed
by comparing the block identifier bit of the present message with that of the previous message. Both identifier bits having the same state indicates a retransmission. The duplicate
block is accepted only when the Terminal had requested the retransmission (NAK response)
and discarded if an ACK response was issued last.
The optional features currently available for a DCT 2000 Terminal include:
•

\

•

;

Wide Print Carriage - Expands the number of print positions in the High-Speed
Printer from 80 to 128.
Printer Form Control - Allows vertical tabulation and skipping to the top of the
next page to be initiated by special data characters within the received message
text(USASCIIversion) , or within the message header (DLT 1/3 version). Actual
skipping is controlled by a paper tape loop form control mechanism in the printer.
All skips are performed immediately after printing the data block containing the
special forms control character.

•

Card Code Translater/Print Bar - Permits conversion of several common card
codes including EBCDIC and Scientific "H" codes to DCT 2000 code for both
reading and punching operations. The card code character set must correspond
to the print bar character set. Data is printed and transmitted in the DC T 2000
code. There are two conditions that determine translator and print bar requirements: card code and card-code character set. A translator is required to
translate between the card code and the DCT 2000 code; a print bar is required
only when the existing printer character set does not correspond to the cardcode character set. UNIVAC provides a wide variety of translators with corresponding print bars that are available free of charge with the initial order, or
as a field change at extra cost. See Paragraph. 9 for pricing.

•

Error Detection and Retransmission - Provides checking of character and longitudinal parity, and automatic retransmission. If no response or a negative acknowledge is received from the remote terminal after transmitting a data block, the DCT
2000 will automatically retransmit that data block. The retransmissions will be
repeated until a successful transmission is accomplished or until the operator intervenes. A lamp is lighted and an audible alarm is sounded after the second retransmission. A bit is changed in one of the control characters when retransmitting a data block because of no response from the remote terminal; this allows the
remote terminal to identify duplicated data blocks. The DLT 1/3 Control Unit
includes this feature as standard equipment.

•

Telephone Alert - Permits a DCT 2000 operator to signal the remote operator.
This is usually used when alternate vocal communication is permitted (e. g., the
public telephone network) to indicate that verbal communication is desired.

•

Select Character Capability - Permits the remote transmitting terminal to specify, by
a control character in the message heading, which of up to six output devices of the
local DCT 2000 is to be used. The local operator can override this control and
specify the output unit.

•

Short Block Capability - Permits the data block to contain less than the 80 or 128
characters as selected by the switches on the Operator Panel. End of data is
indicated by a special control character contained in the input data. This feature applies
only to the USASCII Control Unit; the DL T 1/3 has, as a standard feature, the capability to receive short blocks but cannot transmit short blocks.

•

Unattended Answering - Permits the DCT 2000 to automatically answer a call from
a remote location, to transmit or receive data in response to transmissions from
the remote terminal, and to disconnect when the call is finished.

•

. Peripheral Input/Output Channel.., Permits up to four additional peripheral devices
to be connected to the DCT 2000. This feature is not required to connect the first
card reader/punch.
A

fnt:!ftAIICl'lDA"'U

, , ______ £: ____ ...I

A~I,..,.,,"'A"'II

1_6._

1 __

6863:04
UNIVAC OCT 2000

.15

Description (Contd.)
•

Transmit/Receive Monitor - Permits data to be printed by the high-speed printer
while being transmitted or received by the card reader/punch.

•

Off-Line Listing - Permits data from a deck of cards to be printed without being
transmitted. The Transmit/Receive Monitor feature is! required as a prerequisite
for this feature.

•

Punch Check and Alternate Stacker - Provides echo checking to verify the actuation
of the punch dies. If an error is detected, the card in error is routed to an auxiliary
stacker, also provided with this feature, and a new card is punched.

All features are applicable to both control units except where noted. All features can be fieldinstalled .
. 16

First Delivery:

. 17

Availability:

.2

CONFIGURATION

.................

...................

first quarter, 1967 .
approximately 4 months .

The basic DCT 2000 is available in two versions: USASCn and DLT 1/3. The DLT 1/3 is
intended primarily for use as a remote terminal with a UNIVAC 1004 Card Processor equipped
with a Data Line Terminal Type 1 or Type 3 (see Report 6860). The features included in
each version are indicated below:
•

USASCII version - includes the USASCII Control Unit, the 250-line-per-minute
High-Speed Printer, and either an EIA RS 232A or a MIL STD 188B electrical
interface.

•

DLT 1/3 version - includes the DLT 1/3 Control Unit, the 250-line-per-minute
High-Speed Printer, the Error Detection and Retransmission feature, the Short
Block capability for receive operations only, and an EIA RS 232A electrical
interface.
The basic DCT 2000 can be expanded to include the Card Reader/Punch and/or the Paper
Tape Subsystem. The Card Reader/Punch reads 80-column cards at up to 200 cards per
minute and punches from 75 to 200 cards per minute depending on the number of columns
punched. The Paper Tape Subsystem punches and reads 5- through 8-level paper tape .
. Punching is performed at 110 characters per second, reading at 300 characters per second.
The options available for each of these versions are fully described in Paragraph .15.
Either version of the DCT 2000 can operate ov~r the public telephone network or a commoncarrier leased voice-band line, at 2,000 or 2,400 bits per second, respectively. Connections
to standard communications facilities and the required data sets are described in Paragraph
.72 .
.3

INPUT

. 31

Prepared Input
Paper Tape Reader Input medium: . . . • . . . . . . • . . .

Input code: .. , '.' . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
Quantity of data: . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated input speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , .
Effective Speed: . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .
Commel)ts: . . . • . . . . • . . . . • . . . . . ' ..

fully-punched or chadless 11/16-, 7/8-, or I-inch
paper tape; available with a three-position adjustable tape guide; transmissivity must not
exceed 40%.
any 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level code.
variablE;).
300 char/sec. (10 characters per inch).
less than rated speed, depending upon block
length, transmission speed, and speed of receiving device.
.
undirectional tape read (left to right); hole detection is performed photoelectrically; optional
features include tape spooler and 5-inch reels.
(Contd. )

5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

lA'

~

6863:05
UNIVAC OCT 2000

AUERBACH
r!,

.31

Prepared Input (Contd.)
Card Reader/Punch Input medium: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantity of data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated input speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . : . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

standard 80-column cards.
see Table II.
up to 80 characters per card.
200 cards/min.
90 to 200 cards/min, depending on transmission
speed and whether a half- or full-duplex line is
used.
this unit provides one 1200-card input hopper,
one 850-card stacker, and one 850-card alternate stacker (optional with Punch Check feature).
simultaneous card reading and card punching not
possible.

. 32

Manual Input:

no provision announced to date .

. 33

Fixed Input: .

no provision.

.34

Transaction Code Input:

.35

Message Configuration

anyone of the six Select characters can be selected for transmission by the DCT 2000 operator.

USASCII Control Unit:
A data message consists of four SYN characters followed by the SOH, SEL, and STX control
characters, 80 or 128 data characters, the ETX control character, and the Block Parity
(BP) character. The BP character is always generated and transmitted. The number of
data characters, 80 or 128, is set by switches and can be different for transmit and receive
operations. The size of the data block is independent of the input or output block; non-used
positions in a data block are space-filled. If the Short Block feature is incorporated, the
size of the data block is controlled by an EM character in the data field; the EM character
counts as a data character. When transmitting, the EM character must be punched into the
card. A response or special message consists of four SYN characters followed by two ACK,
NAK, BEL or XMIT START/NO DATA characters. All control characters, with the
exception of EM, are automatically generated and transmitted by the control unit. The total
length of a data message will typically be 89 or 137 characters, including the SYN characters.
The total length of a response or special message will be 6 characters, including the SYN
characters. See Table III for definitions of the control characters.
DLT 1/3 Control Unit:
All messages have the same general format: four SYN characters followed by the SOM
character, the message, and the EOM and Block Parity (BP) characters. The message
portion of a data message consists of a message control character followed by 80 or 128 data
characters (as specified by a switch setting) when transmitting, and 1 to 128 data characters
when receiving. The message portion of all other messages consists of a single response
or special control character. All control characters are automatically generated and transmitted by the control unit. The total length of a data message will typically-be 88 or 136
characters, including the SYN characters. The total length of a response or special
message will be 8 characters, including the SYN characters. See Table III for a definition
of the control characters.
Parity does not accompany data transferred between the Paper Tape Subsystem and the DCT
2000. When reading from paper tape, the transfer of standard NULL (no punching, all O's)
or DELETE (all positions punched, alII's) codes to the DCT 2000 is normally inhibited.
The DELETE code is wired on the plugboard translator and can be any bit configuration.
When tapes punched in other than DCT 2000 code are read, the data being transferred to a
remote USASCII - compatible DCT 2000 should not contain SYN characters since they are
deleted from the message. The short block feature on the DCT 2000 maintenance panel
should be disabled when reading such tapes. The plugboard translator provides for interchanging the pin connections between the interface channel and the paper· tape channels.

©> 1969 AlJFRRAr.H r.ornor"tion "nr! AIII'RRAf'1-l Infn In"

6863:06
UNIVAC OCT 2000

· 36

Operating Procedure
The operator prepares the terminal by loading the card reader/punch (with data cards if data
is to be transmitted or with blank cards if data is to be received and punched), by loading the
high-speed printer with forms if required, and by setting the switches on the Operations
Control Panel to conform with the desired operating procedure. Calls are initiated manually.
Calls are answered manually, or automatically if the Unattended Answering feature is incorporated. The subsequent transmission and reception of data are largely automatic and require little operator attention, if any. If the Error Detection and Retransmission feature
is incorporated, retransmission of data blocks containing errors is automatic.
If the errors are persistent, retransmission continues until a successful transmission is

accomplished or until the operator intervenes. A lamp is lighted and an audible alarm
sounded after the second retransmission of the same data block. The connection is broken
by the operator in the attended mode, or automatically after a lapse of 30 seconds without
receiving data in the unattended mode. An important operating characteristic of the DCT 2000
in the attended mode is that the terminal remains active, even if the connection is accidentally broken, until the operator intervenes. Thus the remote site couldreinitiate a call, even
by redialing over the public telephone network, and the DCT 2000 would pick up where it left
off. The message being transmitted at the time of the interruption would be automatically
retransmitted. One of the control characters in the message heading is altered for retransmissions, permitting detection of message block duplication .
. 37

Entry of Time and Date: . . . . . . . . . . .

.4

OUTPUT

.41

Output to Punched Tape

no provision.

Paper Tape Punch -

Tape code: ..•••.•...•......•.•.

11/16- or 1-inch oiled paper tape. (compatible
paper-MYLAR-paper sandwich tape is available
from UNIVAC).
.
any 5-, 6-,7-, or 8-level code.

Rated punching speed: . . • . . . . . . . . •

110 char/sec. (10 characters per inch).

Effective speed: . • • . . . . . . • . • • . . •

less than rated speed, limited by block length,
transmission speed, and speed of sending device.
punching provided with five levels of tape characters using 11/16-inch paper tape, or five,
six, seven, or eight levels using I-inch paper
tape; adjustable tape guide and winder included;
capable of starting and stopping between characters.

Tape size:

. . . . " . . . . . . . . . . . . 0··

Comments: . . . . . . .

· 42

0

•••••

"

•••••

Output to Punched Cards
Card Reader/Punch Card type and size: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card code: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated punching speed: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Format control: . .'. . . . . . . . . . . . . •
Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
· 44

standard 80-column card.
Hollerith; see Table II.
75 to 200 cards/ min, depending on the
number of columns punched.
75 fully-punched cards/min; up to 200 partiallypunched cards/min, depending on number of
columns punched, transmission speed, and
whether a half- or full-duplex line is used.
none.
see Comments, Paragraph. 31.

Output to Printer
High-Speed Printer Output medium: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5/69

pin-fed continuous forms up to 22 inches wide
and 14 inches long; maximum printed line length
is 80 characters or 128 characters (optional).

. AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

(Contd.)

A,A.,

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

~

6863:07
UNIVAC OCT 2000

AUERBACH
®

Character set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated printing speed: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effective speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format control: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

·5

Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

.51

Data Entry Errors
Type of checking:
Error indication: . . . • • . . . . . . . . . .

Correction procedure: . . . • . . . . . . .
Comments: . . . . • . . . . • . . . . . . . .

· 52

no checking of data read from cards; card detector verifies that a card is in position; character parity check on data read from paper tape.
light, buzzer, and machine halt; characters
read in error from paper tape are replaced
with a special flagging character wired on the
plugboard translator; when STOP ON ERROR
switch is enabled detection of a parity error or
torn tape halts read operations.
manual intervention.
UNIVAC does not recommend use of the STOP
ON ERROR switch in the unattended mode since
rereading the entire tape is the only means of
recovery from a halt condition.

Data Transmission Errors
Type of checking: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Error indication: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Correction procedure: . . . . . . . . . . .

Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

· 53

see Tables I and II.
250 single-spaced lines/min.
70 to 250 lines/min, depending on the number of
characters per line, the transmission speed,
and whether a half- or full-duplex line is used.
via special control codes in received data; operations include form skipping and vertical tab
(optional); line feed and carriage return occur
automatically at end of line.
uses a horizontally oscillating type-bar mechanism.

character parity (odd) and block or longitudinal
parity checking are standard with the DLT 1/3
Control Unit and optional with the USASCII Control
Unit. Character parity bits and the block parity
character are transmitted whether or not the
checking feature is incorporated. Control
characters at beginning of data block are checked
for validity. Length of data block is checked to
verify that it is 80 or 128 characters (depending
on the switch setting) or that an EM (end of
message) character is present.
transmission of a negative acknowledgement
(NAK) or no response within 4. 5 seconds.
automatic retransmission; if error is persistent,
retransmissions continue and a lamp is lighted
and an audible alarm sounded until a successful
transmission is accomplished or the operator
intervenes.
protection against receiving a redundant message block is provided by the Duplicate Block
Protection feature; see Paragraph .15.

Data Recording Errors
Type of checking: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error indication: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Correction procedure: . . . . . . . . . . .

echo check to verify that the correct punch dies
were activated (optional).
card in error is ejected into reject stacker.
automatic repunching of card.

© 1969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Ire.

5/69

6863:08
UNIVAC OCT 2000

.54

Equipment Malfunctions: . • • . . • . . • . .

diagnostic facility allows operator to completely
check out the functioning of each DCT 2000
component up to the data set; a diagnostic
generator is provided, and the transmit section
can be looped into the receive section •

. 55

Line Malfunctions: . . . . . . . . • . . . . . .

line malfunctions can be isolated indirectly by
verifying the proper functioning of the terminal
components via the diagnostic facility (see
Paragraph . 54) .

TABLE 1. UNIVAC DCT 2000
USASCII DATA CODES (1)
Bits
4,3,2,1
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100

lHl1
1110
1111

010
Space
I

~

#
$

%
&
1

(
)

Bits 7, 6, 5(2
100
011
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

*

9
:

,

<

+

-

;

=

>

I

A
B
C

D
E

F

T ABLE II: UNIVAC DCT XS-3
, DATA CODES (1)

101

110

p

@

Q
R
S
T
U
V

G

W

H
I

X
Y

J
K

Z
[

L
M
N
0

\
1
IJ.
~

(1)

See Table ill for control codes. The same card code is
used for both USASCn and XS-3 characters; see Table n.

(2)

The eighth bit is an odd parity bit.

BO·Col. Printable
Card
Code Characters
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9

"-

B
C

0
E
F

G
H
I

BO-Col. Printable
XS-3
Code.(2) Card
Code Characters
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01

0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100

11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-9
0-2
0-3
0-4

S
T
U

100100
100101
10 0110
10 0111
10 1000
10 1001
10 1010
10 1011
10 1100
11 0101
11 0110
11 0111

0-5
0-6
0-7
0-8
0-9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6

V
W
X
y
Z
0
1
2
3
4
5
6

11
11
11
11
11
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

J
K
L
M

H

0

P
Q

R

1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001

7
8
9
12
11
12-0
11-0
0-1
2-8

XS-3
Code (1)
00 1010
00 1011
00 1100
01 0000
00 0010
01 0011
100011
11 0100
11 0011

7
8
9
&
-(minus)
?
!(exclam.

/
+

#
3-8

7-8 • (apos.)
12-3-8 • (period)
12-4-8
12-5-8
12-6-8
<
12-7-8
11-3-8
$
11-4-8

01 1101
10 1110
01 0001
11 1110
10 0000
01 0010
11 1101
00 1111
01 1110
01 1111
100010
100001

11-5-8
1
11-6-8 ;(..mi·col)
11-7-8
~
0-2-8
~
0-3-8 , (comma)
0-4-8
(
0-5-8
0-6-8
\
0-7-8
)

00
00
10
11
11
11
10
00
11

rr
•

"

0001
1110
1111
0000
0010
0001
1101
1101
1111

00 0000

Blank Space H.P.

Reproduced from UNIVAC 1004 Card
Processor - 80 Column, Publication
UT 2543 REV. lA, page 4.

.6

CONDITION INDICATORS: . . . • . . . . . ,

m for control codes.

(1)

See Table

(2)

The seventh bit is an odd parity bit •

a wide range of visible switches and lamps are
provided on the Operator Control Panel to
display the operating status of the DCT 2000
Terminal. A total of 72 conditions can be displayed on 8 status indicators by means of a
changeable overlay technique; the overlay is
controlled by a knob on the side of the panel.
Additional switches are provided under a flipup panel to control diagnostic checking.
(Contd.)

5/69

AUERBACH Data Communications Reports

A
lA'
~

AUERBACH
DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
REPORTS

6863:09
UNIVAC OCT 2000

~UERBACH

'!J

.7

DATA TRANSMISSION

. 71

Basic Characteristics
Rated transmission speed:

2, 000 bits/sec (public telephone network); 2, 400
bits/ sec (leased voice-band line).
serial by bit.
8-level USASCII (7 data bits plus parity) or
7-level UNIVAC XS-3 (6 data bits plus parity);
see Tables I, II, and III.
half-duplex.
low-order bit first.
synchronous; i. e., synchronization is maintained
by interpretation of special Synch characters
transmitted at the start of each data block and
response.

Transmission method:
Transmission code:
Transmission mode: . . . .
Order of bit transmission:
Synchronization: . . . . . . .

T ABLE III. UNIVAC DCT 2000 CONTROL CHARACTER CODES

USASCII
Character

XS-3

Transmission
Code

Character

Transmission
Code

SYN

001 0110

SYN

11 0101

SOH

000 0001

80M

000000

Message
Control (2)

SEL (1)
Sp: 0
!;1
}:::t; 2
#: 3
$ :4

See
Table I

%;5

-

AX XOOO
AX XOOO
AX XOOO
AX XOOO
AX XOOO
AX XOOO
Al 0000
AO 1000

STX

000 0010

-

VT

(3)
(3)

EM

000 1011
000 1100
001 1001

ETX
ACK
NAK

000 0011
000 0110
001 0101

EOM
ACK
NAK

01 0101
00 0101
00 0100

BEL

000 0111

BEL

10 0000

NO DATA!
XMIT START

001 0001

NO DATAl
XMIT START

10 0011

FF

-

Function
Used to establish
synchronization.
Indicates beginning of
transmission.
Indicates desired output
device or format control:
Integral printer.
Integral card punch.
Peripheral device 1.
Peripheral device 2.
Peripheral device 3.
Peripheral device 4.
Initiate vertical tab.
Initiate form skip.
Indicates beginning of
data.
Initiates vertical tab.
Initiates form skip.
Indicates end of short
block (ASCII only).
Indicates end of data.
Positive acknowledge.
Negative acknowledge;
request retransmission.
Causes an alarm to
be sounded.
Response when a called
terminal is not conditioned
to transmit; used to start
a remote unattended terminal.

(1)

The first character shown is transmitted in the first transmiss ion of a block
and all retransmissions in response to a NAK acknowledgement; the second
character is transmitted in a non-requested retransmission of that block.

(2)

The bit indicated as A is transmitted as a "0" in the first transmission of a
block and all retransmissions in response to a NAK acknowledgement; the
bit is transmitted as a "1" in a non-requested retransmission of that block.
The bits indicated as X can be either a "0" or a "1" but cannot both be a "0".

(3) With the DLT Control Unit (XS-3), these functions are initiated by. a Message
Control character.

© 1969 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.

5/69

6863:10
UNIVAC OCT 2000

.72

Connection to Communications Lines
Communications Line

Data Set *

Public telephone network (2000 bits/sec):

Bell System Data-Phone Data Set 201A.

Leased voice~band data channel operating
at the following speeds 2000 bits/sec: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2400 bits/sec: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 73

Bell System Data Set 201A.
Bell System Data Set 20lB or Western Union
2400 Baud Data Modem .

Transmission Control
Call initiation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call reception: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional operations: . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 74

Multistation Operation: . . . . . . . . . . .

.8

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

manual dialing or signaling.
unattended operation is an optional feature;
otherwise operator must establish voice
communication and then switch to data mode.
form skip or vertical tab (optional) initiated by
special character code; card feed or line advance occurs automatically at the end of a data
block .
no provision announced to date .

High-Speed Printer
and Control Unit*

Components
Width (inches)
Depth (inches
Height (inches)

Card Reader/Punch (1)

65
25
45

40
26
41 (2)

Weight (pounds)

1,500

Power (KVA)
Voltage
Frequency (Hz)
Phases

4.9
208/240
60
1

Temperature range (OF)
Humidity range (%)

60 to 94
20 to 85

Heat (BTU /hr)

17,000

Paper Tape
Subsystem
25
26.5
50
300
0.62(3) , 0.27
208/240
60
1
60 to 94
20 to 85
2116(3), 935

(1)

Combined unit forms an